Home

Adobe Photoshop 6.0 User Guide

Contents

1. a i Lion and zebra layers linked and moved Aligning and distributing the contents of linked layers The Align Linked commands let you align the contents of linked layers to the contents of the active layer or to a selection border The Distribute Linked commands let you position the contents of Moving and aligning the contents of layers Moving a layer or layer set on an image moves its contents You can reposition a layer using the move tool or you can align and distribute a linked group of layers using the Align Linked or Distribute Linked commands You can also lock a layer to prevent the contents from being moved on an image However a locked layer can be moved above or below other layers See Locking layers on page 217 Moving the contents of layers You can reposition the contents of individual layers layer sets or linked layers within an image s boundaries unless the layer or layer set is locked or partially locked to prevent movement See Locking layers on page 217 To reposition the contents of a layer in an image 1 In the Layers palette select the layer or layer set whose contents you want to move 2 Select the move tool To activate the move tool when most other tools are selected hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS When a drawing tool is selected holding down Ctrl or Command switches to the path component selection tool or direct selection tool When usin
2. the image with the topmost layer appearing at the top of the list To move a layer or layer set to a different level in the stacking order simply drag the layer up or down in the palette You can also move a layer into a layer set by dragging the layer over the layer set icon Move a layer s contents To move all the contents of RAMI CYS a layer to a different position in the image first select the layer in the Layers palette Then use the move tool F to drag in the image Only the contents of the selected layer are affected 24 Adobe Photoshop Basics Apply a layer style You can apply predefined styles to the contents of a layer to produce instant graphic effects This feature is especially useful for creating Web buttons and rollover states You can also define your own layer styles To apply a style choose Window gt Show Styles to display the Styles palettes Select the desired layer in the Layers palette and then select the style you want to apply from the Styles palette Applying a layer style Compositing images You can use various features in Photoshop and ImageReady to combine several images or parts of images to produce creative compositions For example by isolating the foreground area of an image and placing it against the background of another image you can create unlimited composite effects Copy a layer between images To copy a layer with all its contents from one image to another
3. Photoshop To adjust the image view using the Navigator palette choose Window gt Show Navigator In the Navigator palette drag the view box in the image thumbnail to move the view or click the area of the thumbnail that you want to display in the window e To display the same image in multiple windows choose View gt New View Multiple windows let you display different views of the same image 14 Adobe Photoshop Basics Monitor your work status As you experiment with different tools commands and image views check out the status bar at the bottom edge of the document window This area displays useful information about your work status such as the current magnification percentage or the name of the currently selected tool You can specify the type of information displayed by using the pop up 261 ____Doc 34am ox_ gt if menu in the status bar Status bar Display the Info palette For convenient access to additional information about your image display the Info palette by choosing Window gt Show Info The Info palette displays information about the color values in the image beneath the pointer and depending on the tool in use other useful measurements Streamlining your workflow Photoshop and ImageReady provide a number of convenient features to help your work flow more smoothly The Jump To button makes it easy to work on the same image seamlessly in both Photoshop and ImageReady The Undo command
4. TI SEE Sa LO ei ses A 1 SETI RAI Ra Se mara pi F Eb Kale El J L sa FR E NE i cechi tie e 2 hia Chapter 12 Optimizing Images for matting color display and downloading method However any Web features such as slices links animations and rollovers that you ve added to a file are not preserved For complete information on using the Save As command to save an image as a GIF JPEG or PNG file see Saving images on page 357 For precise optimization you can use the optimization features in Photoshop or ImageReady to preview optimized images in different file formats and with different file attributes You can view multiple versions of an image simultaneously and modify optimization settings as you preview the image to select the best combination of settings for your needs You can also specify background transparency and matting select options to control dithering and resize the image to specified pixel dimensions or a specified percentage of the original size When you save an optimized file using the Save for Web Photoshop or Save Optimized ImageReady command you can choose to generate an HTML file for the image This file contains all the necessary co
5. Saving animations Li Opening and importing files as animations Chapter 12 About optimization 6 eee cece eee eee Viewing images during optimization Choosing a file format for optimization 0 Optimizing images Using weighted optimization Optimizing colors in GIF and PNG 8 images Working with hexadecimal values for color Making transparent and matted images Previewing and controlling dithering Setting optimization preferences ImageReady Using a droplet to automate optimization settings ImageReady Sele aa o Saving optimized images Setting output options Creating background images Chapter 13 Saving IMAGES Lia Aboutalefonmats erica Adding file information Photoshop Adding digital copyright information Setting preferences for saving files Photoshop Creating multiple image layouts Photoshop Placing Photoshop images in other applications 6 Ses teen eats viii CONTENTS Creating Animations ImageReady Optimizing Images for the Web Saving and Exporting Images Chapter 4 ADOURDIINUNG SEEDO Printing Images selle lella Positioning and scaling images Setting output options 0 Selecting halftone screen attributes Printing part of an image
6. varnish 192 193 See also process color inks vector artwork 151 INDEX 434 Julieanne Kost Coin page 79 White flower page 128 Flower jar page 144 Flower page 148 Star page 151 Teapot page 173 Lion page 205 Zebra page 205 Giraffe page 308 Paint brushes page 318 Paint page 318 Paint roller page 319 Bolts page 340 Sands page 352 Clouds page 352 Kaoru Hollin Bicycle illustration page 92 Karen Tenenbaum Clock page 78 Coins page 94 Shell page 197 Michael Dossev Chair page 272 PhotoDisc Inc Soccer ball page 369 Production Notes This book was created electronically using Adobe FrameMaker Art was produced using Adobe Illustrator and Adobe Photoshop The 767 and Myriad families of typefaces are used throughout this book Photography The following photographers and stock agencies have supplied the photographs and artwork seen throughout this book CMCD Inc Bike page 91 Definitive Stock Bird page 9 Hawaii page 13 Leaf page 14 Sailor page 15 Venice page 16 Cherry page 18 Strawberry page 21 Tree page 25 Blaze page 31 Cactus page 251 Trees page 393 Eyewire Photography Bison page 156 Mirelez Ross Inc Leaves page 110 Doug Menuez Ol No Moir page 378
7. 1 Position the pointer over an image or palette item 2 Click with the right mouse button Windows or hold down Control and press the mouse button Mac OS Viewing images The hand tool the zoom tools the Zoom commands and the Navigator palette let you view different areas of an image at different magnifica tions You can open additional windows to display several views at once such as different magnifica tions of an image You can also change the screen display mode to change the appearance of the Photoshop or ImageReady work area Looking at the Work Area The hexadecimal value for the color beneath the pointer e The index color table position for the color beneath the pointer The x and y coordinates of the pointer e The x and y coordinates of your starting position before you click in the image and your ending position as you drag in the image when you use the marquee tool the shape tools the crop tool and the slice tool e The width W and height H of the selection as you drag when you use the crop tool the shape tools the slice tool or the zoom tool The percentage change in width W and height H the angle of rotation A and the angle of horizontal skew H or vertical skew V when you use a Transform or Free Transform command To change the Info palette options 1 Choose Palette Options from the Info palette menu 2 For First Color Readout choose one of the follo
8. 400 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 401 User Guide Rerecording and duplicating actions and commands Rerecording an action or command lets you set new values for it Duplicating an action or command lets you make changes to it without losing the original version To record an action again 1 Select an action and choose Record Again from the Actions palette menu 2 For a modal tool do one of the following Use the tool differently and Press Enter Windows or Return Mac OS to change the tool s effect Press Cancel to retain the same settings 3 For a dialog box do one of the following Change the values and click OK to record them e Click Cancel to retain the same values To record a single command again 1 Inthe Actions palette double click the command 2 Enter the new values and click OK To duplicate an action or command Do one of the following Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS the action or command to a new location in the Actions palette When the highlighted line appears in the desired location release the mouse button To rearrange commands In the Actions palette drag the command to its new location within the same or another action When the highlighted line appears in the desired position release the mouse button Recording additional commands You can add commands to an action using the Record button or the Start Recording command in the Actions palette To r
9. ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 289 User Guide To resize and move a tool based image map area using numeric coordinates 1 Select a rectangular or circular image map area 2 In the Dimensions area of the Image Map palette change one or more of the following options e X to specify the distance in pixels between the left edge of a rectangular image map area or the center point of a circular image map area and the origin point of the ruler in the document window Y to specify the distance in pixels between the top edge of a rectangular image map area or the center point of a circular image map area and the origin point of the ruler in the document window Note The default origin point of the ruler is the upper left corner of the image See Using rulers the measure tool guides and the grid on page 74 W to specify the width of a rectangular image map area H to specify the height of a rectangular image map area R to specify the radius of a circular image map area Changing the shape of layer based image maps When you create a layer based image map area the default image map area is a rectangle that encompasses all of the layer s pixel data You can change the shape of the image map area by selecting a Shape option in the Image Map palette Selecting image maps You select image map areas with the image map select tool To select an image map area 1 Select the image map select tool Rm
10. Border Lets you print a black border around an image Type in a number and choose a unit value to specify the width of the border Bleed Lets you print crop marks inside rather than outside the image Use this option when you want to trim the image within the graphic Type a number and choose a unit value to specify the width of the bleed Screen Lets you set the screen frequency and dot shape for each screen used in the printing process See Selecting halftone screen attributes on page 379 Transfer Lets you adjust the transfer functions traditionally used to compensate for dot gain or dot loss that may occur when an image is transferred to film This option is recognized only when you print directly from Photoshop or when you save the file in EPS format and print to a PostScript printer Generally it s best to adjust for Printing Photoshop Setting output options You can select a variety of page marks and other output options in the Output section of the Print Options dialog box Depending on your printer and print drivers these options may also appear in the Page Setup dialog box The advantage of using the Print Options dialog box is that you can preview the selected options prior to printing Ol No Moire 177101 45 1 cyan magenta yellow black A Black overprint color bar B Label C Registration marks D Progressive color bar E Crop mark F Gradient tint bar G Star target ADOB
11. Select an action or command Then choose Duplicate from the Actions palette menu The copied action or command appears after the original Drag an action or command to the New Action button at the bottom of the Actions palette The copied action or command appears after the original In Photoshop you can duplicate sets as well as actions and commands Deleting actions and commands If you no longer need an action or command you can delete it from the Actions palette To delete an action or command 1 In the Actions palette select the action or command you want to delete 2 Delete the action or command e Click the Trash button if on the Actions palette Click OK to delete the action or command Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the Trash button to delete the selected action or command without displaying a confirmation dialog box e Drag the action or command to the Trash button on the Actions palette to delete the selected action or command without displaying a confirmation dialog box Choose Delete from the Actions palette menu ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide To load a set of actions 1 Choose Load Actions from the Actions palette menu 2 Locate and select the action set file In Windows Photoshop action set files have the extension atn 3 Click Load To load a preset action set Select an action set from the bottom section of the Actions palette menu The name of t
12. To add a layer clipping path that shows the contents of a shape Photoshop 1 In the Layers palette select the layer to which to add a layer clipping path 2 Select a path or use one of the shape or pen tools to draw a work path See Editing paths Photoshop on page 172 3 Choose Layer gt Add Layer Clipping Path gt Current Path Using a mask to hide or show a layer You can obscure an entire layer or layer set or just a selected part of it using a mask or a layer clipping path To add a mask that shows or hides the entire layer 1 Choose Select gt Deselect to clear any selection borders in the image 2 In the Layers palette select the layer or layer set to which to add a mask 3 Do one of the following To create a mask that reveals the entire layer click the New Layer Mask E button at the bottom of the Layers palette To create a mask that hides the entire layer Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the New Layer Mask button You can also use the Layer menu to hide or reveal an entire layer To add a mask that shows or hides a selection 1 In the Layers palette select the layer or layer set to which to add a mask 2 To create a mask that reveals or hides the selected area of a layer select the desired area in the image using the selection tools then click the New Layer Mask button E and the selected area is revealed CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 238 ADOBE PHOTOSH
13. Using fractional character widths By default type is displayed using fractional character widths This means that the spacing between characters varies with fractions of whole pixels between some characters In most situa tions fractional character widths provide the best spacing for type appearance and readability CHAPTER 9 Using Type 264 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide e Select the type layer in the Layers palette to apply formatting to all paragraphs in the layer To show the Paragraph palette Choose Window gt Show Paragraph or click the Paragraph palette tab Aligning and justifying type You can align type to one edge of a paragraph left center or right for horizontal type top center or bottom for vertical type and justify type to both edges of a paragraph Alignment options are available for both point type and paragraph type justification options are only available for paragraph type To specify alignment In the Paragraph palette or options bar click an alignment option The options for horizontal type are Aligns type to the left leaving the right edge of the paragraph ragged Aligns type to the center leaving both edges of the paragraph ragged Aligns type to right leaving the left edge of the paragraph ragged The options for vertical type are i Aligns type to the top leaving the bottom edge of the paragraph ragged To rotate characters in vertical typ
14. What s New in Adobe Photoshop 0 Enhanced vector output Creating vector graphics and type to incorporate into your images 15 only part of a complete workflow Photoshop 6 0 provides complete support for outputting vector based graphics along with your pixel based images all with the highest quality printed results PostScript vector output You can print images containing resolution independent shapes and text directly to any PostScript output device Advanced PDF output Photoshop 6 0 extends its integration with Adobe products by offering enhanced support for Adobe PDF including the ability to save transparency layers and vector objects in PDF files Any service provider with Adobe Acrobat InProduction or other Acrobat prepress plug ins can then prepare those PDF files for high end printing Layer styles Photoshop 6 0 presents an intuitive new layer effects interface new effect options and new support for saving combinations of layer effects as layer styles for ongoing use Layer effects and styles update automatically as you edit your image and are particularly useful for designing type buttons and banners New and enhanced layer effects Photoshop 6 0 introduces a number of new and enhanced features for layer effects including the new stroke overlay and satin layer effects a new contour option advanced blending and transparency options and enhancements to the drop shadow inner shadow glow and bevel and emboss effe
15. e 2 161 Chapter 6 Drawing and Editing Working with shapes provides several advantages Shapes are object oriented you can quickly select resize and move a shape and you can edit a shape s outline called a path and attributes such as line weight fill color and fill style You can use shapes to make selections and create libraries of custom shapes with the Preset Manager Shapes are resolution independent they maintain crisp edges when resized printed to a PostScript printer saved in a PDF file or imported into a vector based graphics application Drawing shapes and paths The pen tools and shape tools provide several options for creating shapes and paths You can create a shape on a new layer The shape is automatically filled with the current foreground color however you can easily change the fill to a different color a gradient or a pattern The shape s outline is stored in a layer clipping path which appears in the Paths palette In Photoshop you can create a new work path A work path is a temporary path that is not part of your image until you apply it in some way You can save a work path in the Path palette for later use When using the shape tools you can create a rasterized shape on an existing layer The shape is automatically filled with the current foreground color After you create a rasterized shape you cannot edit it as a vector object
16. 1 Choose Window gt Show Navigator 2 Do one of the following Drag the view box in the thumbnail of the image which represents the boundaries of the image window Click in the thumbnail of the image The new view includes the area you click To change the color of the Navigator palette view box Photoshop 1 Choose Palette Options from the Navigator palette menu 66 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide To magnify by dragging 1 Select the zoom tool 2 Drag over the part of the image you want to magnify The area inside the zoom marquee is displayed at the highest possible magnification To move the marquee around the artwork in Photoshop begin dragging a marquee and then hold down the space bar while dragging the marquee to a new location To display an image at 100 Do one of the following Double click the zoom tool Choose View gt Actual Pixels Photoshop or View gt Actual Size ImageReady To change the view to fit the screen Do one of the following Double click the hand tool e Choose View gt Fit on Screen These options scale both the zoom level and the window size to fit the available screen space To automatically resize the window when magnifying or reducing the view With the Zoom tool active select Resize Windows to Fit in the options bar The window resizes when you magnify or reduce the view of the image When Resize
17. For a description of using specific Extras see Using guides and the grid on page 75 Annotating images Photoshop on page 80 Making pixel selections on page 139 Using the marquee tools on page 140 Selecting paths Photoshop on page 173 Entering paragraph type on page 252 Formatting characters on page 258 Creating and viewing slices on page 272 and Creating and viewing image maps ImageReady on page 286 Note Show Extras also shows or hides color samplers even though color samplers are not an option in the Show submenu To show Extras Choose View gt Show Extras A check mark appears next to all shown Extras in the Show submenu To hide Extras With Extras showing choose View gt Show Extras A dot Windows or a dash Mac OS appears next to all hidden Extras in the Show submenu Note Hiding only suppresses the display of Extras It does not turn off these options To remove guides from the image Do one of the following To remove a single guide drag the guide outside the image window To remove all guides choose View gt Clear Guides To turn snapping to guides on or off Choose View gt Snap To gt Guides See Working with snap on page 152 To turn snapping to the grid on or off Photoshop Choose View gt Snap To gt Grid See Working with snap on page 152 To set guide and grid preferences Photoshop
18. Jumping to an application saves you from having to close the file in one application and reopen it in another application Opening and editing annotations A note or audio annotation icon marks the location of an annotation on an image When you move the pointer over an annotation icon and pause a message displays the author name You use the icons to open notes or play audio annotations You can show hide or move the icons and edit the contents of notes Note Resizing an image does not resize the annotation icons and note windows The icons and note windows keep their locations relative to the image Cropping an image removes any annotations in the cropped area you can recover the annotations by undoing the Crop command To open a note or play an audio annotation Double click the icon If you are opening a note a window appears displaying the note text If you are playing an audio annotation and have a sound card installed the audio file begins to play To show or hide annotation icons Do one of the following e Choose View gt Show gt Notes Choose View gt Show Extras This command also shows or hides grids guides selection edges target paths and slices 82 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Jumping to other applications ImageReady You can jump to graphics editing applications and HTML editing applications from within ImageReady When yo
19. Specifying layer properties on page 219 Specifying layer blending modes You use layer blending modes to determine how the pixels in a layer or set of layers are blended with underlying pixels in the image By applying modes to layers you can create a variety of special effects For a description of each blending mode see Setting options for painting and editing tools in online Help When working with layer sets you can use Pass Through blending Pass Through blending allows the blending modes and adjustments of the layers within the set to interact with the layers outside the set For more information on Pass Through mode see Grouping layers into sets on page 213 Note There is no Clear blending mode for layers In addition the Color Dodge Color Burn Darken Lighten Difference and Exclusion modes are unavailable for Lab images To specify a blending mode for a layer In the Layers palette choose an option from the Blend Mode menu To partially lock linked layers 1 Select a linked layer and do one of the following to lock selected properties 2 Choose Layers gt Lock All Linked Layers or choose Lock All Linked Layers from the Layers palette menu and in the Lock All Link Layers dialog box set the following Lock options e Transparency 65 to prevent editing of trans parent pixels e Image to prevent the painting tools from modifying the image but not any mask that might
20. grid and guides about 75 preferences 77 grid snapping to 153 grouping blending effects 221 222 into layer sets 213 layers 220 guides creating slices from 273 snapping to 153 H halftone cell 94 halftone screens about 380 defined 94 saving in EPS and DCS files 360 selecting attributes for 379 Halftone Screens dialog box 380 381 halftoning 375 halo 154 hand tool 66 handtinted images 190 hanging punctuation 267 hard proofs 131 See also online Help fractional character widths 264 frame delay 306 Free Transform command 64 freeform pen tool 169 freehand selection 141 fringe 154 Full Document option 72 Fuzziness option 144 G Gamma utility 136 gamut 114 GIF format about 319 background matting 339 hard edged transparency 340 indexing color 361 optimization settings for 323 preserving transparency 339 reducing colors 330 saving files 361 weighted optimization and 328 929 global lighting 235 GoLive opening Photoshop files in 271 saving HTML files for 348 350 gradient fill tool measuring distance of gradient fill 63 gradients fill layers 245 layer style option 233 See also online Help graphics See vector graphics grayscale images about 116 as masks 197 supporting paths 179 See also compression Save For Web dialog box and names of individual formats File Info command 351 366 file size about 94 displaying 78 layer effect on 246 required for alpha channels 185 f
21. he drawing tools let you create and edit 1 vector shapes You can work with shapes in shape layers and as paths you can also create rasterized shapes which can be edited with the painting tools The drawing tools provide an easy way to create buttons navigation bars and other items used on Web pages Other tools and commands let you transform and retouch an image About drawing and painting When creating graphics on a computer there is a distinction between painting and drawing Painting involves changing the colors of pixels using a painting tool You can apply colors gradually with soft edges and transitions and manipulate individual pixels using powerful filter effects However once you apply a brush stroke there is no simple way to select the entire brush stroke and move it to a new location in the image For more information on painting see Painting in online Help Drawing on the other hand involves creating shapes that are defined as geometric objects also called vector objects For example if you draw a circle using the ellipse tool the circle is defined by a specific radius location and color You can quickly select the entire circle and move it to anew location or you can edit the outline of the circle to distort its shape See About bitmap images and vector graphics on page 91 To create a new shape layer 1 Specify a foreground color 2 Select the rectangle tool O rounded rec
22. 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Guides amp Grid 2 For Color choose a color for the guides the grid or both If you choose Custom click the color box choose a color and click OK For more information on choosing colors see Using the Color palette in online Help 3 For Style choose a display option for guides or the grid or both 4 For Gridline Every enter a value for the grid spacing For Subdivisions enter a value to subdivide the grid If desired change the units for this option The Percent option creates a grid that divides the image into even sections For example choosing 25 for the Percent option creates an evenly divided 4 by 4 grid 5 Click OK You can also view copyright and authorship information that has been added to the file This information includes standard file infor mation and Digimarc watermarks Photoshop automatically scans opened images for water marks using the Digimarc Detect Watermark plug in If a watermark is detected Photoshop displays a copyright symbol in the image window s title bar and updates the Copyright amp URL section of the File Info dialog box To display file information in the document window Photoshop 1 Click the triangle in the bottom border of the application window Windows or document window Mac OS 1 JADORE A HATAN 02 10091 0 326 IR Sea ass Document Profil Scratch Sizes Efficiency Timing Current Tool 2
23. 3 Select Limit to Every lt number gt Frame to specify which frames to include from the selected range You can use this option with either Range option 4 Click Open Creating Animations ImageReady You can also import a folder of files and use each file as a frame in ImageReady Files can be in any format that ImageReady supports Each file becomes a frame in the Animation palette The files are placed in the Animation palette in alphabetical order by image filename To open a multilayer Photoshop file as frames 1 Choose File gt Open and select the Photoshop file to open 2 Select Make Frames From Layers in the Animation palette menu Each layer in the image appears as a frame in the Animation palette The bottom layer in the Photoshop image is frame 1 in the Animation palette To import a folder of files as frames 1 Place the files to be used as frames into a folder Make sure that the folder contains only those images that are to be used as frames The resulting animation will display more successfully if all files are the same pixel dimensions To have frames appear in the correct order in the animation name the files in alphabetical or numeric order with the file to be used as frame 1 the first in order You can also change the order of the frames in the Animation palette after you import the files 2 Choose File gt Import gt Import Folder As Frames and choose the folder to be imported
24. 7 and polygon lasso 7 tools let you select areas by dragging and clicking respectively to define the boundary of the selected area In Photoshop you can also use the magnetic lasso tool F to find the edges of the desired area automatically These tools are especially useful for selecting irregularly shaped areas Selecting with the magnetic lasso tool ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide Select with the magic wand The magic wand tool lets you select a consistently colored area without having to trace its outline To use the magic wand first enter a tolerance value in the options bar A higher tolerance selects a broader range of colors Then click the area in the image you want to select Modify a selection border The selection tools come with several options for enhancing or modifying an existing selection border These options can help you select areas that are difficult to define with a single selection First make a selection Then using any selection tool specify an option in the options bar e The Add to Selection option adds the new selection to the first selection e The Subtract from Selection option subtracts the new selection from the first selection e The Restrict Selection option Fm selects only the intersection of the two selections Photoshop Quick Mask mode A quick mask lets you refine an existing selection border with the aid of painting tools This technique is useful f
25. ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Saving files in PNG format Photoshop You can use the Save As command to save RGB indexed color grayscale and Bitmap mode images in PNG format Note You can also save an image as one or more PNG files using the Save for Web command Photoshop or the Save Optimized command ImageReady For more information on optimizing images see Choosing a file format for optimization on page 317 and Optimizing images on page 320 To save a file in PNG format 1 Choose File gt Save As and choose PNG from the format list 2 Specify a filename and location select saving options as described in Setting file saving options Photoshop on page 358 and click Save 3 Select an Interlace option None to create an image that displays in a Web browser only after downloading is complete Adam7 to create an image that displays low resolution versions in a browser while the full image file is downloading Interlacing can make downloading time seem shorter and assures viewers that downloading is in progress However interlacing also increases file size 4 Select a Filter option None to compress the image without a filter This option is recommended for indexed color and Bitmap mode images Sub to optimize the compression of images with even horizontal patterns or blends 6 If the image contains vector graphics such as shapes and type select Include Vector Data to
26. next to a layer layer set or layer effect to hide that layer layer set or layer effect Click in the column again to redisplay the layer layer set or layer effect You can also use the Layers palette to apply layer masks and layer clipping paths to a layer You can also apply layer styles to a layer and create adjustment layers or fill layers You can use a clipping group to act as a mask for a group of layers or to specify a blending mode for a group of layers 00 mm A Layer lock options from left to right Transparency Image Position All B Layer set C Clipping group D Text layer E Show Hide F Base of clipping group G Paintbrush icon H Link Unlink I Fully locked layer J Show Hide layer style K Effects bar L Selected layer M Partially locked layer N New layer styles O New layer mask P New layer set Q New adjustment or fill layer R New layer S Trash Viewing the Layers palette You can use the Windows menu to display the Layers palette and use the palette tab to bring it to the front of the group of palettes To change the display of layer thumbnails 1 Choose Palette Options from the Layers palette menu 2 Select a display option Click a thumbnail size Smaller thumbnails reduce the space required by the palette helpful when you re working on smaller monitors Click None to turn off the display of thumbnai
27. weighted optimization 327 Original view about 316 creating animations in 302 Original Optimized File Size option 79 Outer Glow effect 227 out of gamut colors about 63 definition 114 displaying in Info palette 63 selecting 145 Output Channel option 190 Output Settings dialog box background options 352 file saving options 351 Opacity value in Info palette 63 pixel alignment and 216 Quick Mask 199 Open As command 102 Open command 101 103 312 open paths 173 Open Recent command 102 opening animated GIF files 311 EPS files 104 images 101 PDF files 102 Photo CD files See online Help Raw files See online Help See also placing importing OpenType fonts 251 259 264 operations canceling 88 monitoring 88 Optimize by Bounding Box option 310 Optimize by Redundant Pixel Removal option 310 Optimize palette about 320 creating droplets from 410 Optimize to File Size command 325 Optimized Information option 79 Optimized option for JPEG 322 optimizing animations 309 copying settings between slices 285 optimizing images about 315 adding title and copyright information 351 427 pixels about 91 blending 225 displaying color values 63 selecting 139 Place command 104 placing files 104 images in other applications 369 Playback Options command 400 plug ins file format 365 scanner 99 PNG format background matting in 339 saving files in 363 See also PNG 8 format PNG 24 format
28. 1 Make sure that the two layers or layer sets you want to merge are visible Select the top layer or layer set of the pair in the Layers palette 2 Choose Layer gt Merge Down or Layer gt Merge Layer Set To merge all visible linked layers 1 Make visible all layers or layer sets you want to merge and link them together See Linking layers on page 209 2 Choose Layer gt Merge Linked or choose Merged Linked from the Layers palette menu To flatten an image 1 Make sure that all the layers you want to keep the content from are visible 2 Choose Layer gt Flatten Image or choose Flatten Image from the Layers palette menu Saving layered documents You may want to save two versions of your file a flattened version for final use and a second version with layers intact for future edits For more information on saving documents and determining file formats see Saving images on page 357 To stamp layer sets 1 Make sure that the layers in the layer set you want to merge are visible Select the layer set 2 Press Ctrl Alt E Windows or Command Option E Mac OS A new layer named after the layer set is created above the layer set containing an image that matches all of the contents of the layer set To stamp all visible layers 1 Make sure that the layers you want to include are visible 2 Select the layer or layer set that you want to contain the new contents and press Shift Ctrl Alt E
29. Accurate Screens option 381 actions about 393 button mode 394 creating new 395 deleting 402 editing 400 excluding commands 397 inserting nonrecordable commands 397 inserting paths 396 inserting stops 396 managing 402 optimizing slices with 399 playing 399 recording 394 401 renaming 402 resizing images with 398 sets of 402 Actions palette 394 active layer 206 Actual Size command 67 Adaptive color table 331 Add option 196 Add to Channel option 201 Add To Master Palette command 337 additive colors 110 Adjust commands See online Help adjustment layers about 243 confining effects of 243 setting in new images 101 slices 282 Background from Layer command 211 background image for Web 352 background matting for Web 339 in GIF or PNG format 339 in JPEG format 341 background transparency 339 backgrounds adding 211 converting to layer 211 described 205 layer styles and 226 moving 209 base layer 218 baseline 261 baseline shift 262 Batch command 405 Bevel and Emboss effect 227 Bicubic interpolation 96 Bilinear interpolation 96 Binary encoding in EPS and DCS files 360 bit depth about 116 converting images between 117 bitmap images about 91 112 channels and 116 See also images Bitmap mode about 112 116 duplicating channels in 187 saving transparency in 360 type in 251 applications jumping between 82 83 Apply Image command 195 Arrange command 209 Arrange Icons command 65 arrangi
30. EX toolbox Selected area and Quick Mask mode applied A color overlay similar to a rubylith covers and protects the area outside the selection The original selection is left unprotected by this mask By default Quick Mask mode colors the protected area using a red 50 opaque overlay 3 To edit the mask select a painting or editing tool from the toolbox or select a filter or adjustment command from the menu bar By default painting with black adds to the mask 199 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Storing masks in alpha channels In addition to the temporary masks of Quick Mask mode you can create more permanent masks by storing them in alpha channels This allows you to use the masks again in the same image or in a different image You can create an alpha channel in Photoshop and then add a mask to it You can also save an existing selection in a Photoshop or ImageReady image as an alpha channel that will appear in the Channels palette in Photoshop About alpha channels Photoshop An alpha channel has these properties e Each image except 16 bit images can contain up to 24 channels including all color and alpha channels e All channels are 8 bit grayscale images capable of displaying 256 levels of gray You can specify a name color mask option and opacity for each channel The opacity affects the preview of the channel not the image e All new channels have the same dimensions and numbe
31. See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 Note You cannot apply layer styles to a background a locked layer or to a layer set CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 226 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide You can also load or save layer styles using the Preset Manager See Managing libraries with the Preset Manager Photoshop on page 85 Exiting Photoshop saves the contents of the current pop up palette in the Preferences file Applying layer styles Layer styles are composed of one or more layer effects You can apply layer styles to layers in any image Once you apply a layer effect to a layer you have created a custom layer style composed of that single effect You can use a layer style either to replace all of the current layer effects applied to a layer or to add layer effects while preserving the existing layer effects After you have applied a layer effect you can customize it See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 You can also save the resulting layer style for ease of reuse Layer styles are composed of a combination of one or more of the following effects Drop Shadow to add a shadow that falls behind the contents on the layer e Inner Shadow to add a shadow that falls just inside the edges of the layer contents giving the layer a recessed appearance Outer Glow and Inner Glow to add glows that emanate from the outside or inside edges of the la
32. Select a mode from the Blend Mode pop up menu See Specifying layer blending modes on page 217 Set the opacity using the opacity slider or text box See Specifying opacity on page 216 3 In the Advanced Blending section do the following Set a fill opacity using the Fill Opacity slider or text box To restrict blending deselect one or more Channel options Choose a knockout option from the Knockout pop up menu e Select additional knockout options Set a range for the blending operation 4 To turn off previewing as you choose layer options deselect Preview in the Layer Style dialog box 5 Click OK To set blending options ImageReady 1 Choose Windows gt Show Layer Options Style to display the Layer Options palette If no options appear in the palette choose Show Options from the Layer Options palette menu or click the Show Options button to view all of the options Setting layer blending options The blending options in the Layer Styles dialog box Photoshop and the Layer Options palette ImageReady let you change a layer s opacity and blending with the pixels underneath Keep in mind that a layer s opacity and blending mode interact with the opacity and mode of the tools you use to paint and edit the pixels on the layer For example suppose you are working on a layer that uses the Dissolve mode and an opacity of 50 If you paint on this layer using the paint brus
33. Setting optimization options for GIF and PNG 8 formats GIF is the standard format for compressing images with flat color and crisp detail such as line art logos or illustrations with type See About GIF format on page 319 Like the GIF format PNG 8 efficiently compresses solid areas of color while preserving sharp detail however not all Web browsers can display PNG 8 files See About PNG 8 format on page 319 Settings tunnamet gt A 3 Lossy 0 B selective Colors Es c piffuzion Dither fron CJ Matte gt a Transparency E Interlaced Web Snap 0 Use Unified Color Table ImageReady Optimize palette GIF options with hidden options shown A File Format menu B Color Reduction Algorithm menu C Dither Algorithm menu In ImageReady you can control which options show in the Optimize palette by clicking the Show Options control on the Optimize palette tab To show all options choose Show Options from the Optimize palette menu 11 If the image contains transparency choose an option for preserving or filling transparent pixels Select Transparency the default setting to preserve fully transparent pixels as transparent Partially transparent pixels are filled with the Matte color or converted to fully transparent or fully opaque pixels depending on the Matte option you choose Deselect Transparency to fill fully and partially tr
34. The Normal state usually serves this purpose e Up to define the rollover state when the Web viewer releases the mouse button over the slice or image map area The Over state usually serves this purpose Note Different Web browsers or different versions of a browser may process clicks and double clicks differently For example some browsers leave the slice in the Click state after a click and in the Up state after a double click other browsers use the Up state only as a transition into the Click state regardless of single or double clicking To ensure your Web page will function correctly be sure to preview rollovers in various Web browsers Designing Web Pages To select a slice or image map area in the Rollover palette Choose a slice or image map area from the pop up menu at the lower left corner of the Rollover palette Creating rollover states When you create a rollover state you select a mouse action which activates the state except for the first state in a rollover which is always the Normal state To create a rollover state 1 Select the slice or image map area to which you want to add the rollover Note When creating a slice or image map area for a rollover use a layer based slice or a layer based image map area This is recommended because the dimensions of a layer s content may change in the course of creating a rollover 2 In the Rollover palette create a new state e Click the New
35. To achieve good tonal range drag the black and white sliders to where the graph begins at either end Then drag the middle slider to adjust midtones to the desired level The Levels dialog box provides a useful way to Adjusting tonal levels adjust your image s overall tonal range The Curves dialog box represents another more precise method letting you adjust any point along a 0 255 tonal scale Make other adjustments If needed you can use other adjustment features to correct for color casts and sharpen details in the final image 5 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Retouching images Many of the retouching tools in Photoshop and ImageReady are modeled after traditional photo studio techniques for correcting blemishes and faulty exposures in images However with the power of digital technology you can use these tools to apply all sorts of creative effects beyond basic photo retouching Dodge or burn the image The dodge tool and burn tool let you respectively lighten and darken a localized area in your image With either tool selected choose a brush from the brushes menu in the options bar In addition choose the range of tones you want to affect from the range menu in the options bar Then drag over the part of the image that you want to lighten Remove imperfections The clone stamp tool amp lets you paint over an area of your image using a sample taken from the same image or another image With th
36. To change the order of a layer 1 In the Layers palette select the layer or layer set that you want to move 2 Choose Layer gt Arrange and choose an option from the submenu Bring to Front to make the layer the topmost layer Bring Forward to move the layer one level up in the stacking order Send Backward to move the layer one level down in the stacking order Send to Back to make the layer the bottommost layer in the image except for the background Adding layers Newly added layers and layer sets appear above the selected layer in the Layers palette You can add layers to an image in a variety of ways By creating new layers or converting selections into layers By converting a background to a layer or adding a background to an image By placing dragging and dropping or pasting selections or entire images into the image See Duplicating layers on page 211 By creating type using the type tool See Creating type on page 251 By using the shape or pen tools to create a new layer that contains a layer clipping path See Drawing shapes and paths on page 161 To adda new layer or layer set using default options Click the New Layer button fl or New Layer Set button O at the bottom of the Layers palette The layer defaults to Normal mode with 100 opacity and is named according to its order of creation The layer set defaults to Pass Through mode To add
37. a digital code added as noise to the image is generally imperceptible to the human eye The watermark is durable in both digital and printed forms surviving typical image edits and file format conversions and is still detectable when the image is printed and then scanned back into a computer ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide ImageReady This includes saving merged data for applications that don t support Photoshop layers and saving a rasterized version of each layer for applications that don t support vector data Note Selecting Maximize Backwards Compatibility results in larger file sizes and increases the length of time required to save files To display a preview file icon Windows only 1 Save the file in Photoshop format with a thumbnail preview 2 Right click the file on the desktop or in any Windows or Photoshop dialog box that displays a file list and choose Properties from the context menu that appears 3 Click the Photoshop Image tab 4 Select an option for generating thumbnails and click OK Preview icons appear on the desktop and in file lists when the view is set to Large Icons Creating multiple image layouts Photoshop You can export multiple images automatically as contact sheets and picture packages using Automate commands Windows Thumbnail to save a preview that can display on Windows systems Full Size to save a 72 ppi version of the file for use in applications that
38. an image You can set up the Info palette so that you can Q select any tool position the pointer over any part of an image and determine the color value under the pointer You can customize the Info palette and color samplers to express color values using HSB RGB CMYK Lab or Grayscale modes without changing the mode of the image itself See the procedure to change Info palette options in Using the Info palette on page 63 For more information see Seeing the color values of pixels Photoshop in online Help HSB model Based on the human perception of color the HSB model describes three fundamental characteristics of color Hue is the color reflected from or transmitted through an object It is measured as a location on the standard color wheel expressed as a degree between 0 and 360 In common use hue is identified by the name of the color such as red orange or green amiliarity with color theory and termi nology can help you understand how color is measured and how Adobe Photoshop and Adobe ImageReady use this information to define display and print color values After you determine the appropriate color mode for your image you can apply colors and make color and tonal adjustments About color modes and models Photoshop A color mode determines the color model used to display and print images Photoshop bases its color modes on established models for describing
39. and the grid To help position and align elements accurately in the image use rulers guides and grid lines 10 display rulers along the top and left side of the document window choose View gt Show Rulers In Photoshop you can change the ruler units by choosing Edit gt Preferences gt Units amp Rulers e To place a horizontal or vertical guide drag from either the horizontal or vertical ruler Photoshop To display grid lines throughout the document window choose View gt Show gt Grid You can control the color style and spacing of the grid and guide lines by choosing Edit gt Preferences gt Guides amp Grid You can toggle the display of guides and grid lines at any time by choosing the appropriate command from the View gt Show submenu Checked items are visible unchecked items are hidden Adjust the image view Photoshop and ImageReady offer several tools for navigating and magnifying the view of your image e To move a different area of the image into view drag with the hand tool in the image You can use the hand tool while another tool is selected by holding down the spacebar l I 1 I 1 I l l l L e To magnify the view select the zoom tool amp and click in the image or drag over the part of the image you want to magnify To reduce the view magnification Alt click Windows or Drag with the zoom tool to magnify Option click Mac OS with the zoom tool in the image
40. be applied to the layer This option also prevents moving the image Position to disable the move tool To confine editing to the opaque portions of a layer Select the layer a linked layer or layer set in the Layers palette and select Lock Transparency lH in the Layers palette You can also use the commands in the Layer menu and Layers palette menu to lock transparency Note For type layers Lock Transparency and Lock Image 1 selected by default and cannot be turned off Creating clipping groups In a clipping group the bottommost layer or base layer acts as a mask for the entire group For example you might have a shape on one layer a texture on the overlying layer and some text on the topmost layer If you define all three layers as a clipping group the texture and the text appear only through the shape on the base layer and take on the opacity of the base layer To lock all properties including blending mode opacity and layer style for layers or layer sets Select the layer or layer set and select Lock f in the Layers palette to automatically lock all properties for layers or layer sets When Lock is selected the dimmed lock icon displays next to all of the layers in a layer set except for layers that have their own individual lock options set You can also use the commands in the Layer menu and Layers palette menu to lock all properties To partially lock a layer or layer set
41. e 2 What s New in Adobe Photoshop 6 0 El Bird 100 RGB Adobe Photoshop 6 0 along with the dedicated Web tool ImageReady 3 0 delivers powerful image editing capabilities with a range of new features that offer something for every user New capabilities include integrated vector drawing tools to extend your creative range expanded tools and features for Web production tasks and numerous interface enhancements to help you get to work quickly and use the Photoshop and ImageReady features more fully 40 What s New in Adobe Photoshop 6 0 Expand beyond pixels Superb vector support Photoshop 6 0 provides integrated tools for creating and outputting crisp editable vector shapes and text With these new tools you can incorporate resolution independent vector based graphics and type along with pixel based images to achieve an unparalleled range of design effects You can save vector data in EPS DCS TIFF and PDF formats Shape tools The new rectangle rounded rectangle ellipse polygon custom shape and line tools let you create a wide variety of vector based shapes These tools let you create shapes in three forms as work paths as shape layers or as painted pixels Shape editing Photoshop 6 0 like Adobe Illustrator and other Adobe programs also provides pathfinder operations for quickly combining basic vector shapes into hard to draw shapes These operations include add subtract rest
42. edited it you can save it as a preset To create a custom contour 1 Click the contour in the Layer Style dialog box 2 Click the contour to add points and drag to adjust the contour Or enter values for Input and Output 3 To create a sharp corner instead of a smooth curve select a point and click Corner 4 To save the contour to a file click Save and name the contour 5 To store a contour as a preset choose New 6 Click OK New contours are added at the bottom of the pop up palette Managing layer styles You can select reset delete or change the preview of layer styles using the Styles palette and the Styles pop up palette menu See Using pop up palettes on page 62 You can also use the Preset Manager See Managing libraries with the Preset Manager Photoshop on page 85 Creating and editing contours Photoshop You can use contours to shape the appearance of an effect over a given range in the Drop Shadow Inner Shadow Inner Glow Outer Glow Bevel and Emboss and Satin effects when creating custom layer styles For example a Linear contour on a Drop Shadow causes the opacity to drop off in a linear transition while a Custom contour can be used to create a unique shadow transition Custom contours created in Photoshop can be used in ImageReady You can select reset delete or change the preview of contours in the contour pop up palette See Using pop up palettes on page 62 You c
43. hen you create import or scan an image in Adobe Photoshop or Adobe ImageReady the image consists of a single layer You can add more layers to the image allowing you to organize your work into distinct levels About layers A new image in Photoshop or ImageReady has a single layer In Photoshop this layer is called the background layer and is analogous to the base layer of a painting You cannot change the position of the background layer in the stacking order it is always at the bottom of the stacking order nor can you apply a blending mode or opacity to a background layer unless you first convert it to a normal layer Layers allow you to make changes to an image without altering your original image data For example you might store photographs or elements of photographs on separate layers and then combine them into one composite image Think of layers as sheets of acetate stacked one on top of the other Where there is no image on a layer that is in places where the layer is transparent Layer sets function like layers you can view select duplicate move or change the stacking order of layers in a set the same way you do layers You can easily move layers into and out of layer sets or create new layers within a layer set however you cannot nest layers that is create or move one layer set within another Additionally you cannot apply a layer effect to a layer set or use a layer set as the base for a clipping
44. image file is downloading Interlacing can make downloading time seem shorter and assures viewers that downloading is in progress 5 If the image contains transparency choose an option for preserving or filling transparent pixels e Select Transparency the default setting to preserve transparent pixels as transparent Deselect Transparency to fill transparent pixels with the Matte color Controlling optimization ImageReady By default Photoshop and ImageReady automati cally regenerate the optimized image when you click the Optimized 2 Up or 4 Up tab at the top of the document if you have modified the image since the last optimization when you change optimization settings with the optimized image displayed or when you edit the original image In ImageReady you can turn off auto regener ation so that the last version of the optimized image remains in the image window until you manually reoptimize the image or reactivate auto regeneration This feature is useful if you want to edit the image without pausing for reopti mization with each modification You can also cancel optimization while it s in progress and preserve the previous image When auto regeneration is turned off the Regen erate button 44 appears in the lower right corner of each optimized image view A regeneration alert symbol also appears in the Color Table palette if the optimized image is in GIF or PNG 8 format indicating that the color tabl
45. make sure that both images are open In the Layers palette for the source image select the layer that you want to copy Then select the move tool and drag from the source image to the destination image until a border highlights the destination window If you have made a selection only the selected area is copied to the destination image Photoshop Erase the background area of a layer The background eraser tool 7 lets you erase similarly colored areas of a layer This is useful for extracting a foreground object that is surrounded by a consistently colored background First select the desired layer in the Layers palette Select the background eraser tool and set the Tolerance option to a low value Then drag in the area that you want to remove ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Extracting an image area Photoshop Extract part of an image The Extract Image command provides controls for isolating image areas with wispy or intricate edges First duplicate the layer containing the desired area and select the duplicate layer in the Layers palette Then choose Image gt Extract In the Extract dialog box drag with the edge highlighter tool 2 in the image preview to highlight the edges of the desired area Then click inside the highlighted area with the fill tool Click OK to perform the extraction All areas on the layer outside the extracted area are erased to transparency Mask part of alayer La
46. midtone pixel prints with a 50 dot of the ink a 100 shadow with a 100 dot of the ink and so on 3 Adjust the duotone curve for each ink by dragging a point on the graph or by entering values for the different ink percentages ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Saving and loading duotone settings Use the Save button in the Duotone Options dialog box to save a set of duotone curves ink settings and overprint colors Use the Load button to load a set of duotone curves ink settings and overprint colors You can then apply these settings to other grayscale images The Adobe Photoshop application includes several sample sets of duotone tritone and quadtone curves These sets include some of the more commonly used curves and colors and are useful as starting points for creating your own combinations Viewing individual printing plates Because duotones are single channel images your adjustments to individual printing inks are displayed as part of the final composite image In some cases you may want to view the individual printing plates to see how the individual colors will separate when printed as you can with CMYK images To view the individual colors of a duotone image 1 After specifying your ink colors choose Image gt Mode gt Multichannel Specifying overprint colors Overprint colors are two unscreened inks printed on top of each other For example when a cyan ink prints over a yellow ink the
47. preserve vector data in the PDF file Including vector data maintains resolution independent edges for all type and paths and ensures smoother output When Include Vector Data is selected you can select the following options Embed Fonts to embed all fonts that are used in the image This ensures that the original font is used for display and printing on computers that do not have the font installed Bitmap fonts fonts that don t allow PDF embedding substitute fonts type that uses the faux bold style and warped type cannot be embedded Selecting the Embed Fonts option increases the size of the saved file Use Outlines for Text to save the text as paths instead of as a PDF text object Select this option if embedding the font results in a file that is too large if you plan to open the file in an application that cannot read PDF files with embedded fonts or if a font fails to display or print correctly Text saved as outlines is not searchable or selectable in a PDF viewer such as Adobe Acrobat You can however edit the text when you reopen the PDF file in Photoshop If you deselect Use Outlines for Text text is saved as a PDF text object which causes a PDF viewer to draw the text with the font information available in the file If the font is not embedded in the file using the Embed Fonts option the PDF viewer may substitute a font or use a faux font 7 Click OK 5 Select Save Image Pyramid to create a pyramid
48. quickly and easily Best of all you never have to view or edit the underlying HTML and JavaScript About designing Web pages with Photoshop and ImageReady When designing Web pages using Adobe Photoshop and Adobe ImageReady keep in mind the tools and features that are available in each application Photoshop provides tools for creating and manipulating static images for use on the Web You can divide an image into slices add links and HTML text optimize the slices and save the image as a Web page ImageReady provides many of the same image editing tools as Photoshop In addition it includes tools and palettes for advanced Web processing and creating dynamic Web images like animations and rollovers area of an image needs to be optimized in GIF format to support an animation but the rest of the image is better optimized in JPEG format you can isolate the animation using a slice Web page divided into slices A Image slice B No Image slice C Slice that contains a rollover You set how the Photoshop or ImageReady application generates HTML code for aligning slices either using tables or cascading style sheets in the Output Settings dialog box You can also set how slice files are named See Setting output options on page 348 Types of slices Slices you create using the slice tool are called user slices slices you create from a layer are called layer based slices When yo
49. reformat HTML and JavaScript code so that rollovers will be fully editable in Adobe GoLive Code is reformatted in the style used by GoLive and may create a larger HTML file You need not generate an HTML file to open a Web page in GoLive 5 0 Simply save the Web page as a Photoshop PSD file and then import the file directly into GoLive For more information see the Adobe GoLive 5 0 User Guide 8 Choose an option for slices from the pop up menu e All Slices to save all slices in the image e Selected Slices to save only the selected slices If you select this option in conjunction with the HTML and Images option ImageReady or Photoshop generates the HTML code based on the outermost bounds of the selected slices and generates auto slices as needed to create a complete HTML table Note You must select the desired slices before starting this procedure e A slice selection to save only the slices in the selection You must save a slice selection in order for this option to appear in the menu See Selecting slices on page 276 9 Click Save To copy HTML code to the Clipboard ImageReady Choose Edit gt Copy HTML Code and choose an option for copying code from the submenu Copy All Slices to copy HTML code for all slices in the document ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide To save output settings in a file 1 In the Output Settings dialog box set the options as desired and click Save 2 Type
50. 2 To select additional components or segments select the path component selection tool or the direct selection tool then hold down Shift while selecting additional paths or segments 9 When the direct selection tool 15 selected you can select the entire path or path component by Alt clicking Windows or Option clicking Mac OS inside the path To activate the direct selection tool when any other tool is selected position the pointer over an anchor point and press Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 175 User Guide To adjust the shape of the segment on either side of a selected anchor point drag the anchor point or the direction point Hold down Shift as you drag to constrain movement to multiples of 45 Y 4 Drag the anchor point or drag the direction point To delete a segment 1 Select the direct selection tool and select the segment you want to delete 2 Press Backspace Windows or Delete Mac OS to delete the selected segment Pressing Backspace or Delete again erases the rest of the path component Moving reshaping copying and deleting path components You can reposition a path component including a shape in a shape layer anywhere within an image You can copy components within an image or between two Photoshop images Using the path component selection tool you can merge overlapping components into a single component All vector objects whether they are described b
51. 2 Up and 4 Up views generate new optimized versions of the image based on the selected version You can also revert an optimized version to the original version of the image In ImageReady you can change the default optimizations in Optimization Preferences See Setting optimization preferences ImageReady on page 345 To select a view Click the view you want to select A black frame indicates the selected version To repopulate optimized versions of an image in 2 Up or 4 Up view 1 Select an optimized version of the image in the 2 Up or 4 Up view 2 In the Optimize panel of the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the Optimize palette ImageReady select Repopulate Views from the menu Photoshop and ImageReady generate smaller optimized versions of the image based on the optimization settings of the selected version The selected version and the original version if present are not altered during repopulation For this reason the Repopulate Views option works with 2 Up view only if the original version of the image is not present Optimizing Images for the Web Viewing images during optimization In Photoshop you must choose File gt Save for Web to view and work with optimized images In ImageReady you can view and work with optimized images at any time in the document window Choosing a display option Display options in Photoshop and ImageReady enable you to switch easily between optimized
52. 3 User Guide the gradient Align With Layer uses the bounding box of the layer to calculate the gradient fill Scale scales the application of the gradient You can also use the mouse to move the center of the gradient by clicking and dragging in the image window Style specifies the shape of the gradient C For more information see Creating gradient fills in online Help Highlight or Shadow Mode Specifies the blend mode of a bevel or emboss highlight or shadow Jitter Varies the application of a gradient s color and opacity Layer Knocks Out Drop Shadow Controls the drop shadow s visibility or occlusion in a semitransparent layer Noise Specifies the amount of random elements in the opacity of a glow or shadow as you enter a value or drag the slider Opacity Sets the opacity of the layer effect as you enter a value or drag the slider Pattern Specifies the pattern of a layer effect In ImageReady click the inverted arrow next to the pattern sample and choose a pattern from the list In Photoshop click the pop up palette and choose a pattern Click the New preset button EJ to create a new preset pattern based on the current settings Click Snap to Origin to position the origin of the pattern with that of the document if Link With Layer is selected or to position the origin with the top left corner of the layer if it is deselected Select Link With Layer to specify that the pattern moves with the layer as
53. 6 0 181 User Guide Converting selection borders to paths Any selection made with a selection tool can be defined as a path The Make Work Path command eliminates any feathering applied to the selection It can also alter the shape of the selection depending on the complexity of the path and the tolerance value you choose in the Make Work Path dialog box To convert a selection to a path 1 Make the selection 2 Start converting the selection Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the Make Work Path l button at the bottom of the Paths palette Choose Make Work Path from the Paths palette menu Click the Make Work Path button This converts the selection using the current settings you can skip steps 3 and 4 3 Enter a Tolerance value or use the default value in the Make Work Path dialog box Tolerance values can range from 0 5 to 10 pixels and determine how sensitive the Make Work Path command is to slight changes in the selection shape The higher the tolerance value the fewer the anchor points used to draw the path and the smoother the path If the path is used as a clipping path and you have problems printing the image use a higher tolerance value See Printing image clipping paths on page 370 4 Click OK The converted selection appears as a work path at the bottom of the Paths palette 3 Start converting the path Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the Load Path as
54. 6 0 User Guide For Modify File Name For choose whether ImageReady appends or rewrites the filename using Windows Mac OS or UNIX file naming conventions 4 Select playback options Run In Background to hide ImageReady during droplet execution so that you can work in other applications while processing takes place When you select Run In Background other playback options requiring user input during processing are turned off ImageReady appears when the droplet completes execution Note ImageReady 1s not available for creating and modifying current images while background processing 15 taking place Display Image to show the images as they are being processed Pause Before Save to stop the processing of each image before saving it 5 Choose error options from the Errors menu Stop to suspend the process until you confirm the error message Skip Step to not process steps in which errors are encountered Skip File to not process files in which errors are encountered To edit a droplet 1 Double click the droplet to open the droplet window in ImageReady The droplet window looks like a simplified version of the Actions palette 2 Edit the droplet in the same ways you would edit an action Change the order of commands by dragging them in the droplet list Delete commands by dragging them to the Trash button T Add a command by dragging a state from the History palette to the
55. Adobe Web site at www partners adobe com to learn how you can become certified Customer support When you register your product you may be entitled to technical support for up to 90 days from the date of your first call Terms may vary depending on the country of residence For more information refer to the technical support card provided with the Photoshop documentation Customer support on Adobe Online Adobe Online provides access to FAQs Frequently Asked Questions and trouble shooting information that provides solutions to common problems Additional customer support resources Adobe Systems provides several forms of automated technical support See the ReadMe and ReadMe First files installed with the program for information that became available after this guide went to press Explore the extensive customer support infor mation on Adobe s World Wide Web site www adobe com To access the Adobe Web site from Photoshop choose Help gt Adobe Online or click the icon at the top of the toolbox See Using Web resources on page 3 Read the Top Issues PDF that is available from the Help menu Classroom in a Book Is the official training series for Adobe graphics and publishing software This book is developed by experts at Adobe and published by Adobe Press The Adobe Photoshop Classroom in a Book includes lessons about using Photoshop For information on purchasing Adobe Photoshop Classroom in a Bo
56. As Type option e HTML and Images to generate an HTML file and save each slice as a separate image file Images Only to save each slice in the image as a separate file e HTML Only to generate an HTML file but not save any image files 6 To set preferences for saving image files and HTML files click Output Settings See Setting output options on page 348 2 Do any of the following to control the processing To temporarily pause the processing click Pause You can then click Resume to continue the processing To cancel the processing click Stop Let the process finish on its own Saving optimized images There are several ways to save an optimized image for use on the Web HTML and Images You can generate all files required to use your image as a Web page This includes an HTML file and separate image files for the slices in the source image The HTML file includes code for any Web effects such as hypertext links image maps rollovers and anima tions in the document The image files use the format and options specified in the optimization setting Images only You can save your image with the format and options specified in the optimization setting If the source image contains multiple slices each slice is saved as a separate file HTML only You can save the HTML code but not the image data for your image In ImageReady you can also create an HTML file using the Copy HTML command Th
57. Channels Saves alpha channel information with the image Disabling this option removes the alpha channels from the saved image Layers Preserves all layers in the image If this option is disabled or unavailable all visible layers are flattened or merged depending on the selected format Annotations Saves annotations with the image Spot Colors Saves spot channel information with the image Disabling an option removes spot colors from the saved image Use Proof Setup ICC Profile Windows or Embed Color Profile Mac OS Creates a color managed document See Embedding profiles in saved documents on page 134 Thumbnail Windows Saves thumbnail data for the file In order to select or deselect this option you must choose Ask When Saving for the Image Previews option in the Preferences dialog box See Setting preferences for saving files Photoshop on page 366 Saving and Exporting Images To save a file in a different file format 1 Do one of the following Photoshop Choose File gt Save As ImageReady Choose File gt Export Original 2 Choose a format from the format pop up menu Note In Photoshop if you choose a format that does not support all features of the document a warning appears at the bottom of the dialog box If you see this warning 11 15 recommended that you save a copy of the file in Photoshop format or in another format that supports all of the image data 3 Specify a f
58. Choosing a print encoding method Printing vector graphics 0 9 Using color management when printing Printing with Adobe PressReady Creating color traps Printing dUotones oe Printing color separations Chapter 15 ADOULActionsi soil Using the Actions palette 6 Recording actions Playing actions aiia as Setting playback options Photoshop Editing 261 5 cosi Managing actions in the Actions palette Using the Batch command Photoshop Using droplets sese ae eal Using the Automate commands Photoshop External automation Printing Photoshop Automating Tasks Installing Adobe Photoshop and ImageReady You must install the Photoshop and ImageReady applications from the Adobe Photoshop CD onto your hard drive you cannot run the program from the CD Follow the on screen installation instructions For more detailed information see the Install ReadMe file on the CD The single installer installs both the Photoshop and ImageReady applications Learning Adobe Photoshop and ImageReady Adobe provides a variety of options for you to learn Photoshop including printed guides online Help and tool tips Using the Adobe Online feature you can easily access a host of continually updated Web resources for learning Photoshop from tips and tutorials to tech suppor
59. Disposal Method context menu ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 309 User Guide Optimizing animations You can apply optimization settings to animated images just as you do to nonanimated images See Optimizing images on page 320 You should always optimize an animation in GIF format because GIF is the only format in ImageReady that supports the display of animated images on the Web Note While you can optimize an image that includes animation in JPEG or PNG format these formats do not support animation The resulting Web page will display only the first frame of the animation In addition to the standard optimization options for GIF format you can optimize frames to include only areas that change from frame to frame This greatly reduces the file size of the animated GIF ImageReady also applies a special dithering technique to animations to ensure that dither patterns are consistent across all frames and to prevent flickering during playback Due to these additional optimization functions ImageReady may require more time to optimize an animated GIF than to optimize a standard GIF To flatten frames into layers In the Animation palette choose Flatten Frames into Layers from the palette menu Viewing animations Viewing an animation lets you preview the frames in timed sequence You can preview an animation in ImageReady or in a Web browser To view an animation in ImageReady 1 Click the Play button t in the A
60. Do one of the following To duplicate a channel within an image drag the channel into the image window or onto the New Channel button El at the bottom of the palette To duplicate a channel to another image make sure that the destination image is open Then drag the channel into the destination image window Splitting channels into separate images You can split the channels of a flattened image into separate images The original file is closed and the individual channels appear in separate grayscale image windows The title bars in the new windows show the original filename plus the channel abbreviation Windows or full name Mac OS Any changes since the last save are retained in the new images and lost in the original Q Splitting channels is useful when you want to retain individual channel information in a file format that doesn t preserve channels Note Only flattened images can be split See Flattening all layers on page 248 188 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 189 User Guide The selected channels are merged into a new image of the specified type and the original images are closed without any changes The new image appears in an untitled window Note You cannot split and recombine merge an image with spot color channels The spot color channel will be added as an alpha channel Deleting channels You may want to delete spot or alpha channels you no longer need before saving an image Complex alph
61. Duotone mode Printing duotones When creating duotones keep in mind that both the order in which the inks are printed and the screen angles you use dramatically affect the final output Click the Auto button in the Halftone Screens dialog box to set the optimal screen angles and frequencies See Selecting halftone screen attributes on page 379 Make sure that you select ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 389 User Guide To prepare an image with spot channels for printing from another application 1 In the General Preferences dialog box select Short Pantone Names This step is not necessary if you are exporting to Adobe Illustrator 7 0 or later or Adobe PageMaker 6 5 or later 2 If the image is a duotone convert to Multi channel color mode 3 Save the image in DCS 2 0 format Be sure to deselect the Include Halftone Screen and the Include Transfer Function options See Saving files in Photoshop EPS or DCS format Photoshop on page 359 4 Open or import the image in the application you will be printing from and set your screen angles Make sure that you ve communicated to the printer the spot color you want for each of the color plates Printing color separations When working with CMYK images or images with spot colors you can print each color channel as a separate page Note If you are printing an image from another application and want to print spot channels to spot color plates you must first save the
62. File gt Output Settings submenu Use this method if you want to load and save settings When you save an optimized image click Output Settings in the Save Optimized As dialog box The Save and Load options are not available when you use this method to access the Output Settings dialog box To switch to a different set of output options Do one of the following Select the set from the pop up menu below the Settings menu Click Next to display the next set in the menu list click Prev to display the previous set height values specified on the TD tag Select NoWrap TD W amp H to place a nonstandard NoWrap attribute on the table data and also place width and height values specified on the TD tags TD W8 amp H Select an option for including width and height attributes for table data Always Never or Auto the recommended setting Spacer Cells Select an option for adding one row and one column of empty spacer cells around the generated table Always Never or Auto the recommended setting Adding spacer cells is necessary with table layouts in which slice bound aries do not align to prevent the table from breaking apart in some browsers Image Map Type ImageReady only Select an option for generating image map code Client Side to include all required code for the image map in the image s HTML file NCSA Server Side to create a separate map file in addition to the HTML file using NCSA specifi ca
63. Guide Double click the layer mask channel in the Channels palette 2 To choose a new mask color in the Layer Mask Display Options dialog box click the color swatch and choose a new color For more information see Using the Adobe Color Picker in online Help 3 To change the opacity enter a value between 0 and 100 Both the color and opacity settings affect only the appearance of the mask and have no effect on how underlying areas are protected For example you might want to change these settings to make the mask more easily visible against the colors in the image 4 Click OK Viewing layer clipping paths By default the layer clipping path does not appear in the image You can view and edit the path or temporarily turn off its effects You can also change the display options for the mask To turn off the layer clipping path temporarily 1 Press Shift and click the layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette A red X appears over the layer clipping path thumbnail in the Layers palette and the entire underlying layer appears without masking effects To select and display the layer mask channel Do one of the following Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the layer mask thumbnail to view only the grayscale mask The eye icons in the Layers palette are dimmed because all layers or layer sets are hidden To redisplay the layers Alt click or Option click the layer mask thumbnail or click
64. If needed select the tool 2 Inthe options bar specify whether to add a new selection m add to an existing selection subtract from a selection or select an area intersected by other selections H 3 Specify feather and anti aliasing options See Softening the edges of a selection on page 147 To erase recently drawn straight segments press the Delete key 4 Close the selection border Position the polygonal lasso tool pointer over the starting point a closed circle appears next to the pointer and click If the pointer is not over the starting point double click the polygonal lasso tool pointer or Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS To use the magnetic lasso tool Photoshop 1 Select the magnetic lasso tool 52 and select options See Setting options for the lasso polygonal lasso and magnetic lasso tools on page 142 2 Click in the image to set the first fastening point Fastening points anchor the selection border in place 3 To draw a freehand segment move the pointer along the edge you want to trace You can also drag with the mouse button depressed The most recent segment of the selection border remains active As you move the pointer the active segment snaps to the strongest edge in the image based on the detection Width set in the options bar Periodically the magnetic lasso tool adds fastening points to the selection border to anchor previous
65. PDF file you can choose which page to open and specify rasterization options If you want to open an image versus a page from a PDF file you can use the File gt Import gt PDF Image command Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady 3 Mac OS Click Show Preview to preview the selected file This option requires the Apple QuickTime extension Note Previews display faster if they are saved with the file In Photoshop select Always Save for Image Previews in the Saving Files preferences to always save a preview select Ask When Saving to save previews on a file per file basis 4 Click Open In some cases a dialog box appears letting you set format specific options See Opening and importing PDF files on page 102 and Opening PostScript artwork on page 104 Note If a color profile warning message appears specify whether to convert the pixels based on the file s color profile See Specifying color management policies on page 128 GI For more information on opening and importing Photo CD files see Opening Photo CD files Opening Raw files Photoshop Importing anti aliased PICT files Mac OS and Importing PICT Resources Mac OS in online Help To open a recently used file Choose File gt Open Recent and select a file from the submenu To specify the number of files that are available in the Open Recent submenu choose Edit gt Prefer ences gt Saving Fi
66. RGB mode you can use the Proof Setup commands to simulate the effects of a CMYK conversion without changing the actual image data See Soft proofing colors on page 131 You can also use CMYK mode to work directly with CMYK images scanned or imported from high end systems RGB images use three colors or channels to reproduce up to 16 7 million colors on screen the three channels translate to 24 8 x 3 bits of color information per pixel In 16 bit per channel images this translates to 48 bits per pixel with the ability to reproduce many more colors In addition to being the default mode for new Photoshop images the RGB model is used by computer monitors to display colors This means that when working in color modes other than RGB such as CMYK Photoshop temporarily uses RGB mode for display on screen Although RGB is a standard color model the exact range of colors represented can vary depending on the application or display device Photoshop s RGB mode varies according to the working space setting that you have specified in the Color Settings dialog box See About working spaces on page 125 CMYK model The CMYK model is based on the light absorbing quality of ink printed on paper As white light strikes translucent inks part of the spectrum is absorbed and part is reflected back to your eyes In theory pure cyan C magenta M and yellow Y pigments should combine to absorb all color and produce
67. Select a layer and in the Layers palette select one or more desired lock options e Transparency lA to prevent editing of trans parent pixels This option is equivalent to Preserve Transparency in earlier versions of Photoshop e Image to prevent the painting tools from modifying the image but not any mask that might be applied to the layer This option also prevents moving the image Position to disable the move tool You can also use the commands in the Layer menu and Layers palette menu to set Lock options To lock all properties for linked layers including blending modes opacity and layer style Select a linked layer and select Lock ii in the Layers palette to automatically lock all properties You can also use the commands in the Layer menu and Layers palette menu to lock linked layers CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 218 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide To remove a layer from a clipping group Do one of the following e Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS position the pointer over the line separating two grouped layers in the Layers palette the pointer changes to two overlapping circles and click In the Layers palette select a layer in the clipping group and choose Layer gt Ungroup This command removes the selected layer and any layers above it from the clipping group To ungroup all layers in a clipping group 1 In the Layers palette select the base layer in the c
68. The duotone type monotone duotone tritone or quadtone determines how many ink controls are active To produce fully saturated colors print darker inks before lighter inks The order of inks in the duotone dialog boxes affects how Photoshop applies screens so make sure that inks are specified in descending order darkest at the top lightest at the bottom To specify the duotone type and its ink color 1 In the Duotone Options dialog box select Monotone Duotone Tritone or Quadtone for Type 2 Click the color box the solid square for an ink About duotones Duotones are used to increase the tonal range of a grayscale image Although a grayscale reproduction can display up to 256 levels of gray a printing press can reproduce only about 50 levels of gray per ink This means that a grayscale image printed with only black ink can look significantly coarser than the same image printed with two three or four inks each individual ink repro ducing up to 50 levels of gray Sometimes duotones are printed using a black ink and a gray ink the black for shadows and the gray for midtones and highlights More frequently duotones are printed using a colored ink for the highlight color This technique produces an image with a slight tint to it and significantly increases the image s dynamic range Duotones are ideal for two color print jobs with a spot color such as a PANTONE ink used for accent Because duotones use
69. The thumbnail preview displays the effects in the Normal state Matching layers across rollover states When you use Layers palette commands to create effects for a rollover state the changes apply only to the active state However you can use the Rollover palette to apply layer changes to all states in a rollover or all rollover states associated with an image For more information about working with layers when creating rollovers see Using layers to edit frames on page 306 To match layer changes across rollover states 1 In the Layers palette select the layer containing the element you want to match across states 2 In the Rollover palette choose an option from the palette menu Match Layer Across States to apply layer attributes for the selected state to all states in the current rollover Match Layer Across All Rollovers to apply layer attributes for the selected state to all states in all rollovers associated with the current image Copying and pasting rollover states You can copy a rollover state and paste it into another state in the current rollover or into a state in another rollover Layers in the source state replace layers in the destination state Designing Web Pages Applying and creating rollover styles Rollover styles simplify rollover creation by allowing you to turn a layer into a rollover effect with a single click A rollover style includes all the attributes of a rollover including
70. To apply spot color as a tint throughout an image convert the image to Duotone mode and apply the spot color to one of the duotone plates You can use up to four spot colors one per plate See Printing color separations on page 389 The names of the spot colors print on the separations Spot colors are overprinted on top of the fully composited image Each spot color is overprinted in the order it appears in the Channels palette To convert an alpha channel to a spot channel 1 Double click the alpha channel in the Channels palette 2 If needed rename the channel 3 Select Spot Color 4 Click the color box and choose a color in the Color Picker dialog box Adobe Color Picker in online Help For more information see Using the 5 Click OK The areas of the channel containing grayscale values are converted to spot color 6 Choose Image gt Adjust gt Invert to apply the color to the selected area of the channel Modifying spot channels You can edit a spot channel to add or remove color in it change a spot channel s color or on screen color solidity and merge a spot channel with the image s color channels For information on rearranging duplicating or deleting spot channels see Managing channels Photoshop on page 187 CHAPTER 7 Using Channels and Masks 4 Click the color box and choose a color Adobe Color Picker in online Help For more information see
71. To load the intersection of the pixels and an existing selection press Ctrl Alt Shift Windows or Command Option Shift Mac OS and click the layer or layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette Q To move all the contents of a layer you can use the move tool without loading a trans parency mask Using adjustment layers or fill layers Photoshop An adjustment layer lets you experiment with color or tonal adjustments to an image without permanently modifying the pixels in the image The color or tonal changes reside within the adjustment layer which acts as a veil through which the underlying image layers appear 2 To turn on the layer clipping path Shift click the layer clipping path thumbnail in the Layers palette You can also use the Layer menu to temporarily turn off a layer clipping path Applying and discarding layer masks When you have finished creating a layer mask you can either apply the mask and make the changes permanent or discard the mask without applying changes Because layer masks are stored as alpha channels applying and discarding layer masks can help reduce file size See Storing masks in alpha channels on page 199 To apply or discard a layer mask 1 Click the layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette 2 To remove the layer mask and make changes permanent click the Trash button if at the bottom of the Layers palette then click Apply 3 To remove the layer mask without applyin
72. Using the If you select a custom color your print service provider can more easily provide the proper ink to reproduce the image For more information see Choosing custom colors Photoshop in online Help 5 For Solidity enter a value between 0 and 100 This option lets you simulate on screen the solidity of the printed spot color A value of 100 simulates an ink that completely covers the inks beneath such as a metallic ink 0 simulates a transparent ink that completely reveals the inks beneath such as a clear varnish You can also use this option to see where an otherwise transparent spot color such as a varnish will appear Note The Solidity and color choice options affect only the on screen preview They have no effect on the printed output 6 To enter a name for the spot channel choose a custom color in step 4 and the channel automati cally takes the name of that color Be sure to name spot colors so they ll be recog nized by other applications reading your file Otherwise the file might not print 7 Click OK 5 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide transparent ink that completely reveals the inks beneath such as a clear varnish You can also use this option to see where an otherwise transparent spot color such as a varnish will appear Note The Solidity option affects only the on screen preview It has no effect on the printed output 4 Click OK To merge spot channels 1 Sele
73. Windows to Fit is deselected the default the window maintains a constant size regardless of the image s magnification This can be helpful when using smaller monitors or working with tiled views Choose View gt Zoom In to magnify to the next preset percentage When the image has reached its maximum magnification level the command is dimmed Photoshop Enter a magnification level in the Zoom text box at the lower left of the window ImageReady Click on the Zoom Level pop up menu at the bottom left of the document window and choose a zoom level To zoom out Do one of the following e Select the zoom tool Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS to activate the zoom out tool The pointer becomes a magnifying glass with a minus sign in its center Click the center of the area of the image you want to reduce Each click reduces the view to the previous preset percentage When the file has reached its maximum reduction level so that only 1 pixel is visible horizontally or vertically the magnifying glass appears empty Choose View gt Zoom Out to reduce to the previous preset percentage When the image reaches its maximum reduction level the command is dimmed e Photoshop Enter a reduction level in the Zoom text box at the lower left of the window e ImageReady Click on the Zoom Level pop up menu at the lower left of the document window and choose a zoom level To free memory used by the U
74. You select a looping option to specify how many times the animation sequence repeats when played To specify looping 1 Click the looping option selection box at the lower left corner of the Animation palette 2 Select a looping option Once Forever or Other 3 If you selected Other enter a value in the Set Loop Count dialog box and click OK Specifying delay for frames You can specify a delay the time that a frame is displayed for single frames or for multiple frames in an animation Delay time is displayed in seconds Fractions of a second are displayed as decimal values For example one quarter second is specified as 25 To specify a delay time 1 Select one or more frames 2 In the Animation palette click on the Delay value below the selected frame to view the Delay pop up menu ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide To add a new layer every time you create a frame Choose Add Layer to New Frames from the Animation palette menu A check mark indicates that the option is turned on Showing and hiding layers in frames When you show or hide a layer in a frame the visibility of the layer changes for that frame only For example if you use a multilayer image to create a three frame animation and you hide the top layer in the second frame that layer will still be visible in first and third frames Matching layers across frames When you use Layers palette commands to edit a layer the changes apply only
75. a filename and choose a location for the saved file By default output settings are saved in the Optimized Output Settings folder inside the Presets folder in the Adobe Photoshop folder 3 Click Save To load output settings 1 Click Load in the Output Settings dialog box 2 Select a iros file and click Open Setting HTML output options You can set the following options in the HTML set Tags Case Select the capitalization to be used for tags all uppercase initial cap or all lowercase Setting tags and attributes to all uppercase helps the code stand out in the file Attributes Case Select the capitalization to be used for tag attributes all uppercase initial cap second initial cap or all lowercase Indent Select a method for indenting lines of code using the authoring applications tab settings using a specified number of spaces or using no indentation Line Endings Select a platform for line ending compatibility Using the Output Settings dialog box The Output Settings dialog box contains four sets of options HTML Background Saving Files and Slices You can save output settings as a file and reload them to apply the same settings to a different file To display the Output Settings dialog box Do one of the following Photoshop Click Output Settings in the Save for Web dialog box Use this method ifyou want to load and save settings ImageReady Choose the desired preferences set from the
76. a plus sign appears next to the pointer and drag to add another selection To define a feathered edge for an existing selection 1 Choose Select gt Feather 2 Enter a value for the Feather Radius and click OK Note A small selection made with a large feather radius may be so faint that its edges are invisible and thus not selectable If a message appears stating No pixels are more than 50 selected either decrease the feather radius or increase the selection s size Or click OK to accept the mask at its current setting and create a selection where you cannot see the edges A Original selection B Feather 0 C Feather 10 D Feather 30 Anti aliasing is available for the lasso polygonal lasso magnetic lasso rounded rectangle marquee elliptical marquee and magic wand tools Select a tool to display its options bar You must specify this option before using these tools Once a selection is made you cannot add anti aliasing Feathering Blurs edges by building a transition boundary between the selection and its surrounding pixels This blurring can cause some loss of detail at the edge of the selection You can define feathering for the marquee lasso polygonal lasso or magnetic lasso tool as you use the tool or you can add feathering to an existing selection Feathering effects become apparent when you move cut copy or fill the selection To use anti aliasing 1 Select the lasso polygonal las
77. and use the direct selection tool k to select an anchor point in the path 2 Drag the point or its handles to a new location See Adding deleting and converting anchor points on page 177 To merge overlapping path components 1 Choose the path component selection tool and click Combine in the options bar to create a single component from all overlapping compo nents in the layer 176 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 177 User Guide e Horizontal Center to align the horizontal centers of the selected components Right to align the right edges of the selected components 2 Select the components you want to distribute then select one of the distribute options from the options bar e Top to distribute the top edges of the selected components e Vertical Center amp to distribute the vertical centers of the selected components e Bottom to distribute the bottom edges of the selected components e Left bb to distribute the left edges of the selected components Horizontal Center 4 to distribute the horizontal centers of the selected components e Right dd to distribute the right edges of the selected components Adding deleting and converting anchor points The add anchor point and delete anchor point tools let you add and delete anchor points on a shape The convert direction point tool lets you convert a smooth curve to a sharp curve or to a straight segment and vic
78. and Photoshop related sites Using Adobe Online Adobe Online is constantly changing so you should refresh before you use it Refreshing through Adobe Online updates bookmarks and buttons so you can quickly access the most current content available You can use preferences to automatically refresh Adobe Online daily weekly or monthly Select Show All Files to view all the files on the Adobe Web site that are currently available for download 3 Select Download Options e Select Auto Install Downloaded Components if you want Adobe to start the component s installer if available as soon as the download is complete You can then follow the prompts to install the files e Select Download in Background if you want to continue working in Photoshop ImageReady and other applications while the file downloads e Select Notify When Download Complete if you want Adobe to display a message when the files have been transferred to your computer 4 To view a list of files open the Downloadables folder and any other folder listed 5 Toseea description of a file position the mouse cursor over a filename and view its description in the Item Description section 6 To see the location where a file will be installed if downloaded select a file and view its location in the Download Directory section To change the location click the Folder button 6 7 To download a file select it and click Download 8 To close the Downloadabl
79. and click Continue clicking to set endpoints for subsequent segments Hold down Shift to constrain the segment to 45 increments To close the border double click or position the pointer over the starting point a closed circle appears next to the pointer and click To create an image map area from a layer 1 Inthe Layers palette choose a layer from which to create an image map area To use multiple layers in one image map area first merge the layers 2 Choose Layer gt New Layer Based Image Map Area Converting layer based image maps to tool based image maps Because a layer based image map area is tied to the pixel content of a layer the only way to move resize or align it is to edit the layer You can convert a layer based image map area to a tool based image map area to unlink it from the layer Layer based image map areas Are created from a layer the layer s content defines the shape of the image map area If you edit the layer s content the image map area automatically adjusts to encompass the new pixels You can view and set options for layer based image map areas in the Image Map palette however you cannot use the Duplicate or Align commands To access these commands or to move or resize the image map area by dragging you can convert a layer based image map area to a tool based image map area If you plan to adda rollover effect to an image map area it is often preferable to use a layer based imag
80. and editing selections as masks and spot color channels can be added to add spot color plates for printing See Storing masks in alpha channels on page 199 and Adding spot colors Photoshop on page 191 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Converting between color modes Photoshop When you choose a different color mode for an image you permanently change the color values in the image For example when you convert an RGB image to CMYK mode RGB color values outside the CMYK gamut defined by the CMYK working space setting in the Color Settings dialog box are adjusted to fall within gamut Consequently before converting images it s best to do the following Do as much editing as possible in the image s original mode usually RGB from most scanners or CMYK from traditional drum scanners or if imported from a Scitex system Save a backup copy before converting Be sure to save a copy of your image that includes all layers in order to edit the original version of the image after the conversion Flatten the file before converting it The inter action of colors between layer blending modes will change when the mode changes To convert an image to another mode Choose Image gt Mode and the mode you want from the submenu Modes not available for the active image appear dimmed in the menu Images are flattened when converted to Multi channel Bitmap or Indexed Color mode because these modes do no
81. and original non optimized versions of an image and view up to four versions of an optimized image simultaneously To select a display option for viewing images Click a tab at the top of the image Original to view the image with no optimization Optimized to view the image with the current optimization settings applied e 2 Up to view two versions of the image side by side e 4 Up to view four versions of the image side by side Working in 2 Up and 4 Up view When you choose 2 Up or 4 Up view Photoshop or ImageReady determines a layout for the images based on the aspect ratio width height ratio of the image Images can appear in vertical layout horizontal layout or 2 x 2 layout two rows and two columns 2 x 2 layout is available for 4 Up view only ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 317 User Guide Viewing optimization annotations In 2 Up and 4 Up view an annotation area appears by default below each optimized image showing its optimization settings In Photoshop the annotation area always shows in ImageReady you can hide or show the annotation area To hide or show optimization annotations in 2 Up and 4 Up views ImageReady Choose View gt Hide Optimization Info or View gt Show Optimization Info Choosing a file format for optimization The file format you choose for an optimized image is determined by the color tonal and graphic characteristics of the original image In general continuous tone i
82. and you can specify settings for the masking colors and opacity See Managing channels Photoshop on page 187 for information on rearranging dupli cating or deleting alpha channels To load a saved selection into an image ImageReady Choose Select gt Load Selection then choose an option from the submenu To load a selection from another image Photoshop 1 Open the two images you want to use Note The images must have identical pixel dimen sions See Changing the pixel dimensions of an image on page 97 2 Make the destination image active and choose Select gt Load Selection 3 For Document choose the source image 4 For Channel choose the channel containing the selection you want to use as a mask 5 Click Invert if you want to make the nonselected areas selected and vice versa 6 If the destination image already has a selection indicate how to combine the selections For infor mation on these options see Saving a mask selection on page 200 7 Click OK CHAPTER 7 Using Channels and Masks To load a saved selection using shortcuts Photoshop Do one of the following in the Channels palette e Select the alpha channel click the Load Selection button i at the bottom of the palette and then click the composite color channel near the top of the palette e Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS the channel containing the selection you want to load e To ad
83. appear Click to create a corner point Drag to create a smooth point Managing paths Photoshop When you use a pen or shape tool to create a work path the new path appears as the Work Path in the Paths palette The Work Path is temporary you must save it to avoid losing its contents If you deselect the Work Path without saving it and start drawing again a new path will replace the existing one When you use a pen or shape tool to create a new shape layer the new path appears as a layer clipping path in the Paths palette Layer clipping paths are linked to their parent layer you must select the parent layer in the Layers palette in order to list the clipping path in the Paths palette You can remove a clipping path from a layer and convert a clipping path to a rasterized mask See Editing a layer clipping path Photoshop on page 240 Converting between paths and selection borders Photoshop Because of their smooth outlines you can convert paths into precise selection borders You also can convert selection borders into paths using the direct selection tool for fine tuning Converting paths to selection borders You can define any closed path as a selection border A closed path that overlaps a selected area can be added to subtracted from or combined with the current selection To convert a path to a selection border using the current Make Selection settings 1 Select the path in the Paths palett
84. appears next to the pointer 2 Delete the anchor point Click the anchor point to delete it and to reshape the path to fit the remaining anchor points Drag the anchor point to delete it and to change the shape of the segment ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Paths saved with an image appear when you open it again In Windows the Photoshop JPEG DCS EPS PDF and TIFF formats support paths In Mac OS all available file formats support paths Note Paths in formats other than those listed here generally don t survive a transition from Mac OS to Windows and back to Mac OS To create a new path in the Paths palette Do one of the following To create a path without naming it click the New Path button El at the bottom of the Paths palette e To create and name a path make sure no work path is selected Choose New Path from the Paths palette menu or Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the New Path button at the bottom of the palette Enter a name for the path in the New Path dialog box and click OK To save a work path Do one of the following To save without renaming drag the Work Path name to the New Path button El at the bottom of the Paths palette To save and rename choose Save Path from the Paths palette menu enter a new path name in the Save Path dialog box and click OK e To convert a corner point to a smooth point drag away from the corner point to make direction lines
85. areas Photoshop or oe ImageReady automatically generates slices for the remaining areas of the image Another way to define slices is by using the boundaries of layers See Enhanced slicing capabilities on page 45 for more information Assign a URL link to a slice Assigning a URL to a slice makes the entire slice area a hotspot in the Web page with a link to the specified URL Select the slice select tool and double click the desired slice to display the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop or the Slice palette ImageReady Then enter the desired URL destination and if needed the target frame For information on setting other slice options such as message text and Alt tags see Enhanced slicing capabilities on page 45 ImageReady Create an image map Image maps let you add URL links to different areas of an image Select the rectangle image map tool Lj and drag in the image to define the image map Then select the image map selection tool m and double click the desired image map to display the Image Map palette Enter a name and URL link destination for the image map If desired enter a target frame destination and text for an Alt tag di 33 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide ImageReady Add a rollover effect Rollover effects display different states of an image when a viewer performs a mouse action such as rolling or clicking over an area of the Web page Layers provide an e
86. black For this reason these colors are called subtractive colors Because all printing inks contain some impurities these three inks actually produce a muddy brown and must be combined with black K ink to produce a true black K is used instead of B to avoid confusion with blue Combining these inks to reproduce color is called four color process printing Lab mode In Photoshop Lab mode the asterisks are dropped from the name has a lightness component L that can range from 0 to 100 The a component green red axis and the b component blue yellow axis can range from 120 to 2 10 You can use Lab mode to work with Photo CD images edit the luminance and the color values in an image independently move images between systems and print to PostScript Level 2 and Level 3 printers To print Lab images to other color PostScript devices convert to CMYK first Lab color is the intermediate color model Photoshop uses when converting from one color mode to another Bitmap mode This mode uses one of two color values black or white to represent the pixels in an image Images in Bitmap mode are called bitmapped 1 bit images because they have a bit depth of 1 For more information see Specifying 8 bit color display Photoshop in online Help Grayscale mode This mode uses up to 256 shades of gray Every pixel of a grayscale image has a brightness value ranging from 0 black to 255 white Grayscale valu
87. can move arrange align and duplicate tool based image map areas using the Image Map palette There are fewer options for modifying layer based image map areas because they are tied to the pixel content of the associated layer however you can select arrange and delete layer based image map areas as you do tool based image map areas Designing Web Pages To convert a layer based image map area to a tool based image map area 1 Select a layer based image map area using the image map select tool Rm See Selecting image maps on page 289 2 Choose Promote Layer Based Image Map Area from the Image Map palette menu If the layer contains multiple non overlapping areas of pixel content multiple tool based image map areas are produced Viewing image maps When you select the image map select tool image map areas show automatically You can also show or hide image map areas using the Image Map Visibility button Image map preferences determine how image map areas appear in the document window You can set preferences for image map lines line color and color adjustments To show or hide image map areas Do one of the following e Click the Image Map Visibility button 8 in the toolbox Choose View gt Show gt Image Maps e Choose View gt Show Extras This command also shows or hides selection edges slices text bounds text baseline and text selections See Working with Extras on page 77
88. can only open low resolution Photoshop images For non EPS files this is a PICT preview File Extension Windows Choose an option for the three character file extensions that indicate a file s format Use Upper Case to append file extensions using uppercase characters or Use Lower Case to append file extensions using lowercase characters Append File Extension Mac OS File extensions are necessary for files that you want to use on or transfer to a Windows system Choose an option for appending extensions to filenames Never to save files without file extensions Always to append file extensions to filenames or Ask When Saving to append file extensions on a file by file basis Select Use Lower Case to append file extensions using lowercase characters Q In Mac OS to append a file extension to the current file only hold down Option as you choose a file format from the Save As or Save a Copy dialog box Maximize Backwards Compatibility Select this option to maximize file compatibility with previous versions of Photoshop and with other applications including previous versions of Creating picture packages With the Picture Package command you can place multiple copies of a source image on a single page similar to the photo packages traditionally sold by portrait studios You can choose from a variety of size and placement options to customize your package layout You can customize and create new layouts for picture pack
89. can set the droplet to operate in the background during execution so that you can work in other applications while ImageReady processes images CHAPTER 15 Automating Tasks To create a droplet from an action ImageReady 1 For best results make sure that the action contains at least one Set Optimization command To add a Set Optimization command adjust the settings in the Optimize palette and then drag the droplet icon 4 from the Optimize palette onto the part of the Actions palette where you want to add that command If you do not add a Set Optimization command to the droplet ImageReady will process files using the optimization settings in place at the time the droplet was created 2 Create the droplet Drag the name of the action from the Actions palette onto the desktop The droplet has the same name as the action it was created from You can rename the droplet as you do other desktop icons e Select an action and choose Create Droplet from the Actions palette menu Name the droplet choose a location where the droplet will be saved and click Save Creating droplets for use on different operating systems When creating droplets that may be used in both Windows and Mac OS keep the following compatibility issues in mind When moving a droplet created in Windows to Mac OS drag the droplet onto the Photoshop icon Photoshop will launch and update the droplet for use in Mac OS 408 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
90. cannot align layer based slices or auto slices To align user slices 1 Select the user slices you want to align 2 Do one of the following With the slice select tool active click an alignment option in the options bar Align Top Edges 9 Align Vertical Centers ln Align Bottom Edges Ba Align Left Edges IE Align Horizontal Centers amp Align Right Edges Choose Slices gt Align and choose a command from the submenu Distributing user slices ImageReady In ImageReady you can distribute user slices evenly along the vertical or horizontal axis Distributing user slices can eliminate unneeded auto slices and generate a smaller more efficient HTML file Note You cannot distribute layer based slices or auto slices ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide To display the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop Do one of the following Double click a slice with the slice select tool With the slice select tool active click the Slice Options button in the options bar This method is available only in the main Photoshop application not in the Photoshop Save for Web dialog box To display the Slice palette ImageReady See Using the Web design palettes ImageReady on page 271 Choosing a content type Formatting and display options for a slice vary according to its content type There are two types of slice content Image slices contain image data including rollover states Th
91. careful not to enter more text than can be displayed in the slice area If you enter too much text it will extend into neighboring slices and affect the layout of your Web page To add HTML text to a slice 1 Select a slice If you are working in Photoshop double click the slice with the slice select tool to display the Slice Options dialog box 2 In the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop or the Slice palette ImageReady select No Image from the Type pop up menu 3 Type the desired text in the provided text box You can use standard HTML tags to format the text Designing Web Pages W to specify the width of the slice H to specify the height of the slice Constrain Proportions to preserve the current proportions of the slice 3 Photoshop Click OK Specifying browser messages You can specify what messages appear in the browser using the Message and Alt options These options are only available for Image slices Message Lets you change the default message in the browser s status area for a selected slice or slices By default the slice s URL is displayed Alt Lets you specify an Alt tag for a selected slice or slices The Alt text appears in place of the slice image in nongraphical browsers It also appears in place of the image while the image is downloading and as a tool tip in some browsers In ImageReady if the Message and Alt options aren t showing choose Show Options from the Slice palette
92. ccc ec 24 arenili ini 26 Drawing shapes atelier 27 Creating type cello SEAS 30 BOING TY DG lle 31 Designing Web graphics 32 Creating animations ImageReady 33 Optimizing Web graphics 34 Superb vector support ww ccc cee eects 40 Enhanced vector output eee eect eee ee 42 3 6 aogier Eien 42 Interactive image warping susususs 44 Enhanced slicing capabilities 45 Enhanced support for image maps and rollovers 47 Weighted optimization 48 Improved Web workflow eee ccc cece eee eee eees 48 Streamlined interface 49 Contents Getting Started Adobe Photoshop Basics What s New in Adobe Photoshop 6 0 Enhanced layer management Expanded text features Preset Manager tiar Hagia eda Other new and enhanced features 46 Chapter 1 Using the toolbox eee cece cee eee eeee Using the tool options bar Using palettes assunta ea Using context MENUS kee cece eee eee eens VIEWING IMAGES cece cece bei Correcting mistakes esses Reverting to any state ofan image 6 DuplicatingiMageS Li Using rulers the measure tool guides and the grid Working with Extras oo eee eee cece eee ences Displaying status information Displa
93. containing the colors you want to send to your printer This space may be the document s current color profile if you want the printout to match how the document appears on screen or it may be the current proof profile if you want the printout to match your current soft proof Second you specify the color space of the printer to which you are sending the document Specifying the printer space ensures that Photoshop has enough infor mation to interpret and reproduce the source colors accurately on the printer Printing Photoshop Printing part of an image You can use the Print Selected Area option to print a specific part of an image To print part of an image 1 Use the rectangle marquee tool to select the part of an image you want to print 2 Choose File gt Print Options select Print Selected Area and click Print Choosing a print encoding method By default the printer driver transfers binary information to printers however you can choose to transfer image data using JPEG or ASCII encoding For more information see Choosing a print encoding method in online Help Printing vector graphics If an image includes vector graphics such as shapes and type Photoshop can send the vector data to a PostScript printer When you choose to include vector data Photoshop sends the printer a separate image for each type layer and each vector shape layer These additional images are printed on top
94. creating rollovers Placing the image content for a rollover on its own layer allows you to use Layers palette commands and options to create rollover effects When creating rollovers or animations some changes you make to a layer affect only the active state or frame while others affect all states or frames See Using layers to edit frames on page 306 When creating a slice for a rollover use a layer based slice This is recommended because the dimensions of a layer s content may change in the course of creating a rollover and layer based slices 3 Use the default rollover state assigned by ImageReady or select a rollover state from the pop up menu above the rollover thumbnail Over to define the rollover state when the Web viewer rolls over the slice or image map area with the mouse while the mouse button is not pressed Over is automatically selected for the second rollover state Down to define the rollover state when the Web viewer presses the mouse button on the slice or image map area This state appears as long as the viewer keeps the mouse button pressed down on the area e Click to define the rollover state when the Web viewer clicks the mouse on the slice or image map area This state appears after the viewer clicks the mouse and remains until the viewer activates another rollover state Out to define the rollover state when the Web viewer rolls the mouse out of the slice or image map area
95. draw crisp edged shapes of various dimensions and colors Unlike pixel data such as a scanned photograph these shapes are defined using the mathematical principle of vectors Used in drawing applications such as Adobe Illustrator and now Photoshop and ImageReady vectors describe shape size and boundary properties of graphics with clean resolution independent precision Select a shape tool and set options Select the rectangle tool O rounded rectangle tool O ellipse tool or polygon tool lt gt from the toolbox Then select one of the following drawing options from the options bar e The Create Shape Layer option I creates a vector shape filled with the current foreground color The shape is created on a new layer containing a layer clipping path e The Create Work Path option ff creates an unfilled vector path with shaped boundaries The shape appears as a new work path in the Paths palette e The Fill Region option O creates a rasterized shape filled with the current foreground color on the active layer Selecting this option creates a shape based on pixel rather than vector information You can also specify other settings in the options bar such as layer style opacity and blending mode 28 Adobe Photoshop Basics Draw a vector shape Drag in the image to draw the specified shape Layers Layers Normal Opacity hoos Normal e Opacity poos TF TT lc C Loc
96. e self to display the linked file in the same frame as the original file parent to display the linked file in its own original parent frameset Use this option if the HTML document contains frames and the current frame is a child The linked file displays in the current parent frame Distributing tool based image maps You can distribute tool based image map areas evenly along the vertical or horizontal axis To distribute tool based image map areas 1 Select the tool based image map areas you want to distribute 2 Do one of the following e With the image map select tool active click a distribute option in the options bar Distribute Top Edges Distribute Vertical Centers amp Distribute Bottom Edges Distribute Left Edges hb Distribute Horizontal Centers 44 Distribute Right Edges dd Choose a distribute command from the Image Map palette menu Deleting image maps You can delete selected image map areas by pressing the Backspace key or the Delete key or choosing Delete Image Map Area s from the Image Map palette menu Specifying image map options ImageReady You can specify a name a URL a target frame and Alt text for an image map area in the Image Map palette Working with rollovers ImageReady You use the Rollover palette in conjunction with the Layers palette to add rollover effects to a Web page You can display an animation as a rollover state or you can create second
97. easy loading Press Ctrl Alt Windows or Command Option Mac OS when you choose the Save Actions command to save the actions in a text file You can use this file to review or print the contents of an action However you can t reload the text file back into Photoshop Organizing sets of actions Photoshop To help you organize your actions you can create sets of actions and save the sets to disk You can organize sets of actions for different types of work such as print publishing and online publishing and transfer sets to other computers Although ImageReady doesn t allow you to e create sets you can manually organize actions in the ImageReady Actions folder For example if the Actions palette contains too many actions create a new folder inside the ImageReady Actions folder and move less used actions from the ImageReady Actions folder to this new folder The relocated actions are removed from the palette until you return them to the ImageReady Actions folder To create a new set of actions 1 In the Actions palette click the New Set button O or choose New Set from the palette menu 2 Enter the name of the set and click OK To move an action to a different set In the Actions palette drag the action to a different set When the highlighted line appears in the desired position release the mouse button To rename a set of actions 1 In the Actions palette choose Set Options from the pop up menu
98. edit the layer You can convert a layer based slice to a user slice to unlink it from the layer To convert a layer based slice to a user slice 1 Select a layer based slice In ImageReady you can select multiple slices See Selecting slices on page 276 2 Do one of the following Photoshop Click Promote to User Slice in the options bar ImageReady Choose Slices gt Promote to User slice s Designing Web Pages Layer based slices are especially useful when working with rollovers Start by placing the rollover element on a separate layer and then create a slice from that layer If you apply an effect to the layer such as a drop shadow or glow to create a rollover state the slice automatically adjusts to encompass the new pixels However do not use a layer based slice when you plan to move the layer over a large area of the image during an animation because the slice dimension may exceed a useful size See Working with rollovers ImageReady on page 292 To create a slice from a layer 1 Select a layer in the Layers palette 2 Choose Layer gt New Layer Based Slice Converting auto slices to user slices You can move duplicate combine divide resize delete arrange align and distribute user slices You can also apply different optimization settings to user slices In contrast all auto slices in an image are linked and share the same optimization settings This is because auto s
99. for image maps 290 for slices 279 Send to Back command 209 Send to Back option for image maps 290 for slices 279 separations See Color separations sepia tone images 190 server side image maps 292 shadows CMYK mode 111 shape layers See layer clipping paths shape tools 161 shapes distributing 177 drawing 161 162 drawing constrained 164 166 editing 166 175 options 164 repositioning 175 type as 257 sharpening images See online Help shortcuts 2 Show Actions command 394 Show All Layer Styles command 226 Show Animation command 302 Show Channels command 186 Show Character command 259 Show Color Table command 330 Show command 60 Show Extras command 174 Show Info command 63 Show Optimization Info command 317 copying between applications 151 copying within Photoshop 149 creating slice from 273 customizing 140 142 143 deleting 153 deselecting 140 dragging between documents 150 editing as masks 197 feathering 148 198 freehand 141 from temporary masks 198 intersecting 147 intersecting in channel 201 library 187 loading 201 loading from another image 202 moving 149 pasting 150 pasting into layer masks 239 previewing 145 refining 144 removing halos around 154 replacing in channel 201 saving 200 saving as channel 201 snapping behavior 75 softening 144 softening edges of 147 subtracting from 147 subtracting from channel 201 tools and commands for making 139 See also floating sel
100. group Using the Layers palette You can use the Layers palette to create hide display duplicate merge link lock and delete layers The Layers palette lists all layers and layer sets in an image starting with the topmost layer A thumbnail of the layer s contents appears next to the layer name The thumbnail is updated as you edit You can make changes only to the active layer and only one layer can be active at a time When you move or transform the active layer those changes also affect any layers linked to it Additionally you can fully or partially lock layers to protect their contents You can draw edit paste and reposition elements on one layer without disturbing the others Until you combine or merge the layers each layer remains independent of the others in the image This means you can experiment freely with graphics type opacities and blending modes Photoshop and ImageReady support normal layers and text layers Additionally Photoshop supports adjustment and fill layers You can apply sophisticated effects to layers using masks layer clipping paths and layer styles In ImageReady you can also use layers to create rollover states and animations When you transfer a layered image between Photoshop and ImageReady all layers layer masks layer clipping paths layer styles and adjustment layers are preserved Although adjustment layers and fill layers can be applied and edited only in Photoshop the
101. higher for CMYK Trapping values determine how far overlapping colors are spread outward not choked to compensate for misregistration on the press Adobe Photoshop uses standard rules for trapping e All colors spread under black Lighter colors spread under darker colors Yellow spreads under cyan magenta and black Pure cyan and pure magenta spread under each other equally To create trap 1 Save a version of the file in RGB mode in case you want to reconvert the image later Then choose Image gt Mode gt CMYK Color to convert the image to CMYK mode 2 Choose Image gt Trap 3 For Width enter the trapping value provided by your print shop Then select a unit of measurement and click OK Consult your print shop to determine how much misregistration to expect Printing duotones Photoshop lets you create monotones duotones tritones and quadtones Monotones are grayscale images printed with a single nonblack ink Duotones tritones and quadtones are grayscale images printed with two three and four inks In these types of images colored inks are used to reproduce tinted grays rather than different colors This section uses the term duotone to refer to duotones monotones tritones and quadtones Printing Photoshop Creating color traps After you have converted an image to CMYK you can adjust the color trap Trap is the overlap needed to ensure that a slight misalignment or movement of the
102. how closely the straight line segments approximate the curve The lower the flatness value the greater is the number of straight lines used to draw the curve and the more accurate the curve 5 Click OK If you plan to print the file using process colors convert the file to CMYK mode See Converting between color modes Photoshop on page 117 Placing Photoshop images in other applications Photoshop Photoshop provides a number of features to help you use images in other applications You can use image clipping paths to define transparent areas in images you place in page layout applications In addition Mac OS users can embed Photoshop images in many word processor files Q For assistance with image clipping paths choose Help gt Export Transparent Image This interactive wizard helps you prepare images with transparency for export to a page layout application Using image clipping paths When printing a Photoshop image or placing it in another application you may want only part of the image to appear For example you may want to print or show a foreground object and exclude its rectangular background An image clipping path lets you isolate the foreground object and make everything outside the object transparent when the image is printed or placed in another appli cation This lets you place an image into another file without obscuring the other files background Image imported into Illustrator without i
103. illustration In addition different devices produce slightly different gamuts within page 121 When you apply color and tonal adjustments or convert a document to a different color space you are changing the document s color numbers Color profiles An ICC workflow uses color profiles to determine how color numbers in a document translate to actual color appearances A profile systematically describes how color numbers map to a particular color space usually that of a device such as a scanner printer or monitor By associ ating or tagging a document with a color profile you provide a definition of actual color appear ances in the document changing the associated profile changes the color appearances For infor mation on displaying the current profile name in the status bar see Displaying file and image infor mation on page 78 Documents without associated profiles are known as untagged and contain only raw color numbers When working with untagged documents Photoshop uses the current working space profile to display and edit colors See About working spaces on page 125 Do you need color management Use the following guidelines to determine whether or not you need to use color management You might not need color management if your production process is tightly controlled for one medium only for example if you re using a closed system where all devices are calibrated to the same specifications You
104. in Quick Mask mode Photoshop on page 197 See Modifying spot channels on page 192 for information on changing Spot Color channel options Note You cannot modify options for the default color channels Loading a selection into an image You can reuse a previously saved selection by loading it into an image In Photoshop you can also load the selection into an image when you have finished modifying an alpha channel 4 In the Channel menu choose a destination channel for the selection By default the selection is saved in a new channel You can choose to save the selection to any existing channel in the selected image or to a layer mask if the image contains layers 5 If youre saving the selection to an existing channel select how to combine the selections Replace Channel to replace the current selection in the channel e Add to Channel to add the selection to the current channel contents e Subtract from Channel to delete the selection from the channel contents Intersect with Channel to keep the areas of the new selection that intersect with the channel contents 6 Click OK In Photoshop you can select the channel in the Channels palette to see the saved selection displayed in grayscale A selection saved in ImageReady will appear in a new or existing channel in the Photoshop Channels palette Modifying alpha channels Photoshop You can edit an alpha channel to add or remove color in it
105. in many ways For example you can redefine an image s perspective manipulate areas of an image as if the pixels in those areas had been melted scale rotate or flip a selection or image in two dimensions and transform an object in three dimensions You can also apply filters to create special effects Tools for retouching an image include the clone stamp pattern stamp smudge blur sharpen dodge burn and sponge tools CI For more information on transforming and retouching an image see Transforming and retouching in online Help For information on filters see Applying filters for special effects in online Help 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie e 2 Chapter 7 Using Channels and Masks The file size required for a channel depends on the pixel information in the channel See About image size and resolution on page 92 Certain file formats including TIFF and Photoshop formats compress channel information and can save space See Managing channels Photoshop on page 187 The uncompressed size of a file including alpha channels and layers appears as the rightmost value in the status bar at the bottom of the window when Document Sizes is chosen from the pop up menu No
106. information set to choose one of the optimized information display options L e x Optimize Settings Unnamed 8 Ers E z mon 07 _ dither 100 Selective palette 1 8 bs 8 colors Optimizing a GIF image with 8 colors shifted to Web safe values Fine tune optimization settings You can further customize the optimization by adjusting individual optimization settings You can even name and save your customized settings as a new optimization set Save the optimized image Click OK in the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or choose File gt Save Optimized As ImageReady For Format choose one of the following options e Images Only generates only the optimized image files If you have defined slices in your image an optimized file is generated for each slice HTML and Images generates an HTML file along with the optimized image files If you have defined slices in your image this HTML file contains code for the table that assembles the slices If you are saving the image from ImageReady the HTML file also contains code for any Web features such as image maps animations or rollovers that you have added to the image 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie
107. into Photoshop or ImageReady using the Place command the Paste command and the drag and drop feature See Placing files on page 104 Using drag and drop to copy between applications on page 151 and Using the Clipboard to copy between applications on page 152 To open an EPS file 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Select the file you want to open and click Open 3 Indicate the desired dimensions resolution and mode To maintain the same height to width ratio select Constrain Proportions 4 Select Anti aliased to minimize the jagged appearance of the artwork s edges as it is rasterized 5 Click OK 104 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide In the options bar enter values for W and H to specify the width and height of the artwork By default these options represent scale as a percentage however you can enter another unit of measurement in cm or px To constrain the proportions of the artwork click the Constrain Proportions icon the option is on when the icon has a white background 6 If desired rotate the placed artwork by doing one or more of the following Position the pointer outside the bounding box of the placed artwork the pointer turns into a curved arrow and drag In the options bar enter a value in degrees for the Rotation option 4 The artwork rotates around the center point of the placed artwork To adjust the center point drag it to a new location or click
108. it is relocated and drag the Scale slider or enter a value to specify the size of the pattern You can drag a pattern in Choke Shrinks the boundaries of the matte of an Inner Shadow or Inner Glow prior to blurring Color Specifies the color of a shadow glow or highlight You can click the color box and choose a color For more information see Using the Adobe Color Picker in online Help Contour With solid color glows allows you to create rings of transparency With gradient filled glows allows you to create variations in the repetition of the gradient color and opacity With bevel and emboss contour allows you to sculpt the ridges valleys and bumps that are shaded in the embossing process With shadows allows you to specify the fade See Creating and editing contours Photoshop on page 236 Depth Specifies the depth of a bevel and is a ratio of size It also specifies the depth of a pattern Gloss Contour creates a glossy metal like appearance and is applied after shading a bevel or emboss Gradient Specifies the gradient of a layer effect In Photoshop click the gradient to display the Gradient Editor or click the inverted arrow and choose a gradient from the pop up palette In Photoshop you can edit a gradient or create a new gradient using the Gradient Editor In ImageReady click the inverted arrow next to the gradient sample and select a gradient from the list or choose a gradient type
109. layer opacity using the Opacity text box or pop up slider ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Indent Sides By Photoshop Renders a polygon as a star Enter a percentage in the text box to specify the portion of the star s radius taken up by the points A 50 setting creates points that are half the total radius of the star a larger value creates sharper thinner points a smaller value creates fuller points Proportional Photoshop Renders a rectangle rounded rectangle or ellipse as a proportional shape based on the values you enter in the Width and Height text boxes Radius Photoshop For rounded rectangles specifies the corner radius For polygons specifies the distance from the center of a polygon to the outer points Sides Photoshop Specifies the number of sides in a polygon Smooth Corners or Smooth Indents Photoshop Renders a polygon with smooth corners or indents Snap to Pixels Photoshop Snaps edges of a rectangle or rounded rectangle to the pixel boundaries Square Photoshop Constrains a rectangle or rounded rectangle to a square Unconstrained Photoshop Lets you set the width and height of a rectangle rounded rectangle ellipse or custom shape by dragging Weight Determines the width of a line in pixels Arrowheads Start and End Renders a line with arrowheads Select Start End or both to specify on which end of the line arrows are rendered In ImageReady click Shape to define the s
110. layer set and to the left of the layers contained within the layer set If the layer set is collapsed drag the layer below the layer set and make sure the layer set folder and name is not highlighted before you release the mouse button To collapse or expand a layer set Do one of the following e Click the triangle t to expand the layer set and display the layers contained within the layer set e Click the inverted triangle to collapse the layer set and display only the layer set name To collapse or expand effects applied to layers contained within a layer set hold Alt Windows or Option Mac OS when clicking the triangle to expand or collapse the set Grouping layers into sets Layers can be grouped into layer sets Layer sets allow you to easily move the layers as a group apply attributes or a mask to the group or collapse the group to reduce clutter Layer sets also allow you to set up blending options for the entire set By default the blending mode of a layer set is Pass Through which means that the layer set has no blending properties of its own Layers inside a layer set in Pass Through mode appear the same as they would outside of the layer set When you choose a different blending mode for a layer set you effectively change the order in which the entire image is composited All of the layers in the layer set are composited first The composited layer set is then treated as a single image and blended wi
111. linked layers evenly starting from the leftmost pixel on each layer linked layers at evenly spaced intervals You can also align and distribute the contents of layers using the alignment and distribution options on the move tool s options bar See Aligning and distributing path components on page 177 Before you can align or distribute the contents of layers in a set you must link them To align linked layers 1 To align layers to a selection border make a selection 2 In the Layers palette specify the layers you want to align To align a single layer to a selection select the layer e To align multiple layers to a selection or to the active layer link together the layers to be aligned then select one of the linked layers For more information see Linking layers on page 209 3 Choose Layer gt Align Linked or Align To Selection if you made a selection and choose an option from the submenu Top Edges to align the topmost pixel on the linked layers to the topmost pixel on the active layer or the topmost edge of the selection border Vertical Centers to align the vertical centermost pixel on the linked layers to the vertical centermost pixel on the active layer or the vertical center of the selection border To sample from all visible layers 1 Click the magic wand tool smudge tool blur tool sharpen tool 4 paint bucket tool lt 4 or clone stamp tool amp
112. menu or click the Show Options button on the palette tab to view them To specify a browser message 1 Selecta slice If you are working in Photoshop double click the slice with the slice select tool to display the Slice Options dialog box 2 Inthe Slice Options dialog box Photoshop or the Slice palette ImageReady type the desired text in the Message text box Alt text box or both 3 Photoshop Click OK ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 285 User Guide All Image slices use the optimization settings of the entire image until you apply new settings If you select multiple slices with different optimization settings only the controls that are relevant to all of the selected slices are visible If settings for a control differ among slices the control is blank Any settings you choose are applied to all selected slices In ImageReady you can also copy optimization settings from one slice to another within a document or from a slice in one view to a slice in another view in 2 Up or 4 Up view To optimize a slice Select one or more Image slices and specify options in the Optimize panel palette See Optimizing images on page 320 To copy optimization settings between slices ImageReady 1 Select the slice that uses the optimization settings you want to copy 2 Drag the Droplet icon from the Optimize palette onto the slice to which you want to apply the optimization settings Linking slices ImageRead
113. menu or enter a size in pixels For JPEG Quality choose an option from the pop up menu enter a value between 0 and 12 or drag the slider A higher value results in better image quality but larger file size 7 To set options for the home page choose Gallery Thumbnails from the Options pop up menu Then do the following For Caption select Use Filename to display the filename under each thumbnail Select Use File Info Caption to display caption text from the File Info dialog box under each thumbnail and on each gallery page For more information see Adding title and copyright infor mation to HTML files on page 351 TI SEE Sa LO ei ses A 1 SETI RAI Ra Se mara pi F Eb Kale El J L sa FR E NE i cechi tie e 2 301 Chapter 11 Creating Animations Working with layers is an essential part of creating animations in ImageReady Placing each element of an animation on its own layer enables you to change the position and appearance of the element across a series of frames using the Layers palette commands and options sec sez sec O sec O sec Forever w ka O alal The bicycle image is on its own la
114. more information see Using plug in modules in online Help Opening files The Open dialog box provides controls for locating and previewing files To bypass the Open dialog box use the Open Recent command There may be instances when Photoshop cannot determine the correct format for a file For example transferring a file between Mac OS and Windows can cause the format to be misla beled In such cases you must specify the correct format in which to open the file To open a file 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Select the name of the file you want to open If the file does not appear select the option for showing all files from the Files of Type Windows or Show Mac OS pop up menu Photoshop To base the image size on the default dimensions and resolution or the last entered settings hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS when you choose File gt New 2 If desired type a name for the image and set the width and height Photoshop To match the width and height of the new image to that of any open image choose a filename from the bottom section of the Windows menu 3 Photoshop Set the resolution and mode See About image size and resolution on page 92 and About color modes and models Photoshop on page 109 4 Select an option for the contents of the background layer Photoshop or first layer ImageReady of the image White to fill the background or first layer with white th
115. new frame e blank to display the linked file in a new window leaving the original browser window open e self to display the linked file in the same frame as the original file parent to display the linked file in its own original parent frameset Use this option if the HTML document contains frames and the current frame is a child The linked file displays in the current parent frame e top to replace the entire browser window with the linked file removing all current frames Note For more information on frames see an HTML reference either printed or on the Web 4 Photoshop Click OK Adding HTML text to a slice Choosing the No Image type for a slice lets you enter text that will appear in the slice area of the resulting Web page This text is HTML text you can format it using standard HTML tags You can also select vertical and horizontal alignment options For more information on specific HTML tags see an HTML reference either printed or on the Web Photoshop and ImageReady do not display HTML text in the document window you must use a Web browser to preview the text See Previewing an image in a browser on page 84 Keep in mind that the appearance of text is affected by the browser settings and operating system it is viewed on Be sure to preview HTML text in different browsers with different browser setting and on different operating systems to see how text will appear on the Web Note Be
116. of a fill layer You can click the pop up palette and choose a pattern Click Scale and enter a value or drag the slider to scale the pattern You can edit the pattern settings then click the New preset button Fl to create a new preset pattern Click Snap to Origin to position the origin of the pattern with that of the document if Link With Layer is selected or to position the origin with the top left corner of the layer if it is deselected Select Link With Layer to For example you can darken the lower half of an image by creating a fill gradient layer from white to black and set its blending mode to Multiply By doing this on a fill layer you do not have to permanently modify the original image See Specifying fill layer options on page 244 To create an adjustment layer or fill layer 1 To confine the effects of the adjustment layer or fill layer to a selected area make a selection create a closed path and select it or select an existing closed path When you use a selection you create an adjustment layer or fill layer confined by a layer mask When you use a path you create an adjustment layer or fill layer confined by a layer clipping path 2 Click the New Adjustment Layer button at the bottom of the Layers palette 3 Choose the layer type you want to make 4 Choose layer properties as desired and then click OK See Specifying layer properties on page 219 5 If needed define the contents of t
117. of actions Photoshop on page 404 In ImageReady you cannot group actions into sets To display the Actions palette Choose Window gt Show Actions or click the Actions palette tab if the palette is visible but not active By default the Actions palette displays actions in list mode you can expand and collapse sets actions and commands In Photoshop you can also choose to display actions in button mode as buttons in the Actions palette that play an action with a single mouse click However you cannot view individual commands or sets in button mode To expand and collapse sets actions and commands Click the triangle t to the left of the set action or command in the Actions palette Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS to expand or collapse all actions in a set or all commands in an action 394 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Creating a new action When you create a new action the commands and tools you use are added to the action until you stop recording To create a new action 1 Open a file 2 In the Actions palette click the New Action button fl or choose New Action from the palette menu 3 Enter a name for the action 4 Photoshop Choose a set from the pop up menu 5 If desired set one or both of the following options Assign a keyboard shortcut to the action You can choose any combination of a Function key the Ctrl key Windows or Command key Mac OS and
118. of the base image and clipped using their vector outline Consequently the edges of vector graphics print at the printer s full resolution even though the content of each layer is limited to the resolution of your image file ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide images and have colors managed at the level of the printer The exact results of the color conversion can vary among printers Choose this option only if you are printing remotely if you are printing an RGB EPS file or if you do not have a profile of the printer s color space To proof a CMYK image on a PostScript Level 2 printer choose the Lab Color option Choose Printer Color Management to send the document s color data along with the source space profile directly to a non PostScript printer driver and have colors managed by that driver Choose this option only if you are printing to an RGB based printer or if you do not have a profile of the printer s color space 5 Under Print Space for Intent choose a rendering intent to use when converting colors to the destination profile space For more information see Specifying a rendering intent in online Help Printing with Adobe PressReady M If it is installed on your system Adobe PressReady simplifies the color management of documents printed on inkjet printers by automatically converting the colors of documents to the correct printer color space For more information see Printi
119. on page 368 Fit Image fits the current image to the width and height you specify without changing its aspect ratio Note This will resample the image changing the amount of data in the image Multi Page PDF to PSD converts each page of a PDF document you select to a separate Photoshop file See Opening and importing PDF files on page 102 Picture Package places multiple copies of a source image on a single page similar to the photo packages traditionally sold by portrait studios See Creating picture packages on page 368 Automating Tasks Using droplets to automate optimization settings ImageReady You can save Optimize palette settings for use on individual images or batches of images by creating a droplet for the settings The droplet lets you apply the compression settings to an image or batch of images that you drag onto the droplet icon To create a droplet for automating Optimize palette settings 1 With an image displayed in the image window choose a compression format and desired compression options in the Optimize palette See Optimizing images on page 320 2 Create a droplet e Drag the droplet icon 1 from the Optimize palette onto the desktop The droplet is named with a brief description of the compression settings including file format and color palette or quality setting information You can rename the droplet as you do other desktop icons e Click the d
120. optimized image that previously included that color are rerendered using the closest color remaining in the palette When you delete a color the color table automati cally changes to a Custom palette This is because the Adaptive Perceptual and Selective palettes automatically add the deleted color back into the palette when you reoptimize the image the Custom palette does not change when you reoptimize the image To delete selected colors 1 Select one or more colors in the color table See Selecting colors on page 333 2 Delete the color e Click on the Trash button Choose Delete Color from the Color Table palette menu Loading and saving color tables You can save color tables from optimized images to use with other images and to load color tables created in other applications Once you load a new color table into an image the colors in the optimized image are changed to reflect the colors in the new color table ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide If you want to access the color table when selecting Optimization options for a GIF or PNG image save the master palette in the Optimized Colors folder inside the Presets folder in the Adobe Photoshop folder 9 Click Save 10 To apply the master palette to the image or images for which it was created open the image or images and select the master palette If the master palette appears in the Color Reduction Algorithm menu in the Optimize pa
121. or image states for use in a later editing session create a new file for each state you save and save each in a separate file When you reopen your original file plan to open the other saved files also You can drag each file s initial snapshot to the original image and thus access the snapshots again from the original image s History palette To replace an existing document with a selected state Photoshop Drag the state onto the document could scroll the current states off the palette so that you could not return to any of them Using the Undo command lets you undo only one step and state By making a snapshot first you can select and redisplay the pre action image To create a snapshot 1 Select a state 2 To automatically create a snapshot click the New Snapshot button kl on the History palette or if Automatically Create New Snapshot When Saving is selected in the history options choose New Snapshot from the History palette menu 3 To set options when creating a snapshot choose New Snapshot from the History palette menu or Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the New Snapshot button 4 Enter the name of the Snapshot in the Name text box 5 For From select the snapshot contents e Full Document to make a snapshot of all layers in the image at that state Merged Layers to make a snapshot that merges all layers in the image at that state Current Layer to make a snapshot of only the c
122. or import color data from a document that is tagged with a profile different from the current working space This may be the case when you open a document that has been created using different color management settings or adocument that has been scanned and tagged with a scanner profile In either case Photoshop must decide how to handle the color data in the document A color management policy looks for the color profile associated with an opened document or imported color data and compares the profile or lack of profile with the current working space to make default color management decisions If the profile is missing or does not match the working space Photoshop displays a message that indicates the default action for the policy In many cases you will also be provided with the opportunity to choose ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Specifying working spaces In a color managed workflow each color mode must have a working space profile associated with it See About working spaces on page 125 Photoshop ships with a standard set of color profiles that have been recommended and tested by Adobe Systems for most color management workflows By default only these profiles appear in the working space menus To display additional color profiles that you have customized or installed on your system select Advanced Mode in the Color Settings dialog box To appear in a working space menu a color profile must be bidirectiona
123. or your prepress service provider may prefer to tailor CMYK images and specify color values for a known specific set of printing conditions CHAPTER 4 Producing Consistent Color Photoshop created to the color space in which the same color will be output and makes the necessary adjust ments to represent the color as consistently as possible among different devices Note Don t confuse color management with color adjustment or color correction A CMS won t correct an image that was saved with tonal or color balance problems It provides an environment where you can evaluate images reliably in the context of your final output Photoshop follows a color management workflow based on conventions developed by the Interna tional Color Consortium ICC The following elements and concepts are integral to such a color managed workflow Color management engine Different companies have developed various ways to manage color To provide you with a choice a color management system lets you choose a color management engine that represents the approach you want to use Sometimes called the color management module CMM the color management engine is the part of the CMS that does the work of reading and translating colors between different color spaces Color numbers Each pixel in an image document has a set of color numbers that describe the pixel s location in a particular color mode for example red green and blue values for t
124. or zoom tool the Info palette displays the width W and height H of the marquee as you drag The palette also shows the angle of rotation of the crop marquee When you use the line tool pen tool or gradient tool or when you move a selection the Info palette displays the x and y coordinates of your starting position the change in X DX the change in Y DY the angle A and the distance D as you drag When you use a two dimensional transfor mation command the Info palette displays the percentage change in width W and height H the angle of rotation A and the angle of horizontal skew H or vertical skew V When you use any color adjustment dialog box for example Curves the Info palette displays the before and after color values of the pixels beneath the pointer and beneath color samplers For more information see Seeing the color values of pixels Photoshop in online Help ImageReady The Info palette displays the following information e The RGB numeric values for the color beneath the pointer The Opacity value for the pixels beneath the pointer 4 To save the current list as a library for later use choose the Save command Then enter a name for the library file and click Save You can specify that a file extension 15 always appended to a library file by choosing Edit gt Preferences gt Saving Files and setting Append File Extension to Always Y
125. path In Photoshop you can draw multiple shapes in a layer and specify how overlapping shapes interact In ImageReady you can only draw one shape in a layer In Photoshop you can edit shapes after you draw them In ImageReady you can move and transform shapes but you can t edit them Creating shape layers You create a shape layer using a shape tool or a pen tool Technically a shape layer is a fill layer with a layer clipping path the fill layer defines the color of the shape while the layer clipping path defines the geometric outline of the shape You can change the color and other attributes of a shape by editing its fill layer and applying layer styles to it You can change the outline of a shape by editing its layer clipping path See Using adjustment layers or fill layers Photoshop on page 242 and Editing a layer clipping path Photoshop on page 240 162 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 163 User Guide You can designate a path as a clipping path for an entire image which is useful when exporting images to page layout or vector editing applications Q Create a new path in the Paths palette before you begin drawing to automatically save the work path as a named path To create a new work path 1 Select the rectangle tool O rounded rectangle tool O ellipse tool polygon tool gt line tool custom shape tool pen tool or freeform pen tool 2 In the options ba
126. plates while printing does not affect the final appearance of the print job If any distinctly different colors in your image touch you may need to overprint them slightly to prevent tiny gaps from appearing when the image is printed This technique is known as trapping In most cases your print shop will determine if trapping is needed and tell you what values to enter in the Trap dialog box A B Misregistration with no trap and misregistration with trap Keep in mind that trapping is intended to correct the misalignment of solid tints in CMYK images In general don t create traps for continuous tone images such as photographs Excessive trapping may generate a keyline effect or even cross hair lines in the C M and Y plates These problems may not be visible in the composite channel and might show up only when you output to film ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide 3 Select Preview to view the effects of the duotone settings on the image 4 Specify the type of image the ink colors the duotone curves and the overprint colors for the duotone image 5 Click OK To apply a duotone effect to only part of an e image convert the duotone image to Multi channel mode this converts the duotone curves to spot channels You can then erase part of the spot channel for areas that you want printed as standard grayscale See Adding spot colors Photoshop on page 191 Specifying the duotone type and ink colors
127. points for additional segments The last anchor point is always a solid square indicating it is selected Previously defined anchor points become hollow squares as you add further anchor points If the Auto Add Delete option is selected you can click an existing point to delete it Drawing curves with the pen tool You create curves by dragging the pen tool in the direction you want the curve to go Keep these guidelines in mind when drawing curves Always drag the first direction point in the direction of the bump of the curve and drag the second direction point in the opposite direction to create a single curve Dragging both direction points in the same direction creates an S curve N Drag in the opposite direction to create a smooth curve Drag in the same direction to create an S curve e When drawing a series of smooth curves draw one curve at a time placing anchor points at the beginning and end of each curve not at the tip of the curve Use as few anchor points as possible placing them as far apart as possible ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Drawing with the freeform pen tool The freeform pen tool lets you draw as if you were drawing with a pencil on paper Anchor points are added automatically as you draw You do not determine where the points are positioned but you can adjust them once the path is complete The magnetic pen is an option of the freeform tool that lets you draw a
128. preview appears only when you enable the Proof Colors command 3 To use an existing proof setup as a starting point choose it from the Setup menu If the desired setup does not appear in the menu click Load to locate and load the setup 4 For Profile choose the color profile for the device for which you want to create the proof 5 If the proof profile you chose uses the same color mode as the document do one of the following e Select Preserve Color Numbers to simulate how the document will appear without converting colors from the document space to the proof profile space This simulates the color shifts that may occur when the document s color values are interpreted using the proof profile instead of the document profile Deselect Preserve Color Numbers to simulate how the document will appear if colors are converted from the document space to their nearest equivalents in the proof profile space in an effort to preserve the colors visual appearances Then specify a rendering intent for the conversion For more information see Specifying a rendering intent in online Help 6 If needed select any of the following e Simulate Paper White to preview in the monitor space the specific shade of white exhibited by the print medium described by the proof profile Selecting this option automatically selects the Simulate Ink Black option CHAPTER 4 Producing Consistent Color Photoshop Macintos
129. resulting overprint is a green color The order in which inks are printed as well as variations in the inks and paper can significantly affect the final results To help you predict how colors will look when printed use a printed sample of the overprinted inks to adjust your screen display Just remember that this adjustment affects only how the overprint colors appear on screen not when printed Before adjusting these colors make sure that you have calibrated your monitor following the instructions in Creating an ICC monitor profile on page 136 To adjust the display of overprint colors 1 Choose Image gt Mode gt Duotone 2 Click Overprint Colors The Overprint Colors dialog box displays the combinations that will result when the inks are printed 3 Click the color swatch of the ink combination you want to adjust 4 Select the color you want in the color picker and click OK 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the overprint inks appear as you want them Then click OK Use Accurate Screens in the Auto Screens dialog box if you re printing to a PostScript Level 2 or higher printer or an imagesetter equipped with an Emerald controller Note The recommended screen angles and frequencies for quadtones are based on the assumption that channel 1 15 the darkest ink and channel 4 is the lightest ink You do not have to convert duotone images to CMYK to print separations simply choose Separations from the Profile po
130. same as the current image are available To duplicate the channel in the same file select the channel s current file Selecting and editing channels You can select one or more channels in the Channels palette The names of all selected or active channels are highlighted Any editing changes you make apply to the active channels To select a channel Click the channel name Shift click to select or deselect multiple channels To edit a channel Use a painting or editing tool to paint in the image Paint with white to add to the channel paint with black to remove from the channel paint with a lower opacity or a color to add to the channel with lower opacities Managing channels Photoshop You can rearrange channels duplicate a channel within or between images split a channel into separate images merge channels from separate images into one new image and delete alpha and spot channels when you re finished with them Changing the order of channels The default color channels normally appear at the top of the Channels palette followed by the spot color channels and then the alpha channels You cannot move the default channels but you can rearrange spot and alpha channels to suit the way you work Spot colors are overprinted in the order they appear in the Channels palette To split channels into separate images Choose Split Channels from the Channels palette menu Merging channels Multiple graysca
131. set to none Images with continuous tone color especially color gradients may require dithering to prevent color banding To control application dither 1 Choose an option from the Dither Algorithm pop up menu No Dither applies no application dither to the image Pattern applies a halftone like square pattern to simulate any colors not in the color table Diffusion applies a random pattern that is usually less noticeable than Pattern dither The dither effects are diffused across adjacent pixels Diffusion dither may cause detectable seams to appear across slice boundaries Linking slices diffuses the dither pattern across all linked slices and eliminates the seams Noise applies a random pattern similar to the Diffusion dither method but without diffusing the pattern across adjacent pixels No seams appear with the Noise dither method 2 If you chose Diffusion as the dithering algorithm drag the Dither slider or enter a value to select a dithering percentage CHAPTER 12 Optimizing Images for the Web When optimizing images keep in mind that two kinds of dithering can occur Application dither occurs in GIF and PNG 8 images when Photoshop or ImageReady attempts to simulate colors that appear in the original image but not in the color palette you specify for the optimized image You can control the application dither that Photoshop or ImageReady applies to an optimized image You can choose a dith
132. smaller gamut than magazine quality paper and other natural variations such as manufacturing differences in monitors or monitor age About color management Because color matching problems result from various devices and software using different color spaces one solution is to have a system that inter prets and translates color accurately between devices A color management system CMS compares the color space in which a color was Photoshop hen your document must meet W color standards set by clients and designers viewing and editing color consistently becomes critical all the way from scanning source images to creating final output A color management system reconciles color differences among devices so that you can be reasonably certain of the colors your system ultimately produces Why colors sometimes don t match No device in a publishing system is capable of reproducing the full range of colors viewable to the human eye Each device operates within a specific color space which can produce a certain range or gamut of colors The RGB red green blue and CMYK cyan magenta yellow black color modes represent two main categories of color spaces The gamuts of the RGB and CMYK spaces are very different while the RGB gamut is generally larger that is capable of representing more colors than CMYK some CMYK colors still fall outside the RGB gamut See Color gamuts Photoshop on page 114 for an
133. styles Customizing layer styles Creating and editing contours Photoshop Hiding portions of a layer Using adjustment layers or filllayers Photoshop Managing layered images Chapter 9 ADOULTY DG nie aio ela Working with type layers Formatting characters Formatting paragraphs Controlling hyphenation and justification Working with composition Setting options for Chinese Japanese and Korean type Photoshop Chapter 10 About designing Web pages with Photoshop and ImageReady alal Creating and viewing slices Selecting and modifying slices Specifying slice options Creating and viewing image maps ImageReady Selecting and modifying image maps ImageReady Specifying image map options ImageReady 5 Selecting an image map type ImageReady Working with rollovers ImageReady Creating Web photo galleries Photoshop Using Type Designing Web Pages Chapter 1 About animation e E OSES Creating animations Working with layers in animations Viewing animations 0 eee eee eee eee eee Optimizing animations Viewing animated images in Photoshop
134. the Actions palette menu CHAPTER 15 Automating Tasks 7 Choose the commands and perform the opera tions you want to record 8 To stop recording click the Stop button choose Stop Recording from the Actions palette menu or press the Escape key To resume recording in the same action choose Start Recording from the Actions palette menu Recording paths Photoshop The Insert Path command lets you include a complex path a path created with a pen tool or edited with a path selection tool as part of an action When the action is played back the work path is set to the recorded path You can insert a path when recording an action or after it has been recorded Note Playing actions that insert complex paths may require significant amounts of memory If you encounter problems increase the amount of memory available to Photoshop To record a path 1 Do one of the following Start recording an action e Select an action s name to record a path at the end of the action e Select a command to record a path after the command 2 Select an existing path from the Paths palette 3 Choose Insert Path from the Actions palette menu 396 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Excluding commands You can exclude commands that you don t want to play as part of a recorded action In Photoshop you must be in list mode not button mode to exclude commands To exclude or include a command 1 To expand the lis
135. the following e Click the Tween button in the Animation palette e Select Tween from the Animation palette menu 4 Specify the layer or layers to be varied in the added frames All Layers to vary all layers in the selected frame or frames Selected Layer to vary only the currently selected layer in the selected frame or frames 5 Specify layer attributes to be varied Position to vary the position of the layer s content in the new frames evenly between the beginning and ending frames Opacity to vary the opacity of the new frames evenly between the beginning and ending frames Effects to vary the parameter settings of layer effects evenly between the beginning and ending frames 6 If you selected a single frame in step 2 choose where to add frames from the Tween With menu e Next Frame to add frames between the selected frame and the following frame First Frame to add frames between the last frame and first frame This option is only available if you select the last frame in the Animation palette Previous Frame to add frames between the selected frame and the preceding frame e Last Frame to add frames between the first frame and last frame This option is only available if you select the first frame in the Animation palette The term tweening is derived from in betweening the traditional animation term used to describe this process Tweening significantly reduces the time
136. the hidden tools list appears 2 Select the small downward pointing triangle at the bottom of the hidden tools list A hidden tools list appears and remains open until you click the close box You can view more than one hidden tools list simultaneously 3 Drag the hidden tools list by its title bar to move it anywhere on your desktop To display or hide tool tips 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General then select or deselect Show Tool Tips Show Tool Tips is the default To enable or disable cycling through a set of hidden tools Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General then select or deselect Use Shift Key for Tool Switch Using the tool pointers When you select most tools the mouse pointer matches the tool s icon The marquee pointer appears by default as cross hairs the text tool pointer as an I beam and painting tools default to the Brush Size icon ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide To display the tool options bar Do one of the following Choose Window gt Show Options e Single click a tool in the toolbox Note You can double click the title bar at the left edge to collapse the options bar showing only the tool icon Feather Anti aliased Lasso options bar To return a tool or all tools to the default settings Do one of the following e Click the tool icon on the options bar then choose Reset Tool or Reset All Tools from the context menu Choose Edit gt Preference
137. the most common electronic medium for continuous tone images such as photographs or digital paintings because they can represent subtle gradations of shades and color Bitmap images are resolution dependent that is they contain a fixed number of pixels As a result they can lose detail and appear jagged if they are scaled on screen or if they are printed at a lower resolution than they were created for Bitmap images are good for reproducing subtle gradations of color as in photographs They can have jagged edges when printed at too large a size or displayed at too high a magnification Vector graphics Vector graphics are made up of lines and curves defined by mathematical objects called vectors Vectors describe an image according to its geometric characteristics For example a bicycle tire in a vector graphic is made up of a mathematical definition of a circle drawn with a certain radius set at a specific location and filled with a specific color You can move resize or change the color of the tire without losing the quality of the graphic ou can get digital images from a variety of Y sources you can create new images import them from another graphics appli cation or capture them using a digital camera Often you will begin by scanning a photograph a slide or an image To create effective artwork you must understand some basic concepts about how to work with digital images how to produce high quality scans how
138. the proof profile space and is useful for creating an output file for print For information on setting up a proof profile see Soft proofing colors on page 131 3 Name the document choose other save options and click Save Obtaining installing and updating color profiles Precise consistent color management requires accurate ICC compliant profiles of all of your color devices For example without an accurate scanner profile a perfectly scanned image may appear incorrect in another program simply due to any difference in color space between the scanner and the program displaying the image This misleading representation may cause you to make unnecessary time wasting and potentially Producing Consistent Color Photoshop 3 Under Conversion Options specify a color management engine a rendering intent and black point and dither options Ci For more information see Customizing advanced color management settings in online Help 4 To flatten all layers of the document onto a single layer upon conversion select Flatten Image 5 To preview the effects of the conversion in the document select Preview This preview becomes more accurate if you select Flatten Image 6 Click OK Embedding profiles in saved documents By default a tagged document will have its profile information embedded upon saving in a file format that supports embedded ICC profiles Untagged documents are saved by default without emb
139. the selected area To reselect the most recent selection Choose Select gt Reselect Using the marquee tools The marquee tools let you select rectangles ellipses rounded rectangles ImageReady and 1 pixel rows and columns By default a selection border is dragged from its corner To use the marquee tools 1 Select a marquee tool e Rectangle marquee _ to make a rectangular selection e Rounded rectangle marquee 4 3 to select a rounded rectangle such as a Web page button ImageReady e Elliptical marquee lt _2 to make an elliptical selection e Single row or single column marquee to define the border as a 1 pixel wide row or column 2 Inthe options bar specify whether to add a new selection add to a selection subtract from a selection or select an area intersected by other selections CHAPTER 5 Selecting 140 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 141 User Guide To use the lasso tool 1 Select the lasso tool 7 and select options See Setting options for the lasso polygonal lasso and magnetic lasso tools on page 142 2 Drag to draw a freehand selection border 3 To draw a straight edged selection border hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click where segments should begin and end You can switch between drawing freehand and straight edged segments 4 To erase recently drawn segments hold down the Delete key until you ve erased the fastening p
140. to an image increases its file size To conserve disk space you can delete layers or layer sets merge two or more layers or flatten all layers in an image into one layer Tracking file size File size is proportional to the pixel dimensions of an image and the number of layers contained in the image Images with more pixels may produce more detail at a given printed size but they require more disk space to store and may be slower to edit and print You should keep track of your file sizes to make sure the files are not becoming too large for your purposes If the file is becoming too large reduce the number of layers in the image or change the image size To track file size Check the values in the Document Sizes box at the lower left corner of the screen Windows or the image window Mac OS See Displaying file and image information on page 78 For more information on displaying file size see Changing image size and resolution on page 95 CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 246 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide To merge a clipping group 1 Make visible all the layers in the group that you want to merge any hidden layers in the group are discarded when you merge 2 Select the base layer in the group 3 Choose Layer gt Merge Group or choose Merge Group from the Layers palette menu To merge all the visible layers in an image 1 Hide any layers or layer sets you do not want to merge Make sure that no l
141. to apply the filtering algorithm Sub Up Average or Paeth best suited for the image Select Adaptive if you are unsure of which filter to use 5 Click OK Saving files in TIFF format TIFF is a flexible bitmap image format supported by virtually all paint image editing and page layout applications To save a file in TIFF format Photoshop 1 Choose File gt Save As and choose TIFF from the format list 2 Specify a filename and location select saving options as described in Setting file saving options Photoshop on page 358 and click Save 3 Select a compression method See About file compression on page 365 Keep in mind that some applications cannot open TIFF files that are saved with JPEG or ZIP compression If you plan to open the TIFF file in an application other than Photoshop LZW compression is recommended 4 Select a byte order to determine file compati bility with IBM PC or Macintosh computers ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a lossy compression technique supported by JPEG TIFF PDE and PostScript language file formats JPEG compression provides the best results with continuous tone images such as photographs When you choose JPEG compression you specify the image quality by choosing an option from the Quality menu dragging the Quality pop up slider or entering a value between 1 and 12 in the Quality text box For the best prin
142. to decrease Q While creating a selection you can press to increase the magnetic lasso edge width by 1 pixel press to decrease the width by 1 pixel 4 Position the pointer over the image or preview area and click to sample the colors you want included Select 4 Sampled Colors Fuzziness 15 7 I Invert Selection Image Selection Preview None Sampling color 5 Adjust the range of colors using the Fuzziness slider or by entering a value To decrease the range of colors selected decrease the value The Fuzziness option partially selects pixels by controlling the degree to which related colors are included in the selection whereas the Tolerance option for the magic wand and paint bucket options increases the range of colors that are fully selected Increasing Fuzziness expands selection Using the Color Range command Photoshop The Color Range command selects a specified color or color subset within an existing selection or an entire image If you want to replace a selection be sure to deselect everything before applying this command To refine an existing selection use the Color Range command repeatedly to select a subset of colors For example to select the green areas in a cyan selection select Cyans in the Color Range dialog box and click OK Then reopen the Color Range dialog box and select Greens The results are subtle because the technique selects parts of co
143. to the selected frame To apply layer changes to all frames in an animation use the Match Layer Across Frames command Q You can also use the Paste Frames command to apply layer changes to other frames See Copying and pasting frames on page 304 To match layer changes across frames 1 In the Layers palette select the layer containing the element you want to match across frames 2 In the Animation palette choose Match Layer Across Frames from the palette menu The layer attributes for the selected frame are applied to all frames in the animation Keep in mind that some changes you make to layers affect only the active frame while others affect all frames Frame specific changes Affect only the selected frames in the Animation palette Changes you make to a layer using Layers palette commands and options including a layer s opacity blending mode visibility position and layer effects are frame specific Global changes Affect all frames in an animation Changes you make to the layer s pixel values using painting and editing tools color and tone adjustment commands filters type and other image editing commands affect every frame in which the layer is included When you work with layer masks and layer clipping paths changes in position state enabled or disabled and link state are frame specific whereas changes in pixel or vector content affect all frames Adding layers to frames When you
144. transparency in GIF and PNG images GIF format and PNG 8 format support one level of transparency pixels can be fully transparent or fully opaque but not partially transparent PNG 24 format on the other hand supports multilevel transparency letting you preserve up to 256 levels of transparency in an image To preserve background transparency in a GIF or PNG image 1 Open or create an image that contains transparency 2 In the Optimize panel palette select GIF PNG 8 or PNG 24 from the File Format menu 3 Select Transparency 4 For GIF and PNG 8 format decide how you want to treat partially transparent pixels in the original image You can blend partially transparent pixels with a matte color or you can create hard edged transparency See Creating background matting in GIF and PNG images on page 339 and Creating hard edged transparency in GIF and PNG 8 images on page 340 Creating background matting in GIF and PNG images When you know the Web page background color on which an image will be displayed you can use the matting feature to fill or blend transparent pixels with a matte color that matches the Web page background The Web page background must be a solid color not a pattern To copy a color as a hexadecimal value by dragging ImageReady Drag the Foreground Color from the toolbox or a selected color from the Color Table palette or the Swatches palette into the HTML file in the desti nat
145. type layer in the Layers palette 2 Do one of the following Choose Layer gt Type gt Horizontal or Layer gt Type gt Vertical e ImageReady Select Horizontal T or Vertical 1T in the options bar Specifying anti aliasing Anti aliasing lets you produce smooth edged type by partially filling the edge pixels As a result the edges of the type blend into the background Cactus 0 Magii oY Cactus Magno iophyia Anti aliasing None and Strong When creating type for online use consider that anti aliasing greatly increases the number of colors in the original image This limits your ability to reduce the number of colors in the image and thus reduce the optimized file size and may cause stray colors to appear along the edges of the type 3 Position the insertion point in the text and do one of the following Click to set the insertion point e Select one or more characters you want to edit 4 Enter text as desired 5 Photoshop Commit the changes to the type layer See About using the type tool Photoshop on page 252 Rasterizing type layers Some commands and tools such as filter effects and painting tools are not available for type layers You must rasterize the type prior to applying the command or using the tool Rasterizing converts the type layer to a normal layer and makes its contents uneditable as text A warning message appears if you choose a command or tool that
146. using online Help click the Help on Help button next to the Content tab To properly view online Help topics you need Netscape Communicator 4 0 or later or Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or later You must also have JavaScript active To start online Help Do one of the following Choose Help gt Help Contents Photoshop or Help gt Help Topics ImageReady Press F1 Windows Adobe Photoshop 6 0 User Guide Contains essential information on using Photoshop and ImageReady commands and features Complete information on all topics is available in online Help The printed guide and help also indicate when a topic procedure or command pertains specifically to Photoshop or ImageReady for example Choose View gt Actual Pixels Photoshop or View gt Actual Size ImageReady ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide When you set up Adobe Online to connect to your Web browser Adobe can either notify you whenever new information is available through the Downloadables feature or automatically download that information to your hard disk If you choose not to use the automatic download feature you can still view and download new files whenever they are available using the Download ables command in the Help menu To use Adobe Online 1 In Photoshop or ImageReady choose Help gt Adobe Online or click the icon at the top of the toolbox Note You must have an Internet connection and an Internet b
147. white pixels of the mask gradient The selection boundary indicates the pixels transition from being less than 50 selected to more than 50 selected 5 Apply the desired changes to the image Changes affect only the selected area 6 Choose Select gt Deselect to deselect the selection or save the selection To change the Quick Mask options 1 Double click the Quick Mask mode button E in the toolbox 2 Choose from the following display options Masked Areas the default to have masked protected or unselected areas appear black opaque and to have selected areas appear white transparent Painting with black increases the masked protected area painting with white increases the selected area With this option the Quick Mask button in the toolbox appears as a white circle on a gray background EA Using Channels and Masks Start with a selected area and use Quick Mask mode to add to or subtract from it to make the mask Alternatively create the mask entirely in Quick Mask mode Color differentiates the protected and unprotected areas When you leave Quick Mask mode the unprotected areas become a selection A temporary Quick Mask channel appears in the Channels palette while you work in Quick Mask mode However you do all mask editing in the image window To create a temporary mask 1 Using any selection tool select the part of the image you want to change 2 Click the Quick Mask mode button
148. without actually affecting the pixels on that layer You can then apply the mask and make the changes permanent or remove the mask without applying the changes You can save all layer masks with a layered document Another way to control how areas of a layer are revealed or hidden is to use a layer clipping path which creates a sharp edged mask You can use both a layer mask and a layer clipping path on a single layer or layer set A layer mask is resolution dependent and is created with the painting or selection tools a layer clipping path is resolution independent and is created with the pen or shape tools You can also use the Layer menu to hide or show a selection After creating a layer mask you can use the Y painting tools to paint black over the area of the mask you want to hide or paint white over the area you want to reveal See Editing a layer mask on page 239 For information on viewing the contents of the layer mask channel see Viewing layer masks on page 240 To add a layer clipping path that shows or hides the entire layer Photoshop 1 In the Layers palette select the layer to which you want to add a layer clipping path 2 Do one of the following To create a layer clipping path that reveals the entire layer choose Layer gt Add Layer Clipping Path gt Reveal All e To create a layer clipping path that hides the entire layer choose Layer gt Add Layer Clipping Path gt Hide All
149. you are finished you can perform final touch ups as described in step 9 To perform another extraction after adjusting the highlight and fill repeat steps 5 6 and 7 To perform another extraction with new extraction settings change the Smooth Force Foreground or Color settings and repeat step 7 Note To specify the amount of smoothing of the extracted object drag the Smooth slider or enter a value It is usually best to begin with a zero or small value to avoid unwanted blurring of details If there are sharp artifacts in the extraction result you can increase the Smooth value to help remove them in the next extraction 9 Touch up the extraction results as needed To erase background traces in the extracted area use the cleanup tool E The tool subtracts opacity and has a cumulative effect You can also use the cleanup tool to fill gaps in the extracted object Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS while dragging to add back opacity To edit the edge of the extracted object use the edge touchup tool E The tool sharpens edges and has a cumulative effect If there is no clear edge the edge touchup tool adds opacity to the object or subtracts opacity from the background 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Suri 77 gt EHRE i cechi tie
150. your software package The user guide assumes you have a working knowledge of your computer and its operating conventions including how to use a mouse and standard menus and commands It also assumes you know how to open save and close files For help with any of these techniques please see your Microsoft Windows or Mac OS documentation Adobe Photoshop Quick Reference Card Contains basic information about the Adobe Photoshop and ImageReady tools and palettes and shortcuts for using them Shortcuts are also included in the online Help Using tool tips The tool tips feature lets you display the name of tools or buttons and controls in palettes To identify a tool or control Position the pointer over a tool or control and pause A tool tip appears showing the name and keyboard shortcut if any for the item If tool tips don t appear the preference for displaying them may be turned off To display tool tips 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General 2 Select Show Tool Tips and click OK Note Tool tips are not available in most dialog boxes Getting Started Using online Help The Adobe Photoshop and ImageReady applica tions include complete documentation in an HTML based help system The help system includes all of the information in the Adobe Photoshop 6 0 User Guide plus information on additional features keyboard shortcuts and full color illustrations CI For more detailed information about
151. zero origin 74 Run Length Encoding RLE compression 365 5 Sampled Colors option 4 sampling from layers 216 See also online Help saturation about 110 adjusting See online Help Save a Copy command 248 Save Actions command 403 Save As command 315 357 361 362 363 364 Save command 357 Save for Web dialog box choosing a view 316 Color Table panel 330 Image Size panel 326 Settings panel 320 Save Image Pyramid option 364 Save Master Palette command 337 Save Optimized As command 347 399 Save Optimized command 347 399 Save Palette Locations option 61 Save Path command 179 Save Selection command 153 200 file size and 94 monitor 93 printer 94 screen frequency and 94 Restore to Background option 308 restoring images 68 retouching images See online Help Reverse Frames command 303 Revert command 68 RGB color displays cross platform differences 115 Photoshop and ImageReady differences 115 RGB color model 110 RGB color spaces about 111 RGB color values in Info palette 63 RGB images about 116 channel display 186 converting to indexed color images 118 RGB mode 110 116 Rollover palette 271 293 Rollover Preview button 295 rollovers about 292 animated GIF in 295 copying and pasting states 296 creating new states 294 deleting states 297 layers in 306 matching layers across states 296 previewing 295 rollover styles 296 selecting states 295 INDEX 430 431 Send Backward option
152. 1 Open the source image or images The pixel dimensions of the images must match for image names to appear in the Calculations dialog box 2 Choose Image gt Calculations 3 Select Preview to preview the results in the image window 4 Choose the first source image layer and channel To use all the layers in the source image choose Merged for Layer Using the Apply Image command The Apply Image command lets you blend one image s layer and channel the source with a layer and channel of the active image the destination To use the Apply Image command 1 Open the source and destination images and select the desired layer and channel in the desti nation image The pixel dimensions of the images must match for image names to appear in the Apply Image dialog box Note If the color modes of the two images differ for example one image is RGB and the other is CMYK you can copy a single channel to another channel between images but you cannot copy a composite channel to a composite channel in another image 2 Choose Image gt Apply Image 3 Choose the source image layer and channel you want to combine with the destination To use all layers in the source image select Merged for Layer 4 Select Preview to preview the results in the image window 5 Select Invert to use the negative of the channel contents in the calculation 6 For Blending choose a blending option For information on the Add and Subtract
153. 2 blend tool See online Help blending modes for channel calculations 195 for layer sets 213 layer 216 layer style 232 See also online Help Blur option for JPEG 322 boolean selections 140 142 143 171 borders 378 bounding boxes image map 288 type 253 brightness defined 110 Bring Forward command 209 Bring Forward option for image maps 290 for slices 279 Bring to Front command 209 Bring to Front option for image maps 290 for slices 279 Browser Dither command 343 browser dither See dithering browsers adding to Preview In menu 84 previewing in 84 Multichannel mode 113 number of channels 116 RGB mode 110 setting in new images 101 color profiles See profiles Color Range command 144 color reduction algorithm 330 color separations about 375 adjusting traps 384 definition 111 Color Settings Advanced Mode settings See online Help customizing 126 130 descriptions 124 loading 130 overview 124 predefined settings 124 preference file 127 saving 130 synchronizing 131 color spaces about 121 131 alternate 190 converting when printing images 382 See also profiles working spaces Color Table palette 330 color tables about 113 330 adding colors in 332 deleting colors in 336 editing colors in 334 generating 330 including black and white 333 loading 336 color gamut See gamut color information storing 185 color management calibrating monitors 136 color shifts 121 color values
154. 2 layer styles 220 linking and unlinking 209 loading boundaries as selection 242 locking 217 masking 237 matching across rollover states 296 maximum supported 210 hiding and showing 207 knockout 223 See also layers Layer Style dialog box 220 layer style options bevel 233 color 233 drop shadow behavior 233 gloss 233 glows 234 gradient 233 opacity 233 pattern 233 previewing 234 shading 234 shadow or glow boundaries 233 stroke position 234 texture 235 layer styles applying 227 228 contours 236 converting to layers 230 customizing 230 editing 229 hiding and showing 207 226 libraries 227 modifying 220 options 232 presets 226 removing 229 rollover styles 296 scaling effects 229 type layers 254 using with layer clipping paths 226 Layer Via Cut command 211 lasso tools 139 141 Lasso Width option 143 Layer Clipping Path command 240 layer clipping paths about 161 207 converting to layer masks 240 creating 162 drawing 161 masking with 237 toggle masking 241 using with layer styles 226 layer effects 220 See also layer styles layer mask channel 241 layer masks about 207 adding 237 adjustment layers as 243 applying 242 channels saved as 201 discarding 242 displaying 241 displaying channel 241 editing 151 239 loading as selections 242 pasting selections 239 removing 242 temporarily turning off 241 thumbnails 151 unlinking from layer 240 layer options in ImageReady 220 layer properties in Photo
155. 2 Click on an image map area in the image Shift click to add areas to the selection You can also select multiple image map areas by clicking outside an image map area and dragging across the image map areas you want to select Moving and resizing tool based image maps You can move and resize tool based image map areas by dragging You can also move and resize rectangular and circular image map areas using numeric coordinates Note To move or resize a layer based image map area move or edit the layer To move a tool based image map area 1 Select one or more image map areas you want to move 2 Position the pointer inside the image map area and drag it to a new position Press Shift to restrict movement to a vertical horizontal or 45 diagonal line To resize a tool based image map area 1 Select an image map area you want to resize 2 Drag a handle on the image map border to resize the image map area To change the stacking order of image map areas 1 Select one or more image map areas you want to arrange You can select a combination of tool based image map areas and layer based image map areas 2 Do one of the following e With the image map select tool active click a stacking order option in the options bar Bring to Front Bring Forward Send Backward Send to Back 2 Choose a stacking order command from the Image Map palette menu Aligning tool based image maps You can al
156. 2 Enter the name of the set and click OK Automating Tasks Saving actions ImageReady All actions you create are saved in the ImageReady Actions file in the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder ImageReady can only access actions that reside in this folder You add actions to ImageReady by dragging actions into the ImageReady Actions folder on your computer Because ImageReady does not include a Load Actions command you must add files to the ImageReady Actions file manually Note The default location of the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder varies by operating system Use your operating system s Find command to locate this folder You can remove actions from ImageReady by dragging the actions out of the ImageReady Actions folder or by using the Delete Action command in the Actions palette menu Actions you remove by dragging can be saved in another folder Actions you remove by deleting are removed permanently If you add or remove files from the ImageReady Actions palette you can direct ImageReady to scan the Actions folder for changes and update the Actions palette ImageReady scans the Actions folder and updates the Actions palette whenever you launch the application To update the Actions folder 1 Drag an action file into or out of the ImageReady Actions folder 2 Choose Rescan Actions Folder from the Actions palette menu ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide 3 Choose a source from the Source pop up menu Fo
157. 2 Select Use All Layers in the options bar Note When you are using tools that sample image data painting or editing in a new layer where there are no pixels produces the best results when Use All Layers is selected Filling a new layer with a neutral color Some filters such as the Lighting Effects filter cannot be applied to layers with no pixels Selecting Fill with Neutral Color in the New Layer dialog box resolves this problem by first filling the layer with a preset neutral color If no effect is applied filling with a neutral color has no effect on the remaining layers The Fill with Neutral Color option is not available for layers that use the Normal Dissolve Hue Saturation Color or Luminosity modes See Adding layers on page 210 Note Not all filters produce a visible effect when applied to a layer filled with a neutral color Specifying opacity You can change the opacity of a layer or layers in a set using the Opacity option in the Layers palette At 0 opacity a layer is completely transparent at 100 opacity a layer is completely opaque Note You cannot change the opacity of a background layer or a locked layer Horizontal Centers to space the linked layers evenly starting from the horizontal centermost pixel on each layer Right Edges to space the linked layers evenly starting from the rightmost pixel on each layer Note Photoshop aligns and distributes only those layers whose pixel
158. 86 sequence of 200 source 190 specifying in layers 220 splitting into separate images 188 thumbnails 185 186 viewing 186 See also alpha channels color channels spot channels Channels palette about 185 changing display 186 selecting channels 187 Character palette 258 characters See type Chinese type See CJK type chroma 110 circle image map tool 287 CJK type formatting exceptions 265 267 See also online Help Classroom in a Book 5 Clear command 153 Clear Layer Style command 229 client side image maps 292 Clipboard clearing 68 copying between applications 152 Export Clipboard option 152 brushes size options 58 See also online Help Build Master Palette command 337 Button Mode command 394 5 Calculations command 195 calibration bars 379 captions entering 366 printing 379 Cascade command 65 cascading style sheets See CSS CCITT compression 365 Change Layer Content command 244 Channel Mixer command 113 190 channels bit depth 116 blending 195 calculating 194 color 185 color information and 116 creating 200 deleting 189 201 display 186 duplicating 187 duplicating between separate images 188 file size of 185 hiding and showing 186 inverting 190 layer mask 241 maximum number of 199 merging 188 mixing 190 Black Matte 145 bleeds 378 Blend Clipped Layers as Group command 221 222 Blend If option for layers 225 Blend Interior Effects as Group command 221 22
159. Adobe Photoshop 60 User Guide 2000 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe Photoshop 6 0 User Guide for Windows and Macintosh This manual as well as the software described in it is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated Adobe assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this documentation Except as permitted by such license no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Adobe Please remember that existing artwork or images that you may want to include in your project may be protected under copyright law The unauthorized incorporation of such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the copyright owner Please be sure to obtain any permission required from the copyright owner Any references to company names in sample templates are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat Acrobat Reader Adobe Dimensions Adobe Gamma After Effects FrameMaker GoLive Illustrator ImageR
160. Auto Kern option in previous versions of Photoshop To adjust kerning manually 1 Click with the type tool T to set an insertion point between two characters Note If a range of type 15 selected you can t manually kern the characters Instead use tracking 2 In the Character palette enter or select a numeric value for Kerning 4 3 Photoshop Commit the changes to the type layer See About using the type tool Photoshop on page 252 CHAPTER 9 Using Type 262 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide To specify superscript or subscript characters Choose Superscript or Subscript from the Character palette menu A check mark indicates that the option is selected Applying underline and strikethrough You can apply a line under horizontal type or to the left or right of vertical type You can also apply a line through horizontal or vertical type The line is always the same color as the type color To apply an underline or strikethrough Choose an option from the Character palette menu Underline applies an underline beneath horizontal type e Underline Left and Underline Right apply an underline to the left or right of vertical type You can apply an underline to the left or right but not to both sides Note The Underline Left and Underline Right options only appear in the Character palette menu when a type layer that contains vertical type is selected e Strikethrough applies a horizontal l
161. Because the layer mask is a grayscale alpha channel the foreground and background colors default to grayscale values when the mask is active As you edit the mask thumbnail displays the changes 3 Do one of the following To subtract from the mask and reveal the layer paint the mask with white Normal Opacity joos Lock 2 os D Of Baden painted with black head painted with white neck painted with gray To convert a layer clipping path to a layer mask 1 Click the layer clipping path in the Layers palette to select it 2 Choose Layer gt Rasterize gt Layer Clipping Path Unlinking layers layer masks and layer clipping paths By default a layer or layer set is linked to its layer mask or layer clipping path as indicated by the link icon between the thumbnails in the Layers palette The layer and its layer mask or layer clipping path or both move together in the image when you move either one with the move tool You can unlink the layer from its layer mask or layer clipping path by clicking the link icon Unlinking them lets you move them indepen dently and shift the mask or layer clipping path boundaries separately from the layer Unlinking a layer mask or layer clipping path can change how layer effects are calculated To re establish the link click between the layer and layer mask or layer clipping path thumbnails Viewing layer masks By default the layer mask channel doe
162. Choose a library file displayed at the bottom of the palette menu Then click OK to replace the current list or click Append to append the current list Looking at the Work Area Using pop up palettes Pop up palettes provide easy access to libraries of brushes swatches gradients styles patterns contours and shapes You can customize pop up palettes by renaming and deleting items and by loading saving and replacing libraries You can also change the display of a pop up palette to view items by their names as thumbnail icons or with both names and icons Je HAR i 39 46 59 The 7 7 pop up palette in the options bar To select an item in a pop up palette 1 Click the triangle next to the thumbnail image of the current item Be careful not to click the thumbnail image doing so will display the settings editor for the item 2 Click an item in the pop up palette To rename an item in a pop up palette 1 Do one of the following Double click an item e Select an item click the triangle in the upper right corner of the pop up palette and choose the Rename command from the palette menu 2 Enter a new name in the provided dialog box and click OK ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide When you use the marquee tool the Info palette displays the x and y coordinates of the pointer position and the width W and height H of the marquee as you drag When you use the crop tool
163. Dimensions area of the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop or the Slice palette ImageReady change one or more of the following options e X to specify the distance in pixels between the left edge of the slice and the origin point of the ruler in the document window Y to specify the distance in pixels between the top edge of the slice and the origin point of the ruler in the document window Note The default origin point of the ruler is the upper left corner of the image See Using rulers the measure tool guides and the grid on page 74 To assign link information to an Image slice 1 Select a slice If you are working in Photoshop double click the slice with the slice select tool to display the Slice Options dialog box 2 In the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop or the Slice palette ImageReady enter a URL in the URL text box or choose a previously created URL from the pop up menu You can enter a relative URL or a full URL If you enter a full URL be sure to include http for example enter http www adobe com not www adobe com For more information on using relative URLs and full URLs see an HTML reference either printed or on the Web 3 If desired enter the name of a target frame in the Target text box or choose an option from the pop up menu A frame name must match a frame previously defined in the HTML file for the document When a user clicks the link the specified file displays in the
164. E PHOTOSHOP 6 0 379 User Guide Caption Prints any caption text entered in the File Info dialog box See Adding file information Photoshop on page 366 Caption text always prints as 9 point Helvetica plain type Negative Prints an inverted version of the image Unlike the Invert command in the Image menu the Negative option converts the output not the on screen image to a negative If you print separa tions directly to film you probably want a negative although in many countries film positives are common Check with your print shop to determine which is required Emulsion Down Makes type readable when the emulsion is down that is when the photosen sitive layer on a piece of film or photographic paper is facing away from you Normally images printed on paper are printed with emulsion up with type readable when the photosensitive layer faces you Images printed on film are often printed with emulsion down To determine the emulsion side examine the film under a bright light after it has been developed The dull side is the emulsion the shiny side is the base Check whether your print shop requires film with positive emulsion up negative emulsion up positive emulsion down or negative emulsion down Selecting halftone screen attributes Halftone screen attributes include the screen frequency and dot shape for each screen used in the printing process For color separations you must also specify an angle fo
165. GIFs When you save an optimized document containing an animation you can choose to generate an HTML file that contains code for displaying the animated GIF in a Web page The resulting Web page can contain just the animated GIF or additional Web features such as links and rollovers depending on the source document CHAPTER 11 Creating Animations ImageReady To optimize an animated image 1 Choose Optimize Animation from the Animation palette menu 2 Set the following options Bounding Box to crop each frame to the area that has changed from the preceding frame Animation files created using this option are smaller but are incompatible with GIF editors that do not support the option This option is selected by default and is recommended Redundant Pixel Removal to make transparent all pixels in a frame that are unchanged from the preceding frame This option is selected by default and is recommended The Transparency option in the Optimize palette must be selected for redundant pixel removal to work See Making transparent and matted images on page 339 Important Set the frame disposal method to Automatic when using the Redundant Pixel Removal option See Setting the frame disposal method on page 308 3 Click OK 4 Apply optimization settings as described in Optimizing images on page 320 When optimizing the colors in an animation Q use the Adaptive Perceptual or Selective palett
166. GoLive automatically calls ImageReady or Photoshop to compile the sliced pieces and update edits you make to the image Adobe GoLive also goes back to the original PSD file to generate the final GIF or JPEG file for the Web page HTML integration with Adobe GoLive 5 0 When exporting sliced images Photoshop and ImageReady both generate a set of named image files and an HTML file with the table code necessary to reassemble the image Alternatively you can save sliced image files as CSS based cascading style sheet objects The high quality HTML code produced is ready to be copied into Adobe GoLive or another HTML editor When exporting rollovers from ImageReady select the Include GoLive Code option in the Save Optimized As dialog box for optimal results 48 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide Master Photoshop more quickly Streamlined interface Photoshop 6 0 introduces numerous interface enhancements designed to make it easier and more efficient to use its powerful features Options bar Now when you select a tool in the toolbox all the options that control its behavior are easily accessible in a context sensitive options bar For example when you re working with the shape or selection tools you have access to modifiers such as add subtract restrict and invert which were previously available only by keyboard shortcuts You can dock the options bar to the top or bottom of your screen or let it float anywhere on your screen Palette
167. Grouping blend effects By default layers in a clipping group are blended with the underlying layers using the blending mode of the bottommost layer in the group However you can choose to have the blending mode of the bottommost layer apply only to that layer allowing you to maintain the original blending appearance of the clipped layers For more information on clipping groups see Creating clipping groups on page 218 In addition you can choose to have the blending mode of any layer apply to all layer effects that fall within the boundaries of that layer Thus you can choose to have a layer s blending mode apply to its own Inner Glow Satin or Overlay Conversely you cannot choose to apply the layer s mode to an Outer Glow or Outer Shadow because these effects fall outside the layer s original boundaries CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 224 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 For more information see About color channels in online Help 2 Use the This Layer and Underlying sliders to set the brightness range of the blended pixels measured on a scale from 0 black to 255 white Drag the white slider to set the high value of the range Drag the black slider to set the low value of the range 3 To define a range of partially blended pixels hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag one half of a slider triangl
168. In folder located in the Helpers folder in the Photoshop program folder 3 Restart Photoshop and ImageReady to view the browser in the Preview In menu 84 j CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area 2 If the file has been modified since the last save choose an option in ImageReady for saving the file e Click Save and save the file with its current name and location e Click Save As and save the file with a new name a new location or both To add an application to the Jump To submenu 1 Create a shortcut Windows or an alias Mac OS for the application you want to add to the menu 2 Drag the icon for the shortcut or alias into the Jump To Graphics Editor or the Jump To HTML Editor folder in the Helpers folder in the Photoshop folder 3 Restart ImageReady to view the application in the Jump To submenu To automatically update a file when jumping back to ImageReady from another application Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General then select Auto Update Files Previewing an image in a browser You can open a browser and preview an optimized image You can preview the image in any browser installed on your system The browser displays the image with a caption listing the images file type pixel dimensions file size and compression speci fications in the first paragraph and filename and other HTML information in the second paragraph ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide preset you need to save it in the e
169. JPEG format 318 365 setting 323 weighted optimization and 328 lpi lines per inch 94 luminance 112 merging 206 247 moving 214 naming 220 opacity 221 printing 208 376 reordering 209 restricting channels 221 sampling 216 saving 248 358 selecting 208 specifying channel options 220 stamping 247 styles 226 thumbnails 207 transparency 218 viewing 207 See also type layers Layers palette 151 206 leading 261 learning resources overview 4 Lemple Zif Welch LZW compression 365 libraries working with 85 See also individual library names ligatures 264 lighting effects 235 lightness 112 line tool about 162 measuring distances with 63 lines drawing 162 Link Slices command 286 linking layers 209 linking slices 285 Liquify command See online Help Load Actions command 403 INDEX 424 425 New command 100 New Frame button 302 New Layer Based Image Map Area command 287 New Layer Based Slice command 274 New Layer button 210 New Snapshot button 72 New State command 294 New View command 65 Noise dither 342 Normal mode 221 number of colors choosing a reduction algorithm 324 in image 324 weighted optimization 329 0 Official Adobe Print Publishing Guide 5 old style type 264 OLE automation 411 linking and embedding images 371 one bit images See also bitmap images online Help 2 online images changing size of 97 creating master palette for 336 resolution of 93 See also optimizing i
170. Mac OS Click Record and then speak into the microphone You can click Pause to temporarily stop the recording and then click Record to resume When youre finished click Stop and then click Save To import annotations 1 Choose File gt Import gt Annotations 2 Select a PDF or FDF file that contains annota tions and then click Load The annotations appear in the locations where they were saved in the source document Adding notes and audio annotations You can add notes and audio annotations anywhere on a Photoshop image canvas When you create a note a resizable window appears for entering text When you record an audio annotation you must have a microphone plugged into the audio in port of your computer You can import both kinds of annotations from Photoshop documents saved in PDF or from Acrobat documents saved in PDF or Form Data Format FDF To create a note 1 Select the notes tool O 2 Set options as needed Enter an author name The name appears in the title bar of the notes window Choose a font and size for the note text e Select a color for the note icon and the title bar of note windows 3 Click where you want to place the note or drag to create a custom sized window 4 Click inside the window and type the text If you type more text than fits in the note window the scroll bar becomes active Edit the text as needed You can use the standard editing commands for your system Und
171. OP 6 0 9 User Guide To make the layer partially visible paint the mask with gray e To add to the mask and hide the layer or layer set paint the mask with black To edit the layer instead of the layer mask select it by clicking its thumbnail in the Layers palette The paintbrush icon appears to the left of the thumbnail to indicate that you are editing the layer To paste a selection into a layer mask Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette to select and display the mask channel Choose Edit gt Paste drag the selection in the image to produce the desired masking effect and choose Select gt Deselect Click the layer thumbnail in the Layers palette to deselect the mask channel To edit a layer mask s options Photoshop 1 Double click the layer mask s thumbnail in the Layers palette 2 To choose a new mask color click the color swatch in the Layer Mask Display Options dialog box and choose a new color For more information see Using the Adobe Color Picker in online Help 3 To change the opacity enter a value between 0 and 100 Editing a layer mask You edit a layer mask by adding to or subtracting from the masked region To edit a layer mask 1 Click the layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette to make it active the mask icon Bm appears to the left of the layer thumbnail 2 Select any of the editing or painting tools
172. Option Shift Mac OS a cross appears next to the pointer and drag over the portion of the original selection that you want to select Softening the edges of a selection You can smooth the hard edges of a selection by anti aliasing and by feathering Anti aliasing Smooths the jagged edges of a selection by softening the color transition between edge pixels and background pixels Since only the edge pixels change no detail is lost Anti aliasing is useful when cutting copying and pasting selec tions to create composite images To select the unselected parts of an image Choose Select gt Inverse You can use this option to select an object placed Y against a solid colored background Select the background using the magic wand tool and then inverse the selection Adjusting selections manually You can use the selection tools to add to or subtract from existing pixel selections Before manually adding to or subtracting from a selection set the feather and anti aliased values in the options bar to the same settings used for the original selection See Softening the edges of a selection on page 147 To adjust selections numerically see Adjusting selections numerically in online Help To add to a selection or select an additional area 1 Make a selection 2 Using any selection tool do one of the following e Select the Add to Selection option in the options bar and drag Hold down Shift
173. Option drag Mac OS to draw a freehand path Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS to draw straight segments Press the key to decrease the magnetic pen width by 1 pixel press the key to increase the pen width by 1 pixel Press Caps Lock to display the current pen width Drawing and Editing 6 Tocontinue the existing freehand path position the freeform pen pointer on an endpoint of the path and drag If the Auto Add Delete option is selected you can click an existing point to delete it 7 To complete the path release the mouse To create a closed path drag over the initial point of the path a circle appears next to the pointer when it is aligned and release the mouse For more information on closed and open paths see About anchor points direction lines direction points and components on page 172 8 Draw additional path components if desired 9 Click the OK button in the options bar or press Enter or Return to dismiss the drawing tools To draw using the magnetic pen options 1 To convert the freeform pen tool to the magnetic pen tool select Magnetic in the options bar Then specify the following options by clicking the magnetic options button For Width enter a pixel value between 1 and 40 The magnetic pen detects edges only within the specified distance from the pointer For Contrast enter a percentage value between 0 and 100 to specify the contras
174. Overlay Pattern Overlay Contour F Stroke Range 0 Jitter fo Stroke Modifying an existing layer style Easy application of layer styles Applying layer styles is easy You create type shapes and other artwork elements on a layer and then click a style in the Styles palette to apply it Or select a shape tool select the shape layer option and choose a layer style in the options bar and then start drawing the style is applied as you draw The combination of layer styles and the new shape tools opens up a wide array of creative opportunities for print and Web designers alike What s New in Adobe Photoshop 6 0 Interactive image warping With the new Liquify command in Photoshop 6 0 you can quickly distort or warp an image by interactively pushing pulling rotating enlarging and shrinking different image areas These distortion controls are ideal for a wide range of tasks from making fine warping adjustments to a small image area to making sweeping adjustments for a wildly warped out effect When you open the Liquify dialog box you can display a fine mesh over the image to help you achieve precise adjustments To prevent unwanted changes freeze certain parts of the image and zero in on the areas you want to modify To switch between large scale changes and finer adjustments vary the size of the brush you re using The Liquify command also provides options for rec
175. PNG 24 format about 320 optimization settings for 325 preserving transparency 339 See also PNG format PNG 8 format about 319 hard edged transparency 340 optimization settings for 323 preserving transparency 339 reducing colors 330 weighted optimization and 329 See also PNG format point type See type pointers See tool pointers points 260 policies defined 125 options and behaviors 129 Pattern dither 342 patterns fill layers 244 layer style option 233 See also online Help PDF files opening 102 placing 104 saving 362 viewing with Acrobat Reader 1 PDF Image command 103 pen tools 63 166 drawing curves 168 drawing shapes 161 drawing straight segments 167 recording in actions 396 Perceptual color table 331 Perspective crop See online Help Photo CD format 112 Photoshop EPS format See EPS format Photoshop format 359 picas 260 PICT format 185 Picture Package command 368 pixel depth See bit depth pixel dimensions changing 97 changing during optimization 326 display of 92 maximum 95 new channels 199 new images and 101 resampling and 96 viewing 95 pixelation 93 Paste Slice command 279 pasting decreasing fringe 154 frames 304 PostScript artwork 152 removing halos 154 rollover states 296 selections 150 slices 279 styles 229 path component selection tool 173 path components 172 paths about 161 adjusting 174 175 clipping 369 copying 176 defining as selection border 180 defining tra
176. Photoshop on page 171 To show or hide the selected path component Do one of the following e Choose View gt Show gt Target Path e Choose View gt Show Extras This command also shows or hides a grid guides selection edges annotations and slices Moving reshaping and deleting path segments You can move reshape or delete individual segments in a path and you can add or delete anchor points to change the configuration of segments Note You can also apply a transformation such as scaling rotating flipping or distorting to a segment To move a straight segment 1 Select the direct selection tool amp and select the segment you want to adjust To adjust the angle or length of the segment select an anchor point 2 Drag the selected segment to its new position Drawing and Editing To select a path 1 Do one of the following To select a path component including a shape in a shape layer select the path component selection tool k and click anywhere inside the path component If a path consists of several path components only the path component under the pointer is selected To display the bounding box along with the selected path component select Show Bounding Box in the options bar To select a path segment select the direct selection tool R and click one of the segments anchor points or drag a marquee over part of the segment Drag a marquee to select segments
177. RGB and grayscale images in JPEG format Unlike GIF format JPEG retains color information in an RGB image but compresses file size by selectively discarding data Note You can also save an image as one or more JPEG files using the Save for Web command Photoshop or the Save Optimized command ImageReady For more information on optimizing images see Choosing a file format for optimization on page 317 and Optimizing images on page 320 To save a file in JPEG format 1 Choose File gt Save As and choose JPEG from the format list 2 Specify a filename and location select saving options as described in Setting file saving options Photoshop on page 358 and click Save 3 If the image contains transparency select a Matte color to simulate the appearance of background transparency See Making trans parent and matted images on page 339 10 Select Image Interpolation if you want to anti alias the printed appearance of a low resolution image 11 Click OK Saving files in GIF format Photoshop You can use the Save As command to save RGB indexed color grayscale or Bitmap mode image directly in GIF format When saving an RGB image Photoshop automatically displays the Indexed Color dialog box letting you choose indexed color conversion settings as the image is saved to GIF Note You can also save an image as one or more GIF files using the Save for Web command Photoshop or the Save Opti
178. See About bit depth on page 116 PNG 8 and GIF files support 8 bit color JPEG and PNG 24 files support 24 bit color Depending on the format you can specify image quality background transparency or matting color display and downloading method The appearance of an image on the Web also depends on the computer platform color display system operating system and browser used to display the image Preview images in different browsers on different platforms to see how the images will appear on the Web About JPEG format The JPEG format supports 24 bit color and preserves the broad range and subtle variations in brightness and hue found in photographs and other continuous toned images JPEG is supported by most browsers ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide You can reduce the number of colors in a GIF image and choose options to control the way colors dither in the application or in a browser GIF supports background transparency and background matting in which you blend the edges of the image with a Web page background color About PNG 8 format The PNG 8 format uses 8 bit color Like the GIF format PNG 8 efficiently compresses solid areas of color while preserving sharp detail such as that in line art logos or illustrations with type Because PNG 8 is not supported by all browsers it may be advisable to avoid this format for situa tions in which your image must be accessible to the widest possible Web viewing audien
179. See Previewing and controlling dithering on page 341 In ImageReady click the Show Options control on the Optimize palette tab or choose Show Options from the Optimize palette menu to view the Web Snap option 336 CHAPTER 12 Optimizing Images for the Web To save a color table 1 Select Save Color Table from the Color Table palette menu 2 Name the color table and choose a location where it will be saved By default the color table file is given the extension act for Adobe Color Table Ifyou want to access the color table when selecting Optimization options for a GIF or PNG image save the color table in the Optimized Colors folder inside the Presets folder in the Adobe Photoshop folder 3 Click Save To load a color table 1 Select Load Color Table from the Color Table palette menu 2 Navigate to a file containing the color table you want to load either an Adobe Color Table act file or a GIF file to load the files embedded color table 3 Click Open Using master palettes ImageReady You can create a master palette to use with a group of GIF or PNG 8 images that will be placed on a CD ROM or other multimedia storage medium When you include the master palette with a batch of images all images display using the same colors Deleting colors from the color table You can delete selected colors from the color table to decrease the image file size When you delete a color areas of the
180. See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 ImageReady Choose Windows gt Show Layer Options Style to display the Layer Options palette In the Layer Options palette if the Fill Opacity option is not showing choose Show Options from the Layer Options palette menu or click the Show Options button to view all of the options 2 In the Layer Options palette ImageReady or the Layer Style dialog box Blending Options panel Photoshop enter a value for Fill Opacity CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 222 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide base of the clipping group when Blend Clipped Layers as Group is selected However it stops just below the base of the clipping group when Blend Clipped Layers as Group is not selected Layers Lock E7 De 8 Effects fa Stroke Africa text with shallow knockout to lion layer and deep knockout to background Restricting blending to channels Photoshop You can restrict blending to changing only data from specified channels when blending a layer or layer set By default all channels are included when blending a layer or layer set The channel selections vary based on the type of image you are editing For example if you are editing a RGB image the channel choices are R G and B If you are editing a CMYK image the channel choices are C M Y and K When using an RGB 3 In the Layer Options palette ImageReady or the Layer Style dialog bo
181. Select a view option Document Size to display information on the amount of data in the image The number on the left represents the printing size of the image approximately the size of the saved flattened file in Adobe Photoshop format The number on the right indicates the file s approximate size including layers and channels For more information on how layers affect file size see Using layer styles on page 226 78 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area To show one Extra from a list of hidden Extras Choose View gt Show and choose an Extra from the submenu Choosing one of the hidden Extras will cause it to show and turn off all other Extras To Turn on and off a group of Extras Choose View gt Show gt All to turn on and show all available Extras Choose View gt Show gt None to turn off all Extras Displaying status information The status bar at the bottom of the window displays useful information such as the current magnification and file size of the active image and brief instructions for using the active tool To show or hide the status bar Windows only Choose Window gt Show Status Bar or Window gt Hide Status Bar Displaying file and image information Information about the current file size and other features of the image is displayed at the bottom of the application window Windows or document window Mac OS Note In ImageReady if the document window is wide enough t
182. State button El at the bottom of the palette e Choose New State from the Rollover palette menu The new rollover state is identical to the state immediately preceding it until you make modifi cations to the image using the Layers palette ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide 2 In the document window perform the action that activates the rollover state For example position the mouse over the rollover slice or image map area to preview the Over state Then click the slice or image map area to preview the Click state To exit rollover preview mode Select any tool in the toolbox including the Rollover Preview button or click the Play button in the Rollover palette Adding animation to rollover states You use the Animation palette in conjunction with the Rollover palette to add an animation to a rollover state When working with a layer based slice or a layer based image map area moving the layer in the Normal state repositions the layer in every rollover state However moving the layer in a rollover state other than the Normal state repositions the layer only in the current state To add an animation to a rollover state 1 In the Rollover palette create a new rollover state or select the thumbnail for a rollover state in which you want to display an animation 2 In the Animation palette create frames for the animation See Creating animations on page 301 Note Adding an animation to the Normal
183. Windows or Shift Command Option E Mac OS The selected layer is stamped with the contents of all visible layers If a layer set is selected a new layer named after the set is created the original layer set is deleted and all of the layers contained in the set remain in the Layers palette Flattening all layers In a flattened image all visible layers are merged into the background greatly reducing file size Flattening an image discards all hidden layers and fills the remaining transparent areas with white In most cases you won t want to flatten a file until you have finished editing individual layers Note Converting an image between some color modes flattens the file Be sure to save a copy of your file that includes all layers if you want to edit the original image at a later date CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 248 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie e 2 251 Chapter 9 Using Type Creating type You can create horizontal or vertical type anywhere in an image Depending on how you use the type tool you can enter point type or paragraph type Point type is useful for entering a single word or a line of characters paragraph type is useful for entering and formatting the type as one or more parag
184. Windows computers Specifying color management policies Each predefined color management configuration sets up a color management policy for the RGB CMYK and Grayscale color modes and displays warning messages to let you override the default policy behavior on a case by case basis If desired you can change the default policy behavior to ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Default color management behavior New documents are tagged with the current working space profile e Existing documents tagged with a profile other than the current working space remain tagged with the original embedded profile Existing untagged documents use the current working space for editing but remain untagged For color data imported within the same color mode between either a non color managed source or destination or from a CMYK document into a CMYK document color numbers are preserved For all other import cases colors are converted to the document s color space New documents are tagged with the current working space profile e Existing documents tagged with a profile other than the current working Space are converted to and tagged with the working space profile Existing untagged documents use the current working space for editing but remain untagged For color data imported within the same color mode between either a non color managed source or destination color numbers are preserved For all o
185. a Selection button 2 3 at the bottom of the Paths palette Choose Make Selection from the Paths palette menu 4 In the Make Selection dialog box select a Rendering option e Feather Radius to define how far inside and outside the selection border the feather edge extends Enter a value in pixels Anti aliased to create a finer transition between the pixels in the selection and the surrounding pixels Make sure the Feather Radius is set to 0 For more information on these options see Softening the edges of a selection on page 147 5 Select an Operation option New Selection to select only the area defined by the path Add to Selection to add the area defined by the path to the original selection Subtract from Selection to remove the area defined by the path from the original selection Intersect with Selection to select the area common to both the path and the original selection If the path and selection do not overlap nothing is selected 6 Click OK 182 CHAPTER 6 Drawing and Editing Adding color to paths Photoshop You can add color values to a path by filling or stroking it Filling a path is the same as creating a rasterized shape using the shape tools See Creating rasterized shapes on page 164 For more information see Filling paths with color and Stroking to paint path borders in online Help Transforming and retouching You can transform images
186. a channels can substantially increase the disk space required for an image To delete a channel with no confirmation 1 Select the channel in the Channels palette 2 Do one of the following Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the Trash button ff Drag the channel name in the palette to the Trash button Choose Delete Channel from the Channels palette menu To delete a channel with confirmation 1 Select the channel in the Channels palette 2 Click the Trash button ff at the bottom of the palette Then click Yes To merge channels 1 Open the grayscale images containing the channels you want to merge and make one of the images active You must have more than one image opened for the Merge Channels option to be available 2 Choose Merge Channels from the Channels palette menu 3 For Mode choose the color mode you want to create If an image mode is unavailable it is dimmed The number of channels appropriate for the mode appears in the Channels text box 4 If necessary enter a number in the Channels text box If you enter a number that is incompatible with the selected mode Multichannel mode is automati cally selected This creates a a multichannel image with two or more channels 5 Click OK 6 For each channel make sure the image you want is open If you change your mind about image type click Mode to return to the Merge Channels dialog box 7 If merging into a multichannel im
187. a handle on the Center Point icon 582 in the options bar 7 If desired skew the placed artwork by holding down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS and dragging a side handle of the bounding box 8 Set the Anti alias option in the options bar as desired To blend edge pixels during rasterization select the Anti alias option To produce a hard edged transition between edge pixels during rasterization deselect the Anti alias option 9 To commit the placed artwork to a new layer do one of the following e Click the OK button in the options bar e Press Enter or Return To cancel the placement click the Cancel button in the options bar or press Esc To place a PDF Adobe Illustrator or EPS file Photoshop 1 Open the Photoshop image into which you want to place the artwork 2 Choose File gt Place select the file you want to place and click Place 3 If you are placing a PDF file that contains multiple pages select the page you want to place in the provided dialog box and click OK The placed artwork appears inside a bounding box at the center of the Photoshop image The artwork maintains its original aspect ratio however if the artwork is larger than the Photoshop image it is resized to fit 4 If desired reposition the placed artwork by doing one or more of the following Position the pointer inside the bounding box of the placed artwork and drag In the options bar enter a value fo
188. a new layer or layer set and specify options 1 Do one of the following Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the New Layer button or New Layer Set button at the bottom of the Layers palette e Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS the New Layer button or New Layer Set button at the bottom of the Layers palette to add a layer below the currently selected layer Create layer sets from linked layers See Linking layers on page 209 Rasterize linked layers See Simplifying layers on page 245 To link layers 1 Selecta layer or layer set in the Layers palette 2 Clickin the column immediately to the left of any layers you want to link to the selected layer A link icon appears in the column When you link to a layer set the layers contained in the layer set are implicitly linked and display a dimmed link icon To unlink layers In the Layers palette click the link icons to remove them Creating a layered image You can create a maximum of 8000 combined layers layer sets and layer effects per image each with its own blending mode and opacity However the amount of memory in your system may limit the number of layers possible in a single image Because each layer layer set and layer effect takes up part of that maximum value a realistic maximum value would be closer to 1000 layers Note Images created using the Transparent option in the New dialog box are created with
189. above the active layer in the Layers palette If the layer you re dragging is larger than the destination image only part of the layer is visible but its contents remain available Use the move tool to drag other sections of the layer into view Hold down Shift as you drag a layer to copy it Q in the same position it occupied in the source image if the source and destination images have the same pixel dimensions or to the center of the desti nation image if the source and destination images have different pixel dimensions To copy alayer s contents and paste them into another image 1 Choose Select gt All to select all of the pixels on the layer that fall inside the canvas boundaries 2 Choose Edit gt Copy Select a target layer in the destination image and choose Edit gt Paste The contents of the clipboard are centered in the image Only the information inside the canvas boundaries is copied CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 212 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide If the destination layer set is expanded drag a layer to the desired location within the layer set When the highlighted line appears in the desired location release the mouse button To drag a layer out of a set Do one of the following Drag the layer up or down in the Layers palette When the highlighted line appears in the desired location release the mouse button To draga layer to a position directly below a layer set drag below the
190. ach slice based on the specified number of pixels Any section of a slice that is left over is made into another slice For example if you divide a slice that is 100 pixels wide into three new slices each 30 pixels wide the remaining 10 pixel wide area becomes a new slice 6 Click OK Duplicating slices You can create a duplicate slice with the same dimensions and optimization settings as the original If the original slice is a linked user slice the duplicate is linked to the same set See Linking slices ImageReady on page 285 Duplicate slices are always user slices regardless of whether the original is a user slice a layer based slice or an auto slice In ImageReady you can also copy and paste slices within or between documents To duplicate a slice 1 Select a slice In ImageReady you can select multiple slices 2 Do one of the following Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS from inside the selection Dragging from the edge will resize a user slice Designing Web Pages To snap slices to a guide or another user slice 1 Select the options you want from the View gt Snap To submenu and choose View gt Snap See Working with snap on page 152 A check mark indicates that the option is turned on 2 Move the selected slices as desired The slices snap to any guide or slice within 4 pixels Dividing user slices and auto slices ImageReady In ImageReady the Divide Slice dialog
191. added with a default name e Select the layer containing the layer style you want to add Press Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click the New Item button El at the bottom of the Styles palette and name the layer style Click OK Click an empty area of the Styles palette name the layer style and select Include Layer Effects or Include Layer Blending Options The cursor changes to a bucket Click OK Choose New Style from the Styles palette menu Enter a name in the New Style dialog box and select Include Layer Effects or Include Layer Blending Options Click OK Photoshop Double click the layer containing the layer style you want to add In the Layer Styles dialog box click New Style In the New Style dialog box name the layer style and select Include Layer Effects or Include Layer Blending Options Click OK list below the layer name Layer styles are linked to the layer contents When you move or edit the contents on the layer the layer style applied to that layer is modified correspondingly To define a new layer style preset 1 Apply layer effects to a layer See Using layer styles on page 226 2 Select a single layer effect or a group of layer effects by doing one of the following e In the Layers palette click an individual layer effect name to select it o l De O 8 Lock f Stroke Gee A Effects bar B Layer styles icon Photosh
192. ading duotone settings on page 387 You can use the Info palette to display ink percentages when you re working with duotone images Set the readout mode to Actual Color to see the ink percentages that will be applied when the image is printed These values reflect any changes you ve entered in the Duotone Curve dialog box Printing Photoshop 3 Use the color picker or the Custom Colors dialog box to select an ink When you close the dialog box the ink color appears in the color box and the color name in the text box For more information see Using the Adobe Color Picker in online Help 4 If the ink is to be separated on a process color plate name it cyan magenta yellow or black Modifying the duotone curve A separate duotone curve specifies how each ink is distributed across the shadow and highlight areas of the image This curve maps each grayscale value on the original image to the actual ink percentage that will be used when the image is printed A diagonal line indicates equal values and even distribution of ink To modify the duotone curve for a given ink 1 To preview any adjustments select the Preview option 2 Click the curve box next to the ink color box The default duotone curve a straight diagonal line across the grid indicates that you are mapping the current grayscale value of every pixel to the same percentage value of the printing ink At this setting a 50
193. age and then combine the results in a single channel Two concepts are fundamental to under standing how the calculation commands work Each pixel in a channel has a brightness value from 0 off or black to 255 on or white The Calculations and Apply Image commands manipulate these values to produce the resulting composite pixels These commands overlay the pixels in two or more channels Thus the images used for calculations must have the same pixel dimensions See Changing image size and resolution on page 95 for information on adjusting an image s pixel dimensions Using Channels and Masks Use a printed sample of the overprinted inks to adjust your screen display to help you predict how colors will look when printed Note In some cases such as varnish and bump plates you may want colors to overprint To adjust overlapping spot colors 1 In the Channels palette select the spot channel with the color you want to print 2 Choose Select gt Load Selection To quickly select an image in a channel hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS and click the channel in the Channels palette 3 For Channel choose the spot channel from step 1 and click OK 4 To create a trap when knocking out the underlying color choose Select gt Modify gt Expand or Contract depending on whether the overlapping spot color is darker or lighter than the spot color beneath it For more information on trappin
194. age click Next and repeat step 6 to select the remaining channels Note All channels of a multichannel image are alpha channels 8 When you are finished selecting channels click OK To mix color channels 1 In the Channels palette select the composite color channel 2 Choose Image gt Adjust gt Channel Mixer 3 For Output Channel choose the channel in which to blend one or more existing or source channels See Restricting blending to channels Photoshop on page 223 4 Drag any source channel s slider to the left to decrease the channel s contribution to the output channel or to the right to increase it or enter a value between 200 and 200 in the text box Using a negative value inverts the source channel before adding it to the output channel 5 Drag the slider or enter a value for the Constant option This option adds a channel of varying opacity to the output channel negative values act as a black channel positive values act as a white channel 6 Select Monochrome to apply the same settings to all the output channels creating a color image that contains only gray values Use the Channel Mixer with the Monochrome option applied to control the amount of detail and contrast in the images you plan to convert to grayscale If you select and then deselect the Monochrome option you can modify the blend of each channel separately creating a handtinted appearance 7 Click OK Using Ch
195. age resolutions to use 7 Click OK To save halftone screen settings In the Halftone Screens dialog box click Save Choose a location for the saved settings enter a filename and click Save To save the new settings as the default hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click the gt Default button To load halftone screen settings In the Halftone Screens dialog box click Load Locate and select the settings and click Load To return to the original default settings hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click lt Default 5 Fora color separation choose from the following options To manually enter the screen frequency and angle choose a color of the screen for Ink and enter the frequency and angle repeat for each color separation To have Adobe Photoshop determine and enter the best frequencies and angles for each screen click Auto In the Auto Screens dialog box enter the resolution of the output device and the screen frequency you intend to use and click OK Photoshop enters the values in the Halftone Screens dialog box Changing these values may result in moir patterns If you are using a PostScript Level 2 or higher printer or an imagesetter equipped with an Emerald controller make sure that the Use Accurate Screens option is selected in the Auto Screens dialog box or in the Halftone Screens dialog box if you re entering the values manually The Use Accurate Sc
196. age Size command lets you adjust the pixel dimensions print dimensions and resolution of an image in ImageReady you can only adjust the pixel dimensions of an image For assistance with resizing and resampling e images in Photoshop choose Help gt Resize Image This interactive wizard helps you scale your images for print or online media Choosing an interpolation method When an image is resampled an interpolation method is used to assign color values to any new pixels it creates based on the color values of existing pixels in the image The more sophisti cated the method the more quality and detail from the original image are preserved The General Preferences dialog box lets you specify a default interpolation method to use whenever images are resampled with the Image Size or transformation commands The Image Size command also lets you specify an interpolation method other than the default To specify the default interpolation method 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General 2 For Interpolation choose one of the following options Nearest Neighbor Jagged for the fast but less precise method This method is recommended for use with illustrations containing non anti aliased edges to preserve hard edges and produce a smaller file However this method can result in jagged effects which become apparent when distorting or scaling an image or performing multiple manipulations on a selection Photoshop Bil
197. agement to instruct the printer to convert the file data to the printer s color space Select this option only if you have not already converted the file to the printer s color space However do not select PostScript Color Management if you re planning to place the image into another color managed document Doing so may disrupt color management in your page layout application Note Only PostScript Level 3 printers support PostScript Color Management for CMYK images To print a CMYK image using PostScript Color Management on a Level 2 printer convert the image to Lab mode before saving in EPS format 9 If the image contains vector graphics such as shapes and type select Include Vector Data to preserve vector data in the file However saved vector data in EPS and DCS files is only available to other applications when you reopen the file in Photoshop the vector data will be rasterized CHAPTER 13 Saving and Exporting Images DCS 2 0 format retains spot channels in the image You can choose between saving color channel information as multiple files as for DCS 1 0 or as a single file The single file option saves disk space You can also include a 72 ppi grayscale or color composite with the image 5 Specify an encoding method when printing to a PostScript output device ASCII to use the most generic encoding method Use ASCII encoding if you re printing from a Windows system or if you experience printing errors o
198. ages on page 347 Saving animations as QuickTime movies You can save an animation as a QuickTime movie The resulting file is viewable in the QuickTime player and can be opened in other applications that support QuickTime movie format To save an animation as a QuickTime movie 1 Choose File gt Export Original 2 Select QuickTime Movie from the format pop up menu Note On Windows QuickTime Movie format is only available when QuickTime 15 installed on your computer 3 Type a filename and choose a location for the file 4 Click Save 5 If desired adjust the compression settings and click OK The files appear in the Animation palette as frames and in the Layers palette as layers with each layer assigned to a separate frame The image that is first alphabetically or numerically by filename is frame 1 in the Animation palette and the bottom layer in the Layers palette Opening QuickTime movies as animations You can open movies in MOV AVI and FLIC formats to view and edit in ImageReady To open QuickTime compatible movies 1 Choose File gt Open and select the movie to open 2 Select the range of frames to import From Beginning to End to open the full file Selected Range Only to open selected frames Drag the slider below the movie thumbnail to specify the starting point for the range then Shift drag to specify the ending point A black bar on the slider indicates the range you select
199. ages For more information see Customizing picture package layouts in online Help To create a picture package from a single image 1 Choose File gt Automate gt Picture Package 2 Specify the source image you want to use Click Choose to specify a saved image file as the source Select Use Frontmost Document to use the image currently active in Photoshop as the source 3 For Layout choose a preset layout option Layout dimensions are measured in inches and a preview of the chosen layout appears in the dialog box 4 Enter a resolution value for the package layout using the menu to specify resolution units 5 Choose a color mode appropriate to the package layout 6 Click OK to create the package layout Saving and Exporting Images Creating contact sheets By displaying a series of thumbnail previews on a single page contact sheets let you easily preview and catalog groups of images You can automati cally create and place thumbnails on a page using the Contact Sheet II command Note Make sure that the images are closed before applying this command To create a contact sheet 1 Choose File gt Automate gt Contact Sheet II 2 Click Choose to specify the folder containing the images you want to use Select Include All Subdirectories to include images inside any subfolders of the chosen folder 3 Under Document specify the dimensions resolution and color mode for the contact sheet using the
200. alette menu To select all colors Choose Select All Colors from the Color Table palette menu To select all Web safe colors Choose Select All Web Safe Colors from the Color Table palette menu To select all non Web safe colors Choose Select All Non Web Safe Colors from the Color Table palette menu To view selected colors in an image ImageReady Select the optimized image Then click and hold a selected color in the Color Table palette to tempo rarily invert the color in the optimized image enabling you to see which areas of the image contain the color To view a contiguous group of colors press Shift and click and hold another color All colors in the rows between the first and second selected colors are inverted To view a discontiguous group of colors press Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS and click each color that you want to select and hold the mouse button down on any color in the group ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 335 User Guide Locking colors in the color table You can lock selected colors in the color table to prevent them from being dropped when the number of colors is reduced and to prevent them from dithering in the application Note Locking colors does not prevent them from dithering in a browser See Previewing and controlling dithering on page 341 To lock a color 1 Select one or more colors in the color table See Selecting colors on page 333 2 Lock the color e Cl
201. an also use the Preset Manager See Managing libraries with the Preset Manager Photoshop on page 85 You can create custom contours CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 236 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide In the Layers palette both the layer mask and layer clipping path appear as an additional thumbnail to the right of the layer thumbnail For the layer mask this thumbnail represents the grayscale alpha channel created when you add the layer mask See Storing masks in alpha channels on page 199 The layer clipping path represents the path that clips out the contents of the layer A Layer mask selected B Layer mask link icon C Layer mask D Layer clipping path E Layer clipping path link icon F New Layer Mask To load contours from the Contour Editor dialog box Click the contour in the Layer Style dialog box and in the Contour Editor dialog box choose Load Go to the folder where the contour library you want to load is located and click Open To delete a contour in the Contour Editor dialog box Click the inverted arrow next to the currently selected contour to view the pop up palette Press Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click the contour you want to delete Hiding portions of a layer You can create a layer mask to control how different areas within a layer or layer set are hidden and revealed By making changes to the layer mask you can apply a variety of special effects to the layer
202. an eye icon Hold down Alt Shift Windows or Option Shift Mac OS and click the layer mask thumbnail to view the mask on top of the layer in a rubylith masking color Hold down Alt Shift or Option Shift and click the thumbnail again to turn off the color display To turn off the layer mask temporarily 1 Press Shift and click the layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette A red X appears over the layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette and the entire underlying layer or layer set appears without masking effects 2 To turnon the mask Shift click the layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette You can enable or disable layer masks using the Layer menu To change the rubylith display for a layer mask 1 Do one of the following Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the layer mask thumbnail to select the layer mask channel then double click the layer mask thumbnail To load a layer or layer mask s boundaries as a selection Do one of the following In the Layers palette Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS the layer or layer mask thumbnail To add the pixels to an existing selection press Ctrl Shift Windows or Command Shift Mac OS and click the layer or layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette To subtract the pixels from an existing selection press Ctrl Alt Windows or Command Option Mac OS and click the layer or layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette
203. anagement bere Setting up color management 4 Using predefined color management settings Customizing color management settings 5 Specifying working spaces Specifying color management policies 4 Customizing advanced color management settings Saving and loading color management settings Synchronizing color management between APPIICAtIONS sulla Soft proofing colors Changing the color profile of a document Embedding profiles in saved documents Obtaining installing and updating color profiles Creating an ICC monitor profile Chapter 5 ADOUrselections ge saima eee aa oes Making pixel selections Adjusting pixel selections Softening the edges of a selection Moving copying and pasting selections and layers Working with snap sss Working with Color Producing Consistent Color Photoshop Selecting Saving and loading selections Deleting selections Removing fringe pixels from a selection PHOTOSHOP dirla assesses Sates ola tia Extracting objects from their background PHOTOSHOP ilconte Chapter 6 About drawing and painting Drawing shapes and paths Using the shape tools Using the pen tools Photoshop 4 Drawing overlapping s
204. and 122 customizing settings 126 130 guidelines for 122 loading settings 130 policies 125 predefined settings 124 profiles 122 saving settings 130 setting up 124 soft proofs 131 synchronizing settings 131 viewing environment 123 See also Color Settings color management engine 122 color management module See color management engine color management system CMS 121 color models 109 See also gamut HSB RGB CMYK and LAB color models color modes Bitmap mode 112 changing automatically 410 CMYK mode 111 compared to color models 109 converting images between 113 117 118 Duotone mode 113 Grayscale mode 112 Indexed Color mode 118 Indexed color mode 113 preferences 152 rasterizing images from 152 clipping groups about 218 adjustment layers 243 knockout 224 merging 247 stopping knockout 223 clipping paths 369 Close All command 65 Close command 65 88 closed paths 173 CMM See color management engine CMYK color model 111 CMYK color spaces 112 CMYK images channel display 186 converted from RGB 117 printing 383 CMYK inks See process color inks color adjustments adjustment layers 243 image map 288 slices 275 color adjustments See color corrections color adjustments See online Help color channels 116 See also alpha channels channels spot channels Color Channels in Color option 186 color coding layers 220 color corrections by mixing channels 190 Info palette display 63 color depth Se
205. and History palette let you correct editing mistakes And the Actions palette lets you save sequences of commonly used tasks so that you can perform them automatically on an image or batch of images Switch between Photoshop and ImageReady You can easily jump between Photoshop and ImageReady when working on an image to use the full feature sets of both applications To switch to either application click the Jump To button in the toolbox Jump To button in Photoshop and ImageReady ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 15 User Guide Undo the last performed operation If you make a mistake while working simply choose Edit gt Undo to reverse the effect of the last operation Most but not all operations can be reversed this way Undo multiple operations If you need to undo more than one operation choose Window gt Show History to display the History palette This palette lists all the different states that the image has undergone as a result of the recent edits you ve made To revert the image to a previous state click the name of the state in the History palette Custom CMYK to G gt Make snapshot channel Mixer gt Convert Mode History palette Playing an action Automate repeated tasks To automatically apply a sequence of operations to your image choose Window gt Show Actions to display the Actions palette This palette includes a default list of common tasks or actions You can perform a des
206. and Return Mac OS e Select any tool in the toolbox or click in the Layers Channels Paths Actions History or Styles palette Entering point type When you enter point type each line of type is independent the length of a line grows or shrinks as you edit it but it doesn t wrap to the next line To enter point type 1 Select the type tool T 2 Photoshop Click the New Type Layer button T in the options bar CHAPTER 9 Using Type 252 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide To resize or transform a type bounding box 1 Display the bounding box handles Photoshop With the type tool active select the type layer in the Layers palette and click in the text flow ImageReady With the type tool active select the type layer If the bounding box handles don t appear make sure that the Text Bounds option is selected in the View gt Show submenu 2 Drag to achieve the desired effect To resize the bounding box position the pointer over a handle the pointer turns into a double arrow and drag Shift drag to maintain the proportion of the bounding box Photoshop To rotate the bounding box position the pointer outside of the bounding border the pointer turns into a curved two sided arrow 1 and drag Shift drag to constrain the rotation to 15 increments To change the center of rotation Ctrl drag Windows or Command drag Mac OS the center point to a new location Th
207. and drag so that the highlight slightly overlaps both the foreground object and its background To extract an object you use tools in the Extract dialog box First you draw a highlight that marks the edges of the object and define the object s interior Then you can preview the extraction and redo it or touch up the result as needed When you extract the object Photoshop erases its background to transparency Pixels on the edge of the object lose their color components derived from the background so they can blend with a new background without producing a color halo Q You can add back opacity to the background and create other effects by using the Edit gt Fade command after an extraction For more information see Blending filter effects Photoshop in online Help To extract an object from its background 1 In the Layers palette select the layer containing the object you want to extract If you select a background layer it becomes a normal layer after the extraction To avoid losing the original image information duplicate the layer or make a snapshot of the original image state Note If the layer contains a selection the extraction erases the background only in the selected area 2 Choose Image gt Extract You use tools in the Extract dialog box to specify which part of the image to extract You can resize the dialog box by dragging its lower right corner If the object is especially intricate or la
208. and notes tools In Photoshop when recording an action that Y will be played on files of different sizes set the ruler units to percent As a result the action will always play back in the same relative position in the image You can record the Play command listed on the Actions palette menu to cause one action to play another If you record multiple Insert Path commands in a single action each path will replace the previous one in the target file To add multiple paths record a Save Path command using the Paths palette after recording each Insert Path command Inserting stops You can include stops in your action that let you perform a task that cannot be recorded for example using a painting tool Once you ve completed the task click the Play button in the Actions palette to complete the task You can insert a stop when recording an action or after it has been recorded You can also display a short message when the action reaches the stop For example you can remind yourself what needs to be done before continuing with the action A Continue button can be included in the message box This lets you check for a certain condition in the file for example a selection and continue if nothing needs to be done To insert a stop 1 Choose where to insert the stop e Select an action s name to insert a stop at the end of the action e Select a command to insert a stop after the command 2 Choose Insert Stop from
209. and reproducing color Common models include HSB hue saturation brightness RGB red green blue CMYK cyan magenta yellow black and CIE L a b Photoshop also includes modes for specialized color output such as Indexed Color and Duotone ImageReady uses RGB mode to work with images Because the RGB colors combine to create white they are also called additive colors Adding all colors together creates white that is all light is transmitted back to the eye Additive colors are used for lighting video and monitors Your monitor for example creates color by emitting light through red green and blue phosphors Additive colors RGB RGB mode Photoshop s RGB mode uses the RGB model assigning an intensity value to each pixel ranging from 0 black to 255 white for each of the RGB components in a color image For example a bright red color might have an R value of 246 a G value of 20 and a B value of 50 When the values of all three components are equal the result is a shade of neutral gray When the value of all components is 255 the result is pure white when the value is 0 pure black Working with Color e Saturation sometimes called chroma is the strength or purity of the color Saturation repre sents the amount of gray in proportion to the hue measured as a percentage from 0 gray to 100 fully saturated On the standard color wheel saturation increases from the center to the edge B
210. annels and Masks When deleting a channel from a file with layers regardless of the method you use Photoshop prompts you first to flatten the visible layers and discard hidden layers if any before deleting the channel This is done because removing a color channel converts the image to Multichannel mode which does not support layers Mixing color channels Photoshop The Channel Mixer command lets you modify a color channel using a mix of the current color channels With this command you can do the following Make creative color adjustments not easily done with the other color adjustment tools Create high quality grayscale images by choosing the percentage contribution from each color channel Create high quality sepia tone or other tinted images Convert images to and from some alternative color spaces such as YCbCr Swap or duplicate channels ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 191 User Guide You cannot move spot colors above a default channel in the Channels palette except in Multi channel mode Spot colors cannot be applied to individual layers If you print an image that includes spot color channels to a composite printer the spot colors print out as extra pages You can merge spot channels with color channels splitting the spot color into its color channel components Merging spot channels lets you print a single page proof of your spot color image on a desktop printer Creating spot cha
211. ansparent pixels with the Matte color For more information on setting transparency and Matte color see Making transparent and matted images on page 339 12 Select Interlaced to create an image that displays as low resolution versions in a browser while the full image file is downloading Interlacing can make downloading time seem shorter and assures viewers that downloading is in progress 13 To automatically shift colors to the closest Web palette equivalents and prevent the colors from dithering in a browser drag the Web Snap slider or enter a value to specify a tolerance level for colors to be shifted A higher value shifts more colors See Previewing and controlling dithering on page 341 14 To apply a unified color table across all rollover states select Use Unified Color Table CHAPTER 12 Optimizing Images for the Web 7 To modify the color reduction using an alpha channel click the channel button l next to the Color Reduction Algorithm text box In the Modify Color Reduction dialog box choose an alpha channel from the pop up menu and click OK See Using channels to modify color reduction on page 329 8 To specify the maximum number of colors in the color palette select a number from the Colors pop up menu enter a value in the text box or use the arrows to change the number of colors If the image contains fewer colors than the number specified the color table will contain only the
212. ant Because your image may be viewed on a 15 inch monitor you may want to limit the size of your image to 800 by 600 pixels to allow room for the Web browser window controls 832 x 624 640 x 480 1024 x 768 640 x 480 How large an image appears on screen depends on a combina tion of factors the pixel dimensions of the image the monitor size and the monitor resolution setting The examples above show a 620 by 400 pixel image displayed on monitors of various sizes and resolutions Vector graphics are resolution independent that is they can be scaled to any size and printed at any resolution without losing detail or clarity As a result vector graphics are the best choice for representing bold graphics that must retain crisp lines when scaled to various sizes for example logos Qi Vector graphics are good for reproducing crisp outlines as in logos or illustrations They can be printed or displayed at any resolution without losing detail Because computer monitors represent images by displaying them on a grid both vector and bitmap data is displayed as pixels on screen About image size and resolution In order to produce high quality images it is important to understand how the pixel data of images is measured and displayed Pixel dimensions The number of pixels along the height and width of a bitmap image The display size of an image on screen is determined by the pixel dimensions of the image
213. ap area The duplicate image map area appears on top of the original offset 10 pixels down and to the right and can be moved resized or otherwise modified Arranging image maps When image map areas overlap the last image map area you create is the top image map area in the stacking order You can specify which image map area is on the top and bottom of the stack and move image map areas up or down in the stacking order ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide To change the name of an image map area 1 Select an image map area 2 In the Image Map palette enter a new name in the Name text box To specify link options for an image map area 1 Select an image map area 2 In the Image Map palette enter a URL for the link or choose a previously created URL from the URL pop up menu You can enter a relative URL or a full URL If you enter a full URL be sure to include http for example enter http www adobe com not www adobe com For more information on using relative URLs and full URLs see an HTML reference either printed or on the Web 3 In the Image Map palette enter the name of a target frame in the Target text box or choose an option from the pop up menu A frame name must match a frame previously defined in the HTML file for the document When a user clicks the link the specified file displays in the new frame e blank to display the linked file in a new window leaving the original browser window open
214. appears in the Paths palette and defines the outline of a shape You can use paths in several ways e You can use a path asa layer clipping path to hide areas of a layer See Hiding portions of a layer on page 237 You can convert a path to a selection to use a shape as the basis for selecting pixels in an image See Converting between paths and selection borders Photoshop on page 180 You can edit a path to change its shape See Editing paths Photoshop on page 172 e Select Anti aliased to blend the shape s edge pixels with the surrounding pixels Set additional tool specific options See Setting shape tool options on page 164 Drawing with the pen tool on page 167 and Drawing with the freeform pen tool on page 169 5 Drag in the image to define the shape Continue drawing shapes as desired You can switch between shape tools by selecting a different tool in the toolbox or options bar Using the shape tools You use the shape tools to draw lines rectangles rounded rectangles and ellipses in an image In Photoshop you can also draw polygons and create custom shape libraries to reuse and share custom shapes Photoshop Select a shape in the options bar and click the inverted arrow to display options for the selected shape Setting shape tool options Each shape tool provides specific options for example you can set options that allow you to draw a rectan
215. applied across adjacent slice boundaries to prevent the appearance of seams between the slices See Previewing and controlling dithering on page 341 To link slices 1 Select two or more slices you want to link Note If the first slice you select is a user slice any auto slices you link to the first slice become user slices If the first slice you select is an auto slice any user slices you select are linked to the auto slice group 2 Choose Slices gt Link Slices Each linked set of user slices is assigned a different color for the slice display graphics in the upper left corner of the slice This helps to identify all the slices in one set To unlink user slices Do one of the following e To unlink a user slice select the slice and then choose Slices gt Unlink Slices e To unlink all user slices in a set select a slice in the set and choose Slices gt Unlink Set e To unlink all user slices in an image choose Slices gt Unlink All 286 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide 3 Do one of the following to define the image map area e With the rectangle or circle image map tool drag over the area you want to define Shift drag to constrain the area to a square Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS to drag an image map area from its center With the polygon image map tool click in the image to set the starting point Position the pointer where you want the first straight segment to end
216. area in which you want the command recorded in the droplet window To adjust droplet batch options 1 Do one of the following Before you create the droplet select an action and choose Batch Options from the Actions palette menu After you create the droplet double click the droplet to open the droplet window and double click Batch Options at the top of the droplet list 2 Select Original same name and folder to save the original file with the same name and in the same folder 3 Select Optimized to save an optimized version of the file Then do any of the following For In choose the location in which you want to save the optimized file For If Duplicate File Name choose how and whether to append numbers or letters to indicate the optimized file in cases of duplicate filenames Using the Automate commands Photoshop The Automate commands simplify complex tasks by combining them into one or more dialog boxes Photoshop includes the following commands third party companies may provide additional commands Conditional Mode Change changes the color mode of an image to the mode you specify based on the original mode of the image Record this command in an action to ensure that images use the correct color mode and avoid generating unwanted error messages Contact Sheet produces a series of thumbnail previews on a single sheet from the files in the selected folder See Creating contact sheets
217. areas in the background image TI SEE Sa LO ei ses A 1 SETI RAI Ra Se mara pi F Eb Kale El J L sa FR E NE i cechi tie e 2 Chapter 13 Saving and Exporting ImageReady Export Original to flatten the layers in a copy of the original image and save the copy ina variety of file formats Some information such as slices and optimization settings is not preserved when an original image is saved to file formats other than Photoshop Save for Web Photoshop and Save Optimized ImageReady to save an optimized image for the Web See Optimizing images on page 320 and Saving optimized images on page 347 Saving files You can save a file with its current filename location and format or with a different filename location format and options You can also save a copy of a file while leaving the current file open on your desktop To save changes to the current file Choose File gt Save To save a file with a different name and location 1 Choose File gt Save As 2 Type a filename and choose a location for the file 3 Click Save Images dobe Photoshop and Adobe ImageReady A support a variety of file formats to suit a wide range of output nee
218. arious option settings Photoshop even supports the next generation of Adobe composition engines offering you a choice of the every line and single line composers The every line composer sets multiple lines of text in relation to each other to ensure optimal line breaks while the single line composer handles one line of text at a time New character options With the controls in the new Character palette you can apply color on a per character basis scale characters vertically and horizontally and set baseline shift Plus Photoshop fully supports OpenType fonts and their related features such as all caps small caps superscript and subscript Photoshop produces faux versions of these text options for non OpenType fonts A new no break option controls whether or not a range of characters wraps as a single word Formatting options for Asian type Photoshop 6 0 includes extensive Asian formatting controls such as the following Tsume for manual kerning and tracking Tate chu yoko for setting horizontal text within vertical text Kinsoku shori for setting word breaks Burasagari for hanging punctuation and Mojikumi for auto kerning tracking and justification 52 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Preset Manager The new Preset Manager centralizes management of your custom brushes gradients shapes contours patterns and layer styles and offers instant access to extensive libraries of these elements included with Photoshop 6 0 Whe
219. ary rollovers in which moving a mouse over one area causes an image change in another area ImageReady adds JavaScript code to the resulting HTML file to specify rollover states Note When working with rollovers 11 is important to preview images in a Web browser to ensure your document will function correctly for Web users Also remember that image appearance will vary on different operating systems About rollovers A rollover is a Web effect in which different states of an image appear when a viewer performs a mouse action such as rolling or clicking over an area of the Web page A state is defined by a specific configuration of the Layers palette including layer location styles and other formatting options You use a slice or image map area to define the active area for a rollover By default every slice or image map area has one state the Normal state The Normal state corresponds to the appearance of an image when it is first loaded into a Web browser and no rollover effects have occurred When you add a new state to the rollover you capture a snapshot of the slice or image map area Designing Web Pages e top to replace the entire browser window with the linked file removing all current frames Note For more information on frames see an HTML reference either printed or on the Web 4 In the Image Map palette enter text for an Alt tag in the Alt text box The Alt text appears in place of the image map ar
220. at you reference briefly while using the application The palette well is only available when using a screen resolution greater than 800 pixels x 600 pixels a setting of at least 1024 x 768 is recommended Changing the palette display You can rearrange your palettes to make better use of your work area by using the following techniques e To make a palette appear at the front of its group click the palette s tab or choose Window gt Show To move an entire palette group drag its title bar e To rearrange or separate a palette group drag a palette s tab Dragging a palette outside of an existing group creates a new group To move a palette to another group drag the palette s tab to that group To display a palette menu position the pointer on the triangle in the upper right corner of the palette and press the mouse button e To change the size of a palette drag any corner of the palette Windows or drag the size box at its lower right corner Mac OS Not all palettes can be resized To collapse a group to palette titles only click the Minimize Maximize box Windows or the Zoom box Mac OS or double click a palette s tab You can still access the menu of a collapsed palette SS eee Layers Channels N Paths SS B channels patto SO Click to collapse or expand palette A Windows B Mac OS 60 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area To store other
221. ath Area option subtracts the overlapping area of the two shapes e The Restrict Path Area option B keeps only the overlapping area of the two shapes e The Invert Path Area option reverses the fill of the overlapping area of the two shapes and the background Drag with the shape tool to draw a shape that interacts with the first shape in the manner specified You can continue to add more variations to the custom shape using the different shape tools and options Photoshop Define a custom shape You can simplify the process of recreating a custom shape by storing it in the custom shape library You can then redraw the shape automatically at any time using the custom shape tool Select the shape that you just created and choose Edit gt Define Custom Shape Photoshop Draw with the custom shape tool Select the custom shape tool and choose your custom shape from the Shape list in the options bar Then drag in the image to draw the shape Adobe Photoshop Basics Working with type Creating type Photoshop and ImageReady provide excellent support for adding graphic type and text to images You can enter and preview type directly in an image as well as specify a full range of formatting options Type is automatically added to a new layer Set a type insertion point Select the type tool T in the toolbox and do one of the following e To enter type at a point click in the image to set an insertion point The type is add
222. ayer To show or hide the type bounding box ImageReady Do one of the following e Choose View gt Show gt Text Bounds Choose View gt Show Extras This command also shows or hides selection edges slices image maps text bounds text baseline and text selection See Working with Extras on page 77 Creating a type selection border Photoshop When you use the type tool with the Masked Type option selected you create a selection in the shape of the type Type selections appear on the active layer and can be moved copied filled or stroked just like any other selection To create a type selection border 1 Select the layer on which you want the selection to appear For best results create the type selection border on a normal image layer not a type layer 2 Select the type tool T and click the Masked Type button in the options bar 3 Select additional type options and enter type at a point or in a bounding box See Entering point type on page 252 and Entering paragraph type on page 252 The type selection border appears in the image on the active layer CHAPTER 9 Using Type 254 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide is horizontal the type lines flow from left to right Don t confuse the orientation of a type layer with the direction of characters in a type line See Rotating vertical type on page 264 To change the orientation of a type layer 1 Select the
223. ayer based slices To distribute user slices 1 Select the user slices you want to distribute 2 Do one of the following With the slice select tool active click a distribute option in the options bar Distribute Top Edges Distribute Vertical Centers amp Distribute Bottom Edges Distribute Left Edges h Distribute Horizontal Centers 44 Distribute Right Edges dd e Choose Slices gt Distribute and choose a command from the submenu Deleting user slices and layer based slices When you delete a user slice or layer based slice auto slices are regenerated to fill the document area Deleting a layer based slice does not delete the associated layer however deleting the layer associated with a layer based slice does delete the layer based slice Note You cannot delete auto slices If you delete all user slices and layer based slices in an image one auto slice layer will remain To delete a slice 1 Select a slice In ImageReady you can select multiple slices 2 Do one of the following Press the Backspace key or the Delete key e ImageReady Choose Slices gt Delete Slice s or choose Delete Slice from the Slice palette menu Designing Web Pages Aligning user slices ImageReady In ImageReady you can align user slices with the top bottom left right or middle Aligning user slices can eliminate unneeded auto slices and generate a smaller more efficient HTML file Note You
224. ayers are linked 2 Choose Layer gt Merge Visible or choose Merge Visible from the Layers palette menu Q To merge all visible layers into a new layer and create a new empty layer hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and choose Layer gt Merge Visible The original layers remain intact To stamp a layer or linked layers 1 Make sure that the two layers or linked layers you want to merge are visible Select the top layer of the pair 2 Press Ctrl Alt E Windows or Command Option E Mac OS 3 To stamp linked layers select one of the linked layers and press Ctrl Alt E Windows or Command Option E Mac OS The selected layer is stamped with the contents from the other linked layers Merging layers Merging layers layer sets layer clipping paths clipping groups linked layers or adjustment layers combines several layers into one and keeps file size manageable When you ve finalized the character istics and positioning of a layer s contents you can merge the layer with one or more layers to create partial versions of your composite image The intersection of all transparent areas in the merged layers remains transparent In addition to merging layers you can stamp layers which allows you to merge the contents of more than one layer into a target layer while leaving the other layers intact Typically the selected layer will stamp down to the layer below it To merge a layer with the layer below it
225. b file formats GIF JPEG and PNG and provide you with both basic and advanced controls for fine tuning the quality and compression level of the optimization Because live previews of the optimized image are regenerated whenever an optimization setting is adjusted you are free to experiment with different settings before committing to final changes Compare original and optimized images Choose File gt Save for Web Photoshop or Window gt Show Optimize ImageReady to display the Web optimization settings Click the Optimized tab above the image preview Photoshop or in the image window ImageReady to display how the image will appear on the Web using the current optimization settings To display original and optimized previews side by side click the 2 Up tab Choose an optimization set Photoshop and ImageReady provide a number of predefined optimization settings To apply a predefined optimization set choose the desired set from the Settings menu in the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the Optimize palette ImageReady 34 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide View optimized file information In Photoshop you can view optimized file information such as file size and projected download time for various modem speeds below the optimized preview in the Save for Web dialog box In ImageReady you can display two sets of file information in the status bar along the bottom edge of the image window Click the triangle next to either
226. bottom Each state is listed with the name of the tool or command used to change the image By default selecting a state dims those below This way you can easily see which changes will be discarded if you continue working from the selected state For information on customizing the history options see Setting history options Photoshop on page 71 By default selecting a state and then changing the image eliminates all states that come after If you select a state and then change the image eliminating the states that came after you can use the Undo command to undo the last change and restore the eliminated states By default deleting a state deletes that state and those that came after it If you choose the Allow Non Linear History option deleting a state deletes just that state See Setting history options Photoshop on page 71 e Select the area you want to restore and choose Edit gt Fill For Use choose History and click OK For more information see Filling and stroking selections and layers in online Help Note To restore the image with a snapshot of the initial state of the document choose History Options from the Palette menu and make sure that the Automatically Create First Snapshot option is on Reverting to any state of an image The History palette lets you jump to any recent state of the image created during the current working session Each time you app
227. box lets you divide one or more slices horizontally vertically or both Duplicate slices are always user slices regardless of whether the original is a user slice or an auto slice Note You cannot divide layer based slices To divide slices 1 Select one or more slices 2 Do one of the following e Choose Slices gt Divide Slice s Choose Divide Slice s from the Slice palette menu 3 Select Preview in the Divide Slice dialog box to preview the changes 4 Inthe Divide Slice dialog box select one or both of the following options Divide Horizontally Into to divide the slice lengthwise Divide Vertically Into to divide the slice width wise ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 79 User Guide To combine slices 1 Select two or more slices 2 Choose Slices gt Combine Slices Arranging user slices and layer based slices When slices overlap the last slice you create is the top slice in the stacking order You can change the stacking order to gain access to underlying slices You can specify which slice is on the top and bottom of the stack and move slices up or down in the stacking order Note You cannot arrange the stacking order of auto slices To change the stacking order of slices 1 Select a slice In ImageReady you can select multiple slices 2 Do one of the following e With the slice select tool active click a stacking order option in the options bar Bring to Front Bring Forward 3 Se
228. c OS to activate the move tool when using the shape tools 0 0 O C N 6 To create multiple copies of a selection within an image 1 Select the move tool or hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS to activate the move tool 2 Copy the selection Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag the selection To copy the selection and offset the duplicate by 1 pixel hold down Alt or Option and press an arrow key To copy the selection and offset the duplicate by 10 pixels press Alt Shift Windows or Option Shift Mac OS and press an arrow key As long as you hold down Alt or Option each press of an arrow key creates a copy of the selection and offsets it by the specified distance from the last duplicate To paste one selection into another Photoshop 1 Cut or copy the part of the image you want to paste 2 Select the part of the image into which you want to paste the selection The source selection and the destination selection can be in the same image or in two different Photoshop images 3 Choose Edit gt Paste Into The contents of the source selection appear masked by the destination selection proportion to the new image Use the Image Size command to make the source and destination images the same resolution before copying and pasting See Determining a recommended resolution for an image Photoshop on page 99 Depending on your color management settings a
229. ce For more information on browser support for PNG see your browser s documentation PNG 8 files use more advanced compression schemes than GIF and can be 10 30 smaller than GIF files of the same image depending on the image s color patterns Although PNG 8 compression is considered lossless optimizing an original 24 bit image as an 8 bit PNG file can result in the loss of color information Note With certain images especially those with very few colors and very simple patterns GIF compression can create a smaller file than PNG 8 compression View optimized images in GIF and PNG 8 format to compare file size transparency and you do not know the Web page background color or if the background will be a pattern you should use a format that supports transparency GIF PNG 8 or PNG 24 About GIF format The GIF format uses 8 bit color and efficiently compresses solid areas of color while preserving sharp detail such as that in line art logos or illustrations with type You also use the GIF format to create animated images GIF is supported by most browsers The GIF format uses LZW compression which is a lossless compression method However because GIF files are limited to 256 colors optimizing an original 24 bit image as an 8 bit GIF can result in the loss of color information In addition Photoshop and ImageReady allow you to apply lossy compression to a GIF file Using the Lossy option yields significantly
230. ce to optimize the selected slice to approximately the specified file size e All Slices Separately to optimize each slice in the image to approximately the specified file size All Slices Together to optimize the sum of the size of all slices to approximately the specified file size The total value is apportioned to individual slices based on each slice s relative size For example if you select three slices one of which is twice as large as the other two the large slice is optimized to 50 of the specified file size and each of the other slices is optimized to 25 of the specified file size 4 Specify a value for Desired File Size 5 Click OK Setting optimization options for PNG 24 format PNG 24 format is suitable for compressing continuous tone images However PNG 24 files are often much larger than JPEG files of the same image PNG 24 format is recommended only when working with a continuous tone image that includes multilevel transparency See About PNG 24 format on page 320 To optimize an image in PNG 24 format 1 Select a view in which to apply the optimization setting 2 Select the slice or slices to which you want to apply the optimization setting See Selecting slices on page 276 3 In the Optimize panel palette choose PNG 24 from the File Format menu in the Optimize panel palette 4 Select Interlaced to create an image that displays low resolution versions in a browser while the full
231. ced and that contains more than a single color must be printed on separate master plates one for each color This process is called color separation In Photoshop you can adjust how the various plates are generated and create traps Quality of detail The detail in a printed image results from a combination of resolution and screen frequency The higher an output device s resolution the finer higher a screen ruling you can use A valuable resource for all aspects of print publishing from early planning through prepress is the Print Publishing Guide an Adobe Press book For information on purchasing Adobe Press books visit the Adobe Web site at www adobe com or contact your local book distributor rinting is the process of sending your image to an output device You can print on paper or film positive or negative to a printing plate or directly to a digital printing press About printing Whether you are providing an image to an outside service bureau or just sending a quick proof to a desktop printer knowing a few basics about printing will make the print job go more smoothly and help ensure that the finished image appears as intended Types of printing When you print a file the Adobe Photoshop application sends your image to a printing device either to be printed directly onto paper or to be converted to a positive or negative image on film In the latter case the film can be used to create a master plate for prin
232. ces for saving 366 resizing in Channels palette 186 resizing in Paths palette 172 showing and hiding 275 snapping to 153 viewing 275 Slices palette 281 Small Caps command 263 Smart Highlighting option 156 smoothing edges of a selection 181 Snap command 153 Snapshot command 72 snapshots clearing 69 deleting 73 of state 69 undoing actions 400 soft proofs 131 Solidity option 192 Sort by Hue command 332 Sort by Luminance command 332 Sort by Popularity command 332 source channel 195 source selection 150 Split Channels command 188 spot channels adding 191 merging 193 options 193 saving 358 spot colors about 191 preventing knock out 193 trapping 194 stacking order arranging for image maps 290 arranging for slices 279 stamping layers 247 Standard Macintosh Color command 115 Show Options button 61 Show Options command 59 Show Paragraph command 265 Show Rulers command 74 Show Status Bar command See online Help Show Tool Tips preference 2 58 showing See hiding and showing single column marquee tool 140 single row marquee tool 140 Sixteen Bits Channel command 117 Size Download Time option 80 skewing placed artwork 105 type bounding box 253 Slice palette 271 slice select tool 276 slice tool 273 slices about 272 adding HTML text to 284 adding links to 282 compared to image maps 286 converting to selections 146 converting type of 274 creating layer based slices 274 creating user slices 273 deleting 280
233. character widths can cause type to run together or have too much extra space making it difficult to read You can turn off fractional character widths to fix type spacing in whole pixel increments and prevent small type from running together The fractional character width setting applies to all characters on a type layer you cannot set the option for selected characters To turn fractional character widths on or off Choose Fractional Widths from the Character palette menu A check mark indicates that the option is selected Rotating vertical type When working with vertical type you can rotate the direction of characters by 90 Rotated characters appear upright unrotated characters appear sideways perpendicular to the type line das Magnoliophyta das Magnoliophyta rn Original and type without vertical rotation Using ligatures and old style numerals When working with OpenType fonts you can use ligatures and old style typographic numerals in your type if the font provides them Ligatures are typographic replacements for certain pairs of characters such as fi and fl Old style numerals are shorter than regular numerals and some old style numerals descend below the type baseline Type with Ligatures option unselected and selected To use ligatures or old style numerals Choose Ligatures or Old Style from the Character palette menu A check mark indicates that the option is selected
234. cking In the Character palette enter or select a numeric value for Tracking m Adjusting horizontal or vertical scale Horizontal scale and vertical scale specify the proportion between the height and width of the type Unscaled characters have a value of 100 You can adjust scale to compress or expand selected characters in both width and height Note Depending on the value you enter when you use vertical type the horizontal scale may make the type appear narrower the opposite is true for vertical scale To adjust the horizontal or vertical scale of type In the Character palette enter a new percentage for Horizontal Scale FE or Vertical Scale IT Specifying baseline shift Baseline shift controls the distance that type appears from its baseline either raising or lowering the selected type to create superscripts or subscripts gt actus actus 1 n Default and baseline shift of 10 points 1 em corresponds to 1 point in a 10 point font 1 em corresponds to 10 points Because kerning and tracking units are 1 1000 em 100 units ina 10 point font are equivalent to 1 point CACTUS class Magnoliophyta CACTUS class Magnoliophyta int oe Default and tracking set to 350 To use a font s built in kerning information In the Character palette choose Metrics Photoshop or Auto ImageReady from the Kerning menu 4 Note The Metrics option replaces the
235. cks a clear interior make sure that the highlight covers the entire object and then select Force Foreground Select the eyedropper tool in the dialog box and click inside the object to sample the foreground color or click in the Color text box and use a color picker to select the foreground color This technique works best with objects that contain tones of a single color 7 Click Preview to preview the extracted object or skip to step 10 to extract the object without a preview Selected area highlighted and filled and extracted object Zoom in as needed and set any preview options Use Show menu options to switch between previews of the original and extracted images Use Display menu options to preview the extracted object against a colored matte background or as a grayscale mask To display a transparent background choose None e Select Show Highlight or Show Fill to display the object s highlight or fill Use Smart Highlighting to trace sharper edges Use a large brush to cover wispy intricate edges where the foreground blends into the background such as hair or trees 9 Ifyou use Smart Highlighting to mark an object edge that is near another edge decrease the brush size if conflicting edges pull the highlight off the object edge If the object edge has a uniform color on one side and high contrast edges on the other side keep the object edge within the brush area but center the brush on the un
236. create a new layer it is visible in all frames of an animation To hide a layer in a specific frame select the frame in the Animation palette and then hide the desired layer in the Layers palette You can use the Add Layer to New Frames option to automatically add a new layer to the image every time you create a frame The new layer is visible in the new frame but hidden in other frames Using this options saves time when you are creating an animation that requires you to add a new visual element to each frame 3 Choose a disposal method Automatic to determine a disposal method for the current frame automatically discarding the current frame if the next frame contains layer transparency For most animations the Automatic option yields the desired results and is therefore the default option Note Choose the Automatic disposal option when using the Redundant Pixel Removal optimization option to enable ImageReady to preserve frames that include transparency Do Not Dispose to preserve the current frame as the next frame is added to the display The current frame and preceding frames may show through transparent areas of the next frame To accurately preview an animation using the Do Not Dispose option preview the animation in a browser Restore to Background to discard the current frame from the display before the next frame is displayed Only a single frame is displayed at any time and the current frame will not a
237. ct 1 Select the layer in the Layers palette 2 Choose Layer gt Layer Style gt Scale Effects 3 Enter a percentage or drag the slider 4 Select Preview to preview the changes in the image 5 Click OK Removing layer styles You can remove a layer style that you have applied to a layer To remove a layer style 1 In the Layers palette select the layer containing the layer style you want to remove 2 Do one of the following Choose the desired layer style in the Layers palette and drag it to the Trash button Photoshop Double click the layer name or the layer thumbnail containing the layer style you want to remove In the Layer Styles dialog box deselect the layer style you want to remove To remove all layer effects applied to a layer 1 In the Layers palette select the layer containing the layer effects you want to remove 2 Do one of the following e In the Layers palette drag the Effects bar to the Trash button Choose Layer gt Layer Style gt Clear Layer Style To copy layer styles between layers 1 In the Layers palette select the source layer containing the layer style you want to copy 2 Choose Layer gt Layer Style gt Copy Layer Style 3 Do one of the following To paste into a single layer select the destination layer in the palette and choose Layer gt Layer Style gt Paste Layer Style To paste into multiple layers link the destination layers See L
238. ct the spot channel in the Channels palette 2 Choose Merge Spot Channel from the palette menu The spot color is converted to and merged with the color channels The spot channel is deleted from the palette Merging spot channels flattens layered images The merged composite reflects the preview spot color information including the Solidity settings For example a spot channel with a solidity of 50 will produce different merged results than the same channel with a solidity of 100 In addition the resulting merged spot channels usually don t reproduce the same colors as the original spot channels because CMYK inks can t represent the range of colors available from spot color inks Adjusting overlapping spot colors To prevent overlapping spot colors from either printing over or knocking out the underlying spot color remove one of the spot colors where they overlap To edit a spot channel 1 Select the spot channel in the Channels palette 2 Use a painting or editing tool to paint in the image Paint with black to add more spot color at 100 opacity paint with gray to add spot color with lower opacity Note Unlike the Solidity option in the Spot Channel Options dialog box the Opacity option in the painting or editing tool s options determines the actual density of ink used in the printed output To change a spot channel s options 1 Do one of the following e Double click the spot channel name in the Chann
239. cts 42 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide New layer styles The new Layer Styles dialog box shows at a glance which effects are applied to the currently selected layer To add effects to a layer you simply check each one you want in the list and specify appropriate settings Once you ve designed a custom layer style you can save it in the Styles palette for future use Layer BA Name fred glow stroke styles work just like layer effects applying nonde ME Heme Ped giow strok i M Include Layer Effects Cancel structive changes that update automatically when 8 11 E you change layer contents You can store styles in a default styles library or in your own style libraries nie aerie using the Preset Manager Style libraries are portable so you can share them with colleagues Plus Photoshop layer styles are compatible with ImageReady you can open a Photoshop layer style library in ImageReady and vice versa Styles spal Structure Blending Options Custom Blend Mode mutti gt Cancel I Drop Shadow urico Tinel a New Style T Inner Shadow Noise 0 96 F Outer Glow 3 M Preview FT Inner Glow Bevel and Emboss Contour Technique Softer z Layers Texture Spread 22 Normal E Opacity 100 gt F Satin Size 3 px eee te TT Color Overlay FI a Quality Gradient
240. d the Paste command and the drag and drop feature See Placing files on page 104 Using drag and drop to copy between applications on page 151 and Using the Clipboard to copy between appli cations on page 152 To open a PDF file 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Select the name of the file and click Open You can change which types of files show by selecting an option from the Files of Type Windows or Show Mac OS pop up menu 3 If you are opening a Generic PDF file do the following If the file contains multiple pages select the page you want to open and click OK e Indicate the desired dimensions resolution and mode If the file has an embedded ICC profile you can choose the profile from the mode pop up menu Select Constrain Proportions to maintain the same height to width ratio e Select Anti aliased to minimize the jagged appearance of the artwork s edges as it is rasterized e Click OK To import images from a PDF file 1 Choose File gt Import gt PDF Image select the file you want to import images from and click Open Turning off anti aliasing for PDF and EPS files ImageReady The Anti alias PostScript option removes jagged edges from a pasted or placed selection by making a subtle transition between the edges of the selection and its surrounding pixels Turning off this option produces a hard edged transition between pixels and therefore the appearance of jagged
241. d and background color controls see Choosing foreground and background colors in online Help Each default pointer has a different hot spot where an effect or action in the image begins With all tools except the move tool annotation tools and the type tool you can switch to precise cursors which appear as cross hairs centered around the hot spot To set the tool pointer appearance 1 Do one of the following Photoshop Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Display amp Cursors ImageReady Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Cursors 2 Choose a tool pointer setting e Click Standard under Painting Cursors Other Cursors or both to display pointers as tool icons Click Precise under Painting Cursors Other Cursors or both to display pointers as cross hairs Click Brush Size under Painting Cursors to display the painting tool cursors as brush shapes representing the size of the current brush Brush Size cursors may not display for very large brushes 3 Click OK The Painting Cursors options control the pointers for the following tools Photoshop Eraser pencil airbrush paint brush rubber stamp pattern stamp smudge blur sharpen dodge burn and sponge tools ImageReady Paintbrush pencil and eraser tools 58 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area To view or move a hidden tools list ImageReady 1 Position the pointer on the visible tool and hold down the mouse button until
242. d between different users systems and display and output devices To set up color management choose Edit gt Color Settings choose a predefined configuration from the Settings menu and click OK The configuration you choose defines the specific color spaces that Photoshop uses when working with images in RGB CMYK and Grayscale modes For complete information on setting up color management see the online help section on producing consistent color Scan the image at the correct size and resolution If you are scanning an image to be opened in Photoshop or ImageReady it s a good idea to scan the image as close as possible to the size dimensions and resolution that you want When in doubt scan at a higher resolution than what is needed You can always reduce the image later in Photoshop or ImageReady by cutting down the resolution or pixel dimensions Open or create an image Do one of the following Choose File gt Open and locate and select the desired image file Depending on your color management settings and the color profile associated with the file you may be prompted to specify how to handle color information in the file e Choose File gt New Enter a name for the image and specify its dimensions resolution Photoshop only and color mode Photoshop only In addition specify whether to fill the image with white the current background color or transparency 12 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Set rulers guides
243. d on for any combination of options from the Snap To submenu Using the Clipboard to copy between applications You can often use the Cut or Copy command to copy selections between Photoshop or ImageReady and other applications The cut or copied selection remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy another selection In some cases the contents of the Clipboard are converted to a raster image Photoshop prompts you when vector artwork will be rasterized Note The image 15 rasterized at the resolution of the file into which you paste it To change the Export Clipboard preference Photoshop 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General 2 Select Export Clipboard to save any Photoshop contents on the Clipboard when you exit from Photoshop If you leave this deselected the contents are deleted when you exit from the program 3 Click OK To paste PostScript artwork from another application 1 In the supporting application select your artwork and choose Edit gt Copy Applications that produce PostScript artwork include Adobe Illustrator versions 5 0 through 8 0 Adobe Dimensions and Adobe Streamline C For more information see About file formats in online Help CHAPTER 5 Selecting 152 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Saving and loading selections Selections can be saved and loaded for reuse See Saving a mask selection on page 200 To save a selection Choose Select gt Sav
244. d parts You can then toggle the visibility of layer sets hiding or showing them as you work or move a layer set in the stacking order by dragging it in the Layers palette And you can specify the opacity of an entire layer set Layer identification and locking Color coding layers in the Layers palette lets you quickly identify layer relationships Once your layers are set as desired you can lock them to prevent accidental edits Layers palette enhancements The enhanced Layers palette helps you handle layer effects more efficiently If you assign a layer effect to one layer ES Om EI FT le and want to reuse it on another just drag and drop it on the target layer All of the settings are Locking the selected layer preserved and instantly copied to the target layer Filllayers You can now experiment with color gradient or pattern fills by adding them to a new type of layer called a fill layer Like adjustment layers fill layers apply nondestructive changes to the underlying image and can be modified or discarded at any time 50 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide Expanded text features Photoshop 6 0 offers an expanded range of formatting options for both Roman and Asian text as well as direct on canvas text editing The new Character and Paragraph palettes make it easy to choose formatting options for your type Direct text editing in the image You can enter text and modify style directly in the image withou
245. d the mask to an existing selection press Ctrl Shift Windows or Command Shift Mac OS and click the channel To subtract the mask from an existing selection press Ctrl Alt Windows or Command Option Mac OS and click the channel e To load the intersection of the saved selection and an existing selection press Ctrl Alt Shift Windows or Command Option Shift Mac OS and select the channel To load a saved selection into an image Photoshop 1 Choose Select gt Load Selection For Document the active filename is selected 2 For Channel choose the channel containing the selection you want to load 3 Click Invert to make the nonselected areas selected and vice versa 4 If the destination image already has a selection indicate how to combine the selections For infor mation on these options see Saving a mask selection on page 200 5 Click OK 202 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie e 2 205 Chapter 8 Using Layers you can see through to the layers below All layers in a file have the same resolution start with the same number of channels and have the same image mode RGB CMYK or Grayscale Transparent areas on a layer let you see through to the layers below
246. data structure that contains multiresolution infor mation The highest resolution is the image s resolution when you save it Note Photoshop doesn t provide options for opening multiresolution files however Adobe InDesign and some image servers provide support for opening multiresolution formats 6 Select Save Transparency if you want to preserve transparency when the file is opened in another application When reopening the file in Photoshop or ImageReady transparency is always preserved regardless of whether you select this option 7 Click OK To save a file in TIFF format ImageReady 1 Choose File gt Export Original and choose TIFF from the format list 2 Specify a filename and location and click Save 3 Select a compression method and click OK See About file compression on page 365 About file formats You can use various file formats to get images into and out of Photoshop and ImageReady Graphic file formats differ in the way they represent graphic information as pixels or as vectors in how they compress image data and in which Photoshop and ImageReady features they support Saving and Exporting Images Up to optimize the compression of images with even vertical patterns Average to optimize the compression of low level noise by averaging the color values of adjacent pixels Paeth to optimize the compression of low level noise by reassigning adjacent color values e Adaptive
247. de to display your image as well as links rollovers and anima tions in a Web browser the Web reating small graphics files is key to C distributing images on the World Wide Web With smaller files Web servers can store and transmit images more efficiently and viewers can download images more quickly Likewise when preparing images for CD ROM or other multimedia viewing its important to make the image files as small as possible This conserves file storage space and decreases the amount of RAM needed for image display About optimization Optimization is the process of fine tuning the display quality and file size of an image for use on the Web or other online media Adobe Photoshop and Adobe ImageReady give you an effective range of controls for compressing the file size of an image while optimizing its online display quality You can optimize images in the three major graphic file formats used on the Web GIF Graphics Interchange Format JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group and PNG 8 or PNG 24 Portable Network Graphics with 8 bit or 24 bit color There are two methods of optimizing images For basic optimization the Photoshop Save As command lets you save an image as a GIF JPEG or PNG file Depending on the file format you can specify image quality background transparency or You can select a version of the image in 2 Up or 4 Up view to apply new optimization settings You can automatically repopulate
248. design that will be tiled on a Web page background 4 Click OK 5 Choose Image gt Crop to crop the image to the selected area This is not required if you use the entire image to create a tile 3 To select a solid color background to be displayed while the background image is downloading or to be displayed through any transparent areas in the background image click the Color box and choose a color using the color picker Alternatively click the triangle next to the Color box and select None Foreground Color Background Color or Other using the color picker or select a color from the pop up palette 4 Click OK To specify a background to be used with the current image 1 Open the Output Settings dialog box and select the Background preference set See Setting output options on page 348 2 For View As select Image 3 Select a background To select a background image click Choose and select an image to be used as a background behind the current image To select a solid color background click the Color box and choose a color using the color picker Alternatively click the triangle next to the Color box and select None Foreground Color Background Color or Other using the color picker or select a color from the pop up palette If you select a background image and a background color the background color displays while the background image is downloading It also displays through any transparent
249. desired text in the Copyright text box 4 Click OK Creating background images Many Web pages contain tiled background images created from a single graphic repeated as needed to fill the entire page In ImageReady you can create an HTML file that will display the current image as a tiled background in a Web browser You can also create an HTML file that will display another image or a solid color as a background behind the current image ImageReady includes the lt body background gt tag for the background image and the lt body bgcolor gt tag for the background color in the HTML file 352 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide To prepare an image for use as a tiled background image ImageReady 1 With an image displayed use the marquee tool 1 1 to select an area in an image to be used as a tiled background 2 Choose Filter gt Other gt Tile Maker 3 Choose one of the following Blend Edges to use the selection as a tiled background Then enter a percent value in the Width text box to specify how much of the edge to blend usually between 5 and 15 with a maximum of 20 Select Resize Tile to Fill Image to resize the blended tile to fill the original selection Deselect this option to create a tile that is smaller than the original selection reduced by the amount specified in Width e Kaleidoscope Tile to flip and duplicate the selection horizontally and vertically and blend the edges to create an abstract
250. dient and Pattern Overlay to overlay a color gradient or pattern on a layer e Stroke to outline the object on the current layer using color a gradient or a pattern It is particu larly useful on hard edged shapes such as type The preset layer styles in the Styles palette Styles pop up palette Photoshop and the style libraries are composed of one or more of these layer effects and typically have been customized to create a specific result To apply a layer style to a layer 1 Select a method for applying the layer style e Click the style thumbnail in the Styles palette to apply it to the currently selected layer in the active document Press Shift as you drag to add the layer style while preserving layer effects on the desti nation layer that are not duplicated by the new layer style Any duplicated layer effects will be replaced by the new layer style Drag the style thumbnail from the Styles palette onto a layer in the Layers palette Press Shift as you drag to add the layer style while preserving layer effects on the destination layer that are not duplicated by the new layer style Any duplicated layer effects will be replaced by the new layer style The layer style is applied to the layer that contains pixel data under the drop point If there is no pixel data in that location of the image the layer style is not applied CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 228 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide To scale a layer effe
251. different color inks to reproduce different gray levels they are treated in Photoshop as single channel 8 bit grayscale images In Duotone mode you do not have direct access to the individual image channels as in RGB CMYK and Lab modes Instead you manipulate the channels through the curves in the Duotone Options dialog box To convert an image to duotone 1 Convert the image to grayscale by choosing Image gt Mode gt Grayscale Only 8 bit grayscale images can be converted to duotones 2 Choose Image gt Mode gt Duotone The horizontal axis of the curve graph moves from highlights at the left to shadows at the right The density of the ink increases as you move up the vertical axis You can specify up to 13 points on the curve When you specify two values along the curve Adobe Photoshop calculates intermediate values As you adjust the curve values are automatically entered in the percentage text boxes The value you type in a text box indicates the percentage of the ink color that will be used to print that percentage of the image For example if you enter 70 in the 100 text box a 70 dot of that ink color will be used to print the 100 shadow areas of the image 4 Click Save in the Duotone Curve dialog box to save curves created with this dialog box 5 Click Load to load these curves or curves created in the Curves dialog box including curves created using the Arbitrary Map option See Saving and lo
252. directories Select Suppress Color Profile Warnings to turn off display of color policy messages 5 Select a destination for the processed files from the Destination menu None to leave the files open without saving changes unless the action included a Save command e Save and Close to save the files in their current location When creating a droplet in Mac OS add exe to the end of the droplet name Using the exe extension makes droplets compatible with both Windows and Mac OS References to filenames are not supported between operating systems Any action step that references a file or folder name such as an Open command Save command or adjustment command that loads its settings from a file will pause and prompt the user for a filename Using droplets to process files To use a droplet simply drag a file or folder onto the droplet icon in Photoshop or 4 in ImageReady If the application you used to create the droplet is not currently running the droplet launches it In ImageReady you can control droplet processing in the following ways To temporarily pause processing click Pause Click Resume to continue the processing To cancel processing click Stop Editing droplets ImageReady In ImageReady you can edit the commands in a droplet in the same ways you edit the commands in an action You can also set batch options for a droplet before or after you create it For example you
253. ditor used to create it Otherwise it will be lost if you create a new one or if you replace rather than append a new library of the same type To create load save or delete libraries 1 Choose Edit gt Preset Manager 2 Choose a preset type from the Preset Type menu 3 Do one of the following e Choose Save Set then enter a name for the library If you want to save it to a folder other than the default navigate to the new folder before saving Choose Load then select a library from the list If you want to load a library located in another folder navigate to that folder then select the library Or select a library from the pop up menu Choose Delete to delete the selected presets in the library You can delete the default presets but they can always be restored To reset or replace libraries 1 Choose Edit gt Preset Manager 2 Select the preset type you want to reset or replace in the Preset Type menu Any unsaved presets in the list will be lost You may want to save the current library before you continue ImageReady To specify a browser to be launched by the Preview In keyboard shortcut Do one of the following Choose File gt Preview In then choose an option from the submenu e Select a browser from the Preview in Default Browser tool in the toolbox The shortcut specification takes effect immedi ately and will persist the next time you launch ImageReady Managing libraries wi
254. docking and storage In Photoshop 6 0 you can dock palettes to each other You can also store the palettes you use most often in the palette well in the options bar where they are readily available when you need them but out of your way when you re focused on a task When you want to display a palette in the well click the palette s tab click again and the palette tucks out of sight Improved color management and proofing The new Edit gt Color Settings command simplifies ICC based color management by gathering controls in a single dialog box and offering a choice of predefined color management settings based on common press and Web conditions Based on Adobe Color Engine ACE technology this color management workflow encompasses much of the RGB CMYK and Grayscale setup controls of previous Photoshop versions and offers improved integration with Adobe Illustrator 9 0 and other upcoming Adobe products In addition Photoshop 6 0 provides new controls for generating soft proofs of images on screen and for printing hard proofs based on ICC color profiles What s New in Adobe Photoshop 0 Enhanced layer management Layers are more flexible than ever in Photoshop 6 0 Now you can create hundreds of layers in an image to help arrange elements in an intricate composition In addition you can use an array of new features to help organize and manage layers more efficiently Layersets You can organize layers into sets to keep better track of relate
255. dows or the document window Mac OS See Displaying file and image information on page 78 To display the current image size Do one of the following Photoshop Press Alt Windows or Option Mac OS position the pointer over the file information box and hold down the mouse button The box displays the width and height of the image both in pixels and in the unit of measurement currently selected for the rulers the number of channels and the image resolution ImageReady Click an image information box and select Image Dimensions from the pop up menu The box displays the width and height of the image in pixels 1 by 1 inch 100 ppi image and so has four times the file size Image resolution thus becomes a compromise between image quality capturing all the data you need and file size Another factor that affects file size is file format due to varying compression methods used by GIF JPEG and PNG file formats file sizes can vary considerably for the same pixel dimensions Similarly color bit depth and the number of layers and channels in an image affect file size Photoshop supports a maximum file size of 2 GB and maximum pixel dimensions of 30 000 by 30 000 pixels per image This restriction places limits on the print size and resolution available to an image Changing image size and resolution Once you have scanned or imported an image you may want to adjust its size In Photoshop the Im
256. ds You can save or export your image to any of these formats You can also use special Photoshop features to add information to files set up multiple page layouts and place images in other applications Saving images The saving options that are available to you vary between Photoshop and ImageReady Keep in mind that the primary focus of ImageReady is producing images for the Web If ImageReady doesn t provide the file format or option you need you can jump to Photoshop You can use the following commands to save images e Save to save changes you ve made to the current file In Photoshop the file is saved in the current format in ImageReady the Save command always saves to PSD format Save As to save an image with a different location or filename In Photoshop the Save As command lets you save an image in a different format and with different options The available options vary depending on the format you choose In ImageReady the Save As command always saves to PSD format Setting file saving options Photoshop You can set a variety of file saving options in the Save As dialog box The availability of options depends on the image you are saving and the selected file format For example if an image doesn t contain multiple layers or if the selected file format doesn t support layers the Layers option is dimmed As a Copy Savesacopy of the file while keeping the current file open on your desktop Alpha
257. duce the storage space required by bitmap image data Compression techniques are distinguished by whether they remove detail and color from the image Lossless techniques compress image data without removing detail lossy techniques compress images by removing detail The following are commonly used compression techniques Run Length Encoding RLE is a lossless compression technique supported by Photoshop and some common Windows file formats Lemple Zif Welch LZW is a lossless compression technique supported by TIFF PDF GIF and PostScript language file formats This technique is most useful in compressing images that contain large areas of single color such as screenshots or simple paint images Embedding a digital watermark in an image lets viewers obtain complete contact information about the creator of the image This feature is particularly valuable to image creators who license their work to others Copying an image with an embedded watermark also copies the watermark and any information associated with it For more information on embedding digital watermarks see Adding digital copyright information in online Help Setting preferences for saving files Photoshop In Photoshop you can set preferences for saving image previews using file extensions and maximizing file compatibility To set file saving preferences Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Saving Files and set the following opti
258. e Choose Rotate Character from the Character palette menu A check mark indicates that the option is selected Note You cannot rotate double byte characters full width characters only available in Chinese Japanese and Korean fonts Any double byte characters in the selected range will not be rotated Formatting paragraphs A paragraph is any range of type with a carriage return at the end You use the Paragraph palette to set options that apply to entire paragraphs such as the alignment indentation and space between lines of type For point type each line is a separate paragraph For paragraph type each paragraph can have multiple lines depending on the dimen sions of the bounding box Selecting paragraphs and showing the Paragraph palette You can use the Paragraph palette to set formatting options for a single paragraph multiple paragraphs or all paragraphs in a type layer To select paragraphs for formatting Do one of the following e Select the type tool T and click in a paragraph to apply formatting to a single paragraph e Select the type tool and make a selection within a range of paragraphs to apply formatting to multiple paragraphs Indenting paragraphs Indentation specifies the amount of space between type and the bounding box or line that contains the type Indentation affects only the selected paragraph or paragraphs so you can easily set different indentations for paragraphs To specif
259. e ImageReady 1 Choose Image gt Image Size 2 To maintain the current proportions of pixel width to pixel height select Constrain Proportions 3 Under New Size enter values for Width Height or Percent The New Size text field displays the new file size for the image 4 Select a resampling method from the Quality pop up menu 5 Click OK to change the pixel dimensions and resample the image For information on setting action options see Recording image size options ImageReady on page 398 Changing the print dimensions and resolution of an image Photoshop When creating an image for print media it s useful to specify image size in terms of the printed dimensions and the image resolution These two measurements referred to as the document size determine the total pixel count and therefore the file size of the image document size also determines the base size at which an image is placed into another application You can further manipulate the scale of the printed image in the Print Options dialog box however changes you make in the Print Options dialog box affect only the printed image not the document size of the image file See Positioning and scaling images on page 377 Changing the pixel dimensions of an image When preparing images for online distribution it s useful to specify image size in terms of the pixel dimensions Keep in mind that changing pixel dimensions affects not only th
260. e Some imagesetters and 600 dpi laser printers use screening technologies other than halftoning If you are printing an image on a nonhalftone printer consult your service provider or your printer documentation for the recommended image resolutions and grocery coupons B 85 lpi Average screen typically used to print newspapers C 133 lpi High quality screen typically used to print four color magazines D 177 lpi Very fine screen typically used for annual reports and images in art books File size The digital size of an image measured in kilobytes K megabytes MB or gigabytes GB File size is proportional to the pixel dimensions of the image Images with more pixels may produce more detail at a given printed size but they require more disk space to store and may be slower to edit and print For instance a 1 by 1 inch 200 ppi image contains four times as many pixels as a 94 CHAPTER 2 Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady For example when you display a 1 by 1 inch 144 ppi image on a 72 dpi monitor it appears in a 2 by 2 inch area on screen Because the monitor can display only 72 pixels per inch it needs 2 inches to display the 144 pixels that make up one edge of the image Printer resolution The number of ink dots per inch dpi produced by all laser printers including imagesetters Most desktop laser printers have a resolution of 600 dpi and imagesetters have a resolution of 1200 dpi or higher T
261. e The two values that appear above the divided slider indicate the partial blending range Keep the following guidelines in mind when speci fying blending ranges Use the This Layer sliders to specify the range of pixels on the active layer that will blend and therefore appear in the final image For example if you drag the white slider to 235 pixels with brightness values higher than 235 will remain unblended and will be excluded from the final image Use the Underlying sliders to specify the range of pixels in the underlying visible layers that will blend in the final image Blended pixels are combined with pixels in the active layer to produce composite pixels while unblended pixels show through overlying areas of the active layer For example if you drag the black slider to 19 pixels with brightness values lower than 19 will remain unblended and will show through the active layer in the final image 4 To restrict blending of interior effects such as Inner Glow Satin and the Color Pattern or Gradient Overlay select Blend Interior Effects as Group When this option is selected the blending mode of the layer is applied to all layer effects falling inside the layer bounds Blend Interior Effects as Group option deselected and selected Specifying a range for blending layers Photoshop The sliders in the Blending Options dialog box let you control which pixels from the active layer and which pixels fro
262. e This insures that the colors are consistent across frames See Generating a color table on page 330 310 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 311 User Guide Opening and importing files as animations You can use the animation features in ImageReady to edit animated GIFs multilayered Photoshop files and QuickTime movies Opening animated GIFs You can open an existing animated GIF in ImageReady using the File gt Open command The file is opened as a stack of layers Each layer corresponds to one frame In each frame the layer for that frame is visible and the layers for the other frames are hidden Opening existing animated GIF files in ImageReady is useful primarily for applying optimization settings to the files The one layer per frame structure of imported animated GIF files may make it impractical to edit animation frames in other ways Opening Photoshop files as animations You can easily create animated GIFs from existing one layer per frame images in Adobe Photoshop file format or from a group of single layer images You can make each layer in a multilayer Photoshop file a separate frame in the Animation palette The layers are placed in the Animation palette in their stacking order with the bottom layer becoming the first frame To save an animation as an animated GIF 1 Optimize the animation as described in Optimizing animations on page 309 2 Save the image as described in Saving optimized im
263. e for example filename serial number or serial letter to prevent files from overwriting each other For File Name Compatibility choose Windows Mac OS and UNIX to make filenames compatible with Windows Mac OS and UNIX operating systems Saving files using the Batch command options e always saves the files in the same format as the original files To create a batch process that saves files in a new format record the Save As command followed by the Close command as part of your original action Then choose Override Action Save In Commands for the Destination when setting up the batch process 6 Select an option for error processing from the Errors pop up menu Stop for Errors to suspend the process until you confirm the error message ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Folder to save the processed files to another location Click Choose to specify the destination folder Select Override Action Save In Commands if you want Save As commands in the action to refer to the batched files rather than the filenames and locations specified in the action Deselect Override Action Save In Commands if the action contains Save As commands for specific files that are required by the action 6 If you chose Folder as the destination specify a file naming convention and select file compati bility options for the processed files For File Naming select elements from the pop up menus or enter text into the fi
264. e Selection To load a saved selection Photoshop 1 Choose Select gt Load Selection then enter the options in the Load Selection dialog window 2 Click OK to load selection See Loading a selection into an image on page 201 To load a saved selection ImageReady Choose Select gt Load Selection then choose an option from the submenu Deleting selections To delete a selection choose Edit gt Clear or press Backspace Windows or Delete Mac OS To cut a selection to the Clipboard choose Edit gt Cut Deleting a selection on a background or on a layer with the Lock Transparency option selected in the Layers palette replaces the original location with the background color Deleting a selection on a layer without Lock Transparency selected replaces the original area with the layer transparency To choose options from the Snap To submenu Choose View gt Snap To and choose from the submenu Guides Slices and Document Bounds in any combination to snap to these options Photoshop You can also choose the Grid option from the Snap To submenu e All to turn snap on for all available options in the submenu None to turn snap off for all options To activate or suppress snap Choose View gt Snap When snap is chosen activated options in the Snap To submenu display a check mark When snap is suppressed a dot Windows or a dash Mac OS appears next to chosen options in the Snap To
265. e a resolution the same as the screen frequency no lower than 72 pixels per inch To import an image using the TWAIN interface ImageReady 1 If you re using the TWAIN device for the first time with ImageReady choose File gt Import gt TWAIN Select Then select the device you want to use You do not need to repeat this step for subse quent use of the TWAIN module If more than one TWAIN device is installed in your system and you want to switch devices use the TWAIN Select command 2 To import the image choose File gt Import gt TWAIN Acquire For more information about scanning see Scanning using the resolution setting Photoshop Scanning using the file size setting Photoshop Optimizing the dynamic range of the scan Photoshop and Eliminating unwanted color casts Photoshop in online Help Creating new images The New command lets you create a blank image To create a new image 1 Do one of the following e To base the image dimensions and resolution Photoshop on the Clipboard contents choose File gt New If the Clipboard does not contain image data the image dimensions and resolution are based on the last image you created Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady If your scanner does not have an Adobe Photoshop compatible scanner driver import the scan using the TWAIN interface See Importing an image using the TWAIN interface on page 100 If you can t i
266. e active layer invisible Keep in mind however that changes still affect the layer To select a layer Do one of the following In the Layers palette click a layer or layer set to make it active e Select the move tool right click Windows or Control click Mac OS in the image and choose the layer you want from the context menu The context menu lists all the layers that contain pixels under the current pointer location For information on selecting layers interactively with the move tool see Moving selections and layers within an image on page 149 The name of the active layer appears in the title bar of the image window and a paintbrush appears next to the layer in the Layers palette CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 208 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide To change the order of layers by dragging 1 In the Layers palette select the layer or the layer set you want to move 2 Drag the layer up or down in the Layers palette When the highlighted line appears in the desired position release the mouse button Note By default the background cannot be moved from the bottom of the layer list unless it 1s first converted to a layer See the procedure to convert a background into a layer in Adding layers on page 210 Linking layers By linking two or more layers you can move their contents together You can link layers outside a layer set to each other to a layer within a layer set or to
267. e also copying E edge sensitivity lasso tool 143 edges smoothing 181 editing layers 216 shapes 171 See also names of individual editing tools Eight Bits Channel command 117 elliptical marquee tool 140 embedding images See OLE embedding profiles 134 EPS files opening 104 placing 104 saving 359 Erase to History option 68 eraser tool 68 erasing fastening points 141 lasso segments 142 See also online Help Export Clipboard option 152 dpi dots per inch 94 drawing constraining shapes 164 166 differences between Photoshop and ImageReady 162 shapes 161 with the pen tools 166 with the shape tools 162 drivers scanner 99 Drop Shadow effect 227 droplets about 406 applying to slices 285 creating for optimization 346 410 creating in ImageReady 408 creating in Photoshop 407 editing 408 in actions 399 Duotone mode 113 116 duotones about 113 384 creating 385 curve 386 exporting to other applications 388 ink colors 385 overprint colors 387 printing 388 saving and loading settings 387 viewing individual plates 387 Duplicate Channel command 187 Duplicate command 73 Duplicate Layer command 212 Duplicate Merged Layers Only option 73 Duplicate Path command 176 converting to indexed color images 118 create by mixing channels 190 definition of 112 for storing selections 185 halftone screen attributes for 380 Grayscale mode 112 116 Grayscale preview of color selections 145
268. e bit depth 417 Copy Frames command 304 Copy HTML Code command 348 Copy Layer Style command 229 Copy Preloads command 348 Copy Selected Slices command 348 Copy Slice command 279 Copy State command 297 copying and pasting 149 animation frames 304 between applications 151 channels 187 layers between images 211 optimization settings between slices 285 PostScript artwork from Clipboard 152 rollover states 296 selections 149 150 slices 279 styles 229 See also duplicating copyright information adding to files See online Help viewing 78 correcting mistakes about 68 reverting to saved image 68 undoing last action 68 Create Droplet command in Actions palette 408 in Automate submenu 407 in Optimize palette 346 410 Create Layers command 230 Create Selection from Slice command 146 Create Slice from Selection command 273 composite channel 186 compositing specifying a color range 225 specifying a mode 216 composition of type 267 compression about 365 choosing a file format 317 GIF format 319 JPEG format 318 PNG 24 format 320 PNG 8 format 319 See also optimizing images CompuServe GIF format See GIF format Conditional Mode Change command 410 Constant option 190 Contact Sheet II command 368 context menus 64 Contiguous option 143 continuous tone images about 91 choosing a compression format for 317 printing 375 contours 236 editing 236 Gloss Contour option 233 layer s
269. e center point can be outside the bounding box Photoshop To skew the bounding box hold down Ctrl Shift Windows or Command Shift Mac OS and drag a side handle The pointer turns into an arrowhead with a small double arrow Photoshop To scale the type as you resize the bounding box Ctrl drag Windows or Command drag Mac OS a corner handle Note You can also transform type layers using the transformation commands in the Edit menu except for Perspective and Distort To enter paragraph type 1 Select the type tool T 2 Photoshop Click the New Type Layer button T in the options bar 3 Clickan orientation option in the options bar e Horizontal I to enter type horizontally e Vertical 1T to enter type vertically 4 Do one of the following Drag diagonally to define a bounding box for the type Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS as you click or drag to display the Text Box Size dialog box Enter values for Width and Height and click OK 5 Select additional type options in the options bar Character palette and Paragraph palette See Formatting characters on page 258 and Formatting paragraphs on page 265 6 Enter the characters you want Press Enter on the main keyboard Windows or Return Mac OS to begin a new paragraph If you enter more type than can fit in the bounding box the overflow icon E appears on the bounding box 7 Photoshop If desired re
270. e clone stamp tool selected choose a brush from the options bar Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the image area you want to sample Release Alt Option and then drag to paint with the sample For best results use short strokes when painting and Alt Option click to take updated samples frequently between strokes This helps to producea ney oving areas with the clone stamp tool smoother more natural effect 18 Adobe Photoshop Basics Editing images Making pixel selections Before you can edit an area of an image you must first select the image area This type of selection 1s called a pixel selection because you are selecting an area that contains pixel information If you experience trouble selecting the image area you want you may need to check that you are working on the proper layer Select with a marquee tool The marquee tools let you select image areas by dragging to define a shaped selection border First select the rectangular marquee i_ or the elliptical marquee 3 from the toolbox Then drag over the area you want to select Reposition a selection border At times you may want to adjust the position of a selection border to enclose a different area of the image To reposition a selection border using any selection tool move the pointer inside the border and drag to the desired location Or use the arrow keys to move the selection border in gradual increments Select with a lasso tool The lasso
271. e default background color Background Color to fill the background or first layer with the current background color C For more information see Choosing foreground and background colors in online Help Transparent to make the first layer transparent with no color values The resulting document will have a single transparent layer as its contents 5 Click OK To specify the file format in which to open a file Photoshop Do one of the following e Windows Choose File gt Open As and select the file you want to open Then choose the desired format from the Open As pop up menu and click Open e Mac OS Choose File gt Open and choose All Documents from the Show pop up menu Then select the file you want to open choose the desired file format from the Format pop up menu and click Open Important If the file does not open then the chosen format may not match the file s true format or the file may be damaged Opening and importing PDF files Portable Document Format PDF is a versatile file format that can represent both vector and bitmap data and can contain electronic document search and navigation features PDF is the primary format for Adobe Illustrator 9 0 and Adobe Acrobat For more information see PDF in online Help Some PDF files contain a single image Other PDF files called Generic PDF files may contain multiple pages and images When you open a Generic
272. e following Click an action name to select a single action e Shift click action names to select multiple discontiguous actions e Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS action names to select multiple contiguous actions To display actions as buttons Photoshop Choose Button Mode from the Actions palette menu Choose Button Mode again to return to list mode Recording actions Keep in mind the following guidelines when recording actions You can record most but not all commands in an action You can record operations that you perform with the marquee move polygon lasso magic wand Crop slice magic eraser gradient paint bucket type shape notes eyedropper and color sampler tools as well as those that you perform in the History Swatches Color Paths Channels Layers Styles and Actions palettes In ImageReady you can drag a command from the History palette to the action in the Actions palette in which you want the command recorded You cannot drag italicized commands from the History palette to the Actions palette Commands in italics are nonactionable CHAPTER 15 Automating Tasks Using the Actions palette You use the Actions palette to record play edit and delete individual actions This palette also lets you save and load action files In Photoshop actions are grouped into sets you can create new sets to better organize your actions See Organizing sets
273. e is out of date To turn Auto Regenerate on or off In the Optimize palette choose Auto Regenerate from the palette menu A check mark indicates that the option is turned on To manually optimize an image Choose a method for optimizing Click the Regenerate button 4 in the lower right corner of the optimized image if it appears Optimizing Images for the Web Resizing the image during optimization Photoshop Save For Web dialog box When optimizing an image in the Photoshop Save For Web dialog box you can resize the image to specified pixel dimensions or to a percentage of the original size Note You can also resize an image by choosing Image gt Image Size See Changing the pixel dimensions of an image on page 97 To change the pixel dimensions of an image during optimization 1 Click the Image Size tab in the Save For Web dialog box 2 To maintain the current proportions of pixel width to pixel height select Constrain Proportions 3 Enter values for Width Height or Percent The New Size text field displays the new file size for the image 4 Choose an interpolation method from the Quality pop up menu Jagged Nearest Neighbor for the faster but less precise method This method is recommended for use with illustrations containing non anti aliased edges to preserve hard edges and produce a smaller file e Smooth Bicubic for the slower but more precise method resulting in smoo
274. e map area rather than a tool based image map area For example if you create a rollover button that displays a glow effect in the Over state a layer based image map area will automatically adjust to encompass the pixels that are produced by the glow Important If you overlap image map areas the topmost area is active To create an image map area using an image map tool 1 Select the rectangle image map tool Li the circle image map tool gh or the polygon image map tool Qq in the toolbox 2 For the rectangle or circle image map tool select Fixed Size to specify set values for the image map area s dimensions Enter pixel values in whole numbers To set image map display preferences 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Image Maps 2 To change the color of image map lines choose a color from the Line Color pop up menu Changing the color of image map lines also changes the line color of selected image map areas to a contrasting color 3 To change the strength of image map color adjustments enter a value or choose a value from the Image Map Overlay pop up slider The value determines the extent of color adjustments that dim the brightness and contrast of unselected image map areas 4 To display image map lines only and deselect color adjustment display select Show Lines Only 5 To show a bounding box for circular image map areas select Show Bounding Box Selecting and modifying image maps ImageReady You
275. e or select it in the image using the direct selection tool Kk 2 To convert the path do one of the following e Click the Load Path as a Selection button amp at the bottom of the Paths palette e Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS the path thumbnail in the Paths palette To convert a path to a selection border and specify settings 1 To combine the path with a selection first make the selection using a selection tool 2 Select the path in the Paths palette or select it in the image using the direct selection tool Kk Drawing and Editing To rename a saved path 1 Double click the path s name in the Paths palette 2 Enter a new name in the Rename Path dialog box and click OK Note You cannot rename a layer clipping path If you double click a layer clipping path you ll make a copy of it 3 If you have created a copy of a layer clipping path by double clicking it you can enter a new name for it in the Save Path dialog box To delete a path 1 Select the path name in the Paths palette 2 Do one of the following e Drag the path to the Trash button if at the bottom of the Paths palette Choose Delete Path from the Paths palette menu Click the Trash button at the bottom of the Paths palette and click Yes Q To delete a path without being asked to confirm Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the Trash button at the bottom of the Paths palette ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
276. e path Press Enter or Return to end an open path Double click to close the path with a magnetic segment Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and double click to close the path with a straight segment 7 Draw additional path components if desired Choose a shape area option to determine how overlapping path components intersect See Drawing overlapping shapes Photoshop on page 171 8 Click the OK button in the options bar or press Enter or Return to dismiss the drawing tools Drawing overlapping shapes Photoshop In Photoshop you can draw multiple shapes in a layer or modify a path using one or more of the drawing tools You can specify how overlapping shapes path segments and path components interact using the shape area options Editing paths Photoshop A path is composed of one or more path components collections of one or more anchor points jointed by segments Because they take up less disk space than pixel based data paths can be used for long term storage of simple masks Paths can also be used to clip sections of your image for export to an illustration or page layout application See Using image clipping paths on page 369 About anchor points direction lines direction points and components A path consists of one or more straight or curved segments Anchor points mark the endpoints of the path segments On curved segments each selected anchor point d
277. e recommended for your press or desktop printer and click OK Move a selection To move a selected pixel area select the move tool in the toolbox Position the pointer inside the selection and drag the selection to a new location ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide Duplicate a selection You can also use the move tool to duplicate a selection With the move tool selected simply Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS the selection to copy it Duplicating a selection Rotating a selection Apply atransformation The transformation commands let you make geometric changes such as resizing rotations shears distortions and reflections to a selection To apply a transformation do one of the following Choose the desired command from the Edit gt Transform menu In Photoshop this menu changes to Edit gt Transform Path if a vector shape is selected e Select the move tool and select Show Bounding Box in the options bar If applicable drag the handles that appear around the selection to achieve the desired effect Then press Enter or Return to apply the transformation You can even choose additional transformation commands before you press Enter or Return adjusting the handles for each command to achieve a cumulative effect Apply a filter Photoshop and ImageReady provide a generous array of filters for creating all kinds of special effects from blurs and ripples to mosaics brushlike patterns and ot
278. e scanner name from the File gt Import submenu See your scanner documen tation for instructions on installing the scanner plug in For more information see Using plug in modules in online Help Determining a recommended resolution for an image Photoshop If you plan to print your image using a halftone screen the range of suitable image resolutions depends on the screen frequency of your output device You can have Photoshop determine a recommended resolution for your image based on your device s screen frequency See About image size and resolution on page 92 Note If your image resolution 15 more than 2 5 times the screen ruling an alert message appears when you try to print the image This means that the image resolution is higher than necessary for the printer Save a copy of the file and then reduce the resolution To determine a suggested resolution for an image 1 Choose Image gt Image Size 2 Click Auto 3 For Screen enter the screen frequency for the output device If desired choose a new unit of measurement Note that the screen value is used only to calculate the image resolution not to set the screen for printing Important To specify the halftone screen ruling for printing you must use the Halftone Screens dialog box accessible through the Print Options dialog box See Selecting halftone screen attributes on page 379 4 For Quality select an option Draft to produc
279. e size of an image on screen but also its image quality and its printed characteristics either its printed dimensions or its image resolution See About image size and resolution on page 92 To change the pixel dimensions of an image Photoshop 1 Choose Image gt Image Size 2 Make sure that Resample Image is selected and choose an interpolation method See Choosing an interpolation method on page 96 3 To maintain the current proportions of pixel width to pixel height select Constrain Propor tions This option automatically updates the width as you change the height and vice versa 4 Under Pixel Dimensions enter values for Width and Height To enter values as percentages of the current dimensions choose Percent as the unit of measurement The new file size for the image appears at the top of the Image Size dialog box with the old file size in parentheses 5 Click OK to change the pixel dimensions and resample the image For best results in producing a smaller image downsample and apply the Unsharp Mask filter To produce a larger image rescan the image at a higher resolution 3 To maintain the current proportions of image width to image height select Constrain Propor tions This option automatically updates the width as you change the height and vice versa 4 Under Document Size enter new values for the height and width If desired choose a new unit of measurement Note that for Width
280. e the next point 5 Choose a shape area option to determine what happens at the intersection of overlapping path segments and components See Drawing overlapping shapes Photoshop on page 171 6 Click or drag to set anchor points for additional segments See Drawing straight segments with the pen tool on page 167 and Drawing curves with the pen tool on page 168 For more information on how paths are constructed see About anchor points direction lines direction points and components on page 172 To draw a curve 1 Position the pointer where you want the curve to begin and hold down the mouse button The first anchor point appears and the pointer changes to an arrowhead 2 Drag in the direction you want the curve segment to be drawn As you drag the pointer leads one of two direction points Hold down the Shift key to constrain the tool to multiples of 45 and release the mouse button once you have positioned the first direction point The length and slope of the direction line determine the shape of the curve segment You can adjust one or both sides of the direction line later Drag in the direction of the curve to set the first anchor point Drag in the opposite direction to complete the curve segment 3 Position the pointer where you want the curve segment to end and drag in the opposite direction to complete the segment Drawing and Editing 3 Continue clicking to set anchor
281. e versa If you have selected Auto Add Delete in the options bar for the pen tool or freeform pen tool when you click a line segment a point is added and when you click an existing point it is deleted In the source image select the path s name in the Paths palette and choose Edit gt Copy to copy the path In the destination image choose Edit gt Paste You can also use this method to combine paths in the same image To paste the path into the center of the desti nation image in the source image choose Edit gt Copy to copy the path In the destination image choose Edit gt Paste Aligning and distributing path components You can both align and distribute path components that are described in a single path For example you can align the left edges of several shapes contained in a single layer or distribute several components in a work path along their horizontal centers Note You cannot align shapes that are on separate layers or that are stored in separate paths To align or distribute components 1 Using the path component selection tool k drag 2 marquee to select the components you want to align then select one of the alignment options from the options bar e Top TF to align the top edges of the selected components e Vertical Center Hr to align the vertical centers of the selected components e Bottom Ha to align the bottom edges of the selected components e Left JE to align the
282. ea in nongraphical browsers In most browsers it also appears if the user positions the mouse over the image map area Selecting an image map type ImageReady ImageReady can create client side and server side image maps In client side image maps the links are interpreted by the browser itself In server side image maps the links are interpreted by the server Because client side image maps don t need to contact the server to function they are often significantly faster to navigate By default ImageReady saves image maps as client side image maps Important Server side image maps do not work in images that have multiple slices You select an image map type in the Output Settings dialog box See Setting HTML output options on page 349 If you select a server side image map ImageReady generates a separate map file based on the server option you select However you ll need to update the path to the map file in your HTML file ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide automatically adjust to encompass the new pixels However do not use a layer based slice when you plan to move the layer over a large area during an animation because the slice dimension may exceed a useful size See Creating layer based slices on page 273 You can use layer styles to create instant rollover Q effects When working with layer based slices you can also save the series of states as a rollover style See Applying and creating rollov
283. eady InDesign InProduction Minion Myriad PageMaker Photoshop PostScript PressReady and Streamline are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Apple AppleTalk ColorSync LaserWriter Mac Macintosh and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and other countries QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks used under license Kodak and Photo CD are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Contains an implementation of the LZW algorithm licensed under U S Patent 4 558 302 Adobe Systems Incorporated 345 Park Avenue San Jose California 95110 USA Notice to U S Government End Users The Software and Documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined at 48 C ER 2 101 consisting of Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C ER 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C ER 812 212 or 48 C E R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 as applica ble the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U S Government end users a only as Commercial Items and b with only those ri
284. eater sensitivity Selective Creates a color table similar to the Perceptual color table but favoring broad areas of color and the preservation of Web colors This color table usually produces images with the greatest color integrity Selective is the default option Adaptive Creates a custom color table by sampling colors from the spectrum appearing most commonly in the image For example an image with only the colors green and blue produces a color table made primarily of greens and blues Most images concentrate colors in particular areas of the spectrum Web Uses the standard 216 color color table common to the Windows and Mac OS 8 bit 256 color palettes This option ensures that no browser dither is applied to colors when the image is displayed using 8 bit color This palette is also called the Web safe palette If your image has fewer colors than the total number specified in the color palette unused colors are removed Using the Web palette can create larger files and is recommended only when avoiding browser dither is a high priority See Previewing and controlling dithering on page 341 2 Choose a color Click the color selection box in the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the toolbox ImageReady and choose a color from the color picker e Select the eyedropper tool in the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the toolbox ImageReady and click in the image e ImageReady Select the eyed
285. ecord additional commands 1 Do one of the following e Select the action name to insert a new command at the end of the action e Select a command in the action to insert a command after it 2 Click the Record button or choose Start Recording from the Actions palette menu 3 Record the additional commands 4 Click the Stop button to stop recording In ImageReady you can drag a command from e the History palette to the Actions palette without clicking the Record button or choosing Start Recording from the Actions palette menu To delete all actions in the Actions palette Photoshop Choose Clear All Actions from the Actions palette menu Changing action options You can change the name keyboard shortcut and button color Photoshop for an action in the Action Options dialog box To change action options 1 Do one of the following Double click the action name e Select the action and choose Action Options from the Actions palette menu 2 Type anew name for the action or change other options For more information about action options see Recording actions on page 394 3 Click OK Managing actions in the Actions palette By default the Actions palette displays predefined actions shipped with the application and any actions you create You can also load additional actions into the Actions palette Note Photoshop actions are not compatible with ImageReady and vice versa Automating Tasks
286. ections Selective color table 331 Send Backward command 209 Select All Colors command 334 Select All From Selection command 334 Selected Areas option 199 selecting channels 194 color ranges 144 contiguous pixels 143 image maps 289 layers 208 pixels 139 slices 276 snapshots 72 tools 57 type 258 unselected areas 147 selection borders anti aliasing 147 closing 141 converting to paths 181 defining paths 181 feathering 147 for type 254 from paths 180 hiding and showing 146 moving 146 snapping behavior 75 selection edges snapping to 153 selections adding to 147 adding to channel 201 adjusting 146 aligning 140 anti aliasing 140 198 converting from slices 146 converting to layer 211 copying 150 Standard mode 198 standard screen mode 65 Standard Windows Color command 115 status bar 78 straight edged selection border 141 Stroke effect 228 Styles palette 227 styles See layer styles stylus tablet 143 subscript type 263 subslices 272 Subtract from Channel option 201 Subtract option 196 subtractive colors 111 superscript type 263 surpressing snap 153 T tagged documents defined 122 embedding profiles in 134 target channel 186 technical support 5 Text Bounds command 254 Text Selection command 258 text See type This Layer option 225 thumbnails displaying in Windows desktop 367 for animation frames 302 for rollover states 293 layer 151 207 preferen
287. ed but the JPEG compression method can degrade sharp detail in an image particularly in images containing type or vector art Note Artifacts such as wave like patterns or blocky areas of banding are created each time you save an image in JPEG format These artifacts accumulate each time you resave the image to the same JPEG file therefore you should always save JPEG files from the original image not from a previously saved JPEG Original image and JPEG with Low quality setting You can create a progressive JPEG file in which a low resolution version of the image appears in a browser while the full image is downloading The JPEG format does not support transparency When you save an image as a JPEG file transparent pixels are filled with the Matte color as specified in the Optimize palette If you know the background color of the Web page where you will place the image you can match the Matte color to the Web page background color to simulate the effect of background transparency If your image contains Optimizing Images for the Web transparency Multilevel transparency is supported by the PNG 24 format but not the JPEG format See Making transparent and matted images on page 339 A photograph suitable for compression as a JPEG or PNG 24 image and artwork suitable for compression as a GIF or PNG 8 image Choose a format that contains sufficient pixel depth to display the color information in the image
288. ed starting from the point you click e To enter type inside a bounding box drag in the image to define the box The type automatically wraps to fit inside the bounding box Set type attributes You can use the options bar Character palette or Paragraph palette to specify various type attributes such as orientation font style color and alignment Enter text Enter the desired text using the keyboard pressing Enter or Return to start new paragraphs You can continue to change type attributes in the options bar the Character palette or the Paragraph palette as you enter additional text In Photoshop you must commit the type to its type layer before you can perform other operations Click the Commit button w in the options bar to commit the type Pi ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide Editing type Using the type tool in conjunction with the options bar the Character palette and the Paragraph palette you can edit type directly as it appears in an image In addition you can apply special warp effects to the shape of type and make global edits to type layers Edit type content and attributes Select the type tool T and click inside the desired type to set an insertion point or drag to highlight the characters you want to edit Then change the type content and attributes as desired In Photoshop click the Commit button in the options bar to commit the changes LA eects ap 4 aly T colori Chan
289. ed with the profile before using the profile in production Although Adobe Gamma is an effective calibration and profiling utility hardware based utilities are more precise If you have a hardware based utility that can generate an ICC compliant profile you should use that instead of Adobe Gamma Also be sure to use only one calibration utility to display your profile using multiple utilities can result in incorrect color For more information see Calibrating versus characterizing a monitor About monitor calibration settings Guidelines for creating an ICC monitor profile and Calibrating with Adobe Gamma in online Help Producing Consistent Color Photoshop Updating profiles The color reproduction characteristics of a color device change as it ages so recalibrate devices periodically and generate updated profiles Profiles should be good for approximately a month depending on the device Some monitors automatically compensate for phosphor aging Also recalibrate a device when you change any of the factors that affect calibration For example recalibrate your monitor when you change the room lighting or the monitor brightness setting Creating an ICC monitor profile Your monitor will display color more reliably if you use color management and accurate ICC profiles The Adobe Gamma utility which is automatically installed into your Control Panels folder lets you calibrate a
290. edded profiles You can specify whether or not to embed a profile as you save a document you can also specify to convert colors to the proof profile space and embed the proof profile instead However changing the profile embedding behavior is recommended only for advanced users who are familiar with color management ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Adding device profiles to the color management system You can add color profiles to your system so that they appear as choices in the Color Settings dialog box To minimize confusion when working with profiles delete any profiles for devices not used by you or your workgroup Once you have added a profile to the recommend location on your system you may need to load it or restart Photoshop so that the profile appears in the Color Settings dialog box Note In Mac OS you can organize the ColorSync Profiles folder by creating additional folders within it or adding aliases to other folders However nested folders may cause conflicts with some applications such as Adobe PressReady To add profiles to your system Copy profiles to one of the following recommended locations e Windows 2000 WinNT System Spool Drivers Color e Windows NT WinNT System32 Color Windows 98 Windows System Color e Mac OS System Folder ColorSync Profiles Note If you use ColorSync 2 5 but have used earlier versions some profiles may still be stored in the System Folder Preferences Co
291. edges when vector artwork is rasterized Note In Photoshop you can deselect the Anti alias option when you open or place a PDF or EPS file To turn off the Anti alias Postscript option 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General 2 Deselect Anti alias PostScript Clearing this option can decrease the time it takes to import the file Placing files You can use the File gt Place command to place artwork into a new layer in an image In Photoshop you can place PDF Adobe Illustrator and EPS files in ImageReady you can place files in any supported format with the exception of Photoshop PSD files containing CMYK images When you place a PDF Adobe Illustrator or EPS file it is rasterized you cannot edit text or vector data in placed artwork Keep in mind that artwork is rasterized at the resolution of the file into which it is placed CHAPTER 2 Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady Opening PostScript artwork Encapsulated PostScript EPS can represent both vector and bitmap data and is supported by virtually all graphic illustration and page layout programs Adobe applications that produce PostScript artwork include Adobe Illustrator Adobe Dimensions and Adobe Streamline When you open an EPS file containing vector art it is rasterized the mathematically defined lines and curves of the vector artwork are converted into the pixels or bits of a bitmap image You can also bring PostScript artwork
292. edropper tool the Color palette the Swatches palette or a color picker Photoshop uses the foreground color to paint fill and stroke selections and the background color to make gradient fills and fill in erased areas of an image The foreground and background colors are also used by some special effects filters For information on specifying foreground and background colors using the painting erasing art history and gradient tools and filling and stroking selections and layers see Painting in online Help For information on filters see Applying filters for special effects in online Help Making color and tonal adjustments When you photograph scan or resample images you can often introduce problems involving color quality and tonal range Photoshop provides a comprehensive set of tools for making color and tonal corrections and sharpening the overall focus of an image ImageReady provides many of the basic correction tools For more information see Making color and tonal adjustments in online Help CHAPTER 3 Working with Color Converting to indexed color Photoshop Converting to indexed color reduces the number of colors in the image to at most 256 the standard number of colors supported by the GIF and PNG 8 formats and many multimedia applications This conversion reduces file size by deleting color information from the image To convert to indexed color you must start
293. eferences on page 351 To change the name of a slice 1 Select a slice If you are working in Photoshop double click the slice with the slice select tool to display the Slice Options dialog box 2 In the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop or the Slice palette ImageReady type a new name in the Name text box 3 Photoshop Click OK Specifying slice background colors The background color option lets you select a color to fill the transparent area for Image slices or entire area for No Image slices of the slice In Photoshop this option is available only if you activate the Slice Options dialog box from within the Save for Web dialog box 282 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Resizing and moving slices using numeric coordinates The Dimensions options let you set the exact position and dimensions of a slice in relation to the document window This option is not available if you access the Slice Options dialog box through the Photoshop Save for Web dialog box In ImageReady if the Dimensions options aren t showing choose Show Options from the Slice palette menu or click the Show Options button on the palette tab to view them Note You cannot resize or move a layer based slice using this method To resize and move a slice using numeric coordinates 1 Select a slice If you are working in Photoshop double click the slice with the slice select tool to display the Slice Options dialog box 2 In the
294. elds to be combined into the default names for all files Elements include document name serial number or letter file creation date and file extension For File Name Compatibility choose Windows Mac OS and UNIX to make filenames compatible with Windows Mac OS and UNIX operating systems 7 Selectan option for error processing from the Frrors pop up menu Stop for Errors to suspend the process until you confirm the error message Log Errors to File to record each error in a file without stopping the process If errors are logged to a file a message appears after processing To review the error file click Save As and name the error file To create a droplet from an action Photoshop 1 Choose File gt Automate gt Create Droplet 2 Click Choose in the Save Droplet In section of the dialog box and select a location to save the droplet The droplet icon 4 will appear in the selected location 3 Select the desired set and action from the Set and Action menus 4 Set Play options for the droplet e Select Override Action Open Commands if you want Open commands in the action to refer to the batched files rather than the filenames specified in the action Deselect Override Action Open Commands if the action was recorded to operate on open files or if the action contains Open commands for specific files that are required by the action e Select Include All Subdirectories to process files in sub
295. election is pasted onto a new layer and the desti nation selection border is converted into a layer mask See Hiding portions of a layer on page 237 Keep in mind that when a selection or layer is pasted between images with different resolutions the pasted data retains its pixel dimensions This can make the pasted portion appear out of Moving copying and pasting selections and layers You can move or copy selections and layers within or between images and also between images in other applications Moving selections and layers within an image The move tool lets you drag a selection or layer to a new location in the image With the Info palette open you can track the exact distance of the move To specify move tool options 1 Select the move tool A 2 Select any of the following in the options bar Auto Select Layer to select the topmost layer that has pixels under the move tool rather than the selected layer Show Bounding Box to display the bounding box around the selected item e If multiple items are selected you can choose one of the alignment options To move a selection or layer 1 Select the move tool To activate the move tool when another tool is selected hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS This technique does not work with the pen tool freeform pen amp direct selection tool R hand tool or anchor point tools 7 Hold down Command Ma
296. els palette e Select the spot channel in the Channels palette and choose Channel Options from the palette menu 2 Click the color box and choose a color For more information see Using the Adobe Color Picker in online Help By selecting a custom color your print service can more easily provide the proper ink to reproduce the image For more information see Choosing custom colors Photoshop in online Help 3 For Solidity enter a value between 0 and 100 This option lets you simulate on screen the solidity of the printed spot color A value of 100 simulates an ink that completely covers the inks beneath such as a metallic ink 0 simulates a Using channel calculations to blend layers and channels Photoshop You can use the blending effects associated with layers to combine channels within and between images into new images using the Apply Image command on single and composite channels and the Calculations command on single channels These commands offer two additional blending modes not available in the Layers palette Add and Subtract Although it s possible to create new combinations of channels by copying channels into layers in the Layers palette you may find it quicker to use the calculation commands to blend channel information The calculation commands perform mathematical operations on the corresponding pixels of two channels the pixels with identical locations on the im
297. er Properties or choose Layer Properties from the Layers palette menu ImageReady Choose Layer gt Layer Options or choose Layer Options from the Layers palette menu 2 To change the name of the layer as it appears in the Layers palette type a new name 3 To change the color code of the layer in the palette choose a color from the menu 4 ImageReady Select a blend mode and opacity if desired See Specifying opacity on page 216 and Specifying layer blending modes on page 217 5 ImageReady To group this layer with the previous layer select Group with Previous Layer 6 ImageReady Select one or more of the Lock options if needed See Locking layers on page 217 7 Photoshop For layer sets select the appro priate Channel options See Restricting blending to channels Photoshop on page 223 8 Click OK Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop The Layer Style dialog box allows you to set blending options and apply layer effects To create a custom style using the Layer Styles dialog box in Photoshop click an effect name in the effects list on the left side of the dialog box then set options CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 220 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide To set blending options Photoshop 1 Open the Layer Styles dialog box as described in Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 2 In the General Blending section do the following
298. er pattern grid The Pattern preview box displays the changes you make to the dither pattern 8 When you are satisfied with the dither pattern click Fill to fill the selected area or layer in the current image The custom dither pattern is applied to the image and the DitherBox dialog box closes To apply a previously saved custom dither pattern to an image 1 With an image displayed in Photoshop or ImageReady select an area or a layer in the image that you want to fill with the custom dither pattern 2 Choose Filter gt Other gt DitherBox 3 Select the collection containing the dither pattern you want to use from the Collection pop up menu 4 Select the dither pattern you want to use from the Collection contents list 5 Click Fill The dither pattern is applied to the image and the DitherBox dialog box closes you can choose where the images will be saved When you drag an image over it the droplet launches ImageReady if the program is not currently running Note You can also drag a droplet onto the ImageReady Actions palette to create an action step or you can drag a droplet onto a slice to apply the optimization settings to the slice To create a droplet for automating Optimize palette settings 1 With an image displayed in the image window choose a compression format and compression options in the Optimize palette 2 Create a droplet e Drag the droplet icon 1 from the Optimize palette onto
299. er styles on page 296 Using the Rollover palette You use the Rollover palette to create and set options for rollover states The Rollover palette displays thumbnails for each state of a rollover The first state in the Rollover palette is always the Normal state To change the thumbnail view of rollover states 1 Choose Palette Options from the Rollover palette menu 2 Select a thumbnail size 3 Under Thumbnails Show define the content of the thumbnail e Current Slice to show only the current slice in the thumbnail Entire Document to show the entire image in the thumbnail This view is useful when creating a secondary rollover effect 4 Click OK in the previous state You can then use the Layers palette to make changes to the image in the new state You can also add an animation to a rollover state Dover Normal chair design_08 1 8 The Rollover palette with three rollover states The dark border around the middle thumbnail indicates that the Over state is selected When you save an image with rollover states as a Web page each rollover state is saved as a separate image file By default rollover states are named using the corresponding slice name plus the mouse action that triggers the rollover state When you change the name of a slice rollover states in the slice are renamed Working with layers in rollovers How you work with layers is an essential part of
300. ering pattern to be applied to the image In addition you can create customized dither patterns for GIF or PNG 8 images using the DitherBox filter See Creating and applying custom dither patterns on page 344 Note Applying a dithering pattern is not recommended for JPEG or PNG 24 images Browser dither occurs when a Web browser using an 8 bit color display 256 color mode attempts to simulate colors that appear in an optimized image but not in the color palette used by the browser Browser dither can occur with GIF PNG or JPEG images and can occur in addition to appli cation dither in GIF or PNG 8 images You can control the amount of browser dither by shifting selected colors in the image to Web safe colors Options in the color picker the Color palette in Photoshop or ImageReady and the Color Table panel Photoshop or the Color Table palette ImageReady let you specify Web safe colors when choosing a color 342 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide To preview browser dither in a browser 1 Set your computer s color display to 8 bit color 256 colors See your computer operating system s documentation for information on changing the color display 2 Do one of the following Launch your browser and open an optimized image directly in the browser e With an optimized image displayed click the Preview in Browser button in the toolbox Minimizing browser dither Using colors in the Web palette ensure
301. ert option 195 J Japanese type See CJK type JavaScript copying for slices 348 JPEG compression 365 JPEG compression in TIFF files 364 JPEG encoding in EPS and DCS files 360 JPEG format about 318 background matting in 341 optimization settings for 321 saving files in 361 weighted optimization and 327 Jump To command 83 jumping between applications 82 83 justifying type 266 267 K kerning type 261 keyline effect 384 knock out 194 Knockout options 221 222 223 Korean type See CJK type L L component 112 Lab color mode 116 Lab color model 112 Lab images 116 blending modes 217 channel display 186 labels printing 379 laser printers 94 PICT resources See online Help See also scanning Include GoLive Code option 348 indenting paragraphs 266 Indexed Color mode about 116 118 conversion options 118 converting RGB and grayscale images to 118 type and 251 indexed color images 113 116 Info palette about 63 color corrections display 63 hexadecimal color values in 337 out of gamut colors 63 information box 95 ink jet printers 94 Inner Glow effect 227 Inner Shadow effect 227 Insert Menu Item command 397 398 Insert Path command 396 Insert Set Optimization Settings command 399 Insert Set Output Folder command 398 installing software 1 intensity 110 Interlace option for GIF and PNG 8 324 for PNG 24 325 International Color Consortium 122 interpolation methods 96 379 I
302. es indicate how the image will be divided when you save the optimized file Although subslices are numbered and display a slice symbol you cannot select or edit them separately from the underlying slice Subslices are regenerated every time you arrange the stacking order of slices Creating user slices You can create user slices with the slice tool and in ImageReady from a selection or from guides To create a slice with the slice tool 1 Select the slice tool 7 Any existing slices automatically display in the document window 2 Choose a style setting in the options bar Normal to determine slice proportions by dragging Constrained Aspect Ratio to set a height to width ratio Enter whole numbers or decimals for the aspect ratio For example to create a slice twice as wide as it is high enter 2 for the width and 1 for the height Fixed Size to specify the slice s height and width Enter pixel values in whole numbers To convert an auto slice to a user slice 1 Select an auto slice In ImageReady you can select multiple slices See Selecting slices on page 276 2 Do one of the following Photoshop Click Promote to User Slice in the options bar ImageReady Choose Slices gt Promote to User slice s Converting layer based slices to user slices Because a layer based slice is tied to the pixel content of a layer the only way to move combine divide resize and align it is to
303. es 136 obtaining 134 proof profiles 132 recommended locations 135 tagging documents with 133 updating 136 working spaces 125 Progressive option for JPEG 322 Promote Layer Based Image Map Area command 288 Promote to User Slice command 274 Proof Colors command 132 proof profiles 132 Proof Setup commands 131 properties layer 220 punctuation hanging 267 Purge command 68 pyramid data structure 364 Q quadtones 113 See also duotones Quality option for JPEG 322 362 Quick Mask mode about 197 198 previewing color selection in 145 quick masks removing 198 Quick Reference Card 2 Save Slice Selection command 277 saving batch processed files 406 color range 145 color tables 336 duotone curves 386 duotone settings 387 file extensions 367 HTML files 347 images 357 layered documents 248 optimized images 347 351 options 358 restoring a saved image 68 selection settings 145 selections 200 slice selections 277 thumbnails 366 See also names of individual formats Scale Effects command 229 scaling images during printing 377 type bounding box 253 scaling layer styles 229 scanning about 99 avoiding resampling 96 images 100 selecting devices 100 Scitex CT format 113 117 screen frequency about 94 determining resolution 99 saving settings 381 setting 379 screen ruling 378 379 rotating placed artwork 105 type bounding box 253 type characters 264 rulers about 74 changing settings 74
304. es a color palette that is created or modified by the user If you open an existing GIF or PNG 8 file it will have a custom color palette Optimizing Images for the Web Optimizing colors in GIF and PNG 8 images Decreasing the number of colors in an image is a key factor in optimizing GIF and PNG 8 images A reduced range of colors will often preserve good image quality while dramatically reducing the file space required to store extra colors The color table gives you precise control over the colors in optimized GIF and PNG 8 images as well as original images in indexed color mode With a maximum of 256 colors you can add and delete colors in the color table shift selected colors to Web safe colors and lock selected colors to prevent them from being dropped from the palette Viewing a color table The color table for a slice appears in the Color Table panel in the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the Color Table palette ImageReady Note In ImageReady be careful not to confuse the Color Table panel palette with the Color palette or Swatches palette You use the Color Table panel palette to optimize colors you use the Color palette and Swatches palette to select colors To view the color table for an optimized slice 1 ImageReady Choose Window gt Show Color Table 2 Selecta slice that is optimized in GIF or PNG 8 format See Selecting slices on page 276 The color table for the selected slice ap
305. es can also be measured as percentages of black ink coverage 0 is equal to white 100 to black Images produced using black and white or grayscale scanners typically are displayed in Grayscale mode Working with Color Although CMYK is a standard color model the exact range of colors represented can vary depending on the press and printing conditions Photoshop s CMYK mode varies according to the working space setting that you have specified in the Color Settings dialog box See About working spaces on page 125 L a b model The L a b color model is based on the model proposed by the Commission Internationale d Eclairage CIE in 1931 as an international standard for color measurement In 1976 this model was refined and named CIE L a b L a b color is designed to be device independent creating consistent color regardless of the device such as a monitor printer computer or scanner used to create or output the image L a b color consists of a luminance or lightness component L and two chromatic components the a component from green to red and the b component from blue to yellow A Luminance 100 white B Green to red component C Blue to yellow component D Luminance 0 black ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Indexed Color mode This mode uses at most 256 colors When converting to indexed color Photoshop builds a color lookup table CLUT which stores and indexes the colors in the i
306. es dialog box click Close Other learning resources Other Adobe learning resources are available but are not included with your application Getting Started Adobe Online interacts with Photoshop and ImageReady To see an explanation of each preference option click Setup and follow the prompts You also can set up an automatic refresh using the Update Options Note You can also set Adobe Online preferences by choosing Edit gt Preferences gt Adobe Online e Click any button in the Adobe Online window to open the Web page to which the button is linked e Click the bookmark button 4 to view suggested Web sites related to Photoshop and Adobe These bookmarks are automatically updated as new Web sites become available Click Close to return to Photoshop or ImageReady Accessing Adobe Online through the Help menu The Help menu includes options to view and download information from the Adobe Web site To view updated articles or documents Click Help and choose the topic you want to view To view and download information from the Adobe Web site using the Help menu 1 In Photoshop or ImageReady choose Help gt Downloadables 2 Select a View Option e Select Show Only New Files to view only the files that are new since the last time you viewed downloadable files or were notified of them ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide available for several different geographical regions Visit the Partnering with
307. est percentage of dithering drag the right white tab on the slider enter a value in the Maximum text box or use the arrows to change the current percentage To set the lowest percentage of dithering drag the left black tab on the slider enter a value in the Minimum text box or use the arrows to change the current percentage 6 Click OK If an image has multiple slices the colors in the color table may vary between slices you can link the slices first to prevent this from happening If you select multiple slices that use different color tables the color table is empty and its status bar displays the message Mixed Generating a color table You can change the palette or set of colors in the color table by selecting a color reduction option in the Optimize panel palette There are three categories of options Dynamic options use a color reduction algorithm to build a palette based on the colors in the image and the number of colors specified in the optimization setting The colors in the palette are regenerated every time you change or reoptimize the image Perceptual Selective and Adaptive are dynamic options Fixed options use a set palette of colors In other words the set of available colors is constant but the actual colors in the palette will vary depending on the colors in the image Web Mac OS Windows Black amp White and Grayscale tables are fixed options The Custom option us
308. ew how the image will be printed on the selected paper The shaded border at the edge of the paper represents the margins of the selected paper the printable area is white The base output size of an image is determined by the document size settings in the Image Size dialog box See Changing the print dimensions and resolution of an image Photoshop on page 97 Scaling an image in the Print Options dialog box changes the size and resolution of the printed image only For example if you scale a 72 ppi image to 50 in the Print Options dialog box the image will print at 144 ppi however the document size settings in the Image Size dialog box will not change Many printer drivers such as AdobePS and LaserWriter provide a scaling option in the Page Setup dialog box This scaling affects the size of all page marks such as crop marks To view output options in the Print Options dialog box Select Show More Options and choose Output from the pop up menu Note Options not supported by the designated printer are dimmed Photoshop provides the following output options Background Lets you select a background color to be printed on the page outside the image area For example a black or colored background may be desirable for slides printed to a film recorder To use this option click Background and then select a color from the Color Picker dialog box This is a printing option only it does not affect the image itself
309. fficient way to store different image states for rollovers Select the slice or image map to which you want to add the rollover and choose Window gt Show Rollover The Rollover palette shows a single thumbnail representing the normal inactivated state Click the New State button El at the bottom of the palette From the pop up menu above the new rollover thumbnail choose the mouse action that you want to trigger the rollover Then hide and show appropriate layers in the Layers palette to define the appearance of the new rollover state The rollover thumbnail updates to reflect the new appearance which applies only to this rollover state Creating animations ImageReady With ImageReady it s easy to create multiple frame animations from a single image The key 1s to use the Animation palette in conjunction with the Layers palette to set up the composition of animation frames To output your animated image for Web use optimize the image in GIF format Set up the starting frame Choose Window gt Show Animation to display the Animation palette Show and hide appropriate layers in the Layers palette to ET set up the contents of the starting animation frame 028 The frame thumbnail updates to reflect the current image state which applies only to this animation frame 3 O rae 3 08 M Set up additional frames Click the New Frame 3 button El at the bottom of the Animation pa
310. file in DCS 2 0 format DCS 2 0 preserves spot channels and 5 supported by applications such as Adobe PageMaker and QuarkXPress See Saving files in Photoshop EPS or DCS format Photoshop on page 359 To print separations from Photoshop 1 Choose File gt Print Options 2 Select Show More Options and choose Color Management from the pop up menu 3 Choose Separations from the Profile pop up menu Note Depending on the designated printer and print drivers on your computer these options may also appear in the Print dialog box 4 Click Print Separations are printed for each of the colors in the image TI SEE Sa LO ei ses A 1 SETI RAI Ra Se mara pi F Eb Kale El J L sa FR E NE i cechi tie e 2 Chapter 15 Automating Tasks values in a dialog box while playing an action Actions form the basis for droplets small applica tions that automatically process all files that are dragged onto their icon Gi SF Image Effects E Aged Photo gt Make snapshot 7 g ja Reset Swatches Convert Mode Duplicate current layer FF Dust amp Scratches Radius 16 Threshold amp SF Fade pacity 50 Mode no
311. for adding advanced Web design features to images Rollover Slice and Image Map To display the Rollover Slice or Image Map palette Do one of the following Click the tab of the palette you want to display e Choose Window gt Show Rollover Window gt Show Slice or Window gt Show Image Map Other factors to consider When you save an image for use as a Web page you can choose to generate an HTML file This file contains information that tells a Web browser what to display when it loads the page It can contain pointers to images in the form of GIF PNG and JPEG files HTML text linking information and JavaScript code for creating rollover effects You can integrate your Web production process by opening Photoshop files directly in Adobe GoLive 5 0 Slices URLs and other Web features in Photoshop files are accessible in GoLive for management and editing You can also open Photoshop files in GoLive as page templates Page templates display as a shaded preview and provide a visual guide for building a Web page in GoLive For more information on using GoLive see the Adobe GoLive 5 0 User Guide dobe Photoshop and Adobe ImageReady provide you with a comprehensive environment for designing complex image rich Web pages You can use the tools and techniques you re already familiar with to design Web pages that include images text and sophisti cated effects such as rollovers image maps and animations
312. from Slice Adjusting pixel selections You can adjust and refine your pixel selections using the selection tools and a variety of commands in the Select menu In addition you can apply geometric transforma tions to change the shape of a selection border For more information see Transformin objects in two dimensions in online Help Moving hiding or inverting a selection You can move a selection border around an image hide a selection border and invert a selection so that the previously unselected part of the image is selected To move a selection border 1 Using any selection tool select new selection m from the options bar and position the pointer inside the selection border The pointer changes to indicate that you can move the selection P CHAPTER 5 Selecting 146 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 147 User Guide To subtract from a selection 1 Make a selection 2 Using any selection tool do one of the following e Select the Subtract from Selection option in the options bar and drag to intersect with other selections Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS a minus sign appears next to the pointer and drag to subtract another selection To select only an area intersected by other selections 1 Make a selection 2 Using any selection tool do one of the following e Select the Restrict Selection option 5 in the options bar and drag Hold down Alt Shift Windows or
313. from the Optimize panel palette menu Setting optimization options for JPEG format JPEG is the standard format for compressing continuous tone images such as photographs See About JPEG format on page 318 al ET Optimize 0 Settings JPEG Medium Optimized B Quality Fo IE Blur fo Li Matte r D Progressive Profile ImageReady Optimize palette JPEG options with hidden options shown A File Format menu B Quality menu Using named optimization settings You can save optimization settings as a named set and apply the settings when working with other images Settings that you save appear in the Settings pop up menu in the Optimize panel palette Photoshop and ImageReady also include several predefined named settings When you adjust optimization settings so that they no longer match a named set the Settings menu displays the term Unnamed When you select multiple slices with different optimization settings the Settings menu option is blank To save optimization settings 1 Choose Save Settings from the Optimize panel palette menu 2 Name the settings and choose a location where they will be saved By default named settings are saved in the Optimized Settings folder inside the Presets folder in the Adobe Photoshop folder 3 Click OK To apply named optimization settings to an image 1 Select a view in which to apply the optimization setting 2 Se
314. from the pop up list You can edit the color or opacity in the Gradient Overlay panel the same way you do in the Gradient Editor For some effects you can specify additional gradient options Reverse flips the orientation of Style Specifies the style of a bevel Inner Bevel to create a bevel on the inside edges of the layer contents Outer Bevel to create a bevel on the outside edges of the layer contents Emboss to create the effect of embossing the layer contents against the underlying layers Pillow Emboss to create the effect of stamping the edges of the layer contents into the underlying layers or Stroke Emboss to confine the emboss to the boundaries of a stroke effect applied to the layer Note that the Stroke Emboss effect will not be visible if no stroke is applied to the layer Technique For bevel and emboss Smooth uses a blur based technique that is smooth and is useful on all types of mattes whether their edges are soft or hard It does not preserve detailed features at larger sizes Chisel Hard uses a distance measurement technique and is primarily useful on hard edged mattes from anti aliased geometry such as type It preserves detailed features more so than the Smooth technique Chisel Soft uses a modified distance measurement technique and while not as accurate as Chisel Hard it is more useful on a larger range of mattes It preserves features better than the Smooth technique For glows Softer uses a blur based techni
315. g see Creating color traps on page 384 5 In the Channels palette select the underlying spot channel that contains areas you want to knock out Press Backspace Windows or Delete Mac OS This method can be used to knock out areas from any channels under a spot color such as the CMYK channels 6 If a spot color in one channel overlaps more than one other spot color repeat this process for each channel that contains areas you want removed ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide 7 Enter an opacity to specify the effect s strength 8 Select Preserve Transparency to apply the results only to opaque areas in the result layer 9 Select Mask if you want to apply the blending through a mask Then choose the image and layer containing the mask For Channel you can choose any color or alpha channel to use as the mask You can also use a mask based on the active selection or the boundaries of the chosen layer Transparency Select Invert to reverse the masked and unmasked areas of the channel See Using channel calculations to blend layers and channels Photoshop on page 194 10 Click OK Using the Calculations command The Calculations command lets you blend two individual channels from one or more source images You can then apply the results to a new image or to a new channel or selection in the active image You cannot apply the Calculations command to composite channels To use the Calculations command
316. g the slice tool holding down Ctrl or Command switches to the slice selection tool and when using the hand tool holding down Ctrl or Command switches to the zoom tool CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 214 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Bottom Edges to align the bottommost pixel on the linked layers to the bottommost pixel on the active layer or the bottommost edge of the selection border Left Edges to align the leftmost pixel on the linked layers to the leftmost pixel on the active layer or the leftmost edge of the selection border Horizontal Centers to align the horizontal centermost pixel on the linked layers to the horizontal centermost pixel on the active layer or the horizontal center of the selection border Right Edges to align the rightmost pixel on the linked layers to the rightmost pixel on the active layer or the rightmost edge of the selection border To distribute linked layers 1 In the Layers palette link together three or more layers For more information see Linking layers on page 209 2 Choose Layer gt Distribute Linked and choose an option from the submenu Top Edges to space the linked layers evenly starting from the top pixel on each layer Vertical Centers to space the linked layers evenly starting from the vertical centermost pixel on each layer Bottom Edges to space the linked layers evenly starting from the bottom pixel on each layer Left Edges to space the
317. g box CHAPTER 14 Printing Photoshop Printing images To print any type of image you first select general printing options and then specify settings for a particular image type You can preview how the image and selected options will appear on the printed page and adjust the position and scale of the image Photoshop provides three printing related dialog boxes Print Options Page Setup and Print Some printing options may appear in multiple dialog boxes depending on your printer print drivers and operating system For example you may be able to access output options in both the Print Options and Page Setup dialog boxes Note You cannot print images directly from ImageReady If you have an image open in ImageReady and need to print it use the Jump To command to open the image in Photoshop Keep in mind that ImageReady images open at screen resolution 72 ppi this resolution may not be high enough to produce a high quality print To print an image with its current print options Do one of the following e Choose File gt Print and click Print or OK Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and choose File gt Print One Note By default Adobe Photoshop prints a composite of all visible layers and channels To print an individual layer or channel make it the only visible layer or channel before choosing the Print command 376 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 377 User Guide and captions whereas the scalin
318. g it For information on using Adobe and third party plug in modules see Using plug in modules in online Help Looking at the Work Area Monitoring operations A progress bar indicates that an operation is in process You can interrupt the process or have the program notify you when it has finished To cancel operations Hold down Esc until the operation in progress has stopped In Mac OS you can also press Command period To set notification for completion of operations 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General 2 Do one of the following Photoshop Select Beep When Done ImageReady Select Notify When Done and choose Mac OS only System Alert to use your system alert for notification or Text to Speech to use a spoken notification 3 Click OK Closing files and quitting To close a file 1 Choose File gt Close Windows and Mac OS or File gt Close All Mac OS 2 Choose whether or not to save the file Click Yes Windows or Save Mac OS to save the file Click No Windows or Don t Save Mac OS to close the file without saving it 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie e 2 Chapter 2 Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady Bitmap images are
319. g percentage in the Print Options dialog box affects only the size of the printed image and not the size of page marks Important The Print Options dialog box may not reflect accurate values for Scale Height and Width if you set a scaling percentage in the Page Setup dialog box To avoid inaccurate scaling specify scaling in the Print Options dialog box rather than the Page Setup dialog box do not enter a scaling percentage in both dialog boxes To reposition an image on the paper in the Print Options dialog box Do one of the following Click Center Image to center the image in the printable area Enter values for Top and Left to position the image numerically Drag the image in the preview area To scale the print size of an image in the Print Options dialog box Do one of the following Click Scale to Fit Media to fit the image within the printable area of the selected paper Enter values for Height and Width to rescale the image numerically e Select Show Bounding Box and drag a bounding box handle in the preview area to achieve the desired scale To preview the current image position and options Position the pointer over the file information box at the bottom of the application window in Windows or the document window in Mac OS and hold down the mouse button Positioning and scaling images You can adjust the position and scale of an image in the Print Options dialog box and previ
320. g spaces The working spaces specified by predefined settings represent the color profiles that will produce the best color fidelity for several common output conditions For example the U S Prepress Defaults setting uses a CMYK working space that is designed to preserve color consistency under standard Specifications for Web Offset Publications SWOP press conditions A working space acts as the color profile for untagged documents and newly created documents that use the associated color mode For example if Adobe RGB 1998 is the current RGB working space each new RGB document that you create will use colors within the Adobe RGB 1998 color space Working spaces also define the destination color space of documents converted to RGB CMYK or Grayscale color mode About color management policies When you specify a predefined color management setting Photoshop sets up a color management workflow that will be used as the standard for all documents and color data that you open or Color Management Off Uses passive color management techniques to emulate the behavior of applications that do not support color management Although working space profiles are considered when converting colors between color spaces Color Management Off does not tag documents with profiles Use this option for content that will be output on video or as on screen presentations do not use this option if you work mostly with documents that are tagged with c
321. g the changes click the trash button at the bottom of the Layers palette then click Discard You can also apply or discard layer masks using the Layer menu Selecting opaque areas on a layer By loading a layer mask you can quickly select all the opaque areas on a layer that is the areas within the layer boundaries This is useful when you want to exclude transparent areas from a selection You can also load the boundaries of a layer mask as a selection CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 242 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Creating adjustment layers or fill layers Adjustment layers and fill layers have the same opacity and blending mode options as image layers and can be rearranged deleted hidden and duplicated in the same manner By default adjustment layers and fill layers have layer masks as indicated by the mask icon to the left of the layer thumbnail If a path is active when you create the adjustment or fill layer a layer clipping path is created instead of a layer mask When an adjustment layer or fill layer is active the foreground and background colors default to grayscale values so you can easily edit the mask Adjustment layers You can also specify a color adjustment type for an adjustment layer Depending on your choice the dialog box for the selected adjustment command may appear The adjustment layer takes the name of the adjustment type and is indicated in the Layers palette by a thumbnail linked to a par
322. g tool from the toolbox and drag in the image to paint e The paintbrush tool creates soft strokes of color The pencil tool creates hard edged freehand lines e The airbrush tool 4 lets you apply gradual tones and sprays of color You can build up color as with a traditional airbrush by holding down the mouse in a stationary position e The eraser tool amp lets you erase areas to transparency or if you re working in the background layer or in a layer with locked transparency to the background color You set the background color by clicking the bottom color selection box in the toolbox 26 27 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Choose a brush The Brush option in the options bar lets you specify the brush tip used by many painting and editing tools With a painting tool selected click the triangle to the right of the Brush option in the options bar to display the brushes Then click to select the desired brush tip Larger brushes are indicated by numeric size rather than representative preview You can customize the specified brush by clicking its preview in the options bar Sample brushes Specify opacity and blending mode In the options bar for each painting tool you can also specify an opacity to control how much the underlying image shows through the paint and a blending mode to control how the paint is blended with the colors of the underlying image Drawing shapes The shape tools let you
323. ge Grid spacing along with guide and grid color and style is the same for all images To show or hide a grid or guides Do one of the following Photoshop Choose View gt Show gt Grid e Choose View gt Show gt Guides e Choose View gt Show Extras This command also shows or hides Photoshop selection edges target path slices and notes or ImageReady selection edges slices image maps text bounds text baseline and text selection See Working with Extras on page 77 To place a guide 1 Ifthe rulers are not visible choose View gt Show Rulers Note For the most accurate readings view the image at 100 magnification or use the Info palette 2 Createa guide Choose View gt New Guide In the dialog box select Horizontal or Vertical orientation and enter a position Drag from the horizontal ruler to create a horizontal guide Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag from the vertical ruler to create a horizontal guide ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Working with Extras Guides grid target paths selection edges slices image maps text bounds text baselines text selec tions and annotations are nonprinting Extras that help you select move or edit images and objects You can turn on or off an Extra or any combi nation of Extras without affecting the image You can also show or hide Extras by choosing the Show Extras command in the View menu
324. ge color that does not appear in the color palette To create hard edged transparency in a GIF or PNG 8 1 Open or create an image that contains transparency 2 In the Optimize panel palette select GIF or PNG 8 from the File Format menu 3 Select Transparency 4 Select None from the Matte pop up menu to make all pixels with greater than 50 trans parency fully transparent and all pixels with 50 or less transparency fully opaque Creating background matting in JPEG images When creating a JPEG from an original image that contains layer transparency you must matte the image against a matte color Since the JPEG format does not support transparency blending with a matte color is the only way to create the appearance of background transparency in a JPEG Fully transparent pixels are filled with the matte color and partially transparent pixels are blended with the matte color When the JPEG is placed on a Web page with a background that matches the matte color the image appears to blend with the Web page background To create a matted JPEG image 1 Open or create an image that contains transparency 2 Inthe Optimize panel palette select JPEG from the file format menu Previewing and controlling application dither You can preview application dither in GIF and PNG 8 images The Dither Algorithm pop up menu lets you choose a dithering method for the image Images with primarily solid colors may work well with Dither
325. ges to and from Grayscale mode You can convert both Bitmap mode and color images to grayscale e To convert a color image to a high quality grayscale image Photoshop discards all color information in the original image The gray levels shades of the converted pixels represent the luminosity of the original pixels Q You can mix information from the color channels to create a custom grayscale channel by using the Channel Mixer command e When converting from grayscale to RGB the color values for a pixel are based on its previous gray value A grayscale image can also be converted to a CMYK image for creating process color quadtones without converting to Duotone mode or to a Lab color image Duotone mode This mode creates duotone two color tritone three color and quadtone four color grayscale images using two to four custom inks See Printing duotones on page 384 For more information see Identifying out of gamut colors Photoshop in online Help A Lab color gamut B RGB color gamut C CMYK color gamut Adjusting the monitor display Although the RGB color model used by computer monitors is capable of displaying much of the visible spectrum the video system sending data to a given monitor often limits how many colors can be displayed at once By understanding how color data is measured in digital files and on screen you can better adjust color display settings to offset t
326. gh the Preferences submenu in the Edit menu Preference settings are saved each time you exit the application Note The default location of the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder varies by operating system use your operating system s Find command to locate this folder Unexpected behavior may indicate damaged preferences By removing damaged preferences you can restore preferences to their default settings To open a preferences dialog box 1 Choose the desired preference set from the Edit gt Preferences submenu 2 To switch to a different preference set do one of the following Choose the preference set from the menu at the top of the dialog box Click Next to display the next preference set in the menu list click Prev to display the previous preference set For information on a specific preference option see the Index To restore all preferences to their default settings In Windows press and hold Alt Control Shift immediately after launching Photoshop or ImageReady Click Yes to Photoshop delete the Adobe Photoshop settings file or ImageReady erase all ImageReady preferences To exit Photoshop or ImageReady 1 Choose File gt Exit Windows or File gt Quit Mac OS 2 Choose whether or not to save any open files Click Yes Windows or Save Mac OS for each open file to save the file e Click No Windows or Don t Save Mac OS for each open file to close the file without savin
327. ghts as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Adobe Systems Incorporated 345 Park Avenue San Jose CA 95110 2704 USA For U S Government End Users Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including if appropriate the provisions of Executive Order 11246 as amended Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 38 USC 4212 and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 as amended and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60 1 through 60 60 60 250 and 60 741 The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by refer ence in this Agreement Part Number 90024592 09 00 Registratione 1 Installing Adobe Photoshop and ImageReady 1 Learning Adobe Photoshop and ImageReady 1 Using Web resources 3 Other learning resources 4 CUSItOMErsUuppore SE TEES Gees 5 Using tools and palettes 10 Opening images in Photoshop and ImageReady 12 Streamlining your workflow 14 Making tonal and color adjustments 6 16 Retouching images sisi 17 Making pixel selections 18 Makind egdits ille allenare 20 Using layers esci siti 22 Compositing IMAGES
328. ging the font of a single character Warp the shape of type The warp feature lets you creatively stretch and distort the shape of type Use the type tool to click inside the type you want to warp and click the warp icon in the options bar For Style choose a warp effect Specify whether to apply the warp horizontally or vertically drag the sliders to adjust the intensity of the effect and click OK Apply layer edits to type Because type resides on its own type layer you can apply all sorts of layer specific edits to type from changing the opacity and blending mode to adding layer styles See Using layers on page 22 Adobe Photoshop Basics Preparing Web graphics Designing Web graphics Photoshop and ImageReady provide a rich set of tools for adding Web features to your images Among other benefits you can divide an image into download efficient slices define image maps directly in the image and add interactive rollover effects Slice an image When you slice an image each rectangular slice downloads individually O studio psd so that users can view parts of the image as the Stu d i 0 downloading progresses You can also use slices to 02 03 04 8 i home about services e mail help keep file sizes down and define Web features 100 00 77 467 such as links rollovers and animations To slice an image select the slice tool and drag in the 7 image to define the slice
329. gle with fixed dimensions or a line with arrowheads To set tool specific options 1 Select a shape tool 2 In the options bar set the following options In Photoshop click the inverted arrow next to the shape buttons to view additional options Drawing and Editing e Select a different tool in the toolbox to switch between drawing tools When using a shape tool you can also select a different shape tool in the options bar 5 Click the OK button in the options bar or press Enter or Return to dismiss the drawing tools To reselect the work path select Work Path in the Paths palette See Using the Paths palette Photoshop on page 171 Creating rasterized shapes As the name implies rasterized shapes are not vector objects Creating a rasterized shape is the same as making a selection and filling it with the foreground color You cannot edit a rasterized shape as a vector object To create a rasterized shape 1 Select a layer You cannot create a rasterized shape on a vector based layer a shape layer or a type layer 2 Specify a foreground color 3 Select the rectangle tool O rounded rectangle tool O ellipse tool or line tool additionally in Photoshop select the polygon tool lt gt or custom shape tool 4 Inthe options bar click the Create Filled Region button O and set the following options Choose a layer blending mode from the Mode menu Specify a
330. gned Justifies all lines including the last which is force justified The options for vertical type are mu Justifies all lines except the last which is top aligned mu Justifies all lines except the last which is centered mn Justifies all lines except the last which is bottom aligned mm Justifies all lines including the last which is force justified CHAPTER 9 Using Type 266 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Working with composition The appearance of type on the page depends on a complex interaction of processes called composition Using the word spacing letter spacing glyph spacing and hyphenation options you ve selected Photoshop and ImageReady evaluate possible line breaks and choose the one that best supports the specified parameters Ci For more information see Working with composition in online Help Setting options for Chinese Japanese and Korean type Photoshop Photoshop provides several options for working with Chinese Japanese and Korean CJK type Characters in CJK fonts are often referred to as double byte characters For more information see Setting options for Chinese Japanese and Korean type in online Help Specifying hanging punctuation Hanging punctuation controls whether punctu ation marks fall inside or outside the margins If hanging punctuation is turned on for Roman fonts periods commas single quotation marks double quotation
331. grayscale and CMYK images contain 8 bits of data per color channel This translates to a 24 bit Lab bit depth 8 bits x 3 channels a 24 bit RGB bit depth 8 bits x 3 channels an 8 bit grayscale bit depth 8 bits x 1 channel and a 32 bit CMYK bit depth 8 bits x 4 channels Photoshop can also read and import Lab RGB CMYK and grayscale images that contain 16 bits of data per color channel Working with Color To adjust RGB color display to match Photoshop color display ImageReady Choose View gt Preview gt Use Embedded Color Profile Note In order to use the Use Embedded Color Profile command in ImageReady you must save the original image with color profile embedded in Photoshop Channels and bit depth Photoshop A working knowledge of color channels and bit depth is key to understanding how Photoshop stores and displays color information in images About color channels Every Adobe Photoshop image has one or more channels each storing information about color elements in the image The number of default color channels in an image depends on its color mode For example a CMYK image has at least four channels one each for cyan magenta yellow and black information Think of a channel as analogous to a plate in the printing process with a separate plate applying each layer of color In addition to these default color channels extra channels called alpha channels can be added to an image for storing
332. gt Slices 2 Enter a value or choose a value from the Color Adjustments pop up slider for User slices Auto slices or both The User slices option controls color adjustments for both user slices and layer based slices The value determines by how much the brightness and contrast of unselected slices are dimmed To display slice lines only ImageReady 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Slices 2 Under Slice Lines select Show Lines Only to display slice lines only and deselect color adjust ments and numbers and symbols display 276 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide To delete a slice selection ImageReady Choose Slices gt Delete Slice Selection and select the name of the slice selection you want to delete from the submenu Deleting a slice selection does not delete the slices themselves Moving and resizing user slices You can move and resize user slices in Photoshop and ImageReady but not in the Photoshop Save for Web dialog box You can also move and resize slices using numeric coordinates See Resizing and moving slices using numeric coordinates on page 283 To move or resize a user slice 1 Select a user slice In ImageReady you can select and move multiple slices 2 Do one of the following To move a slice move the pointer inside the slice selection border and drag the slice to a new position Press Shift to restrict movement to a vertical horizontal or 45 diagonal line e T
333. h RGB or Windows RGB soft proofs colors in an image using either a standard Mac OS or Windows monitor as the proof profile space to simulate Neither option is available for CMYK documents Monitor RGB soft proofs colors in an RGB document using your current monitor color space as the proof profile space This option is unavailable for CMYK documents e Simulate Paper White previews the specific shade of white exhibited by the print medium defined by a documents profile This option is not available for all profiles and is available only for soft proofing not printing e Simulate Ink Black previews the actual dynamic range defined by a document s profile This option is not available for all profiles and is available only for soft proofing not printing 2 Choose View gt Proof Colors to turn the soft proof display on and off When soft proofing is on a checkmark appears next to the Proof Colors command When soft proofing is on the name of the current proof profile appears in the document s title bar To create a custom proof setup 1 Choose View gt Proof Setup gt Custom If you want the custom proof setup to be the default proof setup for documents close all document windows before choosing the View gt Proof Setup gt Custom command 132 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 133 User Guide When using the Assign Profile command you may see a shift in color appearance as color numbers are mapped directly to the new prof
334. h may or may not include the active layer For example an inner shadow blends with the active layer because the effect is drawn on top of that layer but a drop shadow blends only with the layers beneath the active layer In most cases the default mode for each effect produces the best results See Specifying layer blending modes on page 217 If you create a new layer style using the New Item button New Style menu command or Layer Style dialog box all effects on the current layer are included in the new layer style 4 To rename a layer style double click the new layer style in the Styles palette rename the layer style and then click OK Editing layer styles You can edit the layer effects that compose a layer style applied to a layer To remove layer styles see Removing layer styles on page 229 To edit the layer style applied to a layer 1 Do one of the following e Double click the effect displayed below the layer name Click the inverted triangle next to the layer name to display the effects contained in the layer style Photoshop Double click a layer name thumbnail or the layer styles icon next to the layer and choose an effect from the Layer Styles dialog box Styles panel ImageReady Select the palette named for the effect you want to change 2 Edit the options See Specifying options for layer styles on page 232 CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 232 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0
335. h tool set to Normal mode with an opacity of 100 the paint will appear in Dissolve mode with a 50 opacity because this is the maximum the layer can display On the other hand suppose you are working ona layer created using Normal mode and 100 opacity If you use the eraser tool with an opacity of 50 only 50 of the paint will disappear as you erase Setting layer blending options Photoshop provides general and advanced blending options in the Layer Style dialog box Advanced blending options allow you to customize layer styles and blend selected contents from multiple layers ImageReady provides a subset of the blending options available in Photoshop in the Layer Options palette Specifying knockout options The knockout options allow you to specify which layers punch through to reveal content from other layers For example you can use a text layer to knock out a color adjustment layer to reveal a portion of the image using the original colors Set the knockout option for the layer where you want the effect to start For example if you want text to knock out layers underneath it set the knockout option on the text layer When using knockout options on a layer in a layer set set the layer set blend mode to Pass Through otherwise the knockout will stop at the bottom of the layer set For more information on Pass Through mode see Grouping layers into sets on page 213 You can also use knockout with clipping gro
336. hanging the pixel dimensions of an image on page 97 3 Select Action Options 4 Choose an option from the Fit Image By menu Width to constrain proportions using the new width value e Height to constrain proportions using the new height value Width amp Height to constrain proportions using either the new width value or the new height value CHAPTER 15 Automating Tasks during playback and the action pauses until you click OK or Cancel You can insert a command when recording an action or after it has been recorded Note When you use the Insert Menu Item command to insert a command that launches a dialog box you cannot disable the modal control in the Actions palette To insert a menu item in an action 1 Choose where to insert the menu item e Select an action s name to insert the item at the end of the action e Select a command to insert the item at the end of the command 2 Choose Insert Menu Item from the Actions palette menu 3 With the Insert Menu Item dialog box open choose a command from its menu 4 Click OK Specifying an output folder ImageReady You can specify the folder in which images are placed after actions are performed Note In Photoshop you can set an output folder when using the Batch command to process files See Using the Batch command Photoshop on page 405 398 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 399 User Guide Playing actions Playing an action executes
337. hape of the arrowhead in Photoshop the shape options appear in the pop up dialog box Enter values for Width and Length to specify the proportions of the arrowhead as a percentage of the line width 10 to 1000 for Width and 10 to 5000 for Length Enter a value for the concavity of the arrowhead from 50 to 50 The concavity value defines the amount of curvature on the widest part of the arrowhead where the arrowhead meets the line Note In Photoshop you can also edit an arrowhead directly using the vector selection and drawing tools Circle Photoshop Constrains an ellipse to a circle Corner Radius ImageReady Specifies the corner radius for rendering a rounded rectangle Defined Proportions Photoshop Renders a custom shape based on the proportions with which it was created Defined Size Photoshop Renders a custom shape based on the size at which it was created Fixed Size Renders a rectangle rounded rectangle ellipse or custom shape as a fixed shape based on the values you enter in the Width and Height text boxes From Center Photoshop Renders a rectangle rounded rectangle ellipse or custom shape from the center Saving custom shapes After you create a shape you can save it as a custom shape The saved shape appears in the Shape pop up palette For information about working with pop up palettes see Using pop up palettes on page 62 To save a shape or path as a custom shape Pho
338. hapes Photoshop Using the Paths palette Photoshop Editing paths Photoshop Managing paths Photoshop Converting between paths and selection borders RROtOSNOP aiuole Adding color to paths Photoshop Transforming and retouching 4 Chapter 7 Aboutchannels gesien aaa do Gaba ai Using the Channels palette Photoshop Managing channels Photoshop Mixing color channels Photoshop Adding spot colors Photoshop Using channel calculations to blend layers and channels Photoshop About masks Photoshop Creating temporary masks in Quick Mask mode PHOTOSHOP ssaa nanne Storing masks in alpha channels Chapter 8 011 3 5 sosia ilari ADOUCIAVEr SEIS O a ISSA Using the Layers palette Creating a layered image Drawing and Editing Using Channels and Masks Using Layers CONTENTS vi vii Grouping layers into sets Moving and aligning the contents of layers Editingilayer ea Creating clipping groups Specifying layer properties Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop Setting layer blending options Using layer
339. he Photoshop Save for Web dialog box double click the slice with the slice select tool to display the Slice Options dialog box 2 In the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop or the Slice palette ImageReady select a background color from the Background BG pop up menu Photoshop Select None Matte Eyedropper to use the color in the eyedropper sample box White Black or Other using the color picker ImageReady Select None Matte Foreground Color Background Color or Other to use the color picker or select a color from the pop up palette 3 Photoshop Click OK Assigning a URL to an Image slice Assigning a URL to a slice makes the entire slice area a hotspot in the resulting Web page When a user clicks in the hotspot the Web browser links to the specified URL and target frame This option is only available for Image slices CHAPTER 10 Designing Web Pages To specify a content type 1 Select a slice If you are working in Photoshop double click the slice with the slice select tool to display the Slice Options dialog box 2 In the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop or the Slice palette ImageReady select a slice type from the Type pop up menu 3 Photoshop Click OK Specifying slice names The Name option lets you change the default name of a slice This option is only available for Image slices You can also change the default naming pattern for slices See Setting slice naming pr
340. he DitherBox dialog box e To rename a collection select the collection from the Collection pop up menu Then select Rename from the Collection pop up menu Enter a new name for the collection and click OK e To create a new collection select New from the Collection pop up menu Enter a name for the collection and click OK To delete a collection and all of its contents select the collection from the Collection pop up menu and then select Delete from the Collection pop up menu Settingoptimization preferences ImageReady You can set preferences in ImageReady to determine the default optimization settings and the default configuration of panels in 2 Up and 4 Up views To set optimization preferences 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Optimization 2 Choose an option in the Default Optimization section Previous Settings to automatically apply the last used optimization settings Auto Selected GIF or JPEG to automatically optimize the image as a GIF or JPEG ImageReady selects GIF or JPEG based on an analysis of the image 7 10 edit the custom dither pattern do one of the following e To add a color to the dither pattern click a color in the color palette Then select the pencil tool in the DitherBox dialog box and click in the dither pattern grid to add the color To delete a color from the dither pattern select the eraser tool 4 in the DitherBox dialog box and click the color in the dith
341. he Horizontal pop up menu choose an option for placing the file horizontally with respect to the ImageReady image In the Pixels text box enter the number of pixels to offset the placed image horizontally From the Vertical pop up menu choose an option for placing the file vertically with respect to the ImageReady image In the Pixels text box enter the number of pixels to offset the placed image vertically Note To enter a negative number and offset the placed file to the left or below the ImageReady image type a hyphen before the number 4 Click OK 5 If you are placing a PDF file that contains multiple pages select the page you want to place and click OK 6 If you are placing a PDF or EPS file select Rasterize options and click OK Enter Width and Height values for Image Size e Select Anti aliased to minimize the jagged appearance of the artwork s edges as it is rasterized Select Constrain Proportions to maintain the same height to width ratio 106 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie e 2 109 Chapter 3 Working with Color In addition to determining the number of colors that can be displayed in an image color modes affect the number of channels and the file size of
342. he RGB mode However the actual appearance of the pixel may vary when output or displayed on different devices because each device has a particular way of translating the raw numbers into visual color See Why colors sometimes don t match on 122 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Creating a viewing environment for color management Your work environment influences how you see color on your monitor and on printed output For best results control the colors and light in your work environment by doing the following View your documents in an environment that provides a consistent light level and color temper ature For example the color characteristics of sunlight change throughout the day and alter the way colors appear on your screen so keep shades closed or work in a windowless room To eliminate the blue green cast from fluorescent lighting consider installing D50 5000 degree Kelvin lighting Ideally view printed documents using a D50 lightbox or using the ANSI PH2 30 viewing standard for graphic arts View your document in a room with neutral colored walls and ceiling A room s color can affect the perception of both monitor color and printed color The best color for a viewing room is polychromatic gray Also the color of your clothing reflecting off the glass of your monitor may affect the appearance of colors on screen Match the light intensity in the room or variable lightbox to the light inten
343. he layer in the dialog that appears and click OK You can also create a fill or adjustment layer using the Layer menu To edit an adjustment layer or fill layer 1 Double click the adjustment layer or fill layer s thumbnail in the Layers palette CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 244 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide applied within the merged layer See Merging layers on page 247 You can rasterize an adjustment layer or fill layer without merging it See Simplifying layers on page 245 Adjustment layers whose masks contain only white values do not add significantly to the file size 50 it is not necessary to merge these adjustment layers to conserve file space Simplifying layers You can take layers that may be composed of multiple generated elements and simplify them to a flat raster image that can then be edited with the painting tools You can convert data from type layers shapes fill layers linked layers layer clipping paths the current layer or all layers To rasterize a layer 1 Select the layer you want to rasterize 2 Choose Layer gt Rasterize and select one of the following options e Type to rasterize a type layer Shape to rasterize a layer containing a shape Layer Content Photoshop or Dynamic Fill Data ImageReady to rasterize an adjustment or fill layer Layer Clipping Path to rasterize a layer containing a layer clipping path Layer to rasterize multiple genera
344. he limitations of your video system For more information see Specifying 8 bit color display Photoshop in online Help CHAPTER 3 Working with Color Converting an RGB image to multichannel creates cyan magenta and yellow spot channels e Deleting a channel from an RGB CMYK or Lab image automatically converts the image to Multichannel mode See About color channels on page 116 for more information on channels To export a multichannel image save it in Photoshop DCS 2 0 format Color gamuts Photoshop A gamut is the range of colors that a color system can display or print The spectrum of colors seen by the human eye is wider than the gamut available in any color model Among the color models used in Photoshop L a b has the largest gamut encompassing all colors in the RGB and CMYK gamuts Typically the RGB gamut contains the subset of these colors that can be viewed on a computer or television monitor which emits red green and blue light Therefore some colors such as pure cyan or pure yellow can t be displayed accurately on a monitor The CMYK gamut is smaller consisting only of colors that can be printed using process color inks When colors that cannot be printed are displayed on screen they are referred to as out of gamut colors that is outside the CMYK gamut 114 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide RGB color display can also vary between Photoshop and ImageReady In Ph
345. he rounded rectangle or elliptical marquee See Softening the edges of a selection on page 147 4 For the rectangle rounded rectangle or ellip tical marquee choose a style in the options bar Normal to determine marquee proportions by dragging Constrained Aspect Ratio to set a height to width ratio Enter values decimal values are valid for the aspect ratio For example to draw a marquee twice as wide as it is high enter 2 for the width and 1 for the height Fixed Size to specify set values for the marquee s height and width Enter pixel values in whole numbers Keep in mind that the number of pixels needed to create a 1 inch selection depends on the resolution of the image See About image size and resolution on page 92 5 For aligning your selection to guides a grid slices or document bounds do one of the following to snap your selection Photoshop Choose View gt Snap or View gt Snap To then choose a command from the submenu The marquee selection can snap 0 2 document bound and more than one Photoshop Extra This is controlled in the Snap To menu See Working with snap on page 152 ImageReady Choose View gt Snap To gt Guides To deselect selections Do one of the following e Choose Select gt Deselect If you are using the rectangle marquee rounded rectangle marquee ImageReady elliptical marquee or lasso tool click anywhere in the image outside
346. he set indicates the type of actions it contains for example Buttons contains actions for creating buttons For more information about the contents of preset action sets see the PDF file in the Photoshop Actions folder inside the Presets folder in the Photoshop application folder To restore actions to the default set 1 Choose Reset Actions from the Actions palette menu 2 Click OK to replace the current actions in the Actions palette with the default set or click Append to add the set of default actions to the current actions in the Actions palette Saving and loading actions Photoshop Actions are automatically saved to the Actions Palette psp file Windows or the Actions Palette file Mac OS in the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder If this file is lost or removed the actions you created are lost You can save your actions to a separate actions file so that you can recover them if necessary You can also load a variety of action sets that are shipped with Photoshop Note The default location of the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder varies by operating system Use your operating system s Find command to locate this folder To save a set of actions 1 Selecta set 2 Choose Save Actions from the Actions palette menu 3 Type a name for the set choose a location and click Save If you save a set of actions in the Photoshop Presets folder the set will appear at the bottom of the Actions palette menu for
347. hen you select part of an image the area that is not selected is masked or protected from editing You can also use masks for complex image editing such as gradually applying color or filter effects to an image In addition masks let you save and reuse time consuming selections as alpha channels Alpha channels can be converted to selections and then used for image editing Because masks are stored as 8 bit grayscale channels you can refine and edit them using the full array of painting and editing tools When a mask channel is selected in the Channels palette foreground and background colors appear as grayscale values See Creating temporary masks in Quick Mask mode Photoshop on page 197 A Opaque mask used to protect the background and color the shell B Opaque mask used to protect the shell and color the background C Semitransparent mask used to color the background and part of the shell shrinking the selection Painting with white removes areas from the mask expanding the selection Painting with gray or another color creates a semitransparent area useful for feath ering or anti aliased effects 4 Click the Standard mode button amp in the toolbox to turn off the quick mask and return to your original image A selection border now surrounds the unprotected area of the quick mask If a feathered mask is converted to a selection the boundary line runs halfway between the black pixels and the
348. her artistic effects To apply a filter to a pixel selection select a command from a submenu in the Filter menu If no selection exists the filter is applied to the entire layer 22 Adobe Photoshop Basics Using layers Layers provide a powerful way for you to organize and manage the various components of your image For example by placing an element on a separate layer you can easily edit and arrange the element without interfering with other parts of the image Layers also provide the basis for managing and defining advanced features such as Web animations and rollovers Display the list of layers If needed choose Window gt Show Layers to display the Layers Layers palette This e sows the list of layers 5 opaty Foor have been created in the image The thumbnail tock SOs 8 previews help you monitor the contents of each layer Layers may be grouped under layer sets to aid in organizing complex images To toggle between the expanded and collapsed displays of a layer set click the triangle to the left of the layer set s name Change the visibility of alayer To help focus your work on individual layers in the image you can toggle the visibility of one or more layers To make a single layer invisible click the eye icon next to that layer in the Layers palette e To display just a single layer and make all other dba layers invisible Al
349. hite to remove from the channel paint with a lower opacity or a color to add to the channel with lower opacities To create an alpha channel and specify options 1 Do one of the following Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the New Channel button kl at the bottom of the palette Choose New Channel from the Channels palette menu 2 Type a name for the channel 3 Select display options for the channel as described in steps 2 through 4 of the procedure for changing Quick Mask options in Creating temporary masks in Quick Mask mode Photoshop on page 197 Alpha channel options are identical to Quick Mask options 4 Click OK A new channel appears at the bottom of the Channels palette and is the only channel visible in the image window ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide To edit an alpha channel Use a painting or editing tool to paint in the image Paint with black to add to the channel paint with white to remove from the channel or paint with a lower opacity or a color to add to the channel with lower opacities To change an alpha channel s options 1 Do one of the following e Select the channel in the Channels palette and choose Channel Options from the palette menu Double click the channel name in the Channels palette 2 Enter a new name for the channel 3 Choose display options as described in steps 2 through 4 of the procedure on Quick Mask options in Creating temporary masks
350. ible layers You cannot however use an adjustment layer or fill layer as the target layer for a merge When you merge an adjustment layer or fill layer with the layer below it the adjust ments are rasterized and become permanently The first left value indicates the size of the file if flattened The second right value shows the estimated file size of the unflattened file including any layers and channels To track the use of the Photoshop scratch disk temporary disk space used for storing data when RAM 1s insufficient position the pointer over the triangle at the bottom of the image window hold down the mouse button and choose Scratch Sizes Deleting a layer Delete layers and layer sets you no longer need to reduce the size of your image file To delete a layer 1 Select the layer or layer set in the Layers palette e Click the Trash button ff at the bottom of the Layers palette and click Yes or drag the layer name in the Layers palette to the trash button You can also delete a layer using the Layer menu or Layers palette menu To delete a selected layer automatically Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the Trash button at the bottom of the Layers palette When you Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS the Trash button while a layer set is selected you can specify whether only the layer set is deleted or the set and its contents Managing layered images Adding nontransparent layers
351. ick the Lock button amp Choose Lock Unlock Selected Colors from the Color Table palette menu A white square appears in the lower right corner of each locked color Note If the selected colors include both locked and unlocked colors all colors will be locked To unlock a color 1 Click the locked color to select it 2 Unlock the color e Click the Lock button amp Choose Lock Unlock Selected Colors from the Color Table palette menu The white square disappears from the color swatch To shift colors to the closest Web palette equivalent 1 Select one or more colors in the optimized image or color table See Selecting colors on page 333 2 Do one of the following e Click the Web Shift button in the Color Table panel palette Choose Web Shift Unshift Selected Colors from the Color Table palette menu A small white diamond El appears in the center of a Web shifted color and in all Web safe colors To revert Web shifted colors to their original colors Do one of the following e Select a Web shifted color in the color table and click the Web Shift button 1 in the Color Table panel palette Choose Unshift All Colors from the Color Table palette menu To specify tolerance for shifting colors automatically to the closest Web palette equivalents In the Optimize panel palette enter a value for Web Snap or drag the pop up slider A higher value shifts more colors
352. icking on the rollover Before creating an animation check the Rollover palette to ensure that the desired state is selected See Working with rollovers ImageReady on page 292 Using the Animation palette The Animation palette lets you create view and set options for the frames in an animation You can change the thumbnail view of frames in the Animation palette using smaller thumbnails reduces the space required by the palette and displays more frames in a given palette width To display the Animation palette Choose Window gt Show Animation or click the Animation palette tab To change the thumbnail view of frames 1 Select Palette Options from the Animation palette menu 2 Select a thumbnail size and click OK 302 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 303 User Guide To deselect a frame in a multiframe selection Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS a frame to deselect it Rearranging and deleting frames You can change the position of frames in an animation and reverse the order of selected contiguous frames You can also delete selected frames or the entire animation To change the position of a frame 1 Select the frame you want to move Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS to add frames to the selection 2 Drag the selection to the new position Note If you drag multiple discontiguous frames the frames are placed contiguously in the new position To reverse the order of cont
353. ide rulers Choose View gt Show Rulers or View gt Hide Rulers To change the rulers zero origin 1 To snap the ruler origin to guides slices or Document bounds choose View gt Snap To then choose any combination of options from the submenu See Working with snap on page 152 Photoshop You can also snap to a grid in addition to guides slices and Document bounds 2 Position the pointer over the intersection of the rulers in the upper left corner of the window and drag diagonally down onto the image A set of cross hairs appears marking the new origin on the rulers ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide To edit a measuring line or protractor 1 Select the measure tool 2 Do one of the following e To resize the line drag one end of an existing measuring line To move the line place the pointer on the line away from either endpoint and drag the line To remove the line place the pointer on the line away from either endpoint and drag the line out of the image Note You can drag out a measure line on an image feature that should be horizontal or vertical then choose Image gt Rotate Canvas gt Arbitrary and the correct angle of rotation required to straighten the image will already be entered into the Rotate Canvas dialog box Using guides and the grid Guides appear as lines that float over the entire image and do not print You can move remove or lock a guide to avoid accide
354. iders to separate them separating the sliders allows you to remove fringe pixels and retain a smooth edge CHAPTER 5 Selecting 154 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide 3 Specify options for tools in the dialog box you can change these settings at any time For Brush Size enter a value or drag the slider to specify the width of the edge highlighter eraser cleanup and edge touchup tools For Highlight choose a preset color option or choose Other to specify a custom color for the highlight For Fill choose a preset color option or choose Other to specify a custom color for the area covered by the fill tool e If you are highlighting a well defined edge select Smart Highlighting This option helps you keep the highlight on the edge and applies a highlight that is just wide enough to cover the edge regardless of the current brush size Smart Highlighting can greatly improve the extraction when the object and background have similar colors or have textures 4 Adjust the view as needed e To magnify an area select the zoom tool 4 in the dialog box and click in the preview image To zoom out hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS as you click To view a different area select the hand tool in the dialog box and drag in the preview image 5 Define the edge of the object you want to extract e To draw a highlight that marks the edge select the edge highlighter tool 42 in the dialog box
355. iform color If the object has a well defined interior make sure that the highlight forms a complete enclosure You do not need to highlight areas where the object touches the image boundaries If the object lacks a clear interior highlight the entire object To base the highlight on a selection saved in an alpha channel choose the alpha channel from the Channel menu The alpha channel should be based on a selection of the edge boundary If you modify a highlight based on a channel the channel name in the menu changes to Custom e To erase the highlight select the eraser tool 4 in the dialog box and drag over the highlight To erase the entire highlight press Alt Backspace Windows or Option Delete Mac OS 6 Define the foreground area If the object has a well defined interior select the fill tool in the dialog box Click inside the object to fill its interior Clicking a filled area with the fill tool removes the fill CHAPTER 5 Selecting 156 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide 10 Click OK to apply the final extraction On the layer all pixels outside the extracted object are erased to transparency Note For best results in cleaning up stray edges use the cleanup and edge touchup tools in the Extract dialog box You can also clean up after an extraction by using the background eraser and history brush tools in the toolbox 8 If necessary repeat the extraction to improve the results when
356. ign tool based image map areas to the top bottom left right and middle Note To align layer based image map areas first link the layers and then choose an alignment option from the Layer gt Align Linked submenu To align tool based image map areas 1 Select the tool based image map areas you want to align 2 Do one of the following e With the image map select tool active click an alignment option in the options bar Align Top Edges m Align Vertical Centers ln Align Bottom Edges Ba Align Left Edges IE Align Horizontal Centers amp Align Right Edges Choose an alignment command from the Image Map palette menu Designing Web Pages To change the shape of a layer based image map area 1 Select a layer based image map area 2 In the Layer Image Map section of the Image Map palette choose an option from the shape pop up list Rectangle Circle or Polygon If you choose Polygon enter a value or choose a value from the Quality pop up slider to set the number of segments in the polygon Duplicating tool based image maps You can create a duplicate image map area with the same dimensions and settings as the original tool based image map area To duplicate a tool based image map area 1 Select one or more image map areas 2 Do one of the following Choose Duplicate Image Map Area s from the Image Map palette menu Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS from inside the image m
357. iguous frames 1 Select the contiguous frames you want to reverse 2 Choose Reverse Frames from the Animation palette menu To delete selected frames Do one of the following Select Delete Frame s from the Animation palette menu e Click the Trash button 11 in the Animation palette and click Yes to confirm the deletion Drag the selected frame or frames onto the Trash button In the Animation palette the current frame is indicated by a narrow border inside the shaded selection highlight around the frame thumbnail Selected frames are indicated by a shaded highlight around the frame thumbnails To select the current frame Do one of the following e In the Animation palette click the thumbnail of the frame you want to select as the current frame In the Animation palette or the Layers palette click the Forward button it to select the next frame in the series as the current frame In the Animation palette or the Layers palette click the Backward button lt 1 to select the previous frame in the series as the current frame e In the Animation palette click the Rewind button lt 1 to select the first frame in the series as the current frame To select multiple frames In the Animation palette do one of the following To select contiguous multiple frames Shift click a second frame The second frame and all frames between the first and second are added to the selection To
358. ile space Convert Profile however shifts color numbers before mapping them to the new profile space in an effort to preserve the original color appearances To reassign or discard the profile of a document 1 Choose Image gt Mode gt Assign Profile 2 Select one of the following Don t Color Manage This Document to remove the profile from a tagged document Select this option only if you are sure that you want the document to become untagged Working color mode working space to tag the document with the current working space profile Profile to reassign a different profile to a tagged document Choose the desired profile from the menu Photoshop tags the document with the new profile without converting colors to the profile space This may dramatically change the appearance of the colors as displayed on your monitor 3 To preview the effects of the new profile assignment in the document select Preview 4 Click OK To convert colors in a document to another profile 1 Choose Image gt Mode gt Convert to Profile 2 Under Destination Space choose the color profile to which you want to convert the documents colors The document will be converted to and tagged with this new profile e Simulate Ink Black to preview in the monitor space the actual dynamic range defined by the proof profile The availability of these options depends on the proof profile chosen Not all profiles support both options 7 To
359. ilename and location 4 Photoshop Select saving options See Setting file saving options Photoshop on page 358 5 Click Save With some image formats a dialog box appears See Saving files in Photoshop EPS or DCS format Photoshop on page 359 Saving files in GIF format Photoshop on page 361 Saving files in JPEG format Photoshop on page 361 Saving files in Photoshop PDF format Photoshop on page 362 Saving files in PNG format Photoshop on page 363 and Saving files in TIFF format on page 364 To copy an image without saving it to your hard disk use the Duplicate command See Dupli cating images on page 73 To store a temporary version of the image in memory use the History palette to create a snapshot See Making a snapshot of an image Photoshop on page 72 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 359 User Guide To print EPS and DCS files you must use a PostScript printer To save a file in Photoshop EPS or DCS format 1 Choose File gt Save As and choose Photoshop EPS Photoshop DCS 1 0 or Photoshop DCS 2 0 from the format list 2 Specify a filename and location select saving options as described in Setting file saving options Photoshop on page 358 and click Save 3 For Preview choose a low resolution preview type To share an EPS file between Windows and Mac OS systems use a TIFF preview An 8 bit preview option results in better display q
360. ilenames Macintosh and UNIX operating systems Copy Background Image When Saving To preserve a background image that has been specified in the Background preferences set See Creating background images on page 352 In addition you can prepare an image to be used as a tiled background using the Tile Maker filter which blends the edges of an image to create a seamless background You can also use the Tile Maker filter to create a kaleidoscopic background in which an image is flipped horizontally and vertically to create an abstract design Original image and image prepared using Blend Edges displayed as tiled background Original image and image prepared using Kaleidoscope Tile displayed as tiled background To specify the current image as a background image 1 Open the Output Settings dialog box and select the Background option set See Using the Output Settings dialog box on page 349 2 For View As select Background CHAPTER 12 Optimizing Images for the Web 2 Enter a title that will appear in the Web browser s title bar Photoshop Choose Caption from the Section pop up menu and enter the desired text in the Caption text box ImageReady Enter the desired text in the Page Title text box 3 Enter copyright information Photoshop Choose Copyright amp URL from the Section pop up menu and enter the desired text in the Copyright Notice text box e ImageReady Enter the
361. iles adding information to 366 batch processing 405 closing 88 embedding profiles in 134 extensions for 359 generating HTML 347 managed See online Help opening 101 options for saving 351 fill layers 243 fill opacity 222 fill tool 156 Fill with Neutral Color option 216 filling paths See online Help type 260 with history state 69 filters See online Help Fit Image command 410 Fit on Screen command 67 Fixed Size option 140 Flatten Frames into Layers command 309 Flatten Image command 248 flattening images 248 floating selections 246 fonts selecting 259 INDEX 420 421 image maps about 286 adding links to 291 client side 292 converting layer based to tool based 287 creating 286 deleting 291 layer based 287 modifying in image 290 options for 291 selecting 289 server side 292 Shape option 289 tool based 287 viewing 288 image previews See thumbnails image resolution See resolution Image Size command about 74 149 changing document size 98 changing pixel dimensions 97 recording in actions 398 using Auto option 99 ImageReady 1 See also names of specific topics tools and commands images about 91 bit depth 116 converting between bit depths 117 converting between color modes 113 117 118 copying layers between 211 copying selections between 150 creating background for Web 352 options 71 replacing existing document 71 reverting to previous 70 horizontal scale of t
362. in actions 399 modifying 279 moving 283 naming pattern setting 351 options for 281 preferences 275 resizing 283 selecting 276 INDEX 432 433 type about 251 bounding box 253 254 committing 252 converting between point type and paragraph type 256 converting to shapes 257 creating 251 editing 254 filling 260 formatting characters 258 formatting paragraphs 265 orientation 252 253 255 paragraph type 252 point type 252 saving in EPS or DCS format 360 saving in PDF format 363 selecting 258 selection border 254 work path for 257 See also CJK type type layers Type 1 fonts 259 type layers about 254 anti aliased 255 changing orientation 255 layer styles 226 rasterizing 255 transforming 254 warping 256 type tool 252 U Uncompensated Color command 115 underlining type 263 Underlying Layer option 225 snapping behavior 75 tool pointers 58 tracking type 261 transfer functions 378 Transform command about 63 in Info palette 64 transformations type layers 254 See also online Help transparency channel display 186 creating in new images 101 document display 208 exporting 369 from mask 198 hard edged 340 in Bitmap mode 360 locking 217 218 option for GIF or PNG 8 324 option for PNG 24 325 preserving in optimized images 339 saving in PDF format 362 saving in TIFF files 364 using advanced blending options 154 Transparency amp Gamut option 208 Trap command 384 trapping colors 194 t
363. include Chinese Japanese and Korean type if you have the correct system software installed on your computer About type Type consists of mathematically defined shapes that describe the letters numbers and symbols of a typeface Many typefaces are available in more than one format the most common formats being Type 1 also called PostScript fonts TrueType and OpenType When you add type to an image the characters are composed of pixels and have the same resolution as the image file zooming in on characters shows jagged edges However Photoshop and ImageReady preserve the vector based type outlines and use them when you scale or resize type save a PDF or EPS file or print the image to a PostScript printer As a result it s possible to produce type with crisp resolution independent edges 3 Click an orientation button in the options bar e Horizontal I to enter type horizontally Vertical IT to enter type vertically 4 Click in the image to set an insertion point for the type The small line through the I beam marks the position of the type baseline For horizontal type the baseline marks the line on which the type rests for vertical type the baseline marks the center axis of the type characters 5 Select additional type options in the options bar Character palette and Paragraph palette See Formatting characters on page 258 and Formatting paragraphs on page 265 6 Enter the character
364. ine Help 3 Click OK Magnifying and reducing the view You can magnify or reduce your view using various methods The window s title bar displays the zoom percentage unless the window is too small for the display to fit as does the status bar at the bottom of the window Note The 100 view of an image displays an image as it will appear in a browser based on the monitor resolution and the image resolution See About image size and resolution on page 92 To zoom in Do one of the following e Select the zoom tool S The pointer becomes a magnifying glass with a plus sign in its center Click the area you want to magnify Each click magnifies the image to the next preset percentage centering the display around the point you click When the image has reached its maximum magni fication level of 6400 the magnifying glass appears empty Navigating the view area If the entire image is not visible in the document window you can navigate to bring another area of the image into view In Photoshop you can also use the Navigator palette to quickly change the view of an image To view another area of an image Do one of the following e Use the window scroll bars e Select the hand tool and drag to pan over the image To use the hand tool while another tool is Q selected hold down the spacebar as you drag in the image To move the view of an image using the Navigator palette Photoshop
365. ine through horizontal type or a vertical line through vertical type A check mark indicates that an option is selected To specify baseline shift In the Character palette enter or select ImageReady a value for Baseline Shift 44 A positive value moves horizontal type above and vertical type to the right of the baseline a negative value moves type below or to the left of the baseline Changing case You can enter or format type as uppercase characters either all caps or small caps When you format type as small caps Photoshop and ImageReady use the small caps designed as part of the font if available If the font does not include small caps Photoshop and ImageReady generate faux small caps To change the case of type Choose All Caps or Small Caps from the Character palette menu A check mark indicates that the option is selected Selecting Small Caps will not change characters that were originally typed in uppercase Making characters superscript or subscript You can enter or format type as superscript or subscript characters Superscript characters are reduced in size and shifted above the type baseline subscript characters are reduced in size and shifted below the type baseline If the font does not include superscript or subscript characters Photoshop and ImageReady generate faux super script or subscript characters However for type in small sizes less than 20 points displayed online fractional
366. inear for a medium quality method Bicubic Smooth for the slow but more precise method resulting in the smoothest tonal gradations 96 CHAPTER 2 Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady About resampling Resampling refers to changing the pixel dimen sions and therefore display size of an image When you downsample or decrease the number of pixels information is deleted from the image When you resample up or increase the number of pixels new pixels are added based on color values of existing pixels You specify an interpolation method to determine how pixels are added or deleted See Choosing an interpolation method on page 96 A Downsampled B Original C Resampled up Selected pixels displayed for each image Keep in mind that resampling can result in poorer image quality For example when you resample an image to larger pixel dimensions the image will lose some detail and sharpness Applying the Unsharp Mask filter to a resampled image can help refocus the image s details For more information see Sharpening images in online Help You can avoid the need for resampling by scanning or creating the image at a high enough resolution If you want to preview the effects of changing pixel dimensions on screen or print proofs at different resolutions resample a duplicate of your file ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide To change the pixel dimensions of an imag
367. ing the Batch command Photoshop The Batch command lets you play an action on a folder of files and subfolders If you have a digital camera or a scanner with a document feeder you can also import and process multiple images with a single action Your scanner or digital camera may need an acquire plug in module that supports actions If the third party plug in wasn t written to import multiple documents at a time it may not work during batch processing or if used as part of an action Contact the plug in s manufacturer for further information When batch processing files you can leave all the files open close and save the changes to the original files or save modified versions of the files to a new location leaving the originals unchanged If you are saving the processed files to a new location you may want to create a new folder for the processed files before starting the batch For better batch performance reduce the 9 number of saved history states and deselect the Automatically Create First Snapshot option in the History palette To batch process files using the Batch command 1 Choose File gt Automate gt Batch 2 Choose the desired set and action from the Set and Action pop up menus Log Errors to File to record each error in a file without stopping the process If errors are logged to a file a message appears after processing To review the error file click Save As and name the error file To ba
368. inking layers on page 209 Then choose Layer gt Paste Layer Style to Linked The pasted layer style will replace the existing layer style on the destination layer or layers To copy layer styles between layers by dragging Do one of the following Drag a single layer effect from one layer to another to duplicate the layer effect or drag the Effects bar from one layer to another to duplicate the layer style Drag one or more layer effects from a layer to the image to apply the resulting layer style to the highest layer in the Layers palette that contains pixels at the drop point Scaling layer effects Photoshop A layer style may have been tuned to look best on a target resolution with features of a given size Using Scale Effects allows you to scale the effects contained in the layer style without scaling the object to which the layer style is applied Customizing layer styles You can customize a layer style by applying predefined layer styles or effects to a layer modifying its options and setting the blend mode and opacity for the layer In Photoshop you define a new layer style and customize it using the Layer Style dialog box See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 In ImageReady you define a layer style using the Styles palette or the Effects button at the bottom of the Layers palette and customize it using a group of palettes named for each type of effect such as Drop Shad
369. ion Each frame you add starts as a duplicate of the preceding frame You then make changes to the frame using the Layers palette Note Always create and edit frames in Original view While you can view frames in an optimized view the editing options are very limited To add a frame to an animation 1 If you want to add the animation to a rollover state select the desired state in the Rollover palette See Using the Rollover palette on page 293 2 In the Animation palette do one of the following e Click the New Frame button bl e Select New Frame from the Animation palette menu Selecting frames Before you can work with a frame you must select it as the current frame The contents of the current frame appear in the document window You can select multiple frames either contiguous or discontiguous to edit them or apply commands to them as a group When multiple frames are selected only the current frame appears in the document window CHAPTER 11 Creating Animations ImageReady Keep in mind that an image can have multiple animations that are associated with different rollover states For example adding an animation to the Normal rollover state causes the animation to play when the Web page is first loaded by a Web browser Adding an animation to another rollover state causes the animation to play only when the Web user performs the specified action such as placing the mouse over the rollover or cl
370. ion application Note This feature is not supported by all text and HTML editing applications Making transparent and matted images Transparency makes it possible to place a nonrect angular graphic object against the background of a Web page Background transparency supported by GIF and PNG formats preserves transparent pixels in the image These pixels allow the Web page background to show through in a browser Background matting supported by GIF PNG and JPEG formats simulates transparency by filling or blending transparent pixels with a matte color that you choose to match the Web page background on which the image will be placed Background matting works better if the Web page background will be a solid color and if you know what that color will be The original image must contain transparent pixels in order for you to create background trans parency or background matting in the optimized image You can create transparency when you create a new layer Note You can use the magic eraser tool to easily create transparency in an image In Photoshop you can also use the background eraser tool 4 Select a color from the Matte pop up menu Photoshop Select Eyedropper to use the color in the eyedropper sample box White Black or Other using the color picker e ImageReady Select Foreground Color Background Color or Other using the color picker or select a color from the Matte pop up palette Creati
371. ions can be undone if you make a mistake Alternatively you can restore all or part of an image to its last saved version But available memory may limit your ability to use these options For information on how to restore your image to how it looked at any point in the current work session see Reverting to any state of an image on page 69 To undo the last operation Choose Edit gt Undo If an operation can t be undone the command is dimmed and changes to Can t Undo To redo the last operation Choose Edit gt Redo Q You can set the Redo keystroke preference to be the same for Photoshop and ImageReady Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General and select a preference for the Redo key You can also set the key to toggle between Undo and Redo ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide By default the History palette lists the previous 20 states Older states are automatically deleted to free more memory for Photoshop To keep a particular state throughout your work session make a snapshot of the state See Making a snapshot of an image Photoshop on page 72 e Once you close and reopen the document all states and snapshots from the last working session are cleared from the palette By default a snapshot of the initial state of the document is displayed at the top of the palette States are added from the top down That is the oldest state is at the top of the list the most recent one at the
372. ired action automatically by selecting it and clicking the Play button E at the bottom of the Actions palette Or you can record your own sequence of operations as a stored action in the palette for future playback on a single image or batch of images Adobe Photoshop Basics Adjusting and retouching images Making tonal and color adjustments Upon first opening a scanned image or digital photograph in Photoshop or ImageReady it s common to notice some problems with color quality and tonal range The image may appear washed out for example or appear too dark or too light in certain areas Open the Levels dialog box When making tonal adjustments to an image in Photoshop it s a good idea to use adjustment layers You can limit the application of flexible and reversible adjustments to an adjustment layer so that underlying layers show the effects of the adjustment without being permanently altered You can even block areas from being adjusted by painting the adjustment layer with black To create an adjustment layer that adjusts the tonality of an image choose Layer gt New Adjustment Layer gt Levels Name the layer and click OK In ImageReady you do not have the option of adjustment layers so choose Image gt Adjust gt Levels Adjust tonal levels The Levels dialog box displays a graph representing the tonal distribution of the image from shadows on the left to midtones in the middle to highlights on the right
373. is command lets you copy the HTML code for an optimized image to the Clipboard and paste the HTML code into an HTML file If you subsequently make changes to the source image you can use the Update HTML command to update the HTML file Copy Selected Slices to copy HTML code for selected slices only Copy Preloads to copy the JavaScript portion of the HTML code for slices in the document ImageReady generates and formats HTML code based on settings in the Output Options dialog box Be sure to specify HTML options such as whether to use tables or cascading style sheets before you copy and paste HTML code See Setting HTML output options on page 349 To paste the ImageReady HTML code into an HTML document open the HTML document in the destination application and choose Edit gt Paste To update HTML code for an image ImageReady 1 Choose File gt Update HTML 2 Select the HTML file into which you pasted HTML code for the image 3 Select Save Images to save the image file when you update the HTML code for the image 4 Click Save Setting output options Output settings give you control over the files that are generated when you save an optimized image as a Web page you can specify how HTML files are formatted and how image files are named Output settings also include options for naming slices and creating background images Optimizing Images for the Web 7 ImageReady Select Include GoLive Code to
374. is is the default content type No Image slices contain solid color or HTML text Because No Image slices contain no image data they download more quickly Photoshop and ImageReady do not display No Image slice content To view No Image slice content preview the image in a browser See Previewing an image in a browser on page 84 To delete all user slices and layer based slices Do one of the following Photoshop Choose View gt Clear Slices ImageReady Choose Slices gt Delete All Locking slices Photoshop Locking slices prevents you from making changes accidentally such as resizing or moving slices To lock all slices Choose View gt Lock Slices Specifying slice options Setting slice options lets you specify how the slice data will appear in a Web browser The available options vary according to the application and the slice type you select You can only set options for one slice at a time Note Setting options for an auto slice promotes the slice to a user slice Viewing slice options You specify slice options in the Slice Options dialog box Photoshop and the Slice palette ImageReady Photoshop and ImageReady do not display the selected background color you must preview the image in a browser to view the effect of selecting a background color See Previewing an image in a browser on page 84 To choose a background color 1 Select a slice If you are working in t
375. isplays one or two direction lines ending in direction points The positions of direction lines and points determine the size and shape of a curved segment Moving these elements reshapes the curves in a path A Curved line segment B Direction point C Direction line D Selected anchor point E Unselected anchor point Drawing and Editing To display the Paths palette Choose Windows gt Show Paths or click the Paths palette tab To select or deselect a path in the palette Do one of the following To select a path click the path name in the Paths palette Only one path can be selected at a time e To deselect a path click in the blank area of the Paths palette choose Turn Off Path from the Paths palette menu or click the OK button in 6 options bar if you are using the shape or pen tools To change the size of path thumbnails 1 Choose Palette Options from the Paths palette menu 2 Selecta size or select None to turn off the display of thumbnails To change a path s stacking order 1 Select the path in the Paths palette 2 Drag the path up or down in the Paths palette When the heavy black line appears in the desired location release the mouse button Note You cannot change the order of layer clipping paths in the Paths palette ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide A path does not have to be all one connected series of segments It can contain more than one distinct and separate path c
376. ist to display the name and thumbnail of each preset item Setting preferences Numerous program settings are stored in Adobe Photoshop 6 Prefs psp file Windows or the Adobe Photoshop 6 Prefs file Mac OS in the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder Among the settings stored in this file are general display options file saving options cursor options transparency options and options for plug ins and scratch disks Most of these options are set in 86 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area 3 From the Preset Manager pop up menu do one of the following Choose Reset to restore the default library for that type Select Append to append the default presets to the current set OK to replace the current presets with the default presets or Cancel Choose Replace to replace the current library with the contents of another libraryloaded from a file To save a subset of a library 1 Choose Edit gt Preset Manager 2 Choose a preset type from the Preset Type menu 3 Shift click to select multiple presets Only the selected presets will be saved to the new library 4 Choose Save Set then enter a name for the library If you want to save the library to a folder other than the default navigate to the new folder before saving To rename presets contained in a library 1 Choose Edit gt Preset Manager 2 Choose a preset type from the Preset Type menu 3 Select a preset in the list 4 Choose Rename then enter a new
377. ite For example when a visitor clicks a thumbnail image on the home page a gallery page with the associated full size image loads Photoshop provides a variety of styles for your gallery which you can select using the Web Photo Gallery command If you are an advanced user who has knowledge of HTML you can also customize a style by editing a set of HTML template files or create a new style For more information see Customizing and creating Web photo gallery styles in online Help To create a Web photo gallery 1 Choose File gt Automate gt Web Photo Gallery 2 Under Files click Source Then select the folder containing the images that you want to appear in the gallery and click OK Select Include All Subdi rectories to include images inside any subfolders of the selected folder 3 Click Destination Then select the destination folder that you want to contain the images and HTML pages for the gallery and click OK 4 For Styles choose a style for the gallery A preview of the home page for the chosen style appears in the dialog box You can also copy frames from the Animation palette and paste them into the Rollover palette as states or copy states from the Rollover palette and paste them into the Animation palette as frames Note Copy commands in the Animation palette and the Rollover palette use an internal clipboard available to these commands only Copying frames or rollover states does not overwrite the
378. ite to remove from the new channel or paint with a lower opacity or a color to add to the new channel with lower opacities Saving a mask selection You can save any selection as a mask in a new or existing alpha channel To save a selection to a new channel with default options Photoshop 1 Select the area or areas of the image that you want to isolate 2 Click the Save Selection button E3 at the bottom of the Channels palette A new channel appears named according to the sequence in which it was created To save a selection to a new or existing channel 1 Select the area or areas of the image that you want to isolate 2 Choose Select gt Save Selection 3 In the Save Selection dialog box choose a destination image for the selection in the Document menu By default the selection is placed in a channel in your active image You can choose to save the selection to a channel in another open image with the same pixel dimensions or to a new image Using Channels and Masks Creating alpha channels Photoshop You can create a new alpha channel and then use painting or editing tools to add the mask to it To create an alpha channel using current options 1 Click the New Channel button El at the bottom of the Channels palette The new channel is named according to the sequence in which it was created 2 Usea painting or editing tool to paint in the image Paint with black to add to the channel paint with w
379. ith those settings This option is available for the second third and fourth panes 4 Click OK Using a droplet to automate optimization settings ImageReady You can save Optimize palette settings for use on individual images or batches of images by creating a droplet a small application that applies the optimization settings to an image or batch of images that you drag over the droplet icon You can drag a droplet to the desktop or save it to a location on disk When you create the droplet ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide When saving an optimized image with slices you can choose to save all slices or only the selected slices To save an optimized image 1 Photoshop Choose File gt Save for Web 2 Select a view and apply optimization settings as described in Optimizing images on page 320 3 Do one of the following Photoshop Click OK in the Save For Web dialog box ImageReady Choose File gt Save Optimized to save the file in its current state If you previously saved the optimized file using the File gt Save Optimized command applying the command again saves the file with the filename and Save options specified in the first save operation The Save dialog box does not appear ImageReady Choose File gt Save Optimized As to save an alternate version of the file with a different filename 4 Type a filename and choose a location for the resulting file or files 5 Select a Save
380. itional file information Do one of the following Photoshop Choose File gt File Info For section choose the attribute you want to view ImageReady Choose File gt Image Info To read a Digimarc watermark 1 Choose Filter gt Digimarc gt Read Watermark If the filter finds a watermark a dialog box displays the Creator ID copyright year if present and image attributes 2 Click OK or for more information choose from the following If you have a Web browser installed click Web Lookup to get more information about the owner of the image This option launches the browser and displays the Digimarc Web site where contact details appear for the given Creator ID ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide If you have the required software for different script systems for example Roman Japanese or Cyrillic installed on your computer you can switch between the script systems Right click Windows or Control click Mac OS to display the context menu and then choose a script system 5 To close the note to an icon click the close box To create an audio annotation 1 Select the audio annotation tool 4 2 Set options as needed Enter an author name Select a color for the audio annotation icon 3 Click where you want to place the annotation icon 4 Record and save the audio annotation Windows Click Start and then speak into the microphone When you re finished click Stop e
381. its states and layer effects When you apply a rollover style to a layer the layer becomes a layer based slice To apply a rollover style to a layer 1 Select a layer in the Layers palette 2 Choose Window gt Show Styles or click the Styles palette tab to display the Styles palette 3 Click the thumbnail for the rollover style you want to apply Rollover style thumbnails have a triangle in the upper left corner To create a rollover style 1 Create or select a layer based slice See Creating layer based slices on page 273 Note You must use a layer based slice in order to create a rollover style 2 In the Rollover palette create the desired rollover states Apply the effects to each state using predefined styles in the Styles palette or by manually setting layer effects in the Layers palette 3 In the Styles palette click the New Style button El or choose New Style from the palette menu 4 Enter a name for the style set style options and click OK The Include Rollover States option must be selected in order to create a rollover style ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Creating Web photo galleries Photoshop You use the Web Photo Gallery command to automatically generate a Web photo gallery from a set of images A Web photo gallery is a Web site that features a home page with thumbnail images and gallery pages with full size images Each page contains links that allow visitors to navigate the s
382. ity Setting dialog box choose an alpha channel from the pop up menu set a quality range and click OK See Using channels to modify JPEG quality on page 327 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide To optimize an image in GIF or PNG 8 format 1 Select a view in which to apply the optimization setting 2 Select the slice or slices to which you want to apply the optimization setting See Selecting slices on page 276 3 In the Optimize panel palette choose GIF or PNG 8 from the File Format menu 4 For GIF format only Drag the Lossy slider or enter a value to allow for lossy compression Lossy compression reduces file size by selectively discarding data a higher Lossy setting results in more data being discarded You can often apply a Lossy value of 5 10 and sometimes up to 50 without degrading the image File size can often be reduced 5 40 using the Lossy option Note You cannot use the Lossy option with the Interlaced option or with Noise or Pattern Dither algorithms 5 For GIF format only To vary the Lossy setting across the selected slices using an alpha channel click the channel button E next to the Lossy text box In the Modify Lossiness Setting dialog box choose an alpha channel from the pop up menu set a lossiness range and click OK See Using channels to modify GIF lossiness on page 328 6 Select a color reduction algorithm See Generating a color table on page 330
383. ivide resize delete arrange align and distribute user slices There are fewer options for modifying layer based slices and auto slices however you can promote a layer based slice or an auto slice to a user slice at any time In Photoshop you cannot divide combine align or distribute slices Jump to ImageReady to access these slice editing capabilities Selecting slices You select a slice with the slice select tool in order to apply modifications to it In the Photoshop Save for Web dialog box and in ImageReady you can select multiple slices To select a slice 1 Select the slice select tool 2 Click on a slice in the image When working with overlapping slices click the visible section of an underlying slice to select it Q To toggle between the slice tool and the slice select tool hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS CHAPTER 10 Designing Web Pages To change the display of slice numbers and slice symbols ImageReady 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Slices 2 Under Numbers and Symbols select a size for display symbols e None to display no numbers or symbols The small icon to display small numbers and symbols The large icon to display large numbers and symbols 3 For Opacity enter a value or choose a value from the pop up slider to change the opacity of the numbers and symbols display To change slice color adjustments ImageReady 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences
384. ject that contains psd data use the OLE Clipboard See your Windows documentation In Mac OS the application must support Mac OS Drag Manager and you must be running System 8 5 8 6 or 9 0 Dragging vector artwork from Adobe Illustrator or from other applications that use the Illustrator Clipboard rasterizes the artwork the mathemat ically defined lines and curves of the vector art are converted into the pixels or bits of a bitmap image To copy the vector artwork as a path in Photoshop hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS as you drag from Adobe Illustrator To copy type you must first convert it to outlines In the Layers palette the layer thumbnail for the source selection appears next to the layer mask thumbnail for the destination selection The layer and layer mask are unlinked that is you can move each one independently 7 C Source selection pasted into destination selection For more information on editing layer masks see Applying and discarding layer masks on page 242 4 Select the move tool or hold down the Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS key to activate the move tool Then drag the source contents until the part you want appears through the mask 5 To reveal more or less of the image underlying the layer click the layer mask thumbnail in the Layers palette select a painting tool and edit the mask To hide more of the image underlying the
385. k TC WA r Drawing a shape on a shape layer Adding to an existing shape Select a shape To select a vector shape for editing you must first target the layer or path containing the shape Do one of the following e Ifthe shape is part of a layer click the shape thumbnail in the Layers palette The path associated with the shape is automatically selected in the Paths palette In ImageReady the shape is automatically selected in the image with a bounding box for repositioning or transforming Photoshop If the shape is stored in the Paths palette select that path in the palette After you have targeted the layer or path in Photoshop select the path component selection tool k in the toolbox and click anywhere inside the shape in the artwork To help make the selected shape more visible select Show Bounding Box in the options bar Selecting a shape on a shape layer Selecting a shape on a work path ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 29 User Guide Photoshop Create a custom shape When the shape layer or work path option is selected in the options bar you can use the basic shape tools in combination with one another to create more complex shapes Select the shape you want to modify and then select the shape tool you want to use to add variations to the first shape Then select one of the following from the options bar e The Add Path Area option adds the new shape on top of the first shape e The Subtract P
386. king color adjustments in online Help Q To confine the effects of an adjustment layer to a group of layers create a clipping group consisting of these layers You can place the adjustment layers in or at the base of the clipping group The adjustment will be confined to the layers inside the set See Creating clipping groups on page 218 Alternatively you can create a layer set and have the set use any blending mode other than Pass Through and adjustment layer applied to entire image 2 Make the desired adjustments and click OK Note If an adjustment layer has no associated adjustment dialog box for example Invert Layer double click the layer s name to open the Layer Options dialog box For information on editing a mask see Editing a layer mask on page 239 For information on editing a layer clipping path see Editing a layer clipping path Photoshop on page 240 To change the content of an adjustment or fill layer 1 Select the adjustment layer or fill layer that you want to change 2 Choose Layer gt Change Layer Content and select a different fill or adjustment layer from the list Specifying fill layer options You can create color pattern or gradient fill layers Color Specifies the color of a fill layer You can click the color box and choose a color Adobe Color Picker in online Help For more information see Using the Pattern Specifies the pattern
387. l a palette outside of an existing group creates a new group e To dock palettes together drag a palette s tab to the bottom of another palette so that the bottom of the second palette is highlighted You can move an entire docked group by dragging its title bar You cannot dock existing palette groups together e To store an undocked palette in the palette well at the options bar s right edge drag the palette s tab into the palette well so that the palette well is highlighted To display a palette in the well click the palette s tab This technique is useful for providing quick and compact access to palettes Adobe Photoshop Basics Display a palette menu Most palettes have menus that contain additional commands and options To display a palette menu click the black triangle at the upper right of the palette For palettes stored in the options bar first display the palette and then click the black triangle in the palette s tab Opening images in Photoshop and ImageReady Photoshop and ImageReady let you open or import a variety of source images You can create new images import digital images saved in various formats and scan or capture images from an imaging device Photoshop Specify color management settings Before opening or creating new images specify the color management settings you want to use Photoshop color management features are designed to help keep colors in your image consistent as the image is transferre
388. l that is contain specifica tions for translating both into and out of color spaces You can also create a custom RGB CMYK Grayscale or Spot working space profile to describe the color space of a particular output or display device For more information see Creating custom RGB profiles Creating custom CMYK profiles and Creating custom grayscale and spot color profiles in online Help For information about a specified RGB or CMYK working space profile see the Description area of the Color Settings dialog box See Setting up color management on page 124 The following information can help you specify an appropriate Gray or Spot working space You can specify a Gray or Spot working space profile that is based on the characteristics of a particular dot gain Dot gain occurs when a printer s halftone dots change as the ink spreads and is absorbed by paper Photoshop calculates It s important to save your custom configurations so that you can reuse and share them with other users and Adobe applications that use the same color management workflows The color management settings that you customize in the Color Settings dialog box have an associated preferences file called Color Settings csf found in the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder Note The default location of the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder varies by operating system use your operating system s Find command to locate this f
389. layer paint the mask with black To reveal more of the image underlying the layer paint the mask with white To partially reveal the image underlying the layer paint the mask with gray 2 In Photoshop or ImageReady select the image into which you ll paste the selection 3 Choose Edit gt Paste 4 Photoshop In the dialog box select from the following options Paste as Pixels to have the artwork rasterized as it is pasted Rasterizing converts mathematically defined vector artwork to pixels Paste as Paths to paste the copy as a path in the Paths palette When copying type from Illustrator you must first convert it to outlines Paste as Shape Layer to create a new shape layer that uses the path as a layer clipping path 5 If you chose Paste as Pixels in the previous step you can choose Anti alias in the options bar to make a smooth transition between the edges of the selection and the surrounding pixels See Softening the edges of a selection on page 147 Note You can use the Matting commands if you have already merged data and are trying to re extract the rasterized data See Removing fringe pixels from a selection Photoshop on page 154 6 Click OK Photoshop Working with snap Snap helps with precise placement of selection edges crops slices drawing tools paths and objects by aligning them with guides slices document bounds and Photoshop a grid Snap can be turne
390. layer you can change a layer s warp style at any time to change the overall shape of the warp Warping options give you precise control over the orientation and perspective of the warp effect When file size and limiting the number of colors is most important leaving type without anti aliased edges may be preferable despite the jagged edges Also consider using larger type than you would use for printed works Larger type can be easier to view online and gives you more freedom in deciding whether to apply anti aliasing to type Note When you use anti aliasing type may be rendered inconsistently at small sizes and low resolu tions such as the resolution used for Web graphics To reduce this inconsistency deselect the Fractional Width option in the Character palette menu To apply anti aliasing to a type layer 1 Select the type layer in the Layers palette 2 Choose Layer gt Type and choose an option from the submenu or select the type tool T and choose an option from the anti aliasing menu 3a in the options bar None to apply no anti aliasing Crisp to make type appear more sharp Strong to make type appear heavier Smooth to make type appear smoother Converting between point type and paragraph type You can convert point type to paragraph type to adjust the flow of characters within a bounding box Or you can convert paragraph type to point type to make each text line flow independently from the o
391. layer is locked a lock displays to the right of the layer name The lock is solid when the layer is fully locked so that no editing is possible it is hollow when partially locked For example a layer is partially locked when you lock the layer position so its contents cannot be moved using the move tool Locked layers can be moved to a different location within the stacking order of the Layers palette but they cannot be deleted When a layer is fully locked you cannot edit the pixels move the image or change the opacity blending mode or layer style applied to that layer You can lock transparency to confine your painting and editing to those areas of a layer already containing pixels For example you may want to edit an object adding special effects changing color without adding pixels to the transparent area outside the object You can also lock the image to prevent inadvertent pixel changes or movement of the image and yet still allow the blending mode opacity or layer style to be edited For example you can edit the layer mask of a layer with locked pixel data This is very useful when doing montages To specify opacity for a layer In the Layers palette enter a value in the Opacity text box or drag the Opacity pop up slider You can also specify opacity in the Layer Styles dialog box Photoshop and in the Layer Options dialog box ImageReady See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 and
392. lder to play the action on files already stored on your computer Click Choose to locate and select the folder Select Override Action Open Commands if you want Open commands in the action to refer to the batched files rather than the filenames specified in the action Deselect Override Action Open Commands if the action was recorded to operate on open files or if the action contains Open commands for specific files that are required by the action Select Include All Subfolders to process files in subfolders Select Suppress Color Profile Warnings to turn off display of color policy messages Import to import and play the action on images from a digital camera or scanner Opened Files to play the action on all open files 4 Choose a destination for the processed files from the Destination menu None to leave the files open without saving changes unless the action includes a Save command e Save and Close to save the files in their current location overwriting the original files Folder to save the processed files to another location Click Choose to specify the destination folder Select Override Action Save In Commands if you want Save As commands in the action to refer to the batched files rather than the filenames and locations specified in the action Deselect Override Action Save In Commands if the action contains Save As commands for specific files that are required by the action Us
393. le images can be combined into a single image Some grayscale scanners let you scan a color image through a red filter a green filter and a blue filter to generate red green and blue images Merging lets you combine the separate scans into a single color image Note You can also blend the data in one or more channels into an existing or new channel See Mixing color channels Photoshop on page 190 The images you want to merge must be in Grayscale mode have the same pixel dimensions and be open See Changing the pixel dimensions of an image on page 97 The number of grayscale images you have open determines the color modes available when merging channels For example you can t merge the split channels from an RGB image into a CMYK image because CMYK requires four channels and RGB requires only three Note If you are working with DCS files that have accidentally lost their links and so cannot be opened placed or printed open the channel files and merge them into a CMYK image Then resave the file as a DCS EPS file CHAPTER 7 Using Channels and Masks Choose New to copy the channel to a new image creating a multichannel image containing a single channel Type a name for the new image 5 To reverse the selected and masked areas in the duplicate channel select Invert 6 Click OK To duplicate a channel by dragging 1 In the Channels palette select the channel you want to duplicate 2
394. lect the slice or slices you want to apply the optimization setting to See Selecting slices on page 276 3 Choose a named optimization set from the Settings pop up menu To edit a named set of optimization settings 1 Choose the named set from the Settings pop up menu 322 CHAPTER 12 Optimizing Images for the Web 6 To create an enhanced JPEG with a slightly smaller file size select Optimized The Optimized JPEG format is recommended for maximum file compression however some older browsers do not support this feature 7 Select Progressive to create an image that displays progressively in a Web browser The image will display as a series of overlays enabling viewers to see a low resolution version of the image before it downloads completely The Progressive option requires use of the Optimized JPEG format Progressive JPEGs require more RAM for viewing and are not supported by some browsers 8 To apply a blur to the image to smooth rough edges enter a value for Blur or drag the pop up slider The Blur option applies an effect identical to that of the Gaussian Blur filter and allows the file to be compressed more resulting in a smaller file size A setting of 0 1 to 0 5 is recommended 9 To preserve the ICC profile of the image with the file select ICC Profile ICC profiles are used by some browsers for color correction The ICC profile option preserves ICC profiles embedded by Photoshop This option is
395. lection tool and the direct selection tool to move resize and edit shapes For complete information on using the path component selection tool and the direct selection tool see Editing paths Photoshop on page 172 To add to an existing shape layer 1 Select a layer in the Layers palette 2 Select a drawing tool and set its options See Creating shape layers on page 162 3 Before you draw specify a shape area option in the options bar See Drawing overlapping shapes Photoshop on page 171 4 When you have finished adding shapes click the OK button wf in the options bar or press Enter or Return to dismiss the drawing tools ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide 7 Complete the path component e To end an open path component click the pen tool in the toolbox or Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS away from the path e To close a path component position the pen pointer over the first anchor point A small loop appears next to the pen tip when it is positioned correctly Click to close the path For more information on closed and open paths see About anchor points direction lines direction points and components on page 172 8 Draw additional path components if desired 9 Click the OK button in the options bar or press Enter or Return to dismiss the drawing tools Drawing straight segments with the pen tool The simplest segment you can draw with the pen to
396. left edges of the selected components To convert between a smooth point and a corner point 1 Select the convert anchor point tool N and position the pointer over the anchor point you want changed To activate the convert anchor point tool while Y the direct selection tool is selected position the pointer over an anchor point and press Ctrl Alt Windows or Command Option Mac OS 2 Convert the point To convert a smooth point to a corner point without direction lines click the smooth anchor point To convert a smooth point to a corner point with direction lines make sure the direction lines are visible Then drag a direction point to break the pair of direction lines Drag direction point to break direction lines Drawing and Editing To add an anchor point 1 Select the add anchor point tool amp and position the pointer on the path where you want the anchor point added a plus sign appears next to the pointer 2 Do one of the following e To add an anchor point without changing the shape of the segment click the path e To add an anchor point and change the shape of the segment drag to define direction lines for the anchor point e To change an anchor point to a corner point Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the anchor point To delete an anchor point 1 Select the delete anchor point tool and position the pointer on the anchor point you want deleted a minus sign
397. lement lt DIV gt tag e By Class to position each slice using classes that are referenced by a unique ID Generate Table To align slices using an HTML table Empty Cells Select an option for filling empty table data cells slices set to No Image Select GIF IMG to use a one pixel GIF with width and height values specified on the IMG tag Select GIF TD W amp H to use a one pixel GIF with width and 350 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 351 User Guide Put Images In Folder To specify a folder name where optimized images are saved available only with documents containing multiple slices Include Copyright To include copyright information with the image You add copyright information for an image in the Image Info dialog box See Adding title and copyright information to HTML files on page 351 Setting slice naming preferences You can specify the default naming pattern for slices in the Slices set Select elements from the pop up menus or enter text into the fields to be combined into the default names for all slices Elements include document name the word slice numbers or letters designating slices or rollover states slice creation date punctuation or none Adding title and copyright information to HTML files You can add title and copyright information to an HTML file by entering information in the File Info dialog box Photoshop or the Image Info dialog box ImageReady Title information di
398. les and enter a number in the Recent File List Contains text box ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide 2 Select the image you want to open e To open a specific image select it and click OK You can use the arrows to scroll through the images or click Go to Image to enter an image number e To open each image as a separate file click Import All Images Q Press Esc to cancel the import operation before all images are imported To create a new Photoshop file for each page of a multiple page PDF file Photoshop 1 Choose File gt Automate gt Multi Page PDF to PSD 2 Under Source PDF click the Choose button and select the file you want to import images from 3 Under Page Range specify a range of pages to import 4 Under Output Options specify a resolution choose a color mode and set the Anti alias option for rasterizing each page of the PDF file To blend edge pixels during rasterization select the Anti alias option To produce a hard edged transition between edge pixels during rasterization deselect the Anti alias option 5 Under Destination enter a base name for the generated files When Photoshop creates the new files the base name is appended with a number that corresponds to the page number of the PDF file Then click the Choose button and select the location where you want to save the generated files 6 Click OK You can also bring PDF data into Photoshop or ImageReady using the Place comman
399. let you manage files using the Web Distributed Authoring and Versioning WebDAV server technology Cascading style sheets You can now generate a cascading style sheet along with an HTML file when saving an optimized image Expanded file format support You can now preserve layers transparency and multiresolution pyramid data in exported TIFF files and choose from more TIFF compression options The File gt Import gt PDF Image command lets you import specific images into Photoshop from a PDF document Reorganized and expanded print options The new File gt Print Options command gathers together many of the output and color management options that once only appeared in the Page Setup and Print dialog boxes In addition you can now adjust and preview the position and scale of an image before printing Photoshop droplets In Photoshop the new File gt Automate gt Create Droplet command lets you create a droplet from an action Gradient Map adjustment The new Gradient Map adjustment layer lets you map the tonal range of an image to the colors of a gradient fill Expanded support for 16 bit per channel images In Photoshop the following tools and commands are now available for images containing 16 bits per channel the history brush slice and shape tools and the Canvas Size Auto Contrast Gradient Map Gaussian Blur Add Noise Median Unsharp Mask High Pass and Dust amp Scratches commands Easy measurement switching Now you can swi
400. lette mi IE 7 and do one of the following e Using the Layers palette modify the image to create the state of the second animation frame l For example you can show and hide appro forever yv lt a e priate layers and layer effects reposition a layer in the image or change a layer s opacity or blending mode Click the New Frame button and repeat this step to set up more frames Adobe Photoshop Basics e Using the Layers palette adjust the position opacity or layer effects of desired layers to create the state of the final animation frame Then choose Tween from the Animation palette menu to have ImageReady generate intermediate frames from the starting and ending states you ve defined Specify which layers and parameters to tween enter the number of frames to generate and click OK The Tween feature is useful for generating a variety of animations such as making a single layer move across the canvas or fade in or out Preview the animation ImageReady offers the convenience of previewing your animation directly in 6 image window In the Animation palette select the first animation frame and then click the Play button at the bottom of the palette Optimizing Web graphics Optimization involves compressing the file size while optimizing the display quality of an image for Web output Photoshop and ImageReady let you optimize images in several We
401. lette select the master palette from this menu The Color Reduction Algorithm menu includes all palettes saved in the Optimized Colors folder inside the Presets folder in the Adobe Photoshop folder Load the master palette as described in Loading and saving color tables on page 336 Working with hexadecimal values for color You can view colors as hexadecimal values in the Info palette In addition you can copy colors as hexadecimal values to the Clipboard and paste them into an HTML document Viewing hexadecimal values for colors in the Info palette In Photoshop hexadecimal values for colors are displayed in the Info palette when you select Web Color Mode for one or both color readouts In ImageReady hexadecimal values for colors are To build a master palette you add colors from a set of images and then build and save the master palette To create a master palette for a batch of images you add colors to the palette from other optimized images To create and apply a master palette 1 With an image displayed choose Image gt Master Palette gt Clear Master Palette if available Clearing the master palette ensures that colors from previous images are not included in the new palette 2 Open an image whose colors you want to include in a master palette 3 Choose Image gt Master Palette gt Add To Master Palette All color information for the current image is added to the master palette 4 Repeat ste
402. lices are regenerated every time you create or edit a user slice or layer based slice Converting an auto slice to a user slice prevents it from being changed when regeneration occurs Dividing combining linking and setting options for auto slices automatically converts them to user slices ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide To show or hide slices Do one of the following Turn on display of slices in the View gt Show submenu and choose View gt Show Extras This command also shows or hides Photoshop selection edges guides a grid target path and notes or ImageReady selection edges image maps text bounds text baseline and text selection See Working with Extras on page 77 Photoshop Save for Web dialog box and ImageReady Click the Slices Visibility button E To change the color of slice lines Photoshop 1 Choose a color from the Line Color pop up menu in the options bar To change the color of slice lines ImageReady 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Slices 2 Under Slice Lines choose a color from the Line Color pop up menu Changing the color of slice lines automatically changes the color of selected slice lines to a contrasting color To show or hide slice numbers Photoshop Select Show Slice Numbers in the options bar Slice numbers show when the option is checked Viewing slices You can view slices in Photoshop the Photoshop Save for Web dialog box see Opti
403. line Help 2 Add the color to the color table as described in Adding new colors to the color table on page 332 To deselect all colors Choose Deselect All Colors from the Color Table palette menu Editing colors You can change a selected color in the color table to any other RGB color value When you regenerate the optimized image the selected color changes to the new color wherever it appears in the image To edit a color 1 Double click the color in the color table to display the default color picker 2 Select a color A small black diamond E appears in the center of each edited color The edited color replaces the original color in the image Note Editing a color also locks 1 0 white square appears in the lower right corner of the color See Locking colors in the color table on page 335 Shifting to Web safe colors To protect colors from dithering in a browser you can shift the colors to their closest equivalents in the Web palette This ensures that the colors won t dither when displayed in browsers on either Windows or Macintosh operating systems capable of displaying only 256 colors See Previewing and controlling dithering on page 341 Optimizing Images for the Web To select colors based on a selection in the image ImageReady 1 Make a selection in the image using the selection tools or the Select menu commands 2 Choose Select All From Selection from the Color Table p
404. lipping group 2 Choose Layer gt Ungroup Specifying layer properties The Layer Properties dialog box Photoshop and the Layer Options dialog box ImageReady provide options for changing a layer or layer set s name and its color code in the palette In ImageReady you can also set some of the same options in the Layer Options palette To show the Layer Options palette choose Window gt Show Layer Options Styles or click the Layer Options palette tab To choose properties for a layer or layer set 1 Do one of the following Photoshop Alt double click Windows or Option double click Mac OS the layer name ImageReady Double click the layer Note that only successive layers can be included in a clipping group The name of the base layer in the group is underlined and the thumbnails for the overlying layers are indented Additionally the overlying layers display a clipping group icon The Blend Clipped Layers As Group option in the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop or the Layer Options palette ImageReady determines whether the blending mode of the base affects the whole group or just the base Layers Lock OI Os D 8 To create a clipping group 1 Do one of the following Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS position the pointer over the line dividing two layers in the Layers palette the pointer changes to two overlapping circles and click Select a layer in the Layer
405. llowing Photoshop Select a layer and choose Layer gt Layer Style gt Blending Options See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 ImageReady Choose Windows gt Show Layer Options Style to display the Layer Options palette If the advanced options are not showing in the Layer Options palette choose Show Options from the palette menu or click the Show Options button to view all of the options 3 To blend the layers in a clipping group using only the blending option applied to the base layer select Blend Clipped Layers as Group option This option which is always selected by default causes the blending mode of the bottom layer in a clipping group to be applied to all layers within the group Deselecting this option allows you to maintain the original blending mode and appearance of each layer in the group Blend Clipped Layers as Group option deselected and selected image for example you can choose to exclude the Red channel from blending and change in the composite image only the channel information contained in Green and Blue channels in online Help For more information see About color To exclude channels from blending 1 Select the layer or layer set from which you want to exclude channels Double click a layer or layer set name or a layer thumbnail 2 Inthe dialog box deselect any channels that you do not want to include when the layer is blended
406. llowing e Click the Jump To button FE in the toolbox Choose File gt Jump To gt Photoshop or File gt Jump To gt ImageReady When jumping between Photoshop and ImageReady the applications use a temp file for transferring changes To automatically update files or documents when jumping between Photoshop and ImageReady Do one of the following Photoshop Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General then select Auto update open documents ImageReady Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General then select Auto Update Files When you install Photoshop and ImageReady all browsers currently on your system are added to the Preview In menu You can add additional browsers to the menu and specify which browser will be launched when using a keyboard shortcut To preview an optimized image in a browser Do one of the following Photoshop Choose File gt Save for Web then select a browser from the Preview In button at the bottom right area of the Save for Web window ImageReady Choose File gt Preview In then choose an option from the submenu Choose Other to select a browser not listed in the submenu ImageReady Select a browser from the Preview in Default Browser tool in the toolbox To add a browser to the Preview In menu 1 Create a shortcut Windows or an alias Mac OS for the browser you want to add to the menu 2 Drag the icon for the shortcut or alias into the Preview
407. lly or you can use automatic kerning to turn on the kerning built into the font by the font designer Tracking is the process of creating an equal amount of spacing across a range of letters Positive kerning or tracking values move characters apart adding to the default spacing negative values move characters closer together reducing the default spacing Kerning and tracking values are measured in units that are 1 1000 of an em space The width of an em space is relative to the current type size In a 1 point font cally apply a color overlay style Applying an overlay layer style affects all character in the type layer you cannot use this method to change the color of individual characters Specifying leading The amount of space between lines of type is called leading For Roman type leading is measured from the baseline of one line of type to the baseline of the next line The baseline is the invisible line on which most type lies You can apply more than one leading amount within the same paragraph however the largest leading value in a line of type determines the leading value for that line You can use other options to set leading for Chinese Japanese or Korean type Ci For more information see Specifying how leading is measured in online Help Cactus class Magnoliophyta Cactus class Magnoliophyta fe ro 5 point type with 5 point leading and with 10 point leading To specify tra
408. load libraries of layer styles or create your own layer styles using the Styles palette You can change the view of layer styles Additionally you can clear a layer style from a layer create a new layer style or delete a layer style from the palette See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 Using layer styles Layer styles affect how a layer interacts with other layers including its blending mode and opacity You can apply layer styles using the Styles palette the Layers gt Layer Styles menu selections the Styles button at the bottom of the Layers palette known as the Layer Effect button in ImageReady or the Styles pop up palette in the options bar of the shape and pen tools You can manage libraries of layer styles using the Styles palette menu the Preset Manager or the pop up palette menu of the shape and pen tools See Managing libraries with the Preset Manager Photoshop on page 85 Note Use the Styles button at the bottom of the Layers palette to create a style by applying one or more layer effects to a layer In addition to using predefined layer styles you can create custom layer styles Layer styles are especially useful for enhancing type layers and layers containing layer clipping paths Once one or more layer styles or layer effects have been applied to a layer they become part of that layer s custom style which can then be saved as a new layer style for ease of reuse
409. lor swatch and then select a new color using the Color Picker The Background option lets you change the background color of each page The Banner option lets you change the background color of the banner 9 Click OK to create the gallery Photoshop places the following HTML and JPEG files in your destination folder e A home page for your gallery named index htm Open this file in any Web browser to preview your gallery e JPEG images inside an images subfolder HTML pages inside a pages subfolder JPEG thumbnail images inside a thumbnails subfolder Designing Web Pages 5 To set options for the banner that appears on each page in the gallery choose Banner from the Options pop up menu Then do the following For Site Name enter the title of the gallery For Photographer enter the name of the person or organization that deserves credit for the photos in the gallery For Date enter the date that you want to appear on each page of the gallery By default Photoshop uses the current date For Font and Font Size choose options for the banner text 6 To set options for the gallery pages choose Gallery Images from the Options pop up menu Then do the following For Border Size enter the width of the border around the image in pixels To have Photoshop resize the source images for placement on the gallery pages select Resize Images Then choose an option for the image size from the pop up
410. lorSync Profiles folder on your hard disk For compatibility with ColorSync 2 5 or later store profiles in the ColorSync Profiles folder in the System Folder damaging corrections to an already satisfactory image With an accurate profile a program importing the image can correct for any gamut differences and display a scan s actual colors Once you obtain accurate profiles they will work with all applications that are compatible with your color management system You can obtain profiles in the following ways with the most precise methods listed first Generate profiles customized for your specific devices using professional profiling equipment e Use the settings in the Custom CMYK dialog box to describe your device and then save the settings as a color profile For more information see Creating custom CMYK profiles in online Help Obtain a profile created by the manufacturer Unfortunately such profiles do not account for individual variations that naturally occur among machines even identical modes from the same manufacturer or from age e Substitute an available profile that may be appropriate for the device s color space For example many Mac OS scanners have been optimized for an Apple RGB monitor color space so you might try using an Apple monitor profile for these devices for a non profiled Windows scanner try substituting the sRGB color space Be sure to proof images creat
411. lors within a color mix To select a color range using sampled colors 1 Choose Select gt Color Range 2 For Select choose the Sampled Colors tool 3 Select one of the display options e Selection to preview only the selection as you build it Image to preview the entire image For example you might want to sample from a part of the image that isn t on screen Q To toggle between the Image and Selection previews in the Color Range dialog box press Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS CHAPTER 5 Selecting 144 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide 3 Click Selection to display the selected areas in the preview area 4 To preview the selection in the image window choose an option for Selection Preview None to display no preview in the image window Grayscale to display the selection as it would appear in a grayscale channel Black Matte to display the selection in color against a black background White Matte to display the selection in color against a white background Quick Mask to display the selection using the current quick mask settings See Creating temporary masks in Quick Mask mode Photoshop on page 197 5 To revert to the original selection hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click Reset 6 Click OK to make the selection Note If a message appears stating No pixels are more than 50 selected the selection border will not be visible Yo
412. ls 3 Click OK Layer sets do not have thumbnails To change the transparency display You can specify how transparent areas of a document are displayed while you are editing it 1 Do one of the following Photoshop Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Transparency amp Gamut ImageReady Choose Edit gt Preference gt Transparency By default the transparent areas of a document appear as a checkerboard pattern 2 For Grid Size choose a new size for the pattern Choose None to show the transparent areas in the layer as white 3 For Grid Colors choose an option Light Medium or Dark to specify a gray pattern Any other color from the list to display the checkerboard in that color e Custom to choose a color that does not appear in the list Then click either of the color selection boxes to specify a custom color Drag through the eye column to show or hide multiple layers or layer effects You can drag through the eye column next to the layers or layer sets to show or hide them You can also drag through the eye column next to layer effects applied to a layer to show or hide them Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the eye icon for a layer to display just that layer Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS in the eye column again to redisplay all the layers Only visible layers are printed Making layers temporarily invisible can improve performance Note You can make th
413. ly a change to an image the new state of that image is added to the palette For example if you select paint and rotate part of an image each of those states is listed separately in the palette You can then select any of the states and the image will revert to how it looked when that change was first applied You can then work from that state About the History palette Note the following guidelines when using the History palette Program wide changes such as changes to palettes color settings actions and preferences are not changes to a particular image and so are not added to the History palette Photoshop Choose Step Forward or Step Backward from the palette menu or the Edit menu to move to the next or previous state To delete one or more states of the image Photoshop Do one of the following e Click the name of the state and choose Delete from the History palette menu to delete that change and those that came after it e Drag the state to the Trash button TT to delete that change and those that came after it Choose Clear History from the palette menu to delete the list of states from the History palette without changing the image This option doesn t reduce the amount of memory used by Photoshop e Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and choose Clear History from the palette menu to purge the list of states from the History palette without changing the image If you get a mes
414. m the underlying visible layers appear in the final image For example you can drop dark pixels out of the active layer or force bright pixels from the underlying layers to show through You can also define a range of partially blended pixels to produce a smooth transition between blended and unblended areas To define a range for the blending operation 1 In the Layer Style dialog box Blending Options panel select a Blend If option Gray to specify a blending range for all channels e An individual color channel for example red green or blue in an RGB image to specify blending in that channel Displaying layer styles You can show or hide all layer styles in the image or in the Layers palette To hide or show all layer styles in the image Choose Layer gt Layer Style gt Hide All Layer Styles or Show All Layer Styles To expand or collapse layer styles in the Layers palette 1 Click the triangle t next to the layer styles icon to expand the list of layer effects applied to that layer 2 Click the inverted triangle to collapse the layer effects 3 To expand or collapse all of the layer styles applied within a layer set hold Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click the triangle or inverted triangle for a single layer within the set The layer styles applied to the other layers within the layer set expand or collapse correspondingly Using the Styles palette You can use the default layer styles
415. mage If a color in the original image does not appear in the table the program chooses the closest one or simulates the color using available colors By limiting the palette of colors indexed color can reduce file size while maintaining visual quality for example for a multimedia animation appli cation or a Web page Limited editing is available in this mode For extensive editing you should convert temporarily to RGB mode See Converting to indexed color Photoshop on page 118 Multichannel mode This mode uses 256 levels of gray in each channel Multichannel images are useful for specialized printing for example converting a duotone for printing in Scitex CT format These guidelines apply to converting images to Multichannel mode Channels in the original image become spot color channels in the converted image When you convert a color image to multi channel the new grayscale information is based on the color values of the pixels in each channel Converting a CMYK image to multichannel creates cyan magenta yellow and black spot channels Although Grayscale is a standard color model the exact range of grays represented can vary depending on the printing conditions In Photoshop Grayscale mode uses the range defined by the working space setting that you have specified in the Color Settings dialog box See About working spaces on page 125 These guidelines apply to converting ima
416. mage clipping path and with image clipping path To simplify an image clipping path with the tolerance setting 1 Select the path in the Paths palette and click the Make Selection button j at the bottom of the palette to convert the path to a selection 2 Click the Trash button ff at the bottom of the palette to delete the original path 3 Choose Make Work Path from the Paths palette menu and increase the tolerance setting 4 to 6 pixels is a good starting value 4 Name and save the work path Then choose Clipping Path from the Paths palette menu Exporting paths to Adobe Illustrator The Paths to Illustrator command lets you export Photoshop paths as Adobe Illustrator files This makes it easier to work with combined Photoshop and Illustrator artwork or to use Photoshop features on Illustrator artwork For example you may want to export a pen tool path and stroke it to use as a trap with a Photoshop clipping path you are printing in Illustrator You can also use this feature to align Illustrator text or objects with Photoshop paths To use the Paths to Illustrator command 1 Draw and save a path or convert an existing selection into a path 2 Choose File gt Export gt Paths to Illustrator 3 Choose a location for the exported path and enter a filename 4 Click Save Saving and Exporting Images 6 Save the file e To print the file using a PostScript printer save in Photoshop EPS DCS or PDF forma
417. mages for Web opacity layer mask 241 layers 216 221 monitors adjusting display 114 calibrating and characterizing See online Help cross platform differences 115 default color 110 Photoshop and ImageReady differences 115 resolution 93 Monochrome option 190 monotones See duotones move tool 149 moving image maps 289 paths 175 selection borders 146 selections 149 shapes 175 slices 277 283 Multichannel mode about 113 190 duotone mode adjustments 388 type in 251 multilevel transparency in PNG 24 format 339 Multi Page PDF to PSD command 103 multiple copies See duplicating N named optimization settings 321 Navigator palette 66 Nearest Neighbor interpolation 96 negatives creating See online Help printing 379 New Channel command 200 New Color command 332 Match Layer Across States command 296 Match Layers Across Frames command 307 Matting command 154 matting removing 154 Maximize Backwards Compatibility option 367 measure tool 75 measuring about 75 angle of rotation 63 changing units 74 cropping marquee 63 using line tool 63 memory freeing 68 Merge Channels command 189 Merge Down command 151 247 Merge Spot Channel option 193 Merge Visible command 247 Merged for Layer option 195 Merged Layers option 72 merging adjustment or fill layers 245 channels 188 layers 206 247 using Stamp 247 Message HTML element 284 292 Metrics option 262 mistakes correcting 68 m
418. mages such as photographs should be compressed as JPEG files Illustrations with flat color or sharp edges and crisp detail such as type should be compressed as GIF or PNG 8 files PNG 24 file format is suitable for continuous tone images However PNG 24 files are often much larger than JPEG files of the same image PNG 24 format is recommended only when working witha continuous tone image that includes multilevel To restore an optimized version of an image to the Original version 1 Select an optimized version of the image in the 2 Up or 4 Up view 2 In the Optimize panel palette choose Original from the Settings pop up menu Navigating in a view If the entire image is not visible in the view area you can navigate to bring another area of the image into view This is particularly useful when working in 2 Up or 4 Up view In ImageReady you can also use the Fit on Screen command to view the entire image in the available space To navigate in a view 1 Do one of the following e Select the hand tool in the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the toolbox ImageReady Hold down the spacebar 2 Dragin the view area to pan over the image To display the entire image in the view area ImageReady Choose View gt Fit on Screen JPEG compresses file size by selectively discarding data Because it discards data JPEG compression is referred to as lossy A higher quality setting results in less data being discard
419. marks apostrophes hyphens em dashes en dashes colons and semicolons appear outside the margins To use hanging punctuation for Roman fonts Choose Roman Hanging Punctuation from the Paragraph palette menu A check mark indicates that the option is selected Note When you use Roman Hanging Punctuation any double byte punctuation marks available in Chinese Japanese and Korean fonts in the selected range will not hang For more information see Using burasagari in online Help Controlling hyphenation and justification The settings you choose for hyphenation and justi fication affect the horizontal spacing of lines and the aesthetic appeal of type on a page Hyphen ation options determine whether words can be hyphenated and if they can what breaks are allowable Justification options determine word letter and glyph spacing For more information see Controlling hyphenation and justification in online Help TI SEE Sa LO ei ses A 1 SETI RAI Ra Se mara pi F Eb Kale El J L sa FR E NE i cechi tie e 2 271 Chapter 10 Designing Web Pages A Using the Web design palettes ImageReady ImageReady provides the following palettes
420. menu or choose GIF from the file format menu 2 Click the channel button E to the right of the Lossy text box 3 In the Modify Lossiness Setting dialog box choose the desired channel from the Channel menu In ImageReady you can choose Save Selection to create a new alpha channel based on the current selection 4 To preview the results of the weighted optimi zation select the Preview option 5 Define the quality range To set the highest level of quality drag the left white tab on the slider enter a value in the Minimum text box or use the arrows to change the current value To set the lowest level of quality drag the right black tab on the slider enter a value in the Maximum text box or use the arrows to change the current value Note Lossiness is a reduction in quality therefore the highest level of image quality 1s defined by the Minimum value and the lowest level of image quality is defined by the Maximum value This is the opposite of the JPEG quality setting 6 Click OK Optimizing Images for the Web To use a channel to modify JPEG quality 1 In the Optimize panel palette choose a JPEG setting from the Settings menu or choose JPEG from the file format menu 2 Click the channel button amp to the right of the Quality text box 3 In the Modify Quality Setting dialog box choose the desired channel from the Channel menu In ImageReady you can choose Save Selection to create a
421. menus to specify measurement units 4 Under Thumbnails specify layout options for the thumbnail previews For Place choose whether to arrange thumbnails horizontally from left to right then top to bottom or vertically from top to bottom then left to right Enter the number of columns and rows that you want per contact sheet The maximum dimensions for each thumbnail are displayed to the right along with a visual preview of the specified layout Select Use Filename As Caption to label the thumbnails using their source image filenames Use the menu to specify a caption font 5 Click OK to create the contact sheet ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 369 User Guide To save a path as an image clipping path 1 Draw and save a path or convert an existing selection into a path 2 Choose Clipping Path from the Paths palette menu 3 For Path choose the path you want to save 4 For good results with most images leave the flatness value blank to print the image using the printer s default value If you experience printing errors enter a new flatness value Values can range from 0 2 to 100 In general a flatness setting from 8 to 10 is recommended for high resolution printing 1200 dpi to 2400 dpi a setting from 1 to 3 for low resolution printing 300 dpi to 600 dpi The PostScript interpreter creates curved segments by linking a series of straight line segments The flatness setting for a clipping path determines
422. mized command ImageReady For more information on optimizing images see Choosing a file format for optimization on page 317 and Optimizing images on page 320 To save a file in GIF format 1 Choose File gt Save As and choose CompuServe GIF from the format list 2 Specify a filename and location select saving options as described in Setting file saving options Photoshop on page 358 and click Save 3 For RGB images the Indexed Color dialog box appears Specify conversion options as described in Conversion options for indexed color images Photoshop in online Help and click OK Saving files in Photoshop PDF format Photoshop You can use the Save As command to save RGB indexed color CMYK grayscale Bitmap mode Lab color and duotone images in Photoshop PDF format To save a file in Photoshop PDF format 1 Choose File gt Save As and choose Photoshop PDF from the format list 2 Specify a filename and location select saving options as described in Setting file saving options Photoshop on page 358 and click Save 3 Select an encoding method See About file compression on page 365 Note Bitmap mode images are automatically encoded using CCITT compression the PDF Options dialog box does not appear 4 Select Save Transparency if you want to preserve transparency when the file is opened in another application When reopening the file in Photoshop or ImageRead
423. mizing images on page 320 and ImageReady The following characteristics can help you identify and differen tiate between slices Slice lines Define the boundary of the slice Solid lines indicate that the slice is a user slice or layer based slice dotted lines indicate that the slice is an auto slice Slice colors Differentiate user slices and layer based slices from auto slices By default user slices and layer based slices have blue symbols while auto slices have gray symbols In addition ImageReady and the Photoshop Save for Web dialog box use color adjustments to dim unselected slices These adjustments are for display purposes only and do not affect the final image s color By default the color adjustment for auto slices is twice the amount of that for user slices Slice numbers Slices are numbered from left to right and top to bottom beginning in the upper left corner of the image If you change the arrangement or total number of slices slice numbers are updated to reflect the new order Slice symbols Indicate whether a user slice is an Image or No Image EJ slice if the slice is a layer based slice EM if the slice is linked B or if the slice includes a rollover effect EY See Choosing a content type on page 281 Linking slices ImageReady on page 285 and Working with rollovers ImageReady on page 292 Selecting and modifying slices You can move duplicate combine d
424. mport the scan using the TWAIN interface use the scanner manufacturer s software to scan your images and save the images as TIFF PICT or BMP files Then open the files in Photoshop or ImageReady Importing an image using the TWAIN interface TWAIN is a cross platform interface for acquiring images captured by certain scanners digital cameras and frame grabbers The manufacturer of the TWAIN device must provide a Source Manager and TWAIN Data source for your device to work with Photoshop and ImageReady You must install the TWAIN device and its software and restart your computer before you can use it to import images into Photoshop and ImageReady See the documentation provided by your device manufacturer for installation information To import an image using the TWAIN interface Photoshop Choose File gt Import and choose the device you want to use from the submenu ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 101 User Guide Opening and importing images You can open and import images in various file formats The available formats appear in the Open dialog box the Open As dialog box Windows or the Import submenu For more information see About file formats in online Help Note Photoshop and ImageReady use plug in modules to open and import many file formats If a file format does not appear in the Open dialog box or in the File gt Import submenu you may need to install the format s plug in module For
425. n drag Mac OS the direction point in the direction of the curve Release Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and the mouse button reposition the pointer where you want the segment to end and drag in the opposite direction to complete the curve segment To break out the direction lines of an anchor point Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS the lines Alt drag or Option drag the direction point toward the curve Release the key and drag in the opposite direction If you are working with a stylus tablet select or deselect Stylus Pressure When this option is selected an increase in stylus pressure causes the width to decrease 2 Clickin the image to set the first fastening point 3 To draw a freehand segment move the pointer or drag along the edge you want to trace The most recent segment of the border remains active As you move the pointer the active segment snaps to the strongest edge in the image connecting the pointer to the last fastening point Periodically the magnetic pen adds fastening points to the border to anchor previous sections 4 If the border doesn t snap to the desired edge click once to add a fastening point manually and to keep the border from moving Continue to trace the edge and add fastening points as needed If needed press Delete to remove the last fastening point 5 To dynamically modify the properties of the magnetic pen do one of the following Alt drag Windows or
426. n the Info palette automatically changes the units on the rulers 3 For Width and Gutter enter values for the column size You can also change the units Some layout programs use the column width setting to specify the display of an image across columns The Image Size and Canvas Size commands also use this setting See Changing the print dimensions and resolution of an image Photoshop on page 97 For more information see Changing the size of the work canvas in online Help 4 For Point Pica Size choose from the following options PostScript 72 points per inch if you are printing to a PostScript device Traditional to use printer s 72 27 points per inch 5 Click OK Looking at the Work Area Using rulers the measure tool guides and the grid Rulers the measure tool guides and the grid help you position images or elements precisely across the width or length of an image Note You can also align and distribute parts of an image using the Layers palette See Moving and aligning the contents of layers on page 214 Using rulers When visible rulers appear along the top and left side of the active window Markers in the ruler display the pointer s position when you move it Changing the ruler origin the 0 0 mark on the top and left rulers lets you measure from a specific point on the image The ruler origin also deter mines the grid s point of origin To display or h
427. n to change their order of execution To rearrange actions In the Actions palette drag the action to its new location before or after another action When the highlighted line appears in the desired position release the mouse button CHAPTER 15 Automating Tasks Press Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS and double click the command Note Because an action 15 a series of commands you can use the Edit gt Undo command to undo only the last command in an action To undo an entire action take a snapshot in the History palette before you play an action and then select the snapshot to undo the action Setting playback options Photoshop Sometimes a long complicated action does not play properly but it is difficult to tell where the problem occurs The Playback Options command gives you three speeds at which to play actions so that you can watch each command as it is carried out When working with actions that contain audio annotations you can specify whether or not the action will pause for audio annotations This ensures that each audio annotation completes playing before the next step in the action is initiated To specify how fast actions should play 1 Choose Playback Options from the Actions palette menu 2 Specify a speed Accelerated to play the action at normal speed the default e Step by Step to complete each command and redraw the image before going on to the next command in the action
428. n you create your own custom element save it in a library file so that it can be accessed through the Preset Manager Once you load a library in the Preset Manager it becomes available whenever its elements are used in Photoshop in the options bar the Styles palette the Gradient Editor dialog box and other locations Libraries can also be shared with colleagues to streamline their creative work Save Set Rename Delete Using the Preset Manager Other new and enhanced features Annotations The new notes and audio annotation tools let you attach text and voice comments to images These annotations are supported in both Photoshop and Adobe Acrobat You can also import annotations from a PDF document into a Photoshop image Control of nonprinting elements The new View gt Show Extras and Hide Extras commands let you globally control the display of nonprinting elements such as guides grids target paths selection edges slices image maps text bounding boxes text selections and annotations Commands for controlling the display and snapping behavior of specific nonprinting element types are grouped under the new View gt Show and View gt Snap To submenus Perspective cropping The crop tool offers a new Perspective option which lets you correct perspective distortions as you crop an image What s New in Adobe Photoshop 0 WebDAV workflow management New commands under the File gt Manage Workflow submenu
429. name for the brush swatch and so on If you selected multiple presets you will be prompted to enter multiple names ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide In Mac OS do one of the following Hold down the Shift Option and Command keys at the startup of Photoshop to reset prefer ences to their default settings Open the Preferences folder in the System Folder and drag the following files to the Trash Photoshop Adobe Save For Web 2 0 prefs and located in the Adobe Photoshop 6 Settings folder Adobe Photoshop 6 Prefs Actions Palette prefs Color Settings prefs Contours psp Custom Shape psp Patterns psp Shape Curves psp and Styles psp ImageReady Adobe ImageReady 3 0 Prefs New Preferences files will be created the next time you start Photoshop or ImageReady Resetting all warning dialogs Sometimes messages containing warnings or prompts regarding certain situations are displayed You can disable the display of these messages by selecting the Don t Show Again option in the message You can also globally reset the display of all messages that have been disabled To reset the display of all warning messages Photoshop 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General 2 Click Reset All Warning Dialogs and click OK To turn on or off warning messages ImageReady 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General 2 Deselect or select Disable Warnings and click OK dialog boxes that can be opened throu
430. names presets contours 236 layer styles 226 227 Preview In menu adding a browser to 84 previewing adding a browser to the Preview In menu 84 animations 309 browser dithering 343 channel calculations 195 color selections 145 extracted objects 156 in a browser 84 layer styles 234 layers 207 printed image 98 rollovers 295 Web pages 272 Print command 376 print dimensions changing 97 changing when printing 377 428 INDEX specifying 128 warning messages 126 polygon image map tool 287 polygon lasso tool 139 141 pop up palettes about 62 changing display of items 63 customizing list of items 62 deleting items 62 renaming items 62 selecting items 62 pop up sliders 61 PostScript fonts 251 Level 2 112 Level 3 112 point size 74 PostScript Color Management option 383 PostScript Language Reference Manual 381 ppi pixels per inch 93 See also resolution preferences Adobe Online 4 anti aliasing 104 Clipboard 152 color management settings 127 displaying previews 115 file compatibility 367 file extensions 366 grid and guides 77 image map 288 image previews 366 interpolation 96 optimization 345 recent file list 102 429 repositioning paths and shapes 175 Resample Image option 97 98 resampling about 96 interpolation methods 96 See also resizing Rescan Actions Folder command 404 Reselect command 140 Reset Actions command 403 Reset All Tools command 59 Reset Palette Location
431. nd optimized sizes Document Profile to display the name of the color profile used by the image Scratch Sizes to display information on the amount of RAM and scratch disk used to process the image The number on the left represents the amount of memory that is currently being used by the program to display all open images The number on the right represents the total amount of RAM available for processing images Efficiency to display the percentage of time actually doing an operation instead of reading or writing the scratch disk If the value is below 100 Photoshop is using the scratch disk and therefore is operating more slowly Timing to display the amount of time it took to complete the last operation e Current Tool to view the name of the active tool To display image information in the document window ImageReady 1 Click an image information box at the bottom of the document window jj 4 eG MN N AA NSA ptimized File Sizes Optimized Information Image Dimensions Watermark Strength Ee EERSTE Original in Bytes Optimized in Bytes Opt imized Savings Size Download Time 14 4Kbps Size Download Time 28 8Kbps Size Download Time 56 Call the phone number listed in the Watermark Information dialog box to get information faxed back to you For more information on adding digital watermarks to an image see Adding digital c
432. nd Backward Send to Back e ImageReady Choose Slices gt Arrange and choose a stacking order command from the submenu or choose a stacking order command from the Slice palette menu ImageReady Choose Slices gt Duplicate Slice s e ImageReady Choose Duplicate Slice s from the Slice palette menu The duplicate slice appears on top of the original offset 10 pixels down and to the right and can be moved resized or otherwise modified To copy and paste a slice ImageReady 1 Select one or more slices 2 Choose Copy Slice from the Slice palette menu 3 If you want to paste into another image open and display that image 4 Choose Paste Slice from the Slice palette menu If you paste the slice into the same image as you copied it from the pasted slice appears on top of the original Combining slices ImageReady In ImageReady you can combine two or more slices into a single slice The resulting slice takes its dimensions and position from the rectangle created by joining the outer edges of the combined slices If the combined slices are not adjacent or are of different proportions or alignments the newly combined slice may overlap other slices Optimization settings for the combined slice are those of the first slice selected before the Combine Slices operation A combined slice is always a user slice regardless of whether the original slices include auto slices Note You cannot combine l
433. nd applications that use the Color Settings dialog box such as Adobe Illustrator 9 0 You can also load previously saved color management configurations into the Color Settings dialog box To save a custom color management configuration 1 In the Color Settings dialog box click Save 2 Name your color settings file and click Save 130 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 131 User Guide page 382 The following diagram shows how the source document profile proof profile and monitor profile are used to represent colors in a soft proof A Document space B Proof space C Monitor space Keep in mind that the reliability of the soft proof is highly dependent upon the quality of your monitor your monitor profile and the ambient lighting conditions of your work station See Creating an ICC monitor profile on page 136 To display a soft proof 1 Choose View gt Proof Setup and choose the proof profile space that you want to simulate Custom soft proofs colors using the color profile of a specific output device Follow the instructions after this procedure to set up the custom proof Working CMYK soft proofs colors using the current CMYK working space as defined in the Color Settings dialog box Working Cyan Plate Working Magenta Plate Working Yellow Plate Working Black Plate or Working CMY Plates soft proofs specific CMYK ink colors using the current CMYK working space Synchronizing color management be
434. nd characterize your monitor to a standard and then save the settings as an ICC compliant profile available to any program that uses your color management system This calibration helps you eliminate any color cast in your monitor make your monitor grays as neutral as possible and standardize image display across different monitors 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Suri 77 gt EHRE i cechi tie e 2 139 In Photoshop you can use the Extract command to isolate an object from its background and erase the background to transparency You can also make sophisticated selections using masks See Saving a mask selection on page 200 Making pixel selections You can select pixels in an image by dragging with the marquee tools or lasso tools or by targeting color areas with the magic wand tool In Photoshop you can also use the Color Range command Making a new selection replaces the existing one Additionally you can create selections that add to a selection subtract from a selection select an area intersected by other selections or select the union of a new selection and the current selection Using the Select menu You can use commands in the Select menu to select all pixels to deselect or to reselect To select all pi
435. nd the color profile associated with the file or imported data you may be prompted to specify how to handle color information in the file or imported data For more information see About color management policies on page 125 To copy a selection 1 Select the area you want to copy 2 Choose Edit gt Copy or Edit gt Copy Merged To copy a selection while dragging 1 Select the move tool or hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS to activate the move tool 2 Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag the selection you want to copy and move When copying between images drag the selection from the active image window into the destination image window If nothing is selected the entire active layer is copied As you drag the selection over another image window a border highlights the window if you can drop the selection into it CHAPTER 5 Selecting 150 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 151 User Guide 6 If you are satisfied with your results you can choose Layer gt Merge Down to merge the new layer and layer mask with the underlying layer and make the changes permanent Using drag and drop to copy between applications The drag and drop feature lets you copy and move images between Photoshop or ImageReady and other applications In Windows the application must be OLE compliant To duplicate an entire image by dragging and dropping use the move tool to drag the image To copy an OLE ob
436. ndo command the History palette or the Clipboard Choose Edit gt Purge and choose the item type or buffer you want to clear If already empty the item type or buffer is dimmed Important The Purge command permanently clears from memory the operation stored by the command or buffer it cannot be undone For example choosing Edit gt Purge gt Histories deletes all history states from the History palette Use the Purge command when the amount of information held in memory 15 so large that Photoshop s performance 15 noticeably diminished To revert to the last saved version Choose File gt Revert Note Revert is added as a history state in the History palette and can be undone To restore part of an image to its previously saved version Photoshop Do one of the following e Use the history brush tool to paint with the selected state or snapshot on the History palette For more information see Painting with a state or snapshot of an image Photoshop in online Help e Use the eraser tool 4 with the Erase to History option selected For more information see Using the eraser tool in online Help 68 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area To automatically resize the window when magnifying or reducing the view using keyboard shortcuts Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General then select the Keyboard Zoom Resizes Windows preference Correcting mistakes Most operat
437. ne or more characters e Click in the text and then shift click to select a range of characters Choose Select gt All to select all the characters in the layer CHAPTER 9 Using Type 258 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide To choose a font family and style 1 Choose a font family from the Font Family pop up menu in the Character palette or options bar If more than one copy of a font is installed on your computer an abbreviation follows the font name T1 for Type 1 fonts TT for TrueType fonts or OT for OpenType fonts In Photoshop you can choose a font family and Q style by typing the desired name in the text box As you type the name of the first font or style beginning with that letter appears Continue typing until the correct font or style name appears Be sure to deselect the font name before entering new type in the image 2 Do one of the following Choose a font style from the Font Style pop up menu in the Character palette or options bar If the font family you chose does not include a bold or italic style choose Faux Bold or Faux Italic from the Character palette menu to apply a simulated style Note You cannot apply Faux Bold formatting to warped type See Warping type layers on page 256 Choosing a type size The type size determines how large the type appears in the image In Photoshop the default unit of measurement for type is points One PostScript point is equal
438. new alpha channel based on the current selection 4 10 preview the results of the weighted optimi zation select the Preview option 5 Define the quality range To set the highest level of quality drag the right white tab on the slider enter a value in the Maximum text box or use the arrows to change the current value To set the lowest level of quality drag the left black tab on the slider enter a value in the Minimum text box or use the arrows to change the current value 6 Click OK Using channels to modify GIF lossiness When you use an alpha channel to optimize the amount of lossiness or quality reduction in a GIF image white areas of the mask yield the highest quality and black areas of the mask yield the lowest quality You can adjust the maximum and minimum level of quality reduction in the Modify Lossiness Setting dialog box ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 329 User Guide Using channels to modify color reduction When you use an alpha channel to optimize the colors in a GIF or PNG 8 image the white areas of the mask determine what areas of the image are the most important when calculating the color table White areas of the channel indicate to the color reduction algorithm which pixels are highly important whereas black areas of the channel indicate which pixels are less important To use a channel to modify color reduction 1 In the Optimize panel palette choose a GIF or PNG 8 setting from the Setti
439. ng image maps 290 slices 279 arrowhead options 165 ASCII encoding in EPS and DCS files 360 Asian type See CJK type aspect ratio constraining about 140 slices 273 when placing files 105 authorship information 78 Auto Regenerate option 326 Auto Screens dialog box 381 automatic frame disposal 308 Automatically Create First Snapshot option 71 automating commands for 410 multiple image layouts 368 optimization 346 410 using actions 393 using Batch command 405 using droplets 406 See also actions auto slices See slices B b component 112 background color printing 378 setting for Web 352 Animation palette 302 animations about 301 copying and pasting frames 304 creating 302 311 312 delay time 306 deleting 303 disposal method for frames 308 flattening frames into layers 308 layers in 306 looping options 306 optimizing 309 previewing 309 rearranging frames 303 selecting frames 302 tweening frames 304 annotations about 80 creating 81 creating audio annotations 81 importing 81 playing in actions 400 saving 358 saving in PDF 80 showing and hiding 82 anti aliasing Adobe Illustrator files 104 EPS files 104 layer style option 232 PDF files 103 placed artwork 105 rasterized shapes 164 selections 147 198 type 255 AppleScript 411 application dither See dithering 415 moving 187 options 200 201 printing 376 Quick Mask 198 restricting blending 221 saving selections in 200 201 selecting 1
440. ng hard edged transparency in GIF and PNG 8 images When working with GIF or PNG 8 files you can create hard edged transparency in which all pixels that are more than 50 transparent in the original image are fully transparent in the optimized image and all pixels that are more than 50 opaque in the original image are fully opaque in the optimized image Use hard edged trans parency when you don t know the background color of a Web page or when the Web page background is a pattern However keep in mind that hard edged transparency can cause Jagged edges in the image O A 8 GIF with hard edged transparency and displayed in browser inset at 300 magnification CHAPTER 12 Optimizing Images for the Web The results of matting GIF and PNG 8 images depend on the Transparency option If you select Transparency only the partially transparent pixels such as those at the edge of an anti aliased image are matted When the image is placed on a Web page the Web background shows through the transparent pixels and the edges of the image blend with the background This feature prevents the halo effect that results when an anti aliased image is placed on a background color that differs from the image s original background This feature also prevents the jagged edges that result with GIF hard edged transparency If you deselect Transparency fully transparent pixels are filled with the matte color and partially transpa
441. ng with Adobe PressReady in online Help For example suppose your document currently uses an RGB profile and you want to use your desktop printer to proof the colors as they will appear on an offset press To do this set up a proof profile for the press color space See Soft proofing colors on page 131 Then print the document using the proof profile as the source space and the desktop printer profile as the printer space To color manage a document while printing 1 Choose File gt Print Options 2 Select Show More Options and choose Color Management from the pop up menu 3 Select an option for Source Space e Select Document to reproduce document colors as interpreted by the profile currently assigned to the document Select Proof to reproduce document colors as interpreted by the current proof profile This option is useful for generating hard proofs of your soft proof settings See Soft proofing colors on page 131 4 Under Print Space choose an option for Profile Choose the profile that matches the color space of your printer to print using that printer space Choose Same As Source to print using the source space profile No additional conversions will be performed on the colors of the document when it is printed Choose PostScript Color Management to send the document s color data along with the source space profile directly to a PostScript Level 2 or higher printer Level 3 or
442. ngs menu or choose GIF or PNG 8 from the file format menu 2 Choose a color reduction algorithm and specify the maximum number of colors 3 Click the channel button E to the right of the Color Reduction Algorithm pop up menu 4 In the Modify Color Reduction dialog box choose the desired channel from the Channel menu In ImageReady you can choose Save Selection to create a new alpha channel based on the current selection 5 To preview the results of the weighted optimi zation select the Preview option 6 Click OK Using channels to modify dithering When you use an alpha channel to optimize the amount of dithering in a GIF or PNG 8 image white areas of the mask yield the most dithering and black areas of the mask yield the least dithering You can adjust the maximum and minimum levels of dithering in the Modify Quality Setting dialog box To use a channel to modify dithering 1 In the Optimize panel palette choose a GIF or PNG 8 setting from the Settings menu or choose GIF or PNG 8 from the file format menu 2 Click the channel button E to the right of the Dither text box 3 In the Modify Quality Setting dialog box choose the desired channel from the Channel menu In ImageReady you can choose Save Selection to create a new alpha channel based on the current selection 4 10 preview the results of the weighted optimi zation select the Preview option 5 Define the dithering range To set the high
443. nimation palette The animation is displayed in the document window The animation repeats indefinitely unless you specified another repeat value in the Play Options dialog box See Specifying looping on page 306 2 To stop the animation click the Stop button U 3 To rewind the animation click the Rewind button lt 1 To preview an animation in a browser 1 Click the Preview in Default Browser tool 85 F in the toolbox or choose File gt Preview In and select a browser from the submenu 2 Use the browser s Stop and Reload commands to stop or replay the animation Viewing animated images in Photoshop When you open a file containing an animation in Photoshop only the frame that was selected when you saved the file in ImageReady is displayed You cannot edit the animation frames separately play the animation or save the animation as an animated GIF If you add a new layer to the file while in Photoshop the layer is added to all frames of the animation However the new layer will only appear in the selected frame when you reopen the file in ImageReady If you change the stacking order of layers while in Photoshop the stacking order of layers will be changed when you reopen the file in ImageReady Saving animations You can save an animation 35 series of GIF files or as a QuickTime movie Saving animations as animated GIFs Animations that you view in a Web browser are called animated
444. nique is particularly useful for generating precise slices for rollovers 46 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide Enhanced support for image maps and rollovers ImageReady 3 0 provides new and enhanced support for creating image maps and rollover effects directly in an image Image map creation Using the new image map tools in conjunction with the new Image Map palette you can define image map areas in your image complete with URL target frame and Alt text options You can also define an image map based on the boundaries of a layer 03 04 01 gt t a 02 home about services e mail Styles n w ud will asi T al Rollover_style Bl Normal Creating a new rollover style Rollover enhancements You can now save a rollover as a style in the Styles palette All of the rollover s attributes including its effects slices and states are saved in the style which you can reapply easily with a single click Other enhancements include the sharing of color palettes between rollover states and the ability to preview rollovers directly in ImageReady What s New in Adobe Photoshop 0 Weighted optimization Photoshop 6 0 incorporates new weighted optimization controls that let you use 8 bit alpha channels to smoothly vary compression settings across an image This technique produces higher quality results in critical image a
445. nnels You can create a new spot channel or convert an existing alpha channel to a spot channel To create a new spot channel 1 Choose Window gt Show Channels to display the Channels palette 2 To fill a selected area with a spot color make or load a selection 3 Do one of the following to create a channel e Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS the New Channel button El in the Channels palette Choose New Spot Channel from the Channels palette menu If you made a selection that area is filled with the currently specified spot color Adding spot colors Photoshop Spot colors are special premixed inks used instead of or in addition to the process color CMYK inks Each spot color requires its own plate on the press Because a varnish requires a separate plate it is considered a spot color too For information on printing spot color plates see Printing color separations on page 389 If you are planning to print an image with spot colors you need to create spot channels to store the colors Note To export spot channels save the file in DCS 2 0 format or PDE See Saving files in Photoshop EPS or DCS format Photoshop on page 359 About spot colors Note the following when working with spot colors For spot color graphics that have crisp edges and knock out the underlying image consider creating the additional artwork in a page layout or illus tration application
446. nnels palette These guidelines apply to channels you display e In RGB CMYK or Lab images you can view the individual channels in color In Lab images only the a and b channels appear in color If more than one channel is active the channels always appear in color ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide To change the order of alpha or spot channels Drag the channel up or down When the heavy black line appears in the position you want release the mouse button Note You can move spot channels above the default color channels only if the image 15 in Multichannel mode You cannot move alpha channels above color channels Duplicating channels You might duplicate an image s channel to make a backup before editing the channel Or you might duplicate alpha channels to a new image to create a library of selections to load into the current image one by one thus keeping the file smaller If you are duplicating alpha channels between images the channels must have identical pixel dimensions See Creating new images on page 100 Note You cannot duplicate a channel to a Bitmap mode image To duplicate a channel using the Duplicate command 1 In the Channels palette select the channel to duplicate 2 Choose Duplicate Channel from the Channels palette menu 3 Type a name for the duplicate channel 4 For Document do one of the following Choose a destination Only images with pixel dimensions the
447. nsparency 369 definition of 172 deleting 180 deselecting 172 distributing 177 drawing freehand 169 exporting to Adobe Illustrator 370 filling See online Help from selection borders 181 recording in actions 396 reordering in the palette 172 repositioning 175 saving 179 selecting 171 173 type as work path 257 Paths palette 171 Paths to Illustrator command 370 Pattern buffer 68 Print One command 376 Print Options command 376 Print Publishing Guide 5 Print Selected Area option 382 Printer Color Management option 383 printer resolution 94 printer s points 74 printing about 375 about dpi 94 CMYK versions of images 383 color management and 382 creating color traps 384 duotones 388 halftone screen attributes for 379 layers 208 layers and channels 376 overprint colors 387 page marks 378 part of an image 382 PostScript Level 2 112 PostScript Level 3 112 previewing image size 98 resizing and reposition images 377 printing inks colors 111 density 193 printing marks 378 process color inks about 191 simulating solidity 192 193 profiles about 131 adding 135 assigning to document 133 restoring to default settings 87 Save Palette Locations 61 setting 86 slices 275 tool tips 2 transparency display 208 unit of measurement for type 260 See also names of individual preferences Preferences command 87 Preset Manager changing views 86 working with libraries 85 See also individual preset
448. ntally moving it In Photoshop a grid appears by default as nonprinting lines but can also be displayed as dots The grid is useful for laying out elements symmetrically Guides and grids behave in similar ways e Selections selection borders and tools snap to a guide or the grid when dragged within 8 screen not image pixels Guides also snap to the grid when moved You can turn this feature on and off Using the measure tool Photoshop The measure tool calculates the distance between any two points in the work area When you measure from one point to another a nonprinting line is drawn and the options bar and Info palette show the following information e The starting location X and Y The horizontal W and vertical H distances traveled from the x and y axes The angle measured relative to the axis A The total distance traveled D1 When using a protractor you can view two distances traveled D1 and D2 All measurements except the angle are calculated in the unit of measure currently set in the Units amp Rulers preference dialog box For information on setting the unit of measure see Using rulers on page 74 To display an existing measuring line Select the measure tool 4 To measure between two points 1 Select the measure tool 2 Drag from the starting point to the ending point Hold down the Shift key to constrain the tool to multiples of 45 3 To create a
449. ntersect with Channel option 201 Inverse command 147 creating from history state 71 creating from snapshot 71 creating new 100 displaying information 78 displaying size of 95 duplicating 73 flattening 248 importing from PDF files 103 loading selections into 202 maximum size 95 moving 66 opening 101 pixel dimensions 92 97 placing 104 369 previewing in browser 84 print dimensions 97 printing 375 resampling 96 restoring 68 reverting to any state 69 scanning 99 viewing 64 66 Web 271 See also bitmap images optimizing images vector graphics imagesetters 94 Import command 100 103 Import Folder As Frames command 312 importing anti aliased PICT files See online Help artwork by dragging 151 files as animation frames 312 PDF images 103 Photoshop images into other applications 369 INDEX 422 423 layer based slices creating 274 in rollovers 293 layers adjustment or fill 242 advanced blending options 221 applying layer styles 228 blending modes 216 217 blending options 220 blending range 225 changing in animations and rollovers 306 color coding 220 copying between images 211 creating 210 creating image maps from 287 creating slices from 273 deleting 246 duplicating 211 editing 216 filling with neutral color 216 flattening 248 grouping 218 220 247 hiding and showing 207 in animations 306 308 312 in channel calculations 195 in rollover states 293 knockout 22
450. nue to drag If you have finished drawing the border drag from inside the selection Using the lasso polygonal lasso and magnetic lasso tools The lasso and polygonal lasso tools let you draw both straight edged and freehand segments of a selection border With the magnetic lasso tool Photoshop the border snaps to the edges of defined areas in the image Q The magnetic lasso tool is especially useful for quickly selecting objects with complex edges set against high contrast backgrounds 5 To switch temporarily to the other lasso tools do one of the following e To activate the lasso tool hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag with the mouse button depressed To activate the polygonal lasso tool hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click 6 To erase recently drawn segments and fastening points press the Delete key until you ve erased the fastening points for the desired segment 7 Close the selection border To close the border with a freehand magnetic segment double click or press Enter or Return To close the border with a straight segment hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and double click To close the border drag back over the starting point and click Setting options for the lasso polygonal lasso and magnetic lasso tools The lasso tool options let you customize how the different lasso tools detect and select edges To set options for the lasso tools 1
451. number of colors in the image You can choose the Auto option when working with a fixed color palette This option determines the number of colors in the color table based on the frequency of colors in the image Choose Auto if you want Photoshop or ImageReady to determine the optimal number of colors in the color table 9 Select a Dither option and amount For infor mation on dither see Previewing and controlling dithering on page 341 10 To vary the Dither setting across the selected slices using an alpha channel click the channel button 2 next to the Dither text box In the Modify Dither Setting dialog box choose an alpha channel from the pop up menu set a dither range and click OK See Using channels to modify dithering on page 329 324 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Optimizing by file size You can optimize an image or slice to an approx imate file size This feature enables you to quickly achieve a desired file size without having to test different optimization settings To optimize a file according to a specified file size 1 Select Optimize to File Size from the Optimize panel palette menu 2 Select a Start With option Current Settings to use current optimization settings Auto Select GIF JPEG to automatically generate a GIF or JPEG Photoshop or ImageReady selects GIF or JPEG format depending on an analysis of colors in the image 3 Selecta Slices option Current Sli
452. o Cut Copy Paste and Select All In Windows right click in the text area and choose the commands from the context menu In Mac OS choose the commands from the Edit and Select menus You can also use standard keyboard shortcuts for these editing commands To edit annotations Do any of the following To move an annotation icon move the pointer over the icon until it turns into an arrow and then drag the icon You can do this with any tool selected Moving a note icon does not move its note window To move a note window drag it by the title bar To delete a selected annotation press Delete To edit the contents of a note open the note change any options and add delete or change the text You can use the same editing commands that you use when creating a note See Adding notes and audio annotations on page 81 To delete all annotations right click Windows or Control click Mac OS an annotation icon to display the context menu and choose Delete All Annotations You can also delete all annotations by clicking Clear All in the options bar for notes or audio annotations Jumping between applications You can jump between Photoshop and ImageReady to transfer an image between the two applications for editing without closing or exiting the originating application In addition you can jump from ImageReady to other graphics editing applications and HTML editing applications installed on your system
453. o copy 2 If not already linked in the Layers palette click in the column immediately to the left of any additional layers you want to move The link icon appears in the column 3 Use the move tool to drag the linked layers or layer set from the source image to the desti nation image To duplicate a layer into another image or a new image 1 If you are duplicating a layer or layer set to an existing image open both the source and desti nation images 2 In the source documents Layers palette select the name of the layer you want to duplicate 3 Choose Layer gt Duplicate Layer or Layer gt Duplicate Layer Set 4 Type a name for the duplicate layer 5 For Document choose a destination for the layer To create a new document for the layer choose New and type a name for the new document 6 Click OK An image created by duplicating a layer has no background layer To copy a layer or layer set between images 1 Make sure that both the source and destination images are open 2 In the Layers palette of the source image select the name of the layer or layer set that you want to copy 3 Do one of the following For layers drag the layer s name from the Layers palette into the destination image e Use the move tool to drag the layer or layer set from the source image to the destination image The copied layer appears in the destination image where you release the mouse button and
454. o determine the appropriate resolution for your image when printing to any laser printer but especially to imagesetters see screen frequency Ink jet printers produce a spray of ink not actual dots however most ink jet printers have an approximate resolution of 300 to 600 dpi and produce good results when printing images up to 150 ppi Screen frequency The number of printer dots or halftone cells per inch used to print grayscale images or color separations Also known as screen ruling or line screen screen frequency is measured in lines per inch lpi or lines of cells per inch in a halftone screen The relationship between image resolution and screen frequency determines the quality of detail in the printed image To produce a halftone image of the highest quality you generally use an image resolution that is from 1 5 to at most 2 times the screen frequency But with some images and ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Keep in mind that bitmap and vector data can produce different results when you resize an image Bitmap data is resolution dependent therefore changing the pixel dimensions of a bitmap image can cause a loss in image quality and sharpness In contrast vector data is resolution independent you can resize it without losing its crisp edges Displaying image size information You can display information about the current image size using the information box at the bottom of the application window Win
455. o resize a slice grab a side or a corner handle of the slice and drag to resize the slice In ImageReady if you select and resize adjacent slices common edges shared by the slices are resized together To select multiple slices Photoshop Save for Web dialog box and ImageReady With the slice select tool do one of the following e Shift click to add slices to the selection Photoshop Save for Web dialog box Drag across the slices you want to select in the image area ImageReady Click in an auto slice or outside the image area and drag across the slices you want to select Clicking in a user slice and dragging moves the slice In ImageReady you can save load and delete slice selections Using slice selections lets you reselect specific slices quickly and accurately To save a slice selection ImageReady 1 Select one or more slices 2 Choose Slices gt Save Slice Selection 3 Enter a name in the Selection Name text box and click OK To load a slice selection ImageReady Choose Slices gt Load Slice Selection and select the name of the slice selection you want to load from the submenu Note You must save a slice selection before you can load it 5 Define how you want to divide each selected slice e Select and enter a value for slices down or slices across to divide each slice evenly into the specified number of slices Select and enter a value for pixels per slice to divide e
456. objects with wispy intricate or undefinable edges may be clipped from their backgrounds with a minimum of manual work Note For simpler cases you can instead use the background eraser tool Removing fringe pixels from a selection Photoshop When you move or paste an anti aliased selection some of the pixels surrounding the selection border are included with the selection This can result in a fringe or halo around the edges of the pasted selection These Matting commands let you edit unwanted edge pixels Defringe replaces the color of any fringe pixels with the colors of nearby pixels containing pure colors those without background color For example if you select a yellow object on a blue background and then move the selection some of the blue background is selected and moved with the object Defringe replaces the blue pixels with yellow ones Remove Black Matte and Remove White Matte are useful when you want to paste a selection anti aliased against a white or black background onto a different background For example anti aliased black text on a white background has gray pixels at the edges which are visible against a colored background You can also remove fringe areas by using the Advanced Blending sliders in the Layer Styles dialog box to remove or make transparent areas from the layer In this case you would make the black or white areas transparent Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS on the sl
457. ocations The change takes effect the next time you start the application Using pop up sliders A number of palettes and dialog boxes contain settings that use pop up sliders for example the Opacity option in the Layers palette To use a pop up slider Do one of the following Position the pointer over the triangle next to the setting hold down the mouse and drag the slider or angle radius to the desired value Click the triangle next to the setting to open the pop up slider box and drag the slider or angle radius to the desired value Click outside the slider box or press Enter or Return to close the slider box To cancel changes press the Escape key Esc Q To increase or decrease values in 10 incre ments when the pop up slider box is open hold down Shift and press the Up or Down arrow key ImageReady To show or hide options for palettes that include hidden options the Optimize Color Type Layer Options and Slice palettes click the Show Options button on the palette tab to cycle through palette displays or choose Show Options or Hide Options from the palette menu Docking palettes together Docking palettes together lets you view multiple palettes at the same time and move them as a group Entire palette groups cannot be docked together at once but you can dock the palettes from one group to another one at a time In Photoshop you can also store palettes in the e palette well of the t
458. odal controls in actions 397 Mode commands 117 118 models See color models modes See blending modes or color modes moir patterns 380 381 monitor profiles 136 monitoring operations 88 HTML options 9 loading setting 348 saving setting 348 slice naming options 351 overprint colors 387 P page marks 378 Page Setup command 376 painting on layer masks 238 with sampled data 216 See also online Help Painting Cursors options 58 painting tools recording in actions 397 palettes about 60 changing display of 60 docking 61 Hide Options command 61 moving 60 pop up sliders 61 resetting to default positions 61 setting position of 61 Show Options button 61 Show Options command 61 showing and hiding 60 storing in tool options bar 60 See also names of individual palettes Paragraph palette 265 paragraph type See type Pass Through blending mode 213 Paste Into command 149 150 Paste Layer Style command 229 Paste Rollover State command 297 automating 346 399 406 410 by file size 325 canceling 327 choosing a view for 316 creating HTML files 347 file formats for 317 GIF format 319 323 JPEG format 318 321 named optimization settings 321 PNG 24 format 320 PNG 8 format 319 323 PNT 24 format 325 preferences for 345 preserving background transparency 339 previewing and controlling dithering 341 repopulating views 316 restoring to original version 317 saving 347 using background matting 339
459. of an image to a URL You can set up multiple linked areas called image map areas in an image with links to text files other images audio video or multi media files other pages in the Web site or other Web sites You can also create rollover effects in image map areas The main difference between using image maps and using slices to create links is in how the source image is exported as a Web page Using image maps keeps the exported image intact as a single file while using slices causes the image to be exported as a separate file Another difference between image maps and slices is that image maps enable you to link circular polygonal or rectan gular areas in an image while slices enable you to link only rectangular areas If you need to link only rectangular areas using slices may be preferable to using an image map Note To avoid unexpected results do not create image map areas in slices that contain URL links either the image map links or the slice links may be ignored in some browsers Creating image maps You can create image map areas using an image map tool or a layer Tool based image map areas Are created using an image map tool you drag in the image to define the image map area You can view and set options for tool based image maps in the Image Map palette CHAPTER 10 Designing Web Pages Linked slices in GIF and PNG 8 format share a color palette and dither pattern The dither pattern is
460. og box and click OK If you selected multiple frames specifying a delay value for one frame applies the value to all frames Note Delay time may not be accurate during an animation preview in ImageReady For an accurate preview of delay time preview animations ina browser Working with layers in animations Working with layers is the key to creating anima tions in ImageReady Each new frame starts out as a duplicate of the preceding frame you edit the frame by adjusting its layers You can apply layer changes to a single frame a group of frames or the entire animation Using layers to edit frames The information in this section applies to rollover states as well as to animation frames When you work with layers in a frame you can create or copy selections in the layer adjust color and tone change the layer s opacity blending mode or position add layer effects and perform editing tasks as you would with layers in any image Using layer attributes to create animation effects is very simple and it allows you to save an animation file in Photoshop format for later reediting Creating Animations ImageReady 7 Enter a value or use the Up or Down Arrow key to choose the number of frames to add This option is not available if you selected more than two frames In this case the tweening operation alters the existing frames between the first and last frames in the selection 8 Click OK Specifying looping
461. oints for the desired segment 5 To close the selection border release the mouse without holding down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS To use the polygonal lasso tool 1 Select the polygonal lasso tool 7 and select options See Setting options for the lasso polygonal lasso and magnetic lasso tools on page 142 2 Clickin the image to set the starting point 3 Do one or more of the following To draw a straight segment position the pointer where you want the first straight segment to end and click Continue clicking to set endpoints for subsequent segments To draw a freehand segment hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag When finished release Alt or Option and the mouse button 6 Do one of the following to make a selection e With the rectangle rounded rectangle or elliptical marquee drag over the area you want to select Hold down Shift as you drag to constrain the marquee to a square or circle To drag a marquee from its center hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS after you begin dragging e With the single row or single column marquee click near the area you want to select and then drag the marquee to the exact location If no marquee is visible increase the magnification of your image view Q To reposition a rectangle rounded rectangle or elliptical marquee first drag to create the border keeping the mouse button depressed Then hold down the spacebar and conti
462. ok visit the Adobe Web site at www adobe com or contact your local book distributor Official Adobe Print Publishing Guide Provides in depth information on successful print production including topics such as color management commercial printing constructing a publication imaging and proofing and project management guidelines For information on purchasing the Official Adobe Print Publishing Guide visit the Adobe Web site at www adobe com Official Adobe Electronic Publishing Guide Tackles the fundamental issues essential to ensuring quality online publications in HTML and PDF Using simple expertly illustrated explana tions design and publishing professionals tell you how to design electronic publications for maximum speed legibility and effectiveness For information on purchasing the Official Adobe Electronic Publishing Guide visit the Adobe Web site at www adobe com The Adobe Certification program Offers users instructors and training centers the opportunity to demonstrate their product proficiency and promote their software skills as Adobe Certified Experts Adobe Certified Instructors or Adobe Authorized Learning Providers Certification is 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie e 2 Adobe Pho
463. ol is a straight segment made by clicking to create anchor points To draw straight segments 1 Position the pen pointer where you want the straight segment to begin and click to define the first anchor point The anchor point remains selected solid until you define the next point 2 Click again where you want the first segment of the straight line to end or Shift click to constrain the angle of the segment to a multiple of 45 Drawing with the pen tool The pen tool lets you create straight lines and smooth flowing curves with greater precision than is possible with the freeform pen tool For most users the pen tool provides the best control and greatest accuracy for drawing To draw with the pen tool 1 Select the pen tool 2 In the options bar click either the Create New Shape Layer button L or the Create New Work Path button fg See Drawing shapes and paths on page 161 3 Set the following tool specific options Rubber Band to preview path segments as you draw After you define at least one anchor point for a path Photoshop displays the next proposed segment as you move the pointer in the image The segment doesn t become permanent until you Click Auto Add Delete to automatically add or delete anchor points while you draw 4 Position the pen pointer where you want to begin to draw and click to define the first anchor point The anchor point remains selected solid until you defin
464. older To customize color management settings 1 Choose Edit gt Color Settings 2 To use 2 preset color management configu ration as the starting point for your customization choose that configuration from the Settings menu 3 Specify the desired color settings As you make adjustments the Settings menu option changes to Custom by default For detailed customization instructions see Specifying working spaces on page 127 Speci fying color management policies on page 128 and Customizing advanced color management settings on page 130 4 Save your custom configuration so that it can be reused See Saving and loading color management settings on page 130 5 Click OK reflect a color management workflow that you use more often For more information on policies see About color management policies on page 125 To customize color management policies 1 In the Color Settings dialog box under Color Management Policies choose one of the following to set the default color management policy for each color mode Off if you do not want to color manage imported or opened color data Preserve Embedded Profiles if you anticipate working with a mix of color managed and non color managed documents or with documents that use different profiles within the same color mode Convert to Working Space if you want to force all documents to use the current working space For detailed descri
465. ollowing e To select a visible tool click its icon or press its keyboard shortcut e To select a hidden tool position the pointer on the visible tool and hold down the mouse button until the tools list appears Then click the tool you want To cycle through a set of hidden tools hold down Shift and press the visible tool s shortcut key To enable or disable this option choose Edit gt Preferences gt General then select or deselect Use Shift Key for Tool Switch he Adobe Photoshop and Adobe 1 ImageReady work area includes the command menus at the top of your screen and a variety of tools and palettes for editing and adding elements to your image You can also add commands and filters to the menus by installing third party software known as plug in modules Using the toolbox The first time you start the application the toolbox appears on the left side of the screen Some tools in the toolbox have options that appear in the context sensitive tool options bar See Using the tool options bar on page 59 These include the tools that let you use type select paint draw sample edit move annotate and view images Other tools in the toolbox allow you to change foreground background colors go to Adobe Online work in different modes and jump between Photoshop and ImageReady applications For an overview of each tool see the Toolbox overview topics in online Help For information on the foregroun
466. olor in the Color Table panel palette To select a contiguous group of colors press Shift and click another color All colors in the rows between the first and second selected colors are selected To select a discontiguous group of colors press Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS and click each color that you want to select Including transparency in a color table The color table includes a transparency swatch 5 if the original image contains transparent pixels You can use the matting option to fill transparent pixels with a solid color or you can preserve trans parent pixels when optimizing the image in GIF or PNG format See Making transparent and matted images on page 339 Note When optimizing an animated image the color table may include a transparency swatch even if the image does not contain transparent pixels This is a result of using the Redundant Pixel Removal optimization option in the Animation palette See Optimizing animations on page 309 Including black and white in a color table You can add black and white to the color table when the image does not include these colors Including black and white is useful when preparing files for multimedia authoring applica tions such as Adobe After Effects To add black or white to the color table for an image 1 Choose black or white as the foreground color For more information see Choosing foreground and background colors in on
467. olor is copied to the Clipboard as a hexadecimal value To paste the color into an HTML file open a destination application and choose Copy gt Paste with the HTML file displayed CHAPTER 12 Optimizing Images for the Web displayed automatically in the right side of the Info palette next to RGB color values The Photoshop and ImageReady Info palettes also display other information depending on the tool being used To view hexadecimal color values in the Info palette 1 Choose Window gt Show Info or click the Info palette tab to view the palette 2 Photoshop Choose Palette Options from the palette menu Under First Color Readout or Second Color Readout choose Web Color from the Mode menu and click OK 3 Position the pointer over the color you want to view hexadecimal values for Copying colors as hexadecimal values You can copy colors as hexadecimal values from files in Photoshop or ImageReady using the context menu with the eyedropper tool or using menu commands In Photoshop you copy a color as a hexadecimal value while in the main work area not the Save for Web dialog box To copy a color as a hexadecimal value using the eyedropper tool 1 Select the eyedropper tool in the toolbox 2 Select a color to copy Right click Windows or Control click Mac OS a color in the image to select the color and view the eyedropper tool context menu 338 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 339 User Guide Preserving
468. olor profiles Emulate Photoshop 4 Emulates the color workflow used by the Mac OS version of Adobe Photoshop 4 0 and earlier U S Prepress Defaults Manages color for content that will be output under common press condi tions in the U S Europe Prepress Defaults Manages color for content that will be output under common press conditions in Europe Japan Prepress Defaults Manages color for content that will be output under common press conditions in Japan Web Graphics Defaults Manages color for content that will be published on the World Wide Web ColorSync Workflow Mac OS only Manages color using the ColorSync CMS with the profiles chosen in the ColorSync control panel Use this option if you want to use color management with a mix of Adobe and non Adobe applications This color management configuration is not recognized by Windows systems or by versions of ColorSync earlier than 3 0 another action For detailed information on the color management decisions associated with different policies see Specifying color management policies on page 128 Working with policy warnings and messages The predefined color management workflows are set to display warning or option messages when a default color management policy is about to be used Although you can disable the repeated display of some warning and messages by selecting the Don t Show Again option it is highly recom mended that you continue to display all polic
469. om commands 66 zoom tool 63 66 vector graphics about 91 printing 382 resizing 95 saving in EPS or DCS format 360 saving in PDF format 363 type 251 257 vector shapes See shapes vertical scale of type adjusting 262 video alpha Use Video Alpha option 209 view box 66 viewing hidden tools 58 image maps 288 images 66 slices 275 See also hiding and showing previewing W warning dialogs color management policies 126 resetting 87 Warp Text command 256 warping type layers 256 watermarks about 78 embedding 366 viewing info in status bar 79 Web creating photo galleries 297 designing Web pages 271 generating Web pages 347 GoLive integration 271 348 350 optimizing images for 315 Undo command 68 Undo Redo Status option 79 undoing changes 68 Ungroup command 219 ungrouping clipping groups 219 linked layers 209 Units amp Rulers preferences 74 Unlink All command 286 Unlink Sets command 286 unlocking colors 335 slices 281 Unsharp Mask filter after resampling 96 Unshift All Colors command 335 untagged documents See tagged documents Update HTML command 348 URLs assigning to image maps 291 assigning to slices 282 Use Accurate Screens option 381 388 Use All Layers option 143 216 Use Embedded Color Profile command 116 Use Pixel Doubling preference 115 Use Printer s Default Screens option 380 Use Shift Key for Tool Switch 58 Use Video Alpha option 209 user slices See slices
470. ommand 238 cursors See tool pointers curves creating smooth and sharp 173 drawing 168 duotone 386 Custom color table 331 custom shape tool 162 custom shapes 166 Custom Spot Function dialog box 381 customer support 5 Cut command 153 D DCS format about 185 188 for images with spot channels 389 saving files in 359 defaults mask editing colors 198 199 restoring palette positions 61 restoring tool settings 59 Define Custom Shape command 166 Defringe command 154 INDEX 418 419 Export Original command 358 364 Export Transparent Image wizard 369 exporting duotones 388 paths 370 transparency 369 external automation 411 Extract command 139 154 extracting objects about 154 cleaning up edges 157 previewing 156 Extras choosing from hidden Extras 78 showing and hiding 77 turning on or off 78 See also names of individual Extras eyedropper tool copying hexadecimal color values with 338 See also online Help F Fade command 155 fastening point 142 feathering selections 148 198 file compression See compression file extensions preferences for saving 367 file formats about 364 choosing for optimization 317 Photo CD 112 Scitex CT 113 117 specifying when opening 101 Duplicate Slices command 278 duplicating channels 187 commands in actions 401 image maps 290 images 73 layers 211 layers between images 212 optimized images 73 selections in an image 150 slices 278 Se
471. omponent Each shape in a shape layer is a path component as described by the layer s clipping path Separate path components selected Selecting paths Photoshop You can select path segments and path compo nents by clicking with the path component selection tool or the direct selection tool Selecting a shape or segment displays all of the anchor points on the selected portion including any direction lines and direction points if the selected segment is curved Direction points appear as filled circles selected anchor points as filled squares and unselected anchor points as hollow squares A path can be closed with no beginning or end for example a circle or open with distinct endpoints for example a wavy line Smooth curves are connected by anchor points called smooth points Sharply curved paths are connected by corner points Smooth point and corner point When you move a direction line on a smooth point the curved segments on both sides of the point adjust simultaneously By comparison when you move a direction line on a corner point only the curve on the same side of the point as the direction line is adjusted SE Adjusting a smooth point and a corner point To change the overlap mode for the selected path component Using the path component selection tool drag a marquee to select existing path areas then choose a shape area option in the options bar See Drawing overlapping shapes
472. on a computer monitor varies with the operating system used by the computer For example an image appears darker on a Windows system than on a Mac OS computer because the standard RGB color space is darker in Windows than in Mac OS The Preview commands in ImageReady enable you to compensate for cross platform differences in RGB color display during image preview In Photoshop you can simulate cross platform differences by using the Macintosh RGB Windows RGB and Monitor RGB commands in the View gt Proof Setup menu See Soft proofing colors on page 131 An image can have up to 24 channels By default Bitmap mode grayscale duotone and indexed color images have one channel RGB and Lab images have three and CMYK images have four You can add channels to all image types except Bitmap mode images About bit depth Bit depth also called pixel depth or color depth measures how much color information is available to display or print each pixel in an image Greater bit depth more bits of information per pixel means more available colors and more accurate color representation in the digital image For example a pixel with a bit depth of 1 has two possible values black and white A pixel with a bit depth of 8 has 28 or 256 possible values And a pixel with a bit depth of 24 has 2 or roughly 16 million possible values Common values for bit depth range from 1 to 64 bits per pixel In most cases Lab RGB
473. on of 72 dpi Understanding monitor resolution helps explain why the display size of an image on screen often differs from its printed size Image pixels are trans lated directly into monitor pixels This means that when the image resolution is higher than the monitor resolution the image appears larger on screen than its specified print dimensions Image resolution The number of pixels displayed per unit of printed length in an image usually measured in pixels per inch ppi In Photoshop you can change the resolution of an image in ImageReady the resolution of an image is always 72 ppi This is because the ImageReady application is tailored to creating images for online media not print media In Photoshop image resolution and pixel dimen sions are interdependent The amount of detail in an image depends on its pixel dimensions while the image resolution controls how much space the pixels are printed over For example you can modify an image s resolution without changing the actual pixel data in the image all you change is the printed size of the image However if you want to maintain the same output dimensions changing the image s resolution requires a change in the total number of pixels 72 ppi and 300 ppi images inset zoom 200 output devices a lower resolution can produce good results To determine your printer s screen frequency check your printer documentation or consult your service provider Not
474. only available after you ve saved an image with an ICC profile tt is not available for unsaved images See Setting up color management on page 124 10 Ifthe original image contains transparency select a Matte color that matches the background of your Web page See Making transparent and matted images on page 339 In ImageReady you can control which options show in the Optimize palette by clicking the Show Options control on the Optimize palette tab To show all options choose Show Options from the Optimize palette menu To optimize an image in JPEG format 1 Select a view in which to apply the optimization setting 2 Select the slice or slices to which you want to apply the optimization setting See Selecting slices on page 276 3 In the Optimize panel palette choose JPEG from the File Format menu 4 Do one of the following to specify the image quality Choose an option from the Quality menu Drag the Quality pop up slider Enter a value in the Quality text box The higher the Quality setting the more detail the compression algorithm preserves However using a high Quality setting results in a larger file size than using a low Quality setting View the optimized image at several quality settings to determine the best balance of quality and file size 5 To vary the Quality setting across the selected slices using an alpha channel click the channel button In the Modify Qual
475. only unit of measurement for type This is because the ImageReady application is tailored to creating images for online media in which pixels are the standard unit of measurement To choose a type size In the Character palette or options bar enter or select a new value for Size iT To use an alternate unit of measurement enter the unit in cm pt px or pica after the value in the Size text box The value you enter is converted to the default unit of measurement To specify the default unit of measurement for type Photoshop 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Units amp Rulers 2 Selecta unit of measurement for Type To specify the point size definition Photoshop 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Units amp Rulers 2 Select an option for Point Pica Size Traditional points are slightly smaller than PostScript points CHAPTER 9 Using Type 260 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide To change the leading In the Character palette do one of the following Choose the desired leading from the Leading menu F e Select the existing leading value and enter a new value To change the default auto leading percentage 1 Display the Paragraph palette 2 Choose Justification from the palette menu 3 For Auto Leading specify a new default percentage Specifying kerning and tracking Kerning is the process of adding or subtracting space between specific letter pairs You can control kerning manua
476. ons Image Previews Choose an option for saving image previews Never Save to save files without previews Always Save to save files with specified previews or Ask When Saving to assign previews on a file by file basis In Mac OS you can select one or more of the following preview types to speed the saving of files and minimize file size select only the previews you need Icon to use the preview as a file icon on the desktop Macintosh Thumbnail to display the preview in the Open dialog box Saving and Exporting Images Adding file information Photoshop Adobe Photoshop supports the information standard developed by the Newspaper Association of America NAA and the International Press Telecommunications Council IPTC to identify transmitted text and images This standard includes entries for captions keywords categories credits and origins The captions and keyword entries can also be searched by some third party image browsers In Windows you can add file information to files saved in Photoshop TIFF JPEG EPS and PDF formats In Mac OS you can add file information to files in any format For more information see Adding file information Photoshop in online Help Adding digital copyright information You can add copyright information to Photoshop images and notify users that an image is copyright protected via a digital watermark that uses Digimarc PictureMarc technology The watermark
477. onstructing the original image as needed Tool Options Brush Size Brush Pressure Stylus Pressure ae Recor Mode Amplitwist Reconstruct Liquify 3 Warping in Amplitwist mode 44 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide Produce superb Web graphics Enhanced slicing capabilities Slicing images 15 the key to incorporating large or complex image files into your Web site because browsers can download and display sliced images more efficiently You can also use slices as a basis for creating rollovers or setting up animations Or you can generate HTML pages directly from Photoshop including the HTML table code necessary to reassemble the sliced image Direct Photoshop slicing With the new slice tool and slice select tool you can now define and edit slices directly in Photoshop 6 0 Create user resse defined slices by dragging over different image areas with the slice tool Photoshop defines slices automatically for the areas you don t define You can modify many attributes of user slices including size position stacking order and visibility Slices created with slice tool What s New in Adobe Photoshop 6 0 Slice specific formatting and optimization Sliced images give you more control over how optimization options are applied because you can select separate slices and apply appro
478. ool options bar See Using the tool options bar on page 59 To dock palettes together Drag a palette s tab to the bottom of another palette so that the bottom of the target palette is highlighted To move an entire docked group drag its title bar Setting the positions of palettes and dialog boxes The positions of all open palettes and moveable dialog boxes are saved when you exit the appli cation Alternatively you can always start with default palette positions or restore default positions at any time To delete an item in a pop up palette Do one of the following e Select an item click the triangle in the upper right corner of the pop up palette and choose the Delete command from the palette menu Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click an item To customize the list of items in a pop up palette 1 Click the triangle in the upper right corner of the pop up palette to view the palette menu 2 To return to the default library choose the Reset command You can either replace the current list or append the default library to the current list 3 To load a different library do one of the following Choose the Load command to add a library to the current list Then select the library file you want to use and click Load e Choose the Replace command to replace the current list with a different library Then select the library file you want to use and click Load
479. op In the Layers palette click the Effects bar in that layer or the layer styles icon next to the layer name to select the style on a layer Photoshop Double click a layer style or the Effects bar In the Layer Styles dialog box select additional types of layer effects Click the checkbox next to a layer effect name to add it to the Specifying options for layer styles When customizing layer styles you can specify a number of options for each effect contained in the layer style In Photoshop many options can also be set by dragging For example when you customize a drop shadow style you can drag the shadow to position it Note In Photoshop customize layer styles using the Layer Style dialog box In ImageReady you can use the palette named for the type of effect such as Drop Shadow Inner Shadow and so on ImageReady provides a subset of the options provided by Photoshop Angle Determines the lighting angle at which the effect is applied to the layer You can define a global angle that applies to all layer effects in the image you can also assign a local angle that applies only to a specific layer effect Using a global angle gives the appearance of a consistent light source shining on the image Anti alias Blends the edge pixels of a contour or gloss contour Most useful on shadows with a small size and complicated contour Blend Mode Determines how the layer style blends with the underlying layers whic
480. options see About the Add and Subtract blending modes on page 196 Ci For information on other blending options see Selecting a blending mode in online Help Add Adds the pixel values in two channels This is a good way to combine nonoverlapping images in two channels Because higher pixel values represent lighter colors adding channels with overlapping pixels lightens the image Black areas in both channels remain black 0 0 0 White in either channel results in white 255 any value 255 or greater Add mode divides the sum of the pixel values by the Scale amount and then adds the Offset value to the sum For example if you wanted to find the average of the pixels in two channels you would add them divide by 2 and enter no Offset value The Scale factor may be any number between 1 000 and 2 000 Entering a higher Scale value darkens the image The Offset value lets you lighten or darken the pixels in the destination channel by any brightness value between 255 and 255 Negative values darken the image positive values lighten the image Subtract Subtracts the pixel values in the source channel from the corresponding pixels in the target channel As with Add mode the result is then divided by the Scale factor and added to the Offset value The Scale factor may be any number between 1 000 and 2 000 The Offset value lets you lighten or darken the pixels in the destination channel by any brightne
481. opyright information with the Digimarc filter in online Help Annotating images Photoshop You can attach note annotations notes and audio annotations to an image in Photoshop This is useful for associating review comments production notes or other information with the image Because Photoshop annotations are compatible with Adobe Acrobat you can use them to exchange information with Acrobat users as well as Photoshop users To circulate a Photoshop document for review Q in Acrobat save the document in Portable Document Format PDF and ask reviewers to use Acrobat to add notes or audio annotations Then import the annotations into Photoshop Notes and audio annotations appear as small nonprintable icons on the image They are associated with a location on the image rather than with a layer You can hide and show annotations open notes to view or edit their contents and play audio annotations You can also add audio annota tions to actions and set them to play during an action or during a pause in an action See Setting playback options Photoshop on page 400 80 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area e Size Download Time 14 4 Kbps 28 8 Kbps 56 6 Kbps to view the file size for the optimized image and estimated download time using the selected modem speed Note Download times may vary based on Internet traffic and modem compression schemes The value displayed 15 an approximation To view add
482. or selecting areas that are more easily defined with a painting brush Use any selection tool to select the desired image area and then click the Quick Mask mode button color overlay Do any of the following to modify the selection border in the toolbox In Quick Mask mode everything outside the selection appears masked by a e To add to the selection use a painting tool to paint with white See Painting on page 26 for more information To subtract from the selection paint with black e To create a semitransparent selection area paint with gray This is useful for creating a selection with feathered edges Click the Standard mode button E21 to turn off the quick mask and display the modified selection border 20 Adobe Photoshop Basics Making edits Photoshop and ImageReady are equipped with a rich collection of editing tools and commands that you can use to modify your images In addition to basic edits such as repositioning or applying geometric changes to a selection you can create an unlimited variety of special effects using the Filter commands Resize the image To change the dimensions or resolution of your image choose Image gt Image Size and specify values for the image e Foran image intended for the Web or online display enter values for the pixel dimensions and click OK Photoshop For an image intended for printed output enter values for the physical output size Enter the resolution valu
483. orrect density limit and your processor should be properly calibrated otherwise results can be unpredictable Before creating your halftone screens check with your print shop for preferred frequency angle and dot settings Use the default angle settings unless your print shop specifies changes Important Some output devices ignore the screen frequency and angle attributes you set in Photoshop When printing custom halftone screens it is advisable to save the image in EPS format which embeds custom halftone screen settings in the file In many but not all cases the halftone screen settings in the EPS file will override the printer s default halftone screens To define the screen attributes 1 Choose File gt Print Options 2 Select Show More Options choose Output from the pop up menu and click Screen 3 In the Halftone Screens dialog box choose whether to generate your own screen settings e Deselect Use Printer s Default Screens to choose your own screen settings Select Use Printer s Default Screens to use the default halftone screen built into the printer Photoshop then ignores the specifications in the Halftone Screens dialog box when it generates the halftone screens 4 Fora grayscale halftone enter a screen frequency from 1 to 999 999 and choose a unit of measurement Enter a screen angle from 180 to 180 degrees CHAPTER 14 Printing Photoshop screens Setting the screens at differen
484. ot warp type layers that include Faux Bold formatting or use fonts that do not include outline data such as bitmap fonts To warp type 1 Selecta type layer 2 Do one of the following e Select the type tool T and click the Warp button T in the options bar Choose Layer gt Type gt Warp Text 3 Choose a warp style from the Style pop up menu 4 Select the orientation of the warp effect Horizontal or Vertical 5 If desired specify values for additional Warping options Bend to specify how much warp is applied to the layer Horizontal Distortion and Vertical Distortion to apply perspective to the warp 6 Click OK Double click a word to select it Triple click a line to select it Quadruple click a paragraph to select it Quintuple click anywhere in the text flow to select all characters in a bounding box To use the arrow keys to select characters hold down Shift and press the Right arrow or Left arrow key To use the arrow keys to select words hold down Shift Ctrl Windows or Shift Command Mac OS and press the Right arrow or Left arrow key 4 To select all the characters in a layer without positioning the insertion point in the text flow select the type layer in the Layers palette and then double click the layer s type icon T Note In Photoshop selecting and formatting characters in a type layer puts the type tool into edit mode You must commit the changes before you can
485. otoshop you can select from several RGB color spaces when editing images As a result images created in Photoshop may use an RGB color space that differs from the monitor RGB color space used by ImageReady You can adjust the RGB color display during image preview to compensate for differences between Photoshop and ImageReady To adjust RGB color display for cross platform variations ImageReady Choose View gt Preview and choose an option for adjusting the color display Uncompensated Color the default option to view the image with no color adjustment e Standard Macintosh Color Windows to view the image with color adjusted to simulate a standard Macintosh monitor e Standard Windows Color Mac OS to view the image with color adjusted to simulate a standard Windows monitor Note These options adjust color display only No changes are made to pixels in the image Making previews display more quickly Photoshop The Use Pixel Doubling preference option speeds up the preview of a tool or command s effects by temporarily doubling the size of the pixels halving the resolution in the preview This option has no effect on the pixels in the file it simply provides faster previews with the tools and commands To speed up previews 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Display amp Cursors 2 Select Use Pixel Doubling and click OK Adjusting color display for cross platform variations RGB color display
486. ou should put the extension on a library filename so that you can easily share the libraries across operating systems To change the display of items in a pop up palette 1 Click the triangle in the upper right corner of the pop up palette to view the palette menu 2 Select a view option Text Only Small Thumbnail Large Thumbnail Small List and Large List Using the Info palette The Info palette displays information about the color values beneath the pointer and depending on the tool in use other useful measurements To display the Info palette Choose Window gt Show Info Photoshop The Info palette displays the following information When displaying CMYK values the Info palette displays an exclamation point next to the CMYK values if the color beneath the pointer or color sampler is out of the printable CMYK color gamut For more information see Identifying out of gamut colors Photoshop in online Help 3 For Second Color Readout choose a display option listed in step 2 4 For Ruler Units choose a unit of measurement 5 Click OK To change measurement units click the e cross hair icon in the Info palette for a menu of options To change color readout modes click the eyedropper icon Using context menus In addition to the menus at the top of your screen context sensitive menus display commands relevant to the active tool selection or palette To display context menus
487. out a background Images with no background even if they only contain a single layer are considered to be layered images Thus like all layered images they can only be saved in Photoshop PDF or TIFF format CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 210 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide Duplicating layers You can duplicate any layer including the background or any layer set within the same image You can also duplicate any layer or layer set from one image to another When duplicating between images keep in mind that the resulting size of the duplicated layer depends on the resolution of the destination image For example if the source image has a lower resolution than the destination image the duplicated layer will appear smaller in the destination image and when printed See About image size and resolution on page 92 To duplicate and name a layer in an image 1 Select the layer or layer set in the Layers palette 2 Press Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag the layer name in the layers palette to the New Layer button El or the New Layer Set button O at the bottom of the palette 3 Photoshop Name the duplicate layer or layer set and click OK You can also duplicate layers using the commands in the Layer menu and the Layers palette menu To duplicate a layer or layer set without naming Drag the layer name in the Layers palette to the New Layer button El or New Layer Set button O at the bottom of
488. ow Inner Shadow and so on Once you have customized a layer style you can save that new layer style as a predefined layer style You can create libraries load and save libraries of layer styles using the Styles palette the Layers Style dialog box the Style pop up palette menu of the shape and pen tools accessed from the options bar the Styles palette accessed by clicking the Styles panel in the Layer Style dialog box or the Preset Manager See Managing layer styles on page 227 or Managing libraries with the Preset Manager Photoshop on page 85 Defining a new layer style You can use an existing style to create a new style or apply a number of layer effects to layers including drop shadows glows beveling and embossing When you apply one or more layer effects or a layer style to a layer an inverted triangle and a layer styles icon appear to the right of the layer s name in the Layers palette Additionally an Effects bar containing each layer effect in the layer style is displayed in an indented e Select the layer then click the Clear style button i at the bottom of the Styles palette e ImageReady Select an effect in the Layers palette then choose Delete Effect or Delete All Effects from the Layers palette menu to delete that one effect or all of the effects applied to that layer Converting layer styles to layers To customize or fine tune the appearance of layer styles you can convert
489. ows Choose Window gt Close All to close all windows Changing the screen display mode The window controls let you change the screen display mode including menu bar title bar and scroll bar options To change the screen display mode Click a screen mode button in the toolbox e The left button displays the default window with a menu bar at the top and scroll bars on the sides The center button displays a full screen window with a menu bar and a 50 gray background but no title bar or scroll bars e The right button O displays a full screen window with a black background but no title bar menu bar or scroll bars Using the document window The document window is where your image appears Depending on the screen display mode see Changing the screen display mode on page 65 the document window may include a title bar and scroll bar In ImageReady the document window allows you to switch easily between original and optimized views of an image using tabs and to view the original image and multiple versions of an optimized image simultaneously For information on changing the view in the document window see Viewing images during optimization on page 316 2 Choose a color To use a preset color choose an option for Color To specify a different color click the color box and choose a color For more information on choosing colors see Using the Adobe Color Picker in onl
490. p up menu in the Color Management section of the Print Options dialog box See Printing color separations on page 389 Converting to CMYK mode converts any custom colors to their CMYK equivalents Exporting duotone images to other applications To prepare a duotone image for exporting to a page layout application save the image in EPS or PDF format unless the image contains spot channels in which case you should convert it to Multichannel mode and save it in DCS 2 0 format Keep in mind that it s important to name custom colors so they ll be recognized by the other application Otherwise the image won t print correctly or might not print at all Printing Photoshop The image is converted to a multichannel image with each channel represented as a spot color channel The contents of each spot channel accurately reflect the duotone settings but the on screen composite preview may not be as accurate as the preview in Duotone mode Important If you make any changes to the image in Multichannel mode you will be unable to revert to the original duotone state unless you can access the duotone state in the History palette To adjust the distribution of ink and view tts effect on the individual printing plates make the adjustments in the Duotone Curves dialog box before converting to Multichannel mode 2 Select the channel you want to examine in the Channels palette 3 Choose Edit gt Undo Multichannel to revert to
491. palettes in the options bar Photoshop Drag the desired palette s tab into the palette well so that the palette well is highlighted Palettes are considered hidden when stored in the options bar The Window menu item associated with a stored palette will say Show when it is stored Clicking on the title of a palette stored in the well shows the palette until you click outside the palette Using palettes Palettes help you monitor and modify images By default palettes appear stacked together in groups Displaying palettes You can display or hide palettes as you work To show or hide palettes Do one of the following To show or hide all open palettes the options bar and the toolbox press Tab To show or hide all palettes press Shift Tab To show or hide one palette Choose Window gt Show to display the selected palette at the front of its group Or choose Window gt Hide to conceal the entire group of which the selected palette is a part ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide To reset palettes to the default positions Do one of the following Photoshop Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General and select Save Palette Locations Photoshop Choose Window gt Reset Palette Locations e ImageReady Choose Window gt Arrange gt Reset Palettes To always startwith the default palette and dialog box positions 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt General 2 Deselect Save Palette L
492. path that snaps to the edges of defined areas in your image You can define the range and sensitivity of the snapping behavior as well as the complexity of the resulting path The magnetic pen and magnetic lasso tools share many of the same options To draw with the freeform pen tool 1 Select the freeform pen tool 7 2 In the options bar click either the Create New Shape Layer button L or the Create New Work Path button ii See Drawing shapes and paths on page 161 3 Setthe following tool specific options Curve Fit to control how sensitive the final path is to the movement of your mouse or stylus Enter a value between 0 5 and 10 0 pixels A higher value creates a simpler path with fewer anchor points Auto Add Delete to automatically add or delete anchor points while you draw 4 Drag the pointer in the image As you drag a path trails behind the pointer When you release the mouse a work path is created 5 Choosea shape area option to determine what happens at the intersection of path segments and components See Drawing overlapping shapes Photoshop on page 171 4 Do one of the following e To draw the next segment of a smooth curve position the pointer where you want the next segment to end and drag away from the curve Drag away from the curve to create the next segment e To change the direction of the curve sharply release the mouse button then Alt drag Windows or Optio
493. pears in the Color Table panel palette ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Custom Preserves the current color table as a fixed palette that does not update with changes to the image Mac OS Uses the Mac OS system s default 8 bit 256 color color table which is based on a uniform sampling of RGB colors If your image has fewer colors than the total number specified in the color palette unused colors are removed Windows Uses the Windows system s default 8 bit 256 color color table which is based on a uniform sampling of RGB colors If your image has fewer colors than the total number specified in the color palette unused colors are removed Other color tables appear in the menu if you have saved them previously See Loading and saving color tables on page 336 Q You can use an alpha channel to influence the generation of color tables See Using channels to modify color reduction on page 329 To regenerate a color table ImageReady Choose Rebuild Color Table from the Color Table palette menu Use this command to generate a new color table when the Auto Regenerate option is off See Controlling optimization ImageReady on page 326 To select a color reduction algorithm Choose an option from the Color Reduction Algorithm pop up menu below the file format menu in the Optimize panel palette Perceptual Creates a custom color table by giving priority to colors for which the human eye has gr
494. perform other operations See About using the type tool Photoshop on page 252 To show or hide selection highlighting ImageReady Do one of the following e Choose View gt Show gt Text Selection Choose View gt Show Extras This command also shows or hides selection edges slices image maps text bounds text baseline and text selection See Working with Extras on page 77 Using the Character palette The Character palette provides options for formatting characters Some formatting options are also provided in the options bar To convert type to shapes Select a type layer and choose Layer gt Type gt Convert to Shapes Formatting characters Photoshop and ImageReady give you precise control over individual characters in type layers including font size color leading kerning tracking baseline shift and alignment You can set type attributes before you enter characters or reset them to change the appearance of selected characters in a type layer Selecting characters Before you can format individual characters you must select them You can select one character a range of characters or all characters in a type layer To select characters 1 Select the type tool T 2 Select the type layer in the Layers palette or click in the text flow to automatically select a type layer 3 Position the insertion point in the text and do one of the following Drag to select o
495. plus the size and setting of the monitor 92 CHAPTER 2 Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide When printed an image with a high resolution contains more and therefore smaller pixels than an image with a low resolution For example a 1 by 1 inch image with a resolution of 72 ppi contains a total of 5184 pixels 72 pixels wide x 72 pixels high 5184 The same 1 by 1 inch image with a resolution of 300 ppi contains a total of 90 000 pixels Higher resolution images usually reproduce more detail and subtler color transi tions than lower resolution images However increasing the resolution of a low resolution image only spreads the original pixel information across a greater number of pixels it rarely improves image quality Using too low a resolution for a printed image results in pixelation output with large coarse looking pixels Using too high a resolution pixels smaller than the output device can produce increases the file size and slows the printing of the image furthermore the device will be unable to reproduce the extra detail provided by the higher resolution image Monitor resolution The number of pixels or dots displayed per unit of length on the monitor usually measured in dots per inch dpi Monitor resolution depends on the size of the monitor plus its pixel setting Most new monitors have a resolution of about 96 dpi while older Mac OS monitors have a resoluti
496. ppear through the transparent areas of the next frame Flattening frames into layers You can flatten animation frames into layers A single composite layer is created for each frame containing all of the layers in the frame The original layers in the frame are hidden but preserved the original layers will be available if they are needed for another frame Note If you save an animation as a GIF the animation frames are flattened and the original layers are lost You should save the original file in Photoshop file format to preserve layers for reediting Creating Animations ImageReady Setting the frame disposal method The frame disposal method specifies whether to discard the current frame before displaying the next frame You select a disposal method when working with animations that include background transparency in order to specify whether the current frame will be visible through the trans parent areas of the next frame A Frame with background transparency with Restore to Background option B Frame with background transparency with Do Not Dispose option The Disposal Method icon indicates whether the frame is set to Do Not Dispose or Restore to Background No icon appears when disposal method is set to Automatic To choose a disposal method 1 Select a frame or frames for which you want to choose a disposal method 2 Right click Windows or Ctrl click Mac OS the frame thumbnail to view the
497. priate settings An image that includes solid colors text and photographic images for example looks best with different settings applied to different areas You can also assign a separate file name URL link Alt tag and message to each slice In ImageReady you can link multiple slices together in a set so you can quickly select optimize output Studio 02 03 04 home about services e mail Slice Options Slice Type image x Name tud_03 Cancel URL http www sampleuricom Target fo Message Text Click here to return to the main page Alt Tag Home 7 Dimensions x 158 W 49 Y 36 H 34 and delete only those slices DN AEE Setting optimization options for an individual slice assigning a URL message text and an Alt tag to a slice Studio 02 03 03 home about services e mail Studio 03 04 main page about services e mail Slice updates automatically when source layer is modified Dynamic layer based slices Photoshop 6 0 intro duces a new way to slice images Set up your slice content on separate layers and then let Photoshop or ImageReady generate layer based slices for you When you slice images this way each slice is bound to the outermost pixels on each layer If you then reposition or edit the content of the layer the slice adjusts dynamically to accommodate the changes This tech
498. primary ImageReady clipboard To copy and paste rollover states 1 Selecta rollover state and choose Copy Rollover State from the Rollover palette menu 2 Selecta rollover state in which to paste the copied state e Select a state in the current rollover Open or display another rollover and select a state 3 Choose Paste Rollover State from the Rollover palette menu Deleting rollover states You can delete individual states or all states in a rollover To delete rollover states e To delete one state select a rollover state and either click the Trash button ff on the Rollover palette or choose Delete State from the Rollover palette menu e To delete all states in a rollover choose Delete Rollover from the Rollover palette menu For Font and Font Size choose options for the thumbnail text For Size choose an option for the thumbnail size from the pop up menu or enter a value in pixels for the width of each thumbnail For Columns and Rows enter the number of columns and rows that you want to be used to display the thumbnails on the home page This option doesn t apply to galleries that use the Horizontal Frame Style or Vertical Frame Style e For Border Size enter the width of the border around each thumbnail in pixels 8 To set options for colors of elements in the gallery choose Customize Colors from the Options pop up menu To change the color of a particular element click its co
499. printed using process color printing See Color gamuts Photoshop on page 114 2 Drag the border to enclose a different area of the image You can drag a selection border partly beyond the canvas boundaries When you drag it back the original border reappears intact You can also drag the selection border to another image window To control the movement of a selection e To constrain the direction to multiples of 45 begin dragging and then hold down Shift as you continue to drag To move the selection in 1 pixel increments use an arrow key To move the selection in 10 pixel increments hold down Shift and use an arrow key To hide or show selection edges Do one of the following Choose View gt Show Extras This command also shows or hides Photoshop selection edges target path slices and notes or ImageReady selection edges slices image maps text bounds text baseline and text selection See Working with Extras on page 77 Choose View gt Show gt Selection Edges This toggles the view of the selection edges and affects the current selection only The selection edges reappear when you make a different selection Creating selections from slices ImageReady If you create a slice in ImageReady it can be converted into a selection To create a selection from a slice 1 Select a slice See Selecting slices on page 276 2 Choose Select gt Create Selection
500. protractor from an existing measuring line Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS at an angle from one end of the measuring line or double click the line and drag Hold down the Shift key to constrain the tool to multiples of 45 Drag from the vertical ruler to create a vertical guide Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag from the horizontal ruler to create a vertical guide Hold down Shift and drag from the horizontal or vertical ruler to create a guide that snaps to the ruler ticks The pointer changes to a double headed arrow when you drag a guide To move a guide 1 Select the move tool or hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS to activate the move tool This option does not work with the hand zoom 4 and slice tools 2 Position the pointer over the guide the pointer turns into a double headed arrow 3 Move the guide Drag the guide to move it Change the guide from horizontal to vertical or vice versa by holding down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS as you click or drag the guide Photoshop Align the guide with the ruler ticks by holding down Shift as you drag the guide The guide will snap to the grid if the grid is visible and View gt Snap To gt Grid is selected To lock all guides Choose View gt Lock Guides Looking at the Work Area Guide spacing along with guide and grid visibility and snapping is specific to an ima
501. ps 2 and 3 for all images whose colors you want to include in the master palette 5 In the Optimize palette select optimization settings for the master palette 6 Choose Image gt Master Palette gt Build Master Palette to create a new color table from the color information of images used in steps 2 3 and 4 7 Choose Image gt Master Palette gt Save Master Palette 8 Name the master palette and choose a location where it will be saved By default the master palette file is given the extension act for Adobe Color Table e ImageReady Click the color in the image which you want to copy The color you click becomes the foreground color With the eyedropper tool still over the image right click Windows or Control click Mac OS to view the eyedropper tool context menu 3 Choose Copy Color as HTML Photoshop or Copy Foreground Color as HTML ImageReady from the eyedropper tool context menu The selected color is copied to the Clipboard as a hexadecimal value To paste the color into an HTML file choose Edit gt Paste with the HTML file displayed in your HTML editing application You can insert the code for any HTML element that allows a color property To copy a color as a hexadecimal value using menu commands 1 Select a color to copy 2 Copy the color Photoshop Choose Copy Color As HTML from the Color palette menu ImageReady Choose Edit gt Copy Foreground Color as HTML The foreground c
502. ption drag Mac OS to draw from the center Use snap to align a new slice to a guide or another slice in the image See Moving and resizing user slices on page 277 To create a slice from a selection ImageReady 1 Select a portion of the image 2 Choose Slices gt Create Slice from Selection ImageReady creates a user slice based on the selection marquee If the selection is feathered the slice covers the full selection including the feathered edges If the selection is nonrectangular the slice covers a rectangular area large enough to cover the full selection To create slices from guides ImageReady In an image containing guides choose Slices gt Create Slices from Guides All slices created from guides are user slices When you create slices from guides any existing slices are deleted Creating layer based slices When you create a slice from a layer the slice area encompasses all the pixel data in the layer If you move the layer or edit the layer s content the slice area automatically adjusts to encompass the new pixels layer based slices Auto slices are regenerated every time you add or edit user slices or layer based slices User slices layer based slices and auto slices look different user slices and layer based slices are defined by a solid line while auto slices are defined by a dotted line A subslice is a type of auto slice that is generated when you create overlapping slices Subslic
503. ptions of the default behaviors associated with each policy option see the table following this procedure 2 For Profile Mismatches select either both or neither of the following Ask When Opening to display a message whenever you open a document tagged with a profile other than the current working space You will be given the option to override the policy s default behavior Ask When Pasting to display a message whenever color profile mismatches occur as colors are imported into a document via pasting drag and drop placing and so on You will be given the option to override the policy s default behavior Producing Consistent Color Photoshop dot gain as the amount by which the expected dot increases or decreases For example a 50 halftone screen may produce an actual density of 60 on the printed page exhibiting a dot gain of 10 The Dot Gain 10 option represents the color space that reflects the grayscale character istics of this particular dot gain Proof no dot gain and printed image with dot gain You can also specify a Gray working space profile that is based on the characteristics of particular gamma A monitor s gamma setting determines the brightness of midtones displayed by the monitor Gray Gamma 1 8 matches the default grayscale display of Mac OS computers and is also the default grayscale space for Photoshop 4 0 and earlier Gray Gamma 2 2 matches the default grayscale display of
504. que to create a glow and is useful on all types of mattes whether their edges are soft or hard At larger sizes it does not preserve detailed features Precise uses a distance measurement technique to create a glow and is primarily useful on hard edged mattes from anti aliased shapes such as type It preserves features better than does the Softer technique the layer to position it while in this panel The position can be reset with the Snap to Origin button There must be at least one pattern loaded for the pattern option to be available You can also load patterns using the Preset Manager Position Specifies the position of a stroke effect as Outside Inside or Center Preview Photoshop Displays a preview of the layer style in the image as you change the layer effect settings This option is in the Layer Style dialog box Range Controls which portion or range of the glow is targeted for the contour Size Specifies the amount of blur or the size of the shadow Soften Blurs the results of shading before compositing to reduce unwanted artifacts Source Specifies the glow source for an inner glow Choose Center to apply a glow that emanates from the center of the layer contents or Edge to apply a glow that emanates from the inside edges of the layer contents Spread Dilates the boundaries of the matte prior to blurring This is particularly useful on small thin features such as cursive descenders or ascenders on type face
505. r a new name for the path in the Duplicate Path dialog box and click OK To copy path components between two Adobe Photoshop files 1 Open both images 2 Use the path component selection tool to select the entire path or the path components in the source image you want to copy 3 To copy the path component do any of the following Drag the path component from the source image to the destination image The path component is copied to the active path in the Paths palette Drag the path component from the source image s Paths palette into the destination image The path is copied to the active path in the Paths palette CHAPTER 6 Drawing and Editing You can also use the Copy and Paste commands to duplicate vector objects between a Photoshop image and an image in another application such as Adobe Illustrator To move a path or path component 1 Select the path name in the Paths palette and use the path component selection tool XK to select the path in the image To select multiple path components Shift click each additional path component to add it to the selection 2 Drag the path to its new location If you move any part of a path beyond the canvas boundaries the hidden part of the path is still available Note If you drag a path so that the move pointer 5 over another open image the path will be copied to that image To reshape a path component 1 Select the path name in the Paths palette
506. r click the Create New Work Path button IH and set additional tool specific options See Setting shape tool options on page 164 Drawing with the pen tool on page 167 and Drawing with the freeform pen tool on page 169 If you re using the custom shape tool select a predefined shape from the Shape pop up palette See Using pop up palettes on page 62 3 If you re using a shape tool drag in the image to draw the path If you re using a pen tool click or drag in the image to draw the path See Using the pen tools Photoshop on page 166 4 To create multiple components in the path continue drawing Choose a shape area option to determine what happens at the intersection of overlapping path segments and components See Drawing overlapping shapes Photoshop on page 171 5 Photoshop To create multiple shape components in the same shape layer continue drawing shapes Choose a shape area option to determine what happens at the intersection of overlapping shapes See Drawing overlapping shapes Photoshop on page 171 e Select a different tool in the toolbox to switch between drawing tools When using a shape tool you can also select a different shape tool in the options bar 6 Photoshop Click the OK button in the options bar or press Enter or Return to dismiss the drawing tools Creating a work path Photoshop A work path is a temporary path that
507. r 4 Up tab in the duplicate image window To rename a snapshot Double click the snapshot and enter a name To delete a snapshot Do one of the following e Select the snapshot and choose Delete from the palette menu Select the snapshot and click the Trash button ff Drag the snapshot to the Trash button For more information see Painting with a state or snapshot of an image Photoshop in online Help Duplicating images You can duplicate an entire image including all layers layer masks and channels into available memory without saving to disk In ImageReady you can also duplicate optimized versions of an image Q Using duplicates in ImageReady lets you experiment and then compare several versions of the optimized image to the original To duplicate an image Photoshop 1 Open the image you want to duplicate 2 Choose Image gt Duplicate 3 Enter a name for the duplicated image 4 To duplicate the image without layers select Duplicate Merged Layers Only To make the ruler origin snap to the ruler ticks Photoshop hold down Shift as you drag Note To reset the ruler origin to its default value double click the upper left corner of the rulers To change the rulers settings Photoshop 1 Do one of the following Double click a ruler Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Units amp Rulers 2 For Rulers choose a unit of measurement Note Changing the units o
508. r Mac OS documentation or contact Apple Computer 413 Allow Non linear History option 71 72 alpha channels about 185 as selections library 187 calculating 194 converting to spot channel 192 copying 187 creating 200 deleting 189 display 186 file formats for saving 185 file size of 185 naming 200 options 200 201 saving 358 saving and loading selections as masks 197 saving selection in 200 storing masks 199 using for optimization 327 See also channels spot channels Alt HTML element 284 292 anchor points adding and deleting 177 creating 177 179 angle global lighting 235 layer style option 232 animated GIFs about 310 in rollover state 295 opening 311 See also animations creating 244 editing 244 See also online Help Adobe Acrobat Reader 1 Adobe Certification program 5 Adobe Color Picker See online Help Adobe Gamma utility 136 Adobe Illustrator exporting Pantone color to 389 files opening 102 104 files placing 104 Adobe Online 3 4 Adobe Online preference 4 Adobe PageMaker 389 Adobe Web site 4 advanced blending options about 221 grouping blend effects 224 knockout 221 222 range for blending layers 225 removing fringe areas 154 restricting channels 223 Align To Selection command 215 aligning image maps 290 layer contents 214 linked layers 215 selections 140 shapes 177 slices 280 type 265 alignment See Snap All Caps command 263 Index A a component 112
509. r X to specify the distance between the center point of the placed artwork and the left edge of the image Enter a value for Y to specify the distance between the center point of the placed artwork and the top edge of the image To adjust the center point of the placed artwork drag the center point to a new location or click a handle on the center point icon 888 in the options bar 5 Ifdesired scale the placed artwork by doing one or more of the following Drag one of the handles at the corners or sides of the bounding box Hold down Shift as you drag a corner handle to constrain the proportions Managing files with WebDAV Photoshop and ImageReady offer support for a server technology known as Web Distributed Authoring and Versioning WebDAV You can easily connect to a WebDAV server download and upload files lock files so others cannot work on them at the same time as you are and add additional files called assets to the server Using a WebDAV server lets you work in a collaborative environment without fear that files will be accidentally overwritten or updates lost For more information see Managing files with WebDAV in online Help CHAPTER 2 Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady To place a file ImageReady 1 Open the ImageReady image into which you want to place the file 2 Choose File gt Place select the file you want to place and click Open 3 Select offset options From t
510. r by the lightness or brightness of a color Sort By Popularity or by the colors frequency of occurrence in the image Adding new colors to the color table You can add colors that were left out in building the color table Adding a color to a dynamic table replaces the color in the palette closest to the new color Adding a color to a fixed or Custom table adds an additional color to the palette See Generating a color table on page 330 To add a new color 1 Deselect all colors in the color table see Selecting colors on page 333 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Selecting colors You select colors directly in the optimized image or in the color table In ImageReady you can select a color from another application such as a Web page displayed in a browser To select a color from the optimized image 1 Select the eyedropper tool in the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the toolbox ImageReady 2 Clicka color in the image A white border appears around that color in the color table Shift click to select additional colors To select a color from another application ImageReady ImageReady Select the eyedropper tool click in the image hold the mouse down and drag anywhere on the desktop You can use this option to select a color displayed in another application such as a color in a Web page displayed in a browser To select a color directly in the color table Click the c
511. r each of the color dot gain using the settings in the CMYK Setup dialog box Transfer functions are useful however when compensating for a poorly calibrated output device For more information see Compensating for dot gain in film using transfer functions in online Help Interpolation Reduces the jagged appearance of a low resolution image by automatically resampling up while printing However resam pling may reduce the sharpness of the image quality See About resampling on page 96 Some PostScript Level 2 or higher printers have interpolation capability If your printer doesn t this option has no effect Calibration Bars Prints an 11 step grayscale a transition in density from 0 to 100 in 10 increments With a CMYK color separation a gradient tint bar is printed to the left of each CMY plate and a progressive color bar to the right Note Calibration bars registration marks crop marks and labels will print only if the paper size is larger than the printed image dimensions Registration Marks Prints registration marks on the image including bull s eyes and star targets These marks are used primarily for aligning color separations Crop Marks Prints crop marks where the page is to be trimmed You can print crop marks at the corners at the center of each edge or both Labels Prints the filename above the image a PostScript imagesetter for example should be set to the c
512. r of pixels as the original image You can edit the mask in an alpha channel using the painting and editing tools e Selected Areas to have masked or protected areas appear white transparent and to have selected areas appear black opaque Painting with white increases the masked protected area painting with black increases the selected area With this option the Quick Mask button in the toolbox appears as a gray circle on a white background To toggle between the Masked Areas and Selected Areas options for quick masks Alt click Windows or Option click Mac OS the Quick Mask mode button 3 To choose a new mask color click the color box and choose a new color For more information see Using the Adobe Color Picker in online Help 4 To change the opacity enter a value between 0 and 100 Both the color and opacity settings affect only the appearance of the mask and have no effect on how underlying areas are protected Changing these settings may make the mask more easily visible against the colors in the image 5 Click OK You can convert this temporary mask to a permanent alpha channel by switching to standard mode and choosing Select gt Save Selection 5 Click the eye icon next to a color channel or the composite color channel to display the image with a color overlay 6 Use a painting or editing tool to paint in the image Paint with black to add to the new channel paint with wh
513. r other difficulties Binary to use a faster encoding method that produces a smaller output file and leaves the original data intact Use Binary encoding if you re printing from a Mac OS system However some page layout applications and some commercial print spooling and network printing software may not support binary Photoshop EPS files JPEG to use the fastest encoding method JPEG encoding compresses the file by discarding some image data thus reducing the quality of your printed output for the best printed results choose maximum quality compression Files with JPEG encoding can be printed only on Level 2 or later PostScript printers and may not separate into individual plates 6 Select Include Halftone Screen and Include Transfer Function to save the image s halftone information including the frequencies and angles of the screens and transfer function information 360 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 361 User Guide 4 Select a row order for the GIF file and click OK Normal to create an image that displays in a browser only when it is fully downloaded Interlaced to create an image that displays as low resolution versions in a browser while the full image file is downloading Interlacing can make downloading time seem shorter and assures viewers that downloading is in progress However interlacing also increases file size Saving files in JPEG format Photoshop You can use the Save As command to save CMYK
514. r style is applied to the topmost layer containing pixels where the layer style is dropped Press Shift as you drag to preserve layer effects on the destination layer that are not duplicated by the new layer style Any duplicated layer effects will be replaced by the new layer style e Click the layer styles button in the Layers palette and choose an effect from the list This creates a layer style composed of that single effect Choose a layer effect from the Layer gt Layer Style submenu Photoshop Double click a layer name or thumbnail in the Layers palette and select one or more layer effects from the Layer Style dialog box Styles panel to create a layer style and click OK Photoshop Open the Layer Style dialog box and click on the work Styles top item in the list on the left side of the dialog box Click the style thumbnail you want to apply and click OK If you are using the shape or pen tools to create a layer clipping path select a style from the pop up palette in the options bar before drawing the shape 2 Youcan specify options to customize the layer style See Specifying options for layer styles on page 232 If a layer style is dragged onto a layer without pressing Shift the layer style replaces any existing effects on the destination layer Satin to apply shading to the interior of a layer that reacts to the shape of the layer typically creating a satiny finish Color Gra
515. r to a different location drag the title bar on the left edge of the bar You can move the options bar anywhere in the work area and dock it to the top or bottom of the screen mo TE Ex Options bar ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 11 User Guide Display the palettes When you first start the application the floating palettes appear stacked in default groups Use the following techniques to show and hide palettes e To bring a palette to the front of its group click the palette s tab SS e To show or hide a palette as you work choose om A the appropriate Window gt Show or Window gt oo Hide command Palette group with Color palette at front e ImageReady To show or hide options for palettes that include hidden options click the Show Options button on the palette tab to cycle through palette displays e To hide or display all open palettes and the toolbox press Tab To hide or display palettes only press Shift Tab Arrange the palettes Depending on your available screen area and work needs you may a _ Palettes Swatches want to reposition and regroup the palettes 5 fn Use the following techniques to change palette arrangements 1 To move an entire palette group drag its Pal title bar e To rearrange or separate a palette from its group drag the palette s tab Dragging Click a tab to display a palette stored in the palette wel
516. r you enter type When editing existing type layers you can change the color of individual selected characters or all type in a layer To change the type color Do one of the following Click the Color selection box in the options bar or Character palette and select a color using the color picker In ImageReady you can also select an option from the Color selection box pop up menu Foreground Color Background Color Other to use the color picker or a color from the pop up palette Click the foreground color selection box in the toolbox and select a color using the color picker Or click a color in the Color palette the Swatches palette or the Color Table palette ImageReady Use fill shortcuts To fill with the foreground color press Alt Backspace Windows or Option Delete Mac OS to fill with the background color press Ctrl Backspace Windows or Command Delete Mac OS Apply an overlay layer style to the type layer to apply a color pattern or gradient on top of the existing color See Using layer styles on page 226 In ImageReady you can drag a color from the toolbox color selection box the Color palette the Color Table palette or the Swatches palette and drop it onto a type layer to automati traditional definitions of point size You can change the default unit of measurement for type in the Units amp Rulers section of the Preferences dialog box In ImageReady pixels are the
517. raphs Cactus class Magnoliophyta fhis group of the plant nedom comprises of th weanisms generally known as the flowering plants angiosperms Angiosperms are characterized by oots stems leaves and vascular or conducting tis ue xylem and phloem The term angiosperm means enclosed seed since the ovgles whic develop into seeds are enclosed win an ovary The flowering plants are the sourcedbi all 17 mS ral crops cereal grainy and prass s garden ant side weeds familia cad lefived shrubs an and most bra mentals 1 i Type entered as point type top and in a bounding box When you create type a new type layer is added to the Layers palette In Photoshop you can also create a selection border in the shape of the type Note In Photoshop a type layer is not created for images in Multichannel Bitmap or Indexed Color mode because these modes do not support layers In these image modes type appears on the background and cannot be edited ypography gives visual form to language Adobe Photoshop and Adobe ImageReady let you add type to images with flexibility and precision You can create and edit type directly on screen instead of in a dialog box and quickly change the font style size and color of the type You can apply changes to individual characters and set formatting options for entire paragraphs including alignment justification and word wrapping You can create designs that
518. rarily as grayscale channels in the following ways e Quick Mask mode lets you create and view a temporary mask for an image Temporary masks are useful when you don t want to save the mask for later use See Creating temporary masks in Quick Mask mode Photoshop on page 197 Alpha channels let you save and load a selection to be used as a mask See Storing masks in alpha channels on page 199 e Layer masks and layer clipping paths let you produce a mix of soft and hard masking edges on the same layer By making changes to the layer mask or the layer clipping path you can apply a variety of special effects See Hiding portions of a layer on page 237 Creating temporary masks in Quick Mask mode Photoshop Quick Mask mode lets you edit any selection as a mask without using the Channels palette and while viewing your image The advantage of editing your selection as a mask is that you can use almost any Photoshop tool or filter to modify the mask For example if you create a rectangular selection with the marquee tool you can enter Quick Mask mode and use the paintbrush to extend or contract the selection or you can use a filter to distort the edges of the selection You can also use selection tools because the quick mask is not a selection About masks Photoshop Masks let you isolate and protect areas of an image as you apply color changes filters or other effects to the rest of the image W
519. reas without sacrificing file size In the past you would have made harder trade offs either favoring image quality in a complex image over smaller files sizes or vice versa Using channels you can produce gradual variations in GIF dithering lossy GIF settings and JPEG compression Weighted optimization controls also let you favor colors in selected image areas as you generate custom color palettes Improved Web workflow Photoshop 6 0 and the built in Web production tool ImageReady 3 0 are now more tightly integrated than ever resulting in a powerful new tool combination for creating your Web graphics from start to finish Adobe Photoshop 6 0 also offers improved integration with Adobe GoLive 5 0 Integrated optimization with Adobe GoLive 5 0 Adobe Photoshop 6 0 and Adobe GoLive 5 0 integrate tightly to support your Web production process Now you can add native Photoshop PSD files directly to the Adobe GoLive application without having to optimize them first Instead you can use the built in image optimization tools in the Adobe GoLive application to perform those steps Automated updates with Adobe GoLive 5 0 Any URLs written by Photoshop or ImageReady are acces sible in Adobe GoLive for management and editing You can even update edited URLs in the original Photoshop PSD file You can also set up a sliced file complete with rollovers and image maps in ImageReady or Photoshop and then add the single PSD file to Adobe GoLive Adobe
520. reen option lets the program access the correct angles and halftone screen frequencies for high resolution output If your output device is not a PostScript Level 2 or higher printer or is not equipped with an Emerald controller this option has no effect 6 For Shape choose the dot shape you want If you want all four screens to have the same dot shape select Use Same Shape For All Inks Choosing Custom from the Shape menu displays the Custom Spot Function dialog box You can define your own dot shapes by entering PostScript commands useful for printing with nonstandard halftone algorithms For information Keep in mind that including vector data likely increases the size of your print job especially if the vector objects overlap and use transparency To print vector data Choose File gt Print Options and select Include Vector Data Using color management when printing Different devices operate within different color spaces for example your monitor operates in a different color space than your printer and different printers have different color spaces The color management options in the Print Options dialog box let you change the color space of an image while printing to get a more accurate color printout Depending on the designated printer and print drivers on your computer these options may also appear in the Print dialog box To use color management when printing you first specify the source color space
521. relocated Invert inverts the texture Depth varies the degree and direction up down to which the texturing is applied Snap to Origin controls the snap of the pattern s origin with that of the document if Link With Layer is disabled and with the top left corner of the layer if it is selected You can also drag the texture with the mouse to position it while in this panel To set a global lighting angle To set a global lighting angle for all layers do one of the following Choose Layer gt Layer Style gt Global Light In the Global Light dialog box enter a value or drag the angle radius to set the Angle and Altitude and click OK Photoshop In the Layer Style dialog box for Drop Shadow Inner Shadow or Bevel select Use Global Light For Angle enter a value or drag the slider and click OK ImageReady In the Bevel and Emboss or Drop Shadow palette select Use Global Angle For Angle and Altitude enter a value or drag the angle radius The new lighting angle appears as the default for each layer effect that uses the global lighting angle load contours or save contours in the Contour Editor dialog box Exiting Photoshop saves the contents of the current pop up palette in the Preferences file A Click to display the Contour Editor dialog box B Click to display the pop up palette Editing contours You can use the Contour Editor dialog box to edit the currently selected contour After you have
522. rent pixels are blended with the matte color GIF with Transparency option selected and with Transparency option deselected To create a matted GIF or PNG image 1 Open or create an image that contains transparency 2 In the Optimize panel palette select GIF PNG 8 or PNG 24 from the File Format menu 3 For GIF and PNG 8 format select of deselect the Transparency option as desired 340 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 341 User Guide 3 Select a color from the Matte pop up menu Photoshop Select None Eyedropper to use the color in the eyedropper sample box White Black or Other using the color picker e ImageReady Select None Foreground Color Background Color or Other using the color picker or select a color from the Matte pop up palette Note When you select None white 15 used as the matte color Previewing and controlling dithering Most images viewed on the Web are created using 24 bit color displays millions of colors mode but many Web browsers are used on computers using only 8 bit color displays 256 color mode so that Web images often contain colors not available to many Web browsers Computers use a technique called dithering to simulate colors not available in the color display system Dithering creates adjacent pixels of different colors to give the appearance of a third color For example a red color and a yellow color may dither in a mosaic pattern to produce the illusion of an oran
523. required to create animation effects such as fading in or fading out or moving an element across a frame You can edit tweened frames individually after you create them Li 2l 3 31 SG date dall sec sec sec O sec O sec Forever w aa O Ie mI Using tweening to animate warped text Specify different warping effects in two frames of the animation then use the Tween command to generate the intermediate frames To create frames using tweening 1 To apply tweening to a specific layer select it in the Layers palette 2 Select a single frame or multiple contiguous frames If you select a single frame you choose whether to tween the frame with the previous frame or the next frame If you select two contiguous frames new frames are added between the frames If you select more than two frames existing frames between the first and last selected frames are altered by the tweening operation If you select the first and last frames in an animation these frames are treated as contiguous and tweened frames are added after the last frame This tweening method is useful when the animation is set to loop multiple times Note You cannot select discontiguous frames for tweening 3 Specify the delay Choose a value from the pop up menu The last value used appears at the bottom of the menu e Choose Other enter a value in the Set Frame Delay dial
524. requires a rasterized layer Some warning messages provide an OK button that you can click to rasterize the layer To convert a type layer to a normal layer 1 Select the type layer in the Layers palette 2 Choose Layer gt Rasterize gt Type Changing type layer orientation The orientation of a type layer determines the direction of type lines in relation to the document window for point type or the bounding box for paragraph type When a type layer is vertical the type lines flow up and down when a type layer When you convert from paragraph type to point type a carriage return is added at the end of each line of type with the exception of the last line When you convert point type to paragraph type you must remove carriage returns in the paragraph type to let the characters reflow in the bounding box Important When you convert paragraph type to point type all characters that overflow the bounding box are deleted To avoid losing text adjust the bounding box so that all type is visible prior to conversion To convert between point type and paragraph type 1 Select the type layer in the Layers palette 2 Choose Layer gt Type gt Convert to Point Text or Layer gt Type gt Convert to Paragraph Text Warping type layers Warping allows you to distort type to conform to a variety of shapes for example you can warp type in the shape of an arc or a wave The warp style you select is an attribute of the type
525. rict and invert You can edit the segments of any basic or combined shape by using the direct selection add anchor point delete anchor point and convert anchor point tools Adding to a basic shape and result after combining ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 31 User Guide Storage of custom shapes Once you ve created shapes that you want to use over again or share with colleagues you can save them as custom shapes Photoshop stores custom shapes in a shape library that s available from the options bar when you select the custom shape tool Alternatively you can use the Preset Manager to save custom shapes in separate shape libraries Shape libraries are portable so workgroups can easily design share and add to them Erea SOS ON SE Name arrow gt Cancel Defining and working with a custom shape Resolution independent type With Photoshop 6 0 you can easily combine crisp resolution independent type with pixel based images and then output sharp type edges with your image to produce high quality results Vector based masks One powerful new vector feature involves using editable shapes to clip out or mask image areas Known as layer clipping paths these shapes can be modified just like any other vector shapes using the direct selection add anchor point and delete anchor point tools To produce a mix of hard and soft masking edges simply combine layer clipping paths and layer masks on the same layer
526. rightness is the relative lightness or darkness of the color usually measured as a percentage from 0 black to 100 white Although you can use the HSB model in Photoshop to define a color in the Color palette or Color Picker dialog box there is no HSB mode available for creating and editing images A Saturation B Hue C Brightness D All hues RGB model A large percentage of the visible spectrum can be represented by mixing red green and blue RGB colored light in various proportions and inten sities Where the colors overlap they create cyan magenta yellow and white ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide The subtractive CMY and additive RGB colors are complementary colors Each pair of subtractive colors creates an additive color and vice versa Subtractive colors CMYK CMYK mode In Photoshop s CMYK mode each pixel is assigned a percentage value for each of the process inks The lightest highlight colors are assigned small percentages of process ink colors the darker shadow colors higher percentages For example a bright red might contain 2 cyan 93 magenta 90 yellow and 0 black In CMYK images pure white is generated when all four components have values of 0 Use the CMYK mode when preparing an image to be printed using process colors Converting an RGB image into CMYK creates a color separation If you start with an RGB image it s best to edit first and then convert to CMYK In
527. ritones 113 See also duotones troubleshooting 5 TrueType fonts 251 259 TWAIN 100 tweening 304 saving 358 viewing in Open dialog box 102 TIFF format 185 364 Tile command 65 Tile Maker filter 352 tiled background creating 353 tinted images 190 Tolerance values 143 tonal adjustments See online Help tonal range adjustment layers 242 See also online Help toning tools recording in actions 397 tool options bar about 59 pop up palettes 62 storing palettes 60 tool pointers about 58 appearance 58 hot spots 58 options 58 tool tips 2 toolbox 57 tools default settings 59 fill 156 hidden 57 layer sampling 216 marquee 140 modal 395 options bar 59 recording in actions 395 397 selecting 57 shape 161 See also animations image maps optimizing images slices rollovers Web documentation overview 3 Web Photo Gallery command 297 Web Shift Unshift Selected Colors command 335 Web site for Adobe 4 Web Snap option 324 Web safe color table 331 weighted optimization about 327 GIF and PNG 8 color reduction 329 GIF and PNG 8 dithering 329 GIF lossiness 328 JPEG quality 327 White Matte 145 Windows color table 331 wizards assistants Export Transparent Image 369 Resize Image 95 work paths 161 converting selection to path 181 creating 161 163 179 workflow management See online Help working spaces defined 125 specifying 127 See also color spaces profiles Z zero origin 74 ZIP compression 364 365 zo
528. rmal ra ra PA PA Color Balance Shadow Levels 46 0 55 Midtone Levels 0 19 80 Highlight Levels 0 12 5 With Preserve Luminosity Hue Saturation 4 bi age Unsharp Mask 6 lt Ol _ Action applied to an image Both Photoshop and ImageReady ship with a number of predefined actions although Photoshop has significantly more actions than ImageReady You can use these actions as is customize them to meet your needs or create new actions utomating tasks can save you time and ensure consistent results for many types of operations Adobe Photoshop and Adobe ImageReady provide a variety of ways to automate tasks using actions droplets the Batch command and task specific Automate commands About actions An action is a series of commands that you play back ona single file or a batch of files For example you can create an action that applies an Image Size command to change an image to a specific size in pixels followed by an Unsharp Mask filter that resharpens the detail and a Save command that saves the file in the desired format Most commands and tool operations are recordable in actions Actions can include stops that let you perform tasks that cannot be recorded for example using a painting tool Actions can also include modal controls that let you enter To select actions Do one of th
529. rop marks in Adobe Illustrator reflect the dimensions of the Adobe Photoshop image The position of the path within the Photoshop image is maintained provided you don t change the crop marks or move the path Object linking and embedding OLE Windows only Photoshop is an OLE 2 0 server which means it supports embedding or linking an image in an OLE container application usually a word processor or page layout program For example you can insert Photoshop files and selections into other OLE applications such as Adobe PageMaker and Microsoft Word using copy and paste or other methods For more information see Object linking and embedding OLE Windows only in online Help TI SEE Sa LO ei ses A 1 SETI RAI Ra Se mara pi F Eb Kale El J L sa FR E NE i cechi tie e 2 375 Chapter 14 Printing Photoshop Halftoning To create the illusion of continuous tones when printed images are broken down into a series of dots This process is called halftoning Varying the sizes of the dots in a halftone screen creates the optical illusion of variations of gray or continuous color in the image Color separation Artwork that will be commer cially reprodu
530. roplet icon 4 on the Optimize palette Name the droplet choose a location where the droplet will be saved and click Save Choose Create Droplet from the Optimize palette menu Name the droplet choose a location where the droplet will be saved and click Save You can add optimization settings to an action by dragging the droplet icon in the Optimize palette to the Actions palette 411 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide Web Photo Gallery generates a Web site from a set of images complete with a thumbnails index page individual JPEG image pages and navigable links See Creating Web photo galleries Photoshop on page 297 To use an automated command Choose File gt Automate and then choose any of the commands listed under it External automation Photoshop supports some external automation using OLE Automation Windows or AppleScript Mac OS Using either of these methods lets you start Adobe Photoshop and execute actions externally Using external automation lets you perform such tasks as Having another scriptable application generate a series of files and having Photoshop batch process them Having Photoshop batch process files and save them to your Web site Writing a script that runs an action and then shuts down your computer late at night after you ve gone home If you have further questions about OLE contact Microsoft Corporation For questions about AppleScript see you
531. ropper tool click in the image hold the mouse down and drag anywhere on the desktop You can use this option to select a color displayed in another application such as a color in a Web page displayed in a browser ImageReady Select a color from the Color palette or the Swatches palette 3 Do one of the following e Click the New Color button fl in the Color Table panel palette e Select New Color from the Color Table palette menu ImageReady Drag the color from the color selection box Color palette or Swatches palette to the Color Table palette To switch the color table to a Custom palette hold down Ctrl Windows or Command Mac OS when you add the new color The new color appears in the color table with a small white square in the lower right corner indicating that the color is locked See Locking colors in the color table on page 335 Optimizing Images for the Web Sorting the color table You can sort colors in the color table by hue luminance or popularity making it easier to see an image s color range and locate particular colors To sort a color table Choose a sorting order from the Color Table palette menu Unsorted Restores the original sorting order Sort By Hue or by the location of the color on the standard color wheel expressed as a degree between 0 to 360 Neutral colors are assigned a hue of 0 and located with the reds Sort By Luminance o
532. rowser The PNG 8 format supports background transparency and background matting in which you blend the edges of the image with a Web page background color PNG 8 with 0 dither and with 100 dither About PNG 24 format The PNG 24 format supports 24 bit color Like the JPEG format PNG 24 preserves the broad range and subtle variations in brightness and hue found in photographs Like the GIF and PNG 8 formats PNG 24 preserves sharp detail such as that in line art logos or illustrations with type The PNG 24 format uses the same lossless compression method as the PNG 8 format For that reason PNG 24 files are usually larger than JPEG files of the same image PNG 24 browser support is similar to that for PNG 8 In addition to supporting background trans parency and background matting the PNG 24 format supports multilevel transparency Multi level transparency allows you to preserve up to ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 321 User Guide 2 Adjust the settings as desired in the Optimize panel palette The Settings menu displays the term Unnamed since the settings no longer match a named set 3 Choose Save Settings from the Optimize panel palette menu and save the settings with the name of the original set 4 Click OK and then click Replace To delete named optimization settings 1 In the Optimize panel palette select a named set of optimization settings from the Settings pop up menu 2 Choose Delete Settings
533. rowser installed Adobe Online will launch your browser using your default Internet configuration 2 Do any of the following Click Refresh to make sure you have the latest version of the Adobe Online window and its buttons as well as the latest bookmarks It is important to refresh the screen so that the current options are available for you to choose from Click Preferences to specify connection options General preferences affect how Adobe Online interacts with all Adobe products installed on your system and Application preferences affect how Using Web resources If you have an Internet connection and a Web browser installed on your system you can access additional resources for learning Photoshop and ImageReady located on the Adobe Systems home page on the World Wide Web These resources are continually updated To access the Adobe home page for your region 1 Open the Adobe U S home page at www adobe com 2 From the Adobe Sites menu choose your geographical region The Adobe home page is customized for several geographical regions About Adobe Online Adobe Online provides access to the latest tutorials quicktips and other Web content for Photoshop and other Adobe products Using Adobe Online you can also download and view the current version of the Photoshop Top Issues document containing the latest Photoshop technical support solutions Bookmarks are also included to take you quickly to noteworthy Adobe
534. s gt General then click Reset All Tools To move the options bar Do one of the following Drag the title bar at the left edge of the options bar e Photoshop Grab the gripper bar at the left edge of the options bar The gripper bar will only appear if the options bar is docked at the top or bottom of your screen The Other Cursors options control the pointers for the following tools Photoshop Marquee lasso polygon lasso magic wand crop slice eyedropper pen gradient line paint bucket magnetic lasso magnetic pen measure and color sampler tools ImageReady Marquee lasso magic wand eyedropper paint bucket and slice tools To toggle between standard and precise cursors Q in some tool pointers press Caps Lock Press Caps Lock again to return to your original setting Using the tool options bar Most tools have options that are displayed in the tool options bar The options bar is context sensitive and changes as different tools are selected Some settings in the options bar are common to several tools such as painting modes and opacity and some are specific to one tool such as the Auto Frase setting for the pencil tool You can move the options bar anywhere in the work area In Photoshop you can dock it at the top or bottom of the screen Photoshop The options bar includes a palette well for storing other palettes providing quick access to palettes such as Swatches and Actions th
535. s created For example an RGB image has four default channels one for each of the red green and blue colors plus a composite channel used for editing the image You can create alpha channels to store selections as 8 bit grayscale images You use alpha channels to create and store masks which let you manipulate isolate and protect specific parts of an image Saved selections in alpha channels can be loaded in ImageReady See Loading a selection into an image on page 201 In addition you can create spot color channels to specify additional plates for printing with spot color inks An image can have up to 24 channels including all color and alpha channels In alpha channels selected pixels appear as white unselected pixels appear as black partially transparent or selected pixels appear as gray These are the channel default options If you display an alpha channel at the same time as color channels the alpha channel appears as a transparent color overlay analogous to a printer s rubylith or a sheet of acetate To change the color of this overlay or set other alpha channel options see Creating alpha channels Photoshop on page 200 Changing the display of the palette You can show the individual color channels in color rather than grayscale in the Channels palette and specify the size of the thumbnails Using thumbnails is the most convenient way of tracking channel contents however turning off
536. s for the entire image You can insert optimization settings for individual slices using the Insert Set Optimi zation Settings command To insert optimization settings in an action 1 Selectthe slice or slices for which you want to record optimization settings See Selecting slices on page 276 2 Selectthe action in which you want to insert the optimization settings 3 Do one of the following Choose Insert Set Optimization Settings to current file format from the Actions palette menu The command indicates the optimization file format currently applied to the selected slice e Drag the droplet icon 1 from the Optimize palette onto the Actions palette Pause For to enter the amount of time Photoshop should pause between carrying out each command in the action 3 Select Pause For Audio Annotation to ensure that each audio annotation in an action completes playback before the next step in the action is initiated Deselect this option if you want an action to continue while an audio annotation is playing 4 Click OK Editing actions After you record an action you can edit it in a variety of ways You can rearrange actions and commands in the Actions palette record additional commands in an action rerecord duplicate and delete commands and actions and change action options Rearranging actions and commands You can rearrange actions in the Actions palette and rearrange commands within an actio
537. s have greater than 50 opacity For example the Align Linked gt Top Edges command aligns to the topmost pixel on the active layer that is more than 50 opaque Editing layers A newly created layer is transparent You can change the colors of pixels in a layer using the painting and editing tools and then apply layer styles and filters to modify the layer s image data All painting and editing occurs on the active layer and in the active channel Sampling from all layers By default when working with the magic wand smudge blur sharpen clone stamp or pattern stamp tool you are applying color sampled only from pixels on the active layer This means you can smudge or sample in a single layer even when other layers are visible and you can sample from one layer and paint in another one Alternatively you can choose to paint using sampled data from all the visible layers For example you can use the clone stamp tool to clone an area containing pixels from all the visible layers and layer sets CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 216 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 217 User Guide You can also specify a blending mode in the Layer Styles dialog box Photoshop and in the Layer Options dialog box ImageReady See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 and Specifying layer properties on page 219 Locking layers You can lock layers and layer sets to make certain properties of a layer unchangeable When a
538. s not appear in the image You can view and edit the contents of the mask or temporarily turn off its effects You can also change the display options for the mask Editing a layer clipping path Photoshop A layer clipping path creates a sharp edged shape on a layer Typically you can use a layer clipping path to create buttons or panels It s useful any time you want to add a design element with clean defined edges Once you create a layer with a layer clipping path you can apply one or more layer styles to it edit them if needed and instantly have a usable button panel or other Web design element For information on how to create a layer clipping path see Drawing shapes and paths on page 161 Edit a layer clipping path by clicking the layer clipping path thumbnail in the Layers palette or the thumbnail in the Paths palette then change the shape using the shape and pen tools See Selecting paths Photoshop on page 173 You can also convert a layer clipping path into a layer mask which automatically rasterizes the mask Important Once a layer clipping path has been rasterized it cannot be changed back into a vector object To remove a layer clipping path 1 Click the layer clipping path in the Layers palette to select it 2 Drag the layer clipping path to the Trash button T You can also use the Layer menu to delete a clipping path CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 240 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User
539. s palette and choose Layer gt Group with Previous Link together the desired layers in the Layers palette See Linking layers on page 209 Then choose Layer gt Group Linked The clipping group is assigned the opacity and mode attributes of the bottommost layer in the group on the right As you select names from the left column the options on the right change You can select or deselect options from the Styles panel to create your desired result To use the Layer Style dialog box 1 Do one of the following Choose a layer effect from the Layer gt Layer Style submenu Double click a layer name or thumbnail in the Layers palette e Click the layer styles button at the bottom of the Layers palette and select an effect from the list 2 To select a predefined style click the Styles panel on the left side of the dialog box and select a style from the palette If needed you can load additional style libraries using the pop up palette menu 3 To create a style based on one effect click an effect name in the Styles panel to display the options for that effect 4 Edit the options as desired See Using the Layer Style dialog box Photoshop on page 220 5 Click OK To display the Advanced Blending options Double click a layer name or layer thumbnail You can also use the Layer menu or the Layers palette menu Double click the layer set name Photoshop Choose Layer gt Lay
540. s that colors won t dither when displayed in browsers on either Windows or Macintosh operating systems capable of displaying at least 256 colors You have several options for choosing Web safe colors e When creating an original image you can use the color picker Color palette and Swatches palette to choose Web safe colors For more information see Using Web safe colors in online Help In optimized GIF and PNG 8 images you can shift existing colors to Web safe colors using the color table See Shifting to Web safe colors on page 334 The Dither percentage controls the amount of dithering that is applied to the image A higher dithering percentage creates the appearance of more colors and more detail in an image but can also increase the file size For optimal compression use the lowest percentage of application dither that provides the color detail you require You can use an alpha channel to vary the Dither percentage across an image This technique produces higher quality results in critical image areas without sacrificing file size See Using channels to modify dithering on page 329 Previewing browser dither You can preview browser dither directly in Photoshop or ImageReady or in a browser that uses an 8 bit color display 256 color mode To preview browser dither With an optimized file displayed preview dither in the respective application Photoshop Choose Bro
541. s to Default option 61 Reset Palettes command 61 Reset Tool command 59 resetting warning dialogs 87 Resize Image command 95 Resize Window to Fit command 67 resizing about 96 during printing 377 image maps 289 images 95 images automatically 410 images in Save for Web dialog box 326 images using actions 398 placed artwork 105 slices 277 283 type bounding box 253 resolution about 93 changing 97 determining optimal 99 displaying 95 document size 97 dpi 94 QuickTime movies opening as animations 312 saving animations as 311 R raster images See bitmap images Rasterize command 245 255 rasterized shapes anti aliasing 164 drawing 161 rasterizing 152 Adobe Illustrator artwork 152 layer clipping paths 240 PDF files 103 104 PostScript artwork 104 type layers 255 vector artwork 151 Raw format 185 rectangle image map tool 287 rectangular marquee tool 140 Redo command 68 reducing colors in GIF and PNG files 330 Regenerate button 326 registering software 1 registration marks 379 Remove Black Matte command 154 Remove Layer Mask command 242 Remove White Matte command 154 rendering See also rasterizing rendering intents See online Help Replace Channel option 201 Repopulate Views command 316 converting colors to 133 customizing See online Help defined 122 embedding in documents 134 for JPEG optimization 322 loading See online Help mismatches 126 monitor profil
542. s you want Press Enter on the main keyboard Windows or Return Mac OS to begin a new line 7 Photoshop Commit the type layer See About using the type tool Photoshop on page 252 The type you entered appears in a new type layer Entering paragraph type When you enter paragraph type the lines of type wrap to fit the dimensions of the bounding box You can enter multiple paragraphs and select a paragraph justification option You can resize the bounding box which causes the type to reflow within the adjusted rectangle You can adjust the bounding box while 6 entering type or after you create the type layer You can also rotate scale and skew type using the bounding box About using the type tool Photoshop Clicking in an image with the type tool puts the type tool in edit mode You can enter and edit characters when the tool is in edit mode however you must commit changes to the type layer before you can perform other operations For example you cannot select a command from the Layer menu while the type tool is in edit mode To determine if the type tool is in edit mode look in the options bar if you see the OK button and Cancel button X the type tool is in edit mode To commit changes to a type layer Do one of the following e Click the OK button in the options bar Press the Enter key on the numeric keypad Press Ctrl Enter on the main keyboard Windows or Comm
543. sage that Photoshop is low on memory purging states is useful since the command deletes the states from the Undo buffer and frees up memory Important This action cannot be undone Choose Edit gt Purge gt Histories to purge the list of states from the History palette for all open documents Important This action cannot be undone Using the History Palette You can use the History palette to revert to a previous state of an image to delete an image s states and in Photoshop to create a document from a state or snapshot E l E Levels EL Flatten Image A Sets the source for the history brush B Thumbnail of a snapshot C History state D History state slider E Create new document from current state button F Create new snapshot button G Trash button To display the History palette Choose Window gt Show History or click the History palette tab To revert to a previous state of an image Do any of the following Click the name of the state Drag the slider at the left of the state up or down to a different state 70 CHAPTER 1 Looking at the Work Area ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 1 User Guide Setting history options Photoshop You can specify the maximum number of items to include in the History palette and set other options that customize the way you work with the palette To set history options 1 Choose History Options from the History palette menu 2 Select an option A
544. save your custom proof setup as a preset proof setup click Save To ensure that the new preset appears in the View gt Proof Setup menu save the preset in the Program Files Common Files Adobe Color Proofing folder Windows or the System Folder Application Support Adobe Color Proofing folder Mac OS 8 Click OK Changing the color profile of a document In some cases you may want to convert a document s colors to a different color profile tag a document with a different color profile without making color conversions or remove the profile from a document altogether For example you may want to prepare the document for a different output destination or you may want to correct a policy behavior that you no longer want implemented on the document The Assign Profile and Convert to Profile commands are recom mended only for advanced users To change the embedding behavior of a profile ina document 1 Choose File gt Save As 2 Do one of the following To toggle the embedding of the document s current color profile select or deselect ICC Profile Windows or Embed Color Profile Mac OS This option is available only for the native Photoshop format psd and PDE JPEG TIFF EPS DCS and PICT formats To toggle the embedding of the documents current proof profile select or deselect Use Proof Setup available for PDE EPS DCS 1 0 and DCS 2 0 formats only Selecting this option converts the documents colors to
545. sed in offices However always make final color judgements under the lighting conditions specified by the legal requirements for contract proofs in your country Setting up color management Photoshop simplifies the task of setting up a color managed workflow by gathering most color management controls in a single Color Settings dialog box You can choose from a list of predefined color management settings or you can adjust the controls manually to create your own custom settings You can even save customized settings to share them with other users and other Adobe applications such as Illustrator 9 0 that use the Color Settings dialog box Photoshop also uses color management policies which determine how to handle color data that does not immediately match your current color management workflow Policies provide guide lines on what to do when you open a document or import color data into an active document 124 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide When you choose a predefined configuration the Color Settings dialog box updates to display the specific color management settings associated with the configuration About working spaces Among other options predefined color management settings specify the color profiles to be associated with the RGB CMYK and Grayscale color modes The settings also specify the color profile for spot colors in a document Central to the color management workflow these profiles are known as workin
546. segments 4 If the border doesn t snap to the desired edge click once to add a fastening point manually Continue to trace the edge and add fastening points as needed CHAPTER 5 Selecting 142 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide Using the magic wand tool The magic wand tool lets you select a consistently colored area for example a red flower without having to trace its outline You specify the color range or tolerance for the magic wand tool s selection Note You cannot use the magic wand tool on an image in Bitmap mode To use the magic wand tool 1 Select the magic wand tool 2 In the options bar specify whether to add a new selection m add to an existing selection subtract from a selection or select an area intersected by other selections 1 The magic wand cursor changes depending on which option is selected 3 For Tolerance enter a value in pixels ranging from 0 to 255 Enter a low value to select colors very similar to the pixel you click or enter a higher value to select a broader range of colors 4 To define a smooth edge select Anti aliased See Softening the edges of a selection on page 147 5 To select only adjacent areas using the same colors select Contiguous Otherwise all pixels using the same colors will be selected 6 To select colors using data from all the visible layers select Use All Layers Otherwise the magic wand tool selects colors from the acti
547. select discontiguous multiple frames Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS additional frames to add those frames to the selection e To select all frames choose Select All Frames from the Animation palette menu Paste Over Selection to add the contents of the pasted frames as new layers in the image When you paste frames into the same image using this option doubles the number of layers in the image In the destination frames the newly pasted layers are visible and the original layers are hidden In the nondestination frames the newly pasted layers are hidden Paste Before Selection or Paste After Selection to add the copied frames before or after the desti nation frame When you paste frames between images new layers are added to the image however only the pasted layers are visible in the new frames the existing layers are hidden 6 Select Link Added Layers if you want to link pasted layers in the Layers palette Use this option when you need to reposition the pasted layers as a unit 7 Click OK Tweening frames You use the Tween command to automatically add or modify a series of frames between two existing frames varying the layer attributes position opacity or effect parameters evenly between the new frames to create the appearance of movement For example if you want to fade out a layer set the opacity of the layer in the starting frame to 100 then set the opacity of the same layer in
548. shop 220 Layer Set from Linked command 213 layer sets about 213 described 206 M Mac OS color table 331 Macintosh Drag Manager 151 magic wand tool 143 magnetic lasso tool 141 magnetic pen tool 170 Make Layers From Frames command 312 Make Selection command 180 Make Work Path command 181 Manage Workflow commands See online Help marquee tools 63 139 140 Mask option calculations 196 Masked Areas option 198 200 masks adding to selection 202 choosing color of 199 color that determines editing 198 creating 197 default colors 197 for type 254 loading 201 loading intersecting selections 202 permanent 199 saving as alpha channels 197 saving selections in 197 selections as 201 storing in alpha channels 199 subtracting from a selection 202 temporary 197 using for optimization 327 master palette 336 Match Layer Across All Rollovers command 296 Load Selection button 201 Load Selection command 153 Load Slice Selection command 277 loading actions 403 color tables 336 contours 237 duotone curves 386 output settings 348 selections 153 slice selections 277 local lighting 235 Lock Transparency option 153 Lock Unlock Selected Colors command 335 locking colors 335 layers 217 partially locked layers 218 slices 281 type layers 218 looping in animations 306 lossless compression CCITT 365 GIF format 319 LZW 365 PNG 24 format 320 PNG 8 format 319 RLE 365 ZIP 365 lossy compression
549. sity of your monitor View continuous tone art printed output and images on screen under the same intensity of light You also might not need color management if you are producing images for the Web or other screen based output since you cannot control the color management settings of monitors displaying your final output It is helpful however to use the Web Graphics Defaults setting when preparing such images because this setting reflects the average RGB space of many monitors See Using predefined color management settings on page 124 You can benefit from color management if you have more variables in your production process for example if you re using an open system with multiple platforms and multiple devices from different manufacturers Color management is recommended if you anticipate reusing color graphics for print and online media ifyou manage multiple workstations or if you plan to print to different domestic and international presses If you decide to use color management consult with your production partners such as graphic artists and prepress service providers to ensure that all aspects of your color management workflow integrate seamlessly with theirs To specify color management settings 1 Choose Edit gt Color Settings To display helpful descriptions of the options that appear in the dialog box position the pointer over a section heading or menu item These descrip tions appear in
550. size rotate or skew the bounding box 8 Photoshop Commit the type layer See About using the type tool Photoshop on page 252 The type you entered appears in a new type layer Working with type layers Once you create a type layer you can edit the type and apply layer commands to it You can change the orientation of the type apply anti aliasing convert between point type and paragraph type create a work path from type or convert type to shapes You can move restack copy and change the layer options of a type layer as you do for a normal layer You can also make the following changes to a type layer and still edit the type Apply transformation commands from the Edit menu except for Perspective and Distort To apply the Perspective or Distort commands or to transform part of the type layer you must rasterize the type layer making the type uneditable e Use layer styles Use fill shortcuts To fill with the foreground color press Alt Backspace Windows or Option Delete Mac OS to fill with the background color press Ctrl Backspace Windows or Command Delete Mac OS Warp type to conform to a variety of shapes Editing text in type layers You can insert new text change existing text and delete text in type layers To edit text in a type layer 1 Select the type tool T 2 Select the type layer in the Layers palette or click in the text flow to automatically select a type l
551. smaller files by sacri ficing some image quality GIF image with 0 dither and with 100 dither 256 levels of transparency to blend the edges of an image smoothly with any background color However multilevel transparency is not supported by all browsers Optimizing images To optimize an image for the Web you select a file format and other options in the Optimize panel Photoshop or the Optimize palette ImageReady You can apply different optimi zation settings to different slices in an image You can also use alpha channels to selectively optimize an image within a slice or across slice boundaries Viewing optimization options Optimization options appear in the Optimize panel Photoshop and the Optimize palette ImageReady These options vary depending on the file format you select To view the Optimize panel palette Do one of the following Photoshop Choose File gt Save for Web The Optimize panel is displayed on the right side of the dialog box beneath the Output Settings button ImageReady Choose View gt Show Optimize or click the Optimize palette tab To show all the optimization options click the Show Options control on the Optimize palette tab or choose Show Options from the Optimize palette menu Optimizing Images for the Web As with the GIF format you can reduce the number of colors in the image and choose options to control the way colors dither in the application or in the b
552. snapshot before creating or applying an action Then you can recover your work more easily if you decide later you don t like the action Each step in an action is added to the list of states on the History palette An action with many steps ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 53 User Guide 5 Click OK Q To duplicate an image in Photoshop and automatically append the name copy to its filename hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS when you choose Image gt Duplicate To duplicate an original image ImageReady 1 Open the image you want to duplicate 2 Select the Original tab at the top of the image window 3 Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag the Original tab from the image window or choose Image gt Duplicate 4 Name the duplicate specify whether to flatten the layers and click OK To duplicate an optimized image ImageReady 1 Open the image you want to duplicate 2 Select the Optimized tab at the top of the image window 3 Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and drag the Optimized tab from the image window or choose Image gt Duplicate Optimized 4 Name the duplicate and click OK Note When you duplicate an image in Optimized 2 Up or 4 Up view the duplicate image appears in the Original view in the duplicate image window If you want a duplicate optimized image to appear in the Optimized 2 Up or 4 Up view duplicate the original image and then select the Optimized 2 Up o
553. so magnetic lasso rounded rectangle marquee elliptical marquee or magic wand tool 2 Select Anti aliased in the options bar To define a feathered edge for a selection tool 1 Select any of the lasso or marquee tools 2 Enter a Feather value in the options bar This value defines the width of the feathered edge and can range from 1 to 250 pixels CHAPTER 5 Selecting 148 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide 2 Do one of the following Move the pointer inside the selection border and drag the selection to a new position If you have selected multiple areas all move as you drag e Select the layer you want to move Then drag the layer to a new position Copying selections or layers You can use the move tool to copy selections as you drag them within or between images or you can copy and move selections using the Copy Copy Merged Cut and Paste commands Dragging with the move tool saves memory because the Clipboard is not used as it is with the Copy Copy Merged Cut and Paste commands The Copy command copies the selected area on the active layer The Copy Merged command makes a merged copy of all the visible layers in the selected area The Paste command pastes a cut or copied selection into another part of the image or into another image as a new layer Photoshop The Paste Into command pastes a cut or copied selection inside another selection in the same image or different image The source s
554. splays in the Web browser s title bar copyright information is not displayed in the browser but can be used in a case of copyright infringement to verify copyright To enter information about an image 1 Do one of the following Photoshop Choose File gt File Info ImageReady Choose File gt Image Info Image Map Placement ImageReady only Select a placement option for the image map declaration the lt MAP gt tag in the HTML file Top to place the image map declaration at the top of the HTML body section Body to place the image map declaration above the lt IMG SRC gt tag for the associated slice Bottom to place the image map declaration at the bottom of the HTML body section Setting file saving options You can set the following options in the Saving Files set File Naming Select elements from the pop up menus or enter text into the fields to be combined into the default names for all files Elements include document name slice name rollover state trigger slice file creation date slice number punctuation and file extension Some options are relevant only if the file contains slices or rollover states The fields let you change the order and formatting of the filename parts for example letting you indicate rollover state by an abbreviation instead of the full word File Name Compatibility Select one or multiple options to make the filename compatible with Windows permits longer f
555. ss value between 255 and 255 CHAPTER 7 Using Channels and Masks 5 Select Invert to use the negative of the channel contents in the calculation For Channel choose Gray to get the same effect as would be obtained by converting the image to a grayscale image 6 Choose the second source image layer and channel specifying further options as described in step 5 7 For Blending choose a blending mode For information on the Add and Subtract modes see About the Add and Subtract blending modes on page 196 For information on other blending modes see Selecting a blending mode in online Help 8 Enter an opacity to specify the effect s strength 9 Select Mask if you want to apply the blending through a mask Then choose the image and layer containing the mask For Channel you can choose any color or alpha channel to use as the mask You can also use a mask based on the active selection or the boundaries of the chosen layer Transparency Select Invert to reverse the masked and unmasked areas of the channel 10 For Result specify whether to place the blending results in a new document or in a new channel or selection in the active image 11 Click OK About the Add and Subtract blending modes The Add and Subtract blending modes are available only for the Apply Image and Calcula tions commands 196 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide In Photoshop you can create masks all stored at least tempo
556. state will cause the animation to appear when the image is loaded in a Web browser e Custom to define a new rollover state You must create JavaScript code and add it to the HTML file for the Web page in order for the Custom rollover option to function See a JavaScript manual for more information None to preserve the current state of the image for later use as a rollover state A state designated as None will not be displayed on the Web page The Rollover States pop up menu displays only the rollover states that have not yet been used for the selected slice or image map area with the exception of the None and Custom states which are always available and can be used repeatedly You can redefine rollover states as you work with the exception of the Normal state 4 Modify the image for the rollover state using the Layers palette Previewing rollover states You can preview rollover states directly in the ImageReady document window by switching to rollover preview mode This preview is consistent with Internet Explorer 5 0 for Windows To preview the rollover effect in your computer s default Web browser click the Preview in Default Browser button in the toolbox See Previewing an image in a browser on page 84 To use rollover preview mode 1 Click the Rollover Preview button i in the toolbox or click the Play button E in the Rollover palette The new rollover style appears in the Styles palette
557. stom dither patterns You can use the DitherBox filter to create a custom dither pattern for a selected RGB color You can then fill a selection or a layer in an image with the dither pattern You can save custom dither patterns in groups called collections and use the dither patterns with other images To create and apply a custom dither pattern 1 With an image displayed in the document window Photoshop or in Original view ImageReady use the eyedropper tool to select a foreground color that you want to simulate with a customized dither pattern The foreground color becomes the basis for the custom dither pattern in DitherBox Note In Photoshop you create custom dither patterns while in the main Photoshop work area not in the Save for Web dialog box Make sure the image 1s in RGB color mode See Photoshop online Help for information on color modes 2 Use the selection tools or the Layers palette to select an area or a layer in the image that you want to fill with the custom dither pattern 3 Choose Filter gt Other gt DitherBox The RGB swatch in the DitherBox dialog box displays the current foreground color To choose another RGB color on which to base the dither pattern click the RGB swatch select a new color in the color picker and then press the arrow button ra to transfer it to the pattern box ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide To edit dither pattern collections Do one of the following in t
558. submenu Note Suppressing snap only temporarily disables snap for the options chosen in the Snap To submenu The submenu options next to dots Windows or dashes Mac OS remain chosen for snapping To turn on an option from alist of suppressed Snap To options 1 With snap suppressed choose View gt Snap To The Snap To submenu opens with a dot Windows or a dash Mac OS next to options for which snap is chosen but suppressed 2 Choose an option next to a dot Windows or a dash Mac OS to turn on snap for that option only This automatically turns snap off for all other options To decrease a fringe on a selection 1 Choose Layer gt Matting gt Defringe 2 Enter a value in the Width text box for the distance to search for replacement pixels In most cases a distance of 1 or 2 pixels is enough 3 Click OK To remove a matte from a selection Choose Layer gt Matting gt Remove Black Matte or Layer gt Matting gt Remove White Matte 1 Adjust the view as needed e To magnify an area select the zoom tool amp in the dialog box and click in the preview image To zoom out hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS as you click To view a different area select the hand tool in the dialog box and drag in the preview image Extracting objects from their background Photoshop The Extract command provides a sophisticated way to isolate a foreground object and erase its background on a layer Even
559. t To print the file using a non PostScript printer save in TIFF format and export to Adobe InDesign or to Adobe PageMaker 5 0 or later Note If you import an EPS or DCS file with a TIFF preview into Adobe Illustrator the image clipping path transparency may not display properly This affects the on screen preview only it does not affect the printing behavior of the image clipping path ona PostScript printer Printing image clipping paths Sometimes an imagesetter has difficulty inter preting image clipping paths or a printer finds the image clipping path too complex to print resulting in a Limitcheck error or a general PostScript error Sometimes you can print a complex path on a low resolution printer without difficulty but run into problems when printing the same path on a high resolution printer This is because the lower resolution printer simplifies the path using fewer line segments to describe curves than does the high resolution printer You can simplify an image clipping path in the following ways By manually reducing the number of anchor points on the path See Adding deleting and converting anchor points on page 177 By increasing the tolerance setting used to create the path See the following procedure 371 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide 5 Open the path in Adobe Illustrator as a new file You can now manipulate the path or use the path to align Illustrator objects Note that the c
560. t Image Size 2 Change the print dimensions image resolution or both e To change only the print dimensions or only the resolution and adjust the total number of pixels in the image proportionately make sure that Resample Image is selected Then choose an inter polation method See Choosing an interpolation method on page 96 To change the print dimensions and resolution without changing the total number of pixels in the image deselect Resample Image ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide Good to produce a resolution 1 5 times the screen frequency Best to produce a resolution 2 times the screen frequency 5 Click OK Scanning images Before you scan an image make sure that the software necessary for your scanner has been installed To ensure a high quality scan you should predetermine the scanning resolution and dynamic range your image requires These preparatory steps can also prevent unwanted colors casts from being introduced by your scanner Scanner drivers are provided and supported by the manufacturers of the scanners not Adobe Systems Incorporated If you have problems with scanning make sure that you are using the latest version of the appropriate scanner driver Importing scanned images You can import scanned images directly from any scanner that has an Adobe Photoshop compatible plug in module or that supports the TWAIN interface To import the scan using a plug in module choose th
561. t angles ensures that the dots placed by the four screens blend to look like continuous color and do not produce moir patterns Halftone screens consist of dots that control how much ink is deposited at a specific location on press Varying their size and density creates the illusion of variations of gray or continuous color Fora process color image four halftone screens are used cyan magenta yellow and black one for each ink used in the printing process Halftone screens with process ink at different screen angles correctly registered dots form rosettes In traditional print production a halftone is produced by placing a halftone screen between a piece of film and the image and then exposing the film In Photoshop you specify the halftone screen attributes just before producing the film or paper output For best results your output device 380 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 381 User Guide about using PostScript language commands see the PostScript Language Reference published by Addison Wesley or consult the imagesetter s manufacturer For optimal output on a PostScript printer the image resolution should be 1 5 to 2 times the halftone screen frequency If the resolution is more than 2 5 times the screen frequency an alert message appears See About image size and resolution on page 92 If you are printing line art or printing to a non PostScript printer see your printer documentation for the appropriate im
562. t between pixels required to be considered an edge Use a higher value for low contrast images For Frequency enter a value between 0 and 100 to specify the rate at which the pen sets anchor points A higher value anchors the path in place more quickly ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 71 User Guide To specify how overlapping areas interact 1 Create a new shape layer or work path select an existing layer in the Layers palette or select an existing path in the Paths palette 2 Before drawing subsequent shapes path segments or path components choose the shape tool or pen tool you want to use and choose one of the following options in the options bar e Add to Shape Area B to add the new area to the existing shapes or path e Subtract from Shape Area to remove the overlapping area from the existing shapes or path e Intersect Shape Area B1 to restrict the area to the intersection of the new area and the existing shapes or path e Exclude Shape Area to exclude the overlap area in the consolidated new and existing areas Using the Paths palette Photoshop The Paths palette lists the name and a thumbnail image of each saved path the current work path and the current layer clipping path Decreasing the size of thumbnails or turning them off lets you list more paths in the palette and turning thumbnails off can improve performance To view a path you must first select it in the Paths palette 6 Complete th
563. t click Windows or Option click Mac OS the eye icon next to the layer you want to show ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 53 User Guide Select alayer Often you will need to target a specific layer for further editing in Photoshop or ImageReady For instance many tasks such as transformations or filters can be applied to entire layers as well as to individual selections In addition you must first target a layer in order to select an area or shape that sits on that layer To select or target a layer click its name in the Layers palette Create a selection based on the contents of a layer To select all the opaque contents of a layer Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS the layer in the Layers palette The resulting selection border represents the boundaries of the layer Adjust opacity and blending mode For each layer you can specify an opacity percentage to control how much layers beneath show through and blending mode to control how the colors in the layer are blended with the colors of underlying layers To specify the opacity of a selected layer enter a value for Opacity or drag the slider at the upper right of the Layers palette To specify a blending mode for a selected layer choose an option from the menu at the upper left of the Layers palette Move a layer s stacking order The Layers palette displays layers in the order that they are stacked in Layers 3 Pass Through lx Opacity t00s lok FO symbols
564. t having to toggle back and forth from a dialog box If you rotate scale or skew your text in the image the text remains editable Type warping The new type warping feature lets you distort type layers in the form of special shapes such as arcs and waves Style TI Arc D_ Horizontal Yertical Cancel 0 he lion once went hunting with the Fox the Jackal and the Wolf They hunted and they hunted until at last Bend Horizontal Distortion b 9 ey surprised a Stag and took its life Then came 0 nd cut it into four parts Then the Lion took his stand in Vertical Distortion of the carcass and propaynced judgement Warping type using Arc style Setting paragraph formatting options New paragraph options Extensive new options for styling paragraphs now appear in the new Paragraph palette which operates similarly to the Paragraph palette in Adobe InDesign and Adobe Illustrator You can specify alignment auto leading space before and after hanging punctuation and left right and first line indents on a per paragraph basis What s New in Adobe Photoshop 0 Hyphenation justification and composition controls Photoshop provides professional quality hyphen ation settings with control over the minimum word size minimum number of characters before and after a hyphen number of consecutive hyphens and hyphenation zone Photoshop also fully supports paragraph justification with v
565. t information Adobe Acrobat Reader software included on the Photoshop CD lets you view PDF files Acrobat Reader or Adobe Acrobat is required to view many documents included on this CD Using the printed documentation Two printed documents are included with the application Getting Started elcome to the Adobe Photoshop 6 0 W application the world standard image editing photo retouching and Web graphics solution With its integrated Web tool application Adobe ImageReady 3 0 Photoshop delivers a comprehensive environment for professional designers and graphics producers to create sophisticated images for both print and the Web Moreover Photoshop 6 0 expands the definition of desktop image editing by adding new support for vector based drawing and editing improved tools for producing Web graphics and an enhanced user interface all to your creative advantage Registration Adobe is confident you will find that its software greatly increases your productivity So that Adobe can continue to provide you with the highest quality software offer technical support and inform you about new Photoshop software devel opments please register your application When you first start the Photoshop or ImageReady application you re prompted to register online You can choose to submit the form directly or fax a printed copy You can also register by filling out and returning the registration card included with
566. t support layers For more information see Converting between Grayscale and Bitmap modes Photoshop in online Help Converting between bit depths A 16 bit per channel image provides finer distinc tions in color but it can have twice the file size of an 8 bit per channel image In addition only the following Photoshop tools and commands are available for 16 bit per channel images The marquee lasso crop measure zoom hand pen eyedropper history brush slice color sampler and clone stamp tools as well as the pen and shape tools for drawing work paths only The Duplicate Feather Modify Levels Auto Levels Auto Contrast Curves Histogram Hue Saturation Brightness Contrast Color Balance Equalize Invert Channel Mixer Gradient Map Image Size Canvas Size Transform Selection and Rotate Canvas commands and a limited set of filters CI For more information see Using filters in online Help To take full advantage of Photoshop features you can convert a 16 bit per channel image to an 8 bit per channel image To convert between 8 bits per channel and 16 bits per channel 1 To convert to a 16 bit per channel image first flatten the image See Flattening all layers on page 248 2 Choose Image gt Mode gt 16 Bits Channel or 8 Bits Channel Applying colors Once you have set up the color mode for an image you can specify a foreground and background color by using the ey
567. tangle tool O ellipse tool or line tool additionally in Photoshop select the polygon tool lt gt custom shape tool pen tool amp or freeform pen tool 3 In the options bar click the Create New Shape Layer button L and set the following options Choose a layer style from the Layer Style pop up palette to apply a predefined layer style to the shape Choose a layer blending mode from the Mode menu Specify a layer opacity using the Opacity text box or slider e Photoshop If you re using the custom shape tool select a predefined shape from the Shape pop up palette See Using pop up palettes on page 62 Set additional tool specific options See Setting shape tool options on page 164 Drawing with the pen tool on page 167 and Drawing with the freeform pen tool on page 169 4 If youre using a shape tool drag in the image to draw the shape If you re using a pen tool click or drag in the image to draw the shape See Using the pen tools Photoshop on page 166 CHAPTER 6 Drawing and Editing About the drawing tools in Photoshop and ImageReady Keep in mind the following differences when using the drawing tools in Photoshop and ImageReady The pen tools polygon tool and custom shape tool are available only in Photoshop In Photoshop you can use the drawing tools to create a work path in ImageReady you can t create a work
568. tch process using multiple actions create e a new action and record the Batch command for each action you want to use This technique also lets you process multiple folders in a single batch To batch process multiple folders create aliases within a folder to the other folders you want to process and select the Include All Subfolders option Using droplets A droplet is a small application that applies an action to one or more images that you drag onto the droplet icon 4 You can save a droplet on the desktop or to a location on disk Creating a droplet from an action Actions are the basis for creating droplets you must create the desired action in the Actions palette prior to creating a droplet See Recording actions on page 394 In ImageReady you can also create droplets with the Optimize palette so that you can apply Optimize palette settings to single images or batches of images Automating Tasks 5 If you chose Folder as the destination specify a file naming convention and select file compati bility options for the processed files For File Naming select elements from the pop up menus or enter text into the fields to be combined into the default names for all files Elements include document name serial number or letter file creation date and file extension The fields let you change the order and formatting of the filename parts You must include at least one field that is unique for every fil
569. tch the units of measurement for your rulers on the fly Just right click Windows or Control click Mac OS the rulers and choose the measurement unit you want from the context menu In addition whenever you are asked to enter measurement values for a tool or dialog box you can use any combination of units you want for example 2 inches by 45 pixels for a rectangle Enhanced multiple image options The Contact Sheet II command offers more label options the Picture Package command offers an enhanced set of layout options and the Web Photo Gallery lets you choose from a variety of customizable HTML templates Moved preferences The preference commands now appear under the Edit menu 54 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie e 2 1 Chapter 1 Looking at the Work Area Displaying and working with tools You select a tool by clicking its icon in the toolbox A small triangle at the lower right of a tool icon indicates hidden tools Positioning the pointer over a tool displays a tool tip with the tool s name and keyboard shortcut To show or hide the toolbox Choose Window gt Show Tools or Window gt Hide Tools To move the toolbox Drag the toolbox by its title bar To select a tool Do one of the f
570. te As long as you save a file in a format supporting the image s color mode the color channels are preserved Alpha channels are preserved only when you save a file in Adobe Photoshop PDF PICT TIFF or Raw formats DCS 2 0 format only preserves spot channels Saving in other formats may cause channel information to be discarded See About file formats on page 364 Using the Channels palette Photoshop The Channels palette lets you create and manage channels and monitor the effects of editing The palette lists all channels in the image composite channel first for RGB CMYK and Lab images then individual color channels spot color channels and finally alpha channels A thumbnail of the channel s contents appears to the left of the channel name the thumbnail automatically updates as you edit the channel ach image in Adobe Photoshop has E channels that store information about the image s color You can create additional channels to store spot colors for printing with special inks and to store masks for sophisticated selections About channels Photoshop uses special grayscale channels to store an image s color information and information about spot colors If an image has multiple layers each layer has its own set of color channels Color information channels are created automatically when you open a new image The image s color mode not its number of layers determines the number of color channel
571. te with the configuration and click OK The comments that you enter will appear in the Description area of the Color Settings dialog box when the pointer is positioned over the configu ration in the Settings menu To load a color management configuration 1 In the Color Settings dialog box click Load 2 Locate and select the desired color settings file and click Load When you load a custom color settings file it appears as the active choice in the Settings menu of the Color Settings dialog box If you load a settings file that has been saved outside the recommended location it temporarily replaces the Other option in the Settings menu until another settings file is loaded CHAPTER 4 Producing Consistent Color Photoshop Customizing advanced color management settings When you select Advanced Mode at the top of the Color Settings dialog box you have the option of further customizing settings used for color management For detailed information on advanced color management settings see Specifying a color management engine Specifying a rendering intent Using black point compen sation Using dither Desaturating monitor colors and Blending RGB colors in online Help Saving and loading color management settings When you create a custom color management configuration you should name and save the configuration to ensure that it can be shared with other users a
572. ted elements Linked Layers to rasterize linked layers All Layers to rasterize all layers in the image specify that the pattern moves with the layer as it is relocated and drag the Scale slider or enter a value to specify the size of the pattern You can 5 a pattern in the layer to position it while in this panel The position can be reset with the Snap to Origin button There must be at least one pattern loaded for the pattern option to be available You can also load patterns using the Preset Manager Gradient Specifies the gradient of a fill layer You can click the gradient to display the Gradient Editor or click the inverted arrow and choose a gradient from the pop up palette For some effects you can specify additional gradient options Reverse flips the orientation of the gradient Align With Layer uses the bounding box of the layer to calculate the gradient fill when the document bounds are used Dither dithers the pattern Scale scales the application of the gradient You can also use the mouse to move the center of the gradient by clicking and dragging in the image window Style specifies the shape of the gradient For more information see Creating gradient fills in online Help Merging adjustment layers or fill layers You can merge an adjustment or fill layer several ways with the layer below it with the layers in its own clipping group with the layers it is linked to with all other vis
573. ted results choose maximum quality compression Files with JPEG encoding can be printed only on Level 2 or later PostScript printers and may not separate into individual plates CCITT encoding is a family of lossless compression techniques for black and white images that is supported by the PDF and PostScript language file formats CCITT is an abbreviation for the French spelling of Interna tional Telegraph and Telekeyed Consultive Committee e ZIP encoding is a lossless compression technique supported by the PDF and TIFF file formats Like LZW ZIP compression is most effective for images that contain large areas of single color ImageReady PackBits is a lossless compression technique that uses a run length compression scheme PackBits is supported by the TIFF file format in ImageReady only For more information on choosing file formats when opening or saving images see Opening and importing images on page 101 and Saving images on page 357 For information on choosing a Web optimization format see Choosing a file format for optimization on page 317 Note If a supported file format does not appear in the appropriate dialog box or submenu you may need to install the format s plug in module For more information about specific file formats and plug in modules see About file formats in online Help About file compression Many image file formats use compression techniques to re
574. tension lowercase File Extension options Mac OS Specifies the format for file extensions Select Append to add the format s extension to a filename and Use Lower Case to make the extension lowercase Important To display image preview and file extension options when saving files in Mac OS select Ask When Saving for the Image Previews option and the Append File Extension option in the Preferences dialog box See Setting preferences for saving files Photoshop on page 366 Saving files in Photoshop EPS or DCS format Photoshop You can use Encapsulated PostScript EPS format to share Photoshop files effectively with many graphic illustration and page layout programs Desktop Color Separations DCS format a version of the standard EPS format lets you save color separations of CMYK or multichannel files You use DCS 2 0 format to export images containing spot channels The PostScript language interpreter in some appli cations can use these screen settings when color separations are generated You can also choose the Override Printer s Default Functions option in the Transfer Functions dialog box for dot gain in film using transfer functions For more information see Compensating in online Help 7 To display white areas in the image as trans parent select Transparent Whites This option is available only for images in Bitmap mode 8 If you are saving to EPS format select PostScript Color Man
575. th the rest of the image using the selected blending mode Thus if you choose a blending mode other than Pass Through for the layer set none of the adjustment layers or layer blending modes inside the layer set will apply to layers outside the set To create a new layer set from linked layers Choose Layer gt New gt Layer Set from Linked For additional methods of creating layer sets see Adding layers on page 210 To drag a layer into a set Do one of the following e If the destination layer set is collapsed drag a layer to the layer set folder or the layer set name When the layer set folder and name are highlighted release the mouse button The layer is placed at the bottom of the layer set 3 Drag anywhere in the image to move the selected layer into the desired position To constrain the direction of movement to a multiple of 45 hold down Shift as you drag To reposition the contents of the layer in 1 pixel Q increments when the move tool is selected press the arrow keys on the keyboard To move the contents of the layer in 10 pixel increments or to move one frame if you re editing a filmstrip file press Shift and an arrow key To reposition the contents of multiple layers 1 In the Layers palette link the layers or layer sets you want to move See Linking layers on page 209 2 Use the move tool to move the linked layers in the image window Layers ck OL Os OF Dia
576. th the Preset Manager Photoshop You can use the Preset Manager to manage libraries of preset brushes swatches gradients styles patterns contours and custom shapes This lets you easily reuse or share libraries of presets Each type of library has its own file extension and default folder You can always restore the default presets Note that you cannot create new presets using the Preset Manager as each preset is created in its own type of editor The Preset Manager lets you create a library composed of multiple presets of a single type Any new preset brush swatch and so on automatically displays in the Preset Manager Prior to saving it into a preset library the new brush swatch and so on is saved in the Prefer ences file so that it persists between editing sessions To permanently save the new item as a Changing views of the Preset Manager You can change the view of the Preset Manager to display presets by name by thumbnail or for some preset types you can choose to show both the name and thumbnail of each item Only the available choices for each type of preset display when you change the view for that preset type To change the view of the Preset Manager In the Preset Manager dialog box choose one of the available views from the pop up menu e Text Only to display the name of each preset item Small Thumbnail or Large Thumbnail to display a thumbnail of each preset item Small List or Large L
577. the Columns option uses the width and gutter sizes specified in the Units amp Rulers preferences See Using rulers the measure tool guides and the grid on page 74 5 For Resolution enter a new value If desired choose a new unit of measurement 6 Click OK To return to the original values displayed in the Image Size dialog box hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click Reset To view the print size on screen Do one of the following e Choose View gt Print Size e Select the hand tool or zoom tool and click Print Size in the options bar The magnification of the image is adjusted to display its approximate printed size as specified in the Document Size section of the Image Size dialog box Keep in mind that the size and resolution of your monitor affect the on screen print size 98 CHAPTER 2 Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady If you turn on resampling for the image you can change print dimensions and resolution indepen dently and change the total number of pixels in the image If you turn resampling off you can change either the dimensions or the resolution Photoshop adjusts the other value automatically to preserve the total pixel count For the highest print quality it s generally best to change the dimen sions and resolution first without resampling Then resample only as necessary To change the print dimensions and resolution of an image 1 Choose Image g
578. the Shift key for example Ctrl Shift F3 Photoshop Assign a color for display in Button Mode 6 Click Record The Record button in the Actions palette turns red Important When recording the Save As command do not change the filename If you enter a new filename Photoshop records the filename and uses that filename each time you run the action Before saving if you navigate to a different folder you can specify a different location without having to specify a filename Results depend on file and program setting variables such as the active layer or the foreground color For example a 3 pixel Gaussian blur won t create the same effect on a 72 ppi file ason a 144 ppi file Nor will Color Balance work on a grayscale file When recording actions that include dialog box and palette settings keep in mind that only changed settings are recorded For example to record an action that sets a particular preference to its current value you must first change that preference to some other value and then record the action as you change the preference back to its original value Modal operations and tools as well as tools that record position use the units currently specified for the ruler A modal operation or tool is one that requires you to press Enter or Return to apply its effect such as the transformation commands Tools that record position include the marquee slice gradient magic wand lasso path
579. the desktop The droplet is named with a brief description of the compression settings including file format and color palette or quality setting information You can rename the droplet as you do other desktop icons e Click the droplet icon on the Optimize palette Name the droplet choose a location where the droplet will be saved and click Save Choose Create Droplet from the Optimize palette menu Name the droplet choose a location where the droplet will be saved and click Save To use a droplet 1 Drag a single image or a folder of images onto the droplet icon As the images are processed a progress bar appears Optimizing Images for the Web Named Setting and select an option from the Named Settings pop up menu to apply that setting 3 Under 2 Up Settings or 4 Up Settings specify settings for the Ist 2nd 3rd and 4th panes 3rd and 4th panes apply to 4 Up view only Original to display the original image in the specified pane This option is available for the first pane only Current to display the image with current Optimize palette settings in the specified pane This option is available for all panes Auto to display a smaller optimized version of the image generated automatically by ImageReady based on the current Optimize palette settings This option is available for the second third and fourth panes e Select one of the twelve named settings to display the optimized image w
580. the display of thumbnails can improve performance To show color channels in color 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Display amp Cursors 2 Select Color Channels in Color and click OK To resize or hide channel thumbnails 1 Choose Palette Options from the Channels palette menu 2 Select a display option Click a thumbnail size Smaller thumbnails reduce the space required by the palette helpful when you re working on smaller monitors Click None to turn off the display of thumbnails 3 Click OK Using Channels and Masks Viewing channels You can use the palette to view any combination of individual channels For example you can view an alpha channel and the composite channel together to see how changes made in the alpha channel relate to the entire image By default individual channels are displayed in grayscale To display the Channels palette 1 Choose Windows gt Show Channels or click the Channels palette tab 2 Use the scroll bars or resize the palette to see additional channels When a channel is visible in the image an eye icon appears to its left in the palette To show or hide a channel Click in the eye column next to the channel to show or hide that channel Click the composite channel to view all default color channels The composite channel is displayed whenever all the color channels are visible Q To show or hide multiple channels drag through the eye column in the Cha
581. the ending frame to 0 When you tween between the two frames the opacity of the layer is reduced evenly across the new frames Creating Animations ImageReady To delete an entire animation Select Delete Animation from the Animation palette menu Copying and pasting frames To understand what happens when you copy and paste a frame think of a frame as a duplicate version of an image with a given layer configu ration When you copy a frame you copy the configuration of layers including each layer s visibility setting position and other attributes When you paste a frame you apply that layer configuration to the destination frame To copy and paste layers between frames 1 Select one or more frames 2 Choose Copy Frame s from the Animation palette menu 3 Select a destination frame or frames in the current animation or another animation 4 Choose Paste Frame s from the Animation palette menu 5 Select a Paste Method Replace Frames to replace the selected frames with the copied frames When you paste frames into the same image no new layers are added to the image rather the attributes of each existing layer in the destination frames are replaced by those of each copied layer When you paste frames between images new layers are added to the image however only the pasted layers are visible in the destination frames the existing layers are hidden ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide 3 Do one of
582. the entire layer set You can also link a layer in a layer set to a layer contained in another layer set or to a layer that is not part of a layer set Once you link to a layer set the layers within the layer set are implicitly linked By linking layers and layer sets you can move their contents together You can also perform the following tasks on linked layers and layers in a set Apply transformations For more information see Transforming objects in two dimensions in online Help Align layer contents See Moving and aligning the contents of layers on page 214 Merge layers See Merging layers on page 247 Create clipping groups See Creating clipping groups on page 218 4 Photoshop Select Use Video Alpha to enable Photoshop to send transparency information to your computer s video board This option requires hardware support make sure that your computer s video board allows images to be overlaid on top of a live video signal Selecting this option without hardware support produces unpredictable results 5 Click OK Changing the stacking order of layers The stacking order determines whether a layer or layer set appears in front of or behind other layers Note that you cannot drag a layer set into another layer set or drag layer effects below the background For more information about the stacking order in layers see Grouping layers into sets on page 213
583. the layer styles to regular image layers Once you have converted a layer style to image layers you can enhance the result by painting or applying commands and filters However you can no longer edit the layer style on the original layer and the layer style will no longer update as you change the original image layer Note The layers produced by this process may not result in artwork that exactly matches the version using layer styles In Photoshop you may see an alert when you create the new layers To convert a layer style to image layers 1 In the Layers palette select the layer containing the layer style you want to convert 2 Choose Layer gt Layer Style gt Create Layers You can now modify and restack the new layers in the same way as regular layers Some effects for example Inner Glow convert to layers within a clipping group CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 230 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 231 User Guide custom layer style or click the name of the layer effect to select it and to display its options in the dialog box See Specifying options for layer styles on page 232 3 Create a new layer style by doing one of the following Drag the selected layer style into the Styles palette or onto the New Item button El in the Styles palette In Photoshop enter a name in the New Style dialog box and select Include Layer Effects or Include Layer Blending Options Click OK In ImageReady the layer style is
584. the lower area of the dialog box 2 Do one of the following To set up a predefined color management workflow see Using predefined color management settings on page 124 To customize your own color management settings see Customizing color management settings on page 126 3 Click OK Using predefined color management settings Photoshop offers a collection of predefined color management settings designed to produce consistent color for a common publishing workflow such as preparation for Web or offset press output In most cases the predefined settings will provide sufficient color management for your needs These settings can also serve as starting points for customizing your own workflow specific settings To choose a predefined color management setting choose one of the following options from the Settings menu in the Color Settings dialog box CHAPTER 4 Producing Consistent Color Photoshop Remove colorful background and user interface patterns on your monitor desktop Busy or bright patterns surrounding a document interfere with accurate color perception Set your desktop to display neutral grays only View document proofs in the real world condi tions under which your audience will see the final piece For example you might want to see how a housewares catalog looks under the incandescent light bulbs used in homes or view an office furniture catalog under the fluorescent lighting u
585. the palette The new layer is named according to its order of creation 2 Name the layer and select mode opacity and in some cases fill options See Specifying layer properties on page 219 Then click OK You can also use the New Layer and New Layer Set commands in the Layer menu and the Layers palette menu to add layers To convert a selection into a new layer 1 Makea selection 2 Do one of the following Choose Layer gt New gt Layer Via Copy to copy the selection into a new layer Choose Layer gt New gt Layer Via Cut to cut the selection and paste it into a new layer The selection contents appear in the same position relative to the image boundaries To convert a background into a layer 1 Do one of the following Choose Layer gt Layer from Background Double click Background in the Layers palette 2 Enter a name opacity and mode for the layer See Specifying layer properties on page 219 3 Click OK To add a background to an image Photoshop 1 Add a layer See Adding layers on page 210 2 Choose Layer gt New gt Background from Layer to create a background layer from the selected layer You cannot change the stacking order of the background or apply a blending mode or opacity To copy multiple layers or layer sets into another image 1 Make sure that both the source and destination images are open and select one of the layers or layer sets you want t
586. the series of commands you recorded in the active document You can exclude specific commands from an action or play a single command If the action includes a modal control you can specify values in a dialog box or use a modal tool when the action pauses Note In button mode clicking a button executes the entire action though commands previously excluded are not executed To play an action on a file 1 Open the file 2 Do one of the following e To play an entire action select the action name and click the Play button E in the Actions palette or choose Play from the palette menu If you assigned a key combination to the action press that combination to play the action automatically To play part of an action select the command from which you want to start playing and click the Play button in the Actions palette or choose Play from the palette menu To play a single command in an action 1 Select the command you want to play 2 Do one of the following e Ctrl click Windows or Command click Mac OS the Play button in the Actions palette Percent to constrain proportions using the new percent value 5 Select Do Not Enlarge to prevent images that are smaller than the new dimensions from being sized up 6 Click OK and continue recording the action Inserting optimization settings for selected slices ImageReady When you record a Save Optimized action step ImageReady includes optimization setting
587. ther import cases colors are converted to the document s color space The availability of options for Profile Mismatches depends on which policies have been specified Preserve 3 For Missing Profiles select Ask When Opening Embedded to display a message whenever you open an Profiles untagged document You will be given the option to override the policy s default behavior The availability of options for Missing Profiles depends on which policies have been specified It is strongly recommended that you keep the Ask When Opening and Ask When Pasting options selected Policy option Default color management behavior New documents and existing untagged documents remain untagged Convert to Working Space Existing documents tagged with a profile other than the current working space become untagged e Existing documents tagged with the current working space profile remain tagged For color data imported into a document using the same color mode color numbers are preserved For all other import cases colors are converted to the document s color space To ensure that the saved configuration appears in the Settings menu of the Color Settings dialog box save the file in one of the following recommended locations Windows Program Files Common Files Adobe Color Settings e Mac OS System Folder Application Support Adobe Color Settings 3 Enter any comments that you want to associa
588. ther tonal gradations For more information on interpolation see About resampling on page 96 5 Click Apply ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 327 User Guide describe the highest level of image quality while the black areas for the mask describe the lowest level of image quality The level of optimization in gray areas of the mask decreases by a linear scale Weighted optimization is available for specific settings in the Optimize panel palette as indicated by the channel button EJ This button has a dark when a channel is selected and background E appears dimmed when no channels 6 available To access the weighted optimization dialog box simply click the channel button To create a channel for use during optimization Do one of the following Photoshop Save a selection as a mask or create a new alpha channel and use the painting and editing tools to modify it See Storing masks in alpha channels on page 199 e ImageReady Use a selection tool to select an area of the image Either save the selection using the Select gt Save Selection command or choose the Save Selection command from the Channel pop up menu in the weighted optimization dialog box Using channels to modify JPEG quality When you use an alpha channel to optimize the range of quality in a JPEG image white areas of the mask yield the highest quality and black areas of the mask yield the lowest quality You can adjust the ma
589. thers CHAPTER 9 Using Type 256 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 User Guide To unwarp type 1 Select a type layer that has warping applied to it 2 Select the type tool T and click the Warp button in the options bar or choose Layer gt Type gt Warp Text 3 Choose None from the Style pop up menu and click OK Creating a work path from type Photoshop Creating a work path from type lets you work with characters as vector shapes A work path is a temporary path that appears in the Paths palette Once you create a work path from a type layer you can save and manipulate it like any other path See Selecting paths Photoshop on page 173 You cannot edit characters in the path as text however the original type layer remains intact and editable To create a work path from type Select a type layer and choose Layer gt Type gt Create Work Path Converting type to shapes Photoshop When you convert type to shapes the type layer is replaced by a layer with a vector based layer clipping path You can edit the layer clipping path and apply styles to the layer however you cannot edit characters in the layer as text See Editing a layer clipping path Photoshop on page 240 Warping applies to all characters on a type layer you cannot warp selected characters While warping is applied to a type layer you cannot resize or transform the bounding box for paragraph type Note You cann
590. tially filled circle By painting the adjustment layer you can apply the content to just portions of the under lying layers For more information see Making color adjustments in online Help Filllayers The fill layer takes the name of the fill type and is indicated by a color pattern or gradient icon to the left of the thumbnail Fill layers are primarily used with layer clipping paths For example when you create a new layer clipping path it gets filled with a solid color by default You can later choose to change it to a gradient or pattern fill layer At times you may also want to create a new color pattern or gradient layer independently of the shape tools Fill layers do not have any effect on the layers underneath them The fill layer options are solid color gradient or pattern Once you create an adjustment or fill layer you can easily edit the settings or dynamically replace it with a different adjustment or fill type When you create an adjustment layer its effect appears on all the layers below it This lets you correct multiple layers by making a single adjustment rather than making the adjustment to each layer separately Adjustment layers can be applied and edited only in Photoshop however they can be viewed in ImageReady When you apply an adjustment layer to a layer set Photoshop adds the new adjustment layer in the layer set above the existing layers For more information see Ma
591. ting by a mechanical press Types of images The simplest types of images such as line art use only one color in one level of gray A more complex image such as a photograph has color tones that vary within the image This type of image is known as a continuous tone image To select print options 1 Choose File gt Page Setup and select an installed printer from the pop up list at the top of the dialog box You can also select an installed printer in the Print dialog box 2 Select a paper size and orientation in the Page Attributes section of the Page Setup dialog box 3 Choose File gt Print Options to do the following e Adjust the position and scale of the image in relation to the selected paper size and orientation See Positioning and scaling images on page 377 Set output options See Setting output options on page 378 e Select halftone screen attributes See Selecting halftone screen attributes on page 379 Set other printing options See Printing part of an image on page 382 Choosing a print encoding method on page 382 and Printing vector graphics on page 382 e Set color management options See Using color management when printing on page 382 4 Click OK to save the print options for the image or click Print to print the image Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click Print One to print the image without displaying the Print dialo
592. ting of commands in an action click the triangle to the left of the action you want to work with 2 Click the check mark to the left of the specific command you wish to exclude click again to include the command To exclude or include all commands in an action click the check mark to the left of the action name When you exclude a command its check mark disappears In addition the check mark of the parent action turns red to indicate that some of the commands within the action are excluded Inserting nonrecordable commands Photoshop The painting and toning tools tool options view commands and window commands cannot be recorded However many commands that cannot be recorded can be inserted into an action using the Insert Menu Item command An inserted command is not executed until the action is played so the file remains unchanged when the command is inserted No values for the command are recorded in the action If the command has a dialog box the dialog box appears 3 Type the message you want to appear 4 If you want the option to continue the action without stopping select Allow Continue 5 Click OK Setting modal controls A modal control pauses an action so that you can specify values in a dialog box or use a modal tool You can only set modal controls for actions that launch dialog boxes or activate modal tools If you do not set a modal control dialog boxes do not appear when you play the action and yo
593. ting percentage of 342 shifting to Web safe colors 334 using the DitherBox filter 344 weighted optimization and 329 Divide Slices command 278 Do Not Dispose option 308 document bounds snapping to 153 document size about 97 adjusting during printing 377 document window 65 documentation overview 1 3 dot loss 378 double byte type See CJK type Downloadables command 4 downsampling 96 delete anchor point tool 177 Delete Color command 336 Delete Frame command 303 Delete Slice Selection command 277 deleting alpha channels 189 animations 304 channels 189 colors in color table 336 frames 303 image maps 291 layer clipping paths 240 layers 246 locked selections 153 rollover states 297 selections 149 153 slice selections 277 slices 280 Deselect All Colors command 334 Deselect command 140 deselecting selections 140 See also selecting destination channel 195 destination selection 150 detection width lasso tool 143 device independent color 112 dialog boxes about 61 pop up sliders 61 setting position of 61 See also names of individual dialog boxes Diffusion dither 342 Digimarc Detect Watermark plug in 78 Digimarc filters See online help direct selection tool 173 Create Slices from Guides command 273 Create Work Path command for type 257 crop marks 379 crop tool 63 cropping images snapping to 153 See also online Help CSS generating 350 Current Layer option 72 Current Path c
594. tions CERN Server Side to create a separate map file in addition to the HTML file using CERN specifications e Client amp NCSA to create both a client side and server side compatible image map using NCSA specifications Client amp CERN to create both a client side and server side compatible image map using CERN specifications Note Contact your Internet service provider to find out whether to use NCSA or CERN specification for server side image maps CHAPTER 12 Optimizing Images for the Web Always Quote Attributes To place quotation marks around all tag attributes Placing quotation marks around attributes is required for compati bility with certain early browsers and for strict HTML compliance However always quoting attributes is not recommended Quotation marks are used when necessary to comply with most browsers even if this option is deselected Include Comments To add explanatory comments to the HTML code Include GoLive Code To reformat HTML and JavaScript code so that rollovers will be fully editable in Adobe GoLive Code is reformatted in the style used by GoLive and may create a larger HTML file Generate CSS To generate a Cascading Style Sheet Referenced Select an option for referencing slice position in the HTML file when using CSS By ID to position each slice using styles that are referenced by a unique ID e Inline to include style elements in the decla ration of the block e
595. to 1 72 of an inch in a 72 ppi image however you can switch between using the PostScript and To display the Character palette Do one of the following e Choose Window gt Show Character Click the Character palette tab e With the type tool selected T click Palettes in the options bar Choosing a font A font is a complete set of characters letters numbers and symbols that share a common weight width and style When you select a font you can select the font family and its type style independently The font family is a collection of fonts sharing an overall typeface design for example Times A type style is a variant version of an individual font in the font family for example Regular Bold or Italic The range of available type styles varies with each font If a font doesn t include the style you want you can apply faux styles simulated versions of bold italic super script subscript all caps and small caps styles In addition to the fonts installed on your system Photoshop uses font files in these local folders Windows Program Files Common Files Adobe Fonts Mac OS System Folder Application Support Adobe Fonts If you install a Type 1 TrueType OpenType or CID font into the local Fonts folder the font appears in Adobe applications only Changing the type color The type you enter gets its color from the current foreground color however you can change the type color before or afte
596. to work with a variety of file formats and how to adjust the resolution and size of images About bitmap images and vector graphics Computer graphics falls into two main categories bitmap and vector You can work with both types of graphics in Photoshop and ImageReady moreover a Photoshop file can contain both bitmap and vector data Under standing the difference between the two categories helps as you create edit and import artwork Bitmap images Bitmap images technically called raster images use a grid of colors known as pixels to represent images Each pixel is assigned a specific location and color value For example a bicycle tire in a bitmap image is made up of a mosaic of pixels in that location When working with bitmap images you edit pixels rather than objects or shapes For example a 15 inch monitor typically displays 800 pixels horizontally and 600 vertically An image with dimensions of 800 pixels by 600 pixels would fill this small screen On a larger monitor with an 800 by 600 pixel setting the same image with 800 by 600 pixel dimensions would still fill the screen but each pixel would appear larger Changing the setting of this larger monitor to 1024 by 768 pixels would display the image at a smaller size occupying only part of the screen When preparing an image for online display for example a Web page that will be viewed on a variety of monitors pixel dimensions become especially import
597. toshop 1 Inthe Paths palette select a path either a layer clipping path for a shape layer a work path or a saved path 2 Choose Edit gt Define Custom Shape and in the Shape Name dialog box enter a name for the new custom shape The new shape appears in the Shape pop up palette 3 To save the new custom shape as part of the current library or to save a new library select Save Shapes from the pop up palette menu You can also use the Preset Manager to manage libraries of custom shapes See Managing libraries with the Preset Manager Photoshop on page 85 Using the pen tools Photoshop You can create or edit straight lines curves or freeform lines and shapes using the pen tools The pen tools can be used in conjunction with the shape tools to create complex shapes Drawing and Editing Manipulating a shape while dragging You can use the following modifier keys to manipulate a shape while dragging Hold down Shift to constrain a rectangle or rounded rectangle to a square to constrain an ellipse to a circle or to constrain the line angle to a multiple of 45 Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS to draw from the center of the shape Hold down the spacebar to move the shape without changing its size or proportions Adding shapes to an existing shape layer Photoshop After you create a shape layer you can add new shapes to it at any time You can also use the path component se
598. toshop Basics This interactive overview of Adobe Photoshop offers a number of short lesson modules designed to introduce the key features of the program You can complete the modules in sequence or select individual ones to design your own program introduction If you are an experienced Photoshop user you may want to quickly review sections of this overview and then skip to What s New in Adobe Photoshop 6 0 10 Adobe Photoshop Basics Setting up the work area Using tools and palettes The Photoshop or ImageReady work area consists of the image window the toolbox the options bar and a set of floating palettes This module shows you the basics of navigating the work area from selecting tools and tool options to customizing the display and arrangement of palettes Select a tool To select a tool click its icon in the toolbox Some tools in the toolbox have additional hidden tools as indicated by the small triangle to the lower right of the tool icon To select a hidden tool position the pointer on the visible tool and hold down the mouse button until the tools list appears Then click the tool you want Choose tool options When you first start the application the options bar appears docked to the top of your screen This options bar contains option settings for the currently selected tool e To display the options bar if it is hidden click a tool in the toolbox or choose Window gt Show Options To move the options ba
599. tween applications The Color Settings dialog box represents the common color management controls shared by several Adobe applications including Photoshop 6 0 and Illustrator 9 0 If you modify and save over the current color settings file in any application other than Photoshop you may be prompted to synchronize the common color settings upon starting Photoshop or upon reopening the Color Settings dialog box in Photoshop Synchronizing the color settings helps to ensure that color is reproduced consistently between Adobe applications that use the Color Settings dialog box To share custom color settings between applications be sure to save and load the settings file in the desired applications See Saving and loading color management settings on page 130 Soft proofing colors In a traditional publishing workflow you print a hard proof of your document to preview how the document s colors will look when reproduced ona specific output device In a color managed workflow you can use the precision of color profiles to soft proof your document directly on the monitor to display an on screen preview of the document s colors as reproduced on a specified device In addition you can use your printer to produce a hard proof version of this soft proof See Using color management when printing on 2 Select Preview to display a live preview of the proof settings in the document while the Proof Setup dialog box is open This
600. tyle option 233 libraries 237 convert direction point tool 177 Convert to Paragraph Text command 256 Convert to Point Text command 256 Convert to Shapes command 258 Copy All Slices command 348 locking colors in 335 master palette for 336 saving 336 selecting colors in 333 shifting to Web safe colors 335 sorting 332 using weighted optimization to generate 329 color transitions quality of 93 color trap 384 color values color management and 122 measuring CMYK 111 color wheel 109 colors additive 110 converting between color spaces 132 133 copying hexadecimal values for 338 fill layers 244 for type 260 in color tables 330 reducing with weighted optimization 329 setting printing background 378 shifting to Web palette 335 soft proofs 131 specifying number of 324 subtractive 111 viewing in an image 334 See also background color column width setting 74 Combine Slices command 279 Commands palette 68 commands recording in actions 395 complementary colors 111 Display amp Cursors preference 6 disposal method for animation frames 308 Dissolve mode 221 distributing image maps 291 shapes 177 slices 280 DitherBox filter 344 dithering about 341 application dither previewing and controlling 342 browser dither previewing and minimizing 343 choosing a dithering algorithm 342 creating and applying custom dither patterns 344 in animations 309 in linked slices 286 set
601. u cannot change the recorded values A modal control is indicated by a dialog box icon E to the left of a command action or set in the Actions palette Actions and sets in which some but not all available commands are modal display a red dialog box icon amp In Photoshop you must be in list mode not button mode to set a modal control To set a modal control Do one of the following e Click the box to the left of the command name to display the dialog box icon Click again to remove the modal control To turn on or disable modal controls for all commands in an action click the box to the left of the action name Photoshop To turn on or disable modal controls for all actions in a set click the box to the left of the set name To specify an output folder 1 Select the action for which you want to specify an output folder in the Actions palette 2 Choose Insert Set Output Folder from the Actions palette menu 3 Select a folder and click OK Recording image size options ImageReady Resizing images is a typical step in preparing irreg ularly sized images for use on the Web You can automate this task by creating an action that includes the Image Size command ImageReady provides several options that give you control over how an action resizes images To record Image Size options 1 Start recording an action 2 Choose Image gt Image Size and enter the desired image dimensions See C
602. u create a new user slice or layer based slice additional auto slices are generated to account for the remaining areas of the image In other words auto slices fill the space in the image that is not defined by user slices or Designing Web Pages You can preview most Web effects directly in Photoshop or ImageReady However the appearance of an image on the Web depends on the operating system color display system and browser used to display the image Be sure to preview images in different browsers on different operating systems and with different color bit depths See Previewing an image in a browser on page 84 Creating and viewing slices A slice is a rectangular area of an image that you can use to create links rollovers and animations in the resulting Web page Dividing an image into slices lets you selectively optimize it for Web viewing About slices You use slices to divide a source image into functional areas When you save the image as a Web page each slice is saved as an independent file that contains its own settings color palette links rollover effects and animation effects You can use slices to achieve faster download speeds Slices are also advantageous when working with images that contain different types of data For example if one ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 3 User Guide 3 Drag over the area where you want to create a slice Shift drag to constrain the slice to a square Alt drag Windows or O
603. u install ImageReady Adobe graphics editing and HTML editing applications currently on your system are added to the Jump To submenu You can add more applications including non Adobe applications to the Jump To submenu When you jump to a graphics editing application the original file is opened in the destination application When you jump to an HTML editor the optimized file and the HTML file are saved and opened in the destination application If the image contains slices all filesfor the full image are included A preference enables files updated in another application to be automatically updated in ImageReady when jumping back to ImageReady To jump to another application from ImageReady 1 Choose a method for jumping to the desti nation application Choose File gt Jump To gt Other Graphics Editor or File gt Jump To gt Other HTML Editor and select an application by navigating through the Jump To dialog Jumping between Photoshop and ImageReady You can easily jump between Photoshop and ImageReady to use features in both applications when preparing graphics for the Web or other purposes Jumping between the applications allows you to use the full feature sets of both applications while maintaining a streamlined workflow Files and documents updated in one application can be automatically updated in the other application by choosing a preference To jump between Photoshop and ImageReady Do one of the fo
604. u may have selected a color such as red when the image didn t contain the fully saturated color To save and load color range settings Use the Save and Load buttons in the Color Range dialog box to save and reuse the current settings 6 Adjust the selection To add colors select the plus eyedropper and click in the preview area or image To remove colors select the minus eyedropper and click in the preview area or image To activate the plus eyedropper temporarily hold down Shift Hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS to activate the minus eyedropper 7 10 preview the selection in the image window choose an option for Selection Preview Grayscale to display the selection as it would appear in a grayscale channel Black Matte to display the selection in color against a black background White Matte to display the selection in color against a white background Quick Mask to display the selection using the current quick mask settings See Creating temporary masks in Quick Mask mode Photoshop on page 197 8 To revert to the original selection hold down Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click Reset 9 Click OK to make the selection To select a color range using preset colors 1 Choose Select gt Color Range 2 For Select choose a color or tonal range The Out of Gamut option works only on RGB and Lab images An out of gamut color is an RGB or Lab color that cannot be
605. uality but larger file size than does a 1 bit preview option You must save a preview of an EPS image to view the image in the destination application Note To use the JPEG preview option in Mac OS you must have QuickTime installed 4 If you are saving to DCS format follow these guidelines when choosing a DCS option DCS 1 0 format creates five files one for each color channel in the CMYK image and a fifth master file corresponding to the composite channel You can choose to include a 72 ppi grayscale or color version of the composite image in the master file By printing the low resolution composite from the destination application you can proof the image If you plan to print directly to film or want to reduce file size choose No Composite PostScript To view the composite file you must keep all five files in the same folder Image Previews options Mac OS Saves thumbnail data for the file Thumbnails display in the Open dialog box You can set these image preview options Icon to use the preview as a file icon on the desktop Full Size to save a 72 ppi version for use in applications that can only open low resolution Photoshop images Macintosh Thumbnail to display the preview in the Open dialog box and Windows Thumbnail to save a preview that can display on Windows systems Keep in mind that Windows thumbnails increase the size of files as delivered by Web servers Use Lower Case Extensions Windows Makes the file ex
606. ups See Creating clipping groups on page 218 Important To see knockout effects lower the fill opacity or change the blending mode of the layer To specify a knockout mode 1 Select the layer that you want to knock out other layers 2 10 display the Advanced Blending options do one of the following Photoshop Double click a layer name or layer thumbnail ImageReady Choose Windows gt Show Layer Options Style In the Layer Options palette if the advanced options are not showing choose Show Options from the palette menu or click the Show Options button to view all of the options 2 Do the following Set a fill opacity using the Fill Opacity slider or text box Choose a knockout option from the Knockout pop up menu e Select additional knockout options Specifying fill opacity In addition to setting opacity for a layer which affects any layer styles and blending modes applied to the layer you can specify a fill opacity for layers Fill opacity affects only the fill of pixels painted in a layer or shapes drawn on a layer without affecting the opacity of the layer effect bevel drop shadow and so on that has been applied For example you can use Fill opacity to cause a bevel effect to appear to be super imposed directly on an underlying layer To specify fill opacity for objects in a layer 1 Do one of the following Photoshop Double click a layer name or layer thumbnail
607. urrently selected layer at that state 6 Click OK To select a snapshot Do any of the following Click the name of the snapshot Drag the slider at the left of the snapshot up or down to a different snapshot Looking at the Work Area Making a snapshot of an image Photoshop The Snapshot command lets you make a temporary copy or snapshot of any state of the image The new snapshot is added to the list of snapshots at the top of the History palette Selecting a snapshot lets you work from that version of the image Important Snapshots are not saved with the image closing an image deletes its snapshots Also unless you select the Allow Non Linear History option selecting a snapshot and changing the image deletes all of the states currently listed in the History palette Snapshots let you do the following Switch repeatedly between several states By taking a temporary snapshot of a state you can keep that state for the entire work session even if the original state is deleted from the list of states in the History palette Give a unique name to states to make them easier to identify e Experiment more freely For example you may want to compare two different techniques for achieving a similar effect You can take a snapshot before and after trying the first technique You can then select the first snapshot try the second technique on it and then compare snapshots of each technique Take a
608. utomatically Create First Snapshot to automat ically create a snapshot of the initial state of the image when the document is opened Automatically Create New Snapshot When Saving to generate a snapshot every time you save Allow Non Linear History to make changes to a selected state without deleting the states that come after Normally when you select a state and change the image all states that come after the selected one are deleted This enables the History palette to display a list of the editing steps in the order you made them By recording states in a nonlinear way you can select a state make a change to the image and delete just that state The change will be appended at the end of the list Show New Snapshot Dialog By Default to force Photoshop to prompt you for snapshot names even when using the buttons on the palette 3 Click OK To delete all of an image s states ImageReady Choose Clear Undo Redo History from the History palette menu Important This action cannot be undone To create a new document from the selected state or snapshot of the image Photoshop Do one of the following Drag a state or snapshot onto the New Document button El e Select a state or snapshot and click the New Document button Select a state or snapshot and choose New Document from the History palette menu The history list for the newly created document will be empty To save one or more snapshots
609. ve layer only 7 In the image click the color you want to select If Contiguous is selected all adjacent pixels within the tolerance range are selected Otherwise all pixels in the tolerance range are selected 4 For the magnetic lasso tool Photoshop set any of these options To specify a detection width enter a pixel value between 1 and 40 for Width The magnetic lasso detects edges only within the specified distance from the pointer To specify the lasso s sensitivity to edges in the image enter a value between 1 and 100 for Edge Contrast A higher value detects only edges that contrast sharply with their surroundings a lower value detects lower contrast edges To specify the rate at which the lasso sets fastening points enter a value between 0 and 100 for Frequency A higher value anchors the selection border in place more quickly On an image with well defined edges try a higher width and higher edge contrast and trace the border roughly On an image with softer edges try a lower width and lower edge contrast and trace the border more precisely To change the lasso cursor to indicate the lasso Width value in the options bar press the Caps Lock key on the keyboard Change the cursor while the tool is selected but not in use If you are working with a stylus tablet select or deselect the Stylus Pressure option When the option is selected an increase in stylus pressure will cause the edge width
610. which tend to disappear in the presence of a large blur CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 234 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide To set a local lighting angle In the PS Layer Style dialog box for Drop Shadow Inner Shadow or Bevel deselect Use Global Light For Angle enter a value or drag the angle radius Set Distance Spread and Size by dragging a slider or entering a value In ImageReady deselect Use Global Angle in the palette named for the effect such as Bevel and Emboss To set the quality options for glows 1 Select a contour to shape the effects of opacity by doing one of the following Photoshop In the Layer Style dialog box click the inverted arrow next to the currently selected contour to view the contour display and select a contour from the pop up palette To edit the currently selected contour click the contour sample See Creating and editing contours Photoshop on page 236 ImageReady Click the contour in the effect palette such as the Satin palette and select a contour name from the list 2 Select Anti aliased to anti alias the effect 3 Tocontrol the amount of Noise Range or Jitter enter a value or drag the slider See Specifying options for layer styles on page 232 Texture Allows you to specify a pattern used to texture the bevel effect Scale allows you to scale the size of the texture Link With Layer specifies that the texture is to move with the layer as it is
611. wing display options Actual Color to display values in the current color mode of the image Total Ink to display the total percentage of all CMYK ink at the pointer s current location based on the values set in the CMYK Setup dialog box Opacity to display the opacity of the current layer This option does not apply to the background Any other option to display the color values in that color mode ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 5 User Guide You can open multiple windows to display different views of the same file A list of open windows appears in the Window menu Available memory may limit the number of windows per image To open multiple views of the same image Do one of the following e Choose View gt New View ImageReady Drag any tab away from the document window To arrange multiple windows Windows only Do one of the following Choose Window gt Cascade Photoshop or Window gt Arrange gt Cascade ImageReady to display windows stacked and cascading from the upper left to the lower right of the screen Choose Window gt Tile Photoshop or Window gt Arrange gt Tile ImageReady to display windows edge to edge Choose Window gt Arrange Icons Photoshop or Window gt Arrange gt Arrange Icons ImageReady to align minimized images along the bottom of the work area To close windows Choose a command e Choose File gt Close to close the active window Wind
612. with either a grayscale or RGB image To convert a grayscale or RGB image to indexed color 1 Choose Image gt Mode gt Indexed Color Note The image must be flattened first or you will lose layers For grayscale images the conversion happens automatically For RGB images the Indexed Color dialog box appears 2 Select Preview the Indexed Color dialog box to display a preview of the changes 3 Specify conversion options Ci For information on conversion options and customizing indexed color tables see Conversion options for indexed color images Photoshop in online Help 4 Click OK 118 7 MES 7 ED SL IN 2S ESP ne EEN 2 VEE SEER Succ OF be i cechi tie e 2 i Chapter 4 Producing Consistent Color the same color mode For example a variety of RGB spaces can exist among scanners and monitors and a variety of CMYK spaces can exist among printing presses Because of these varying color spaces colors can shift in appearance as you transfer documents between different devices Color variations can result from different image sources scanners and software produce art using different color spaces differences in the way software applications define color differences in print media newsprint paper reproduces a
613. wo image information boxes appear enabling you to view two different information options for the image at the same time For more information about original and optimized images see Viewing images during optimization on page 316 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 9 User Guide 2 Select a view option Original Optimized File Size to view the original and optimized file size images The first value indicates the original image file size The second value present if the original image has been optimized indicates the optimized image file size and file format based on the current settings in the Optimize palette Optimized Information to view the file format file size number of colors and dither percentage for the optimized image Image Dimensions to view the image s pixel dimensions Watermark Strength to view the strength of the Digimarc digital watermark in the optimized image if present CI For more information on using digital watermarks see Adding digital copyright information in online Help Undo Redo Status to view the number of undos and redos that are available for the image Original in Bytes to view the size of the original flattened image expressed in bytes Optimized in Bytes to view the size of the optimized image expressed in bytes Optimized Savings to view the percentage of the optimized image file size reduction followed by the difference in bytes between the original a
614. wser Dither from the document panel menu in the Save for Web dialog box To view the menu click on the triangle near the upper right corner of the document panel e ImageReady Choose View gt Preview gt Browser Dither A check mark next to the command indicates that it is turned on Choose View gt Preview gt Browser Dither again to turn the command off 4 Choose one of the following from the color palette pop up menu in the DitherBox dialog box e Web Safe Colors to create a dither pattern using colors from the Web palette Load to load another color palette and create a dither pattern using those colors Then navigate to the color palette and open it Note If you use non Web palette colors in a custom dither pattern the colors will dither in a browser using an 8 bit color display Using non Web colors is recommended only for non Web display By default a new dither pattern you create is saved in the current dither pattern collection 5 Select a pixel pattern for the custom dither pattern from the pattern list between 2 and 8 pixels square 6 Click the arrow button ra to display the dither pattern that most closely matches the selected RGB color in the Pattern preview box If no dither patterns are currently saved in a collection in the DitherBox filter the Pattern preview box displays the dither pattern that matches the RGB color Dither pattern Optimizing Images for the Web Creating and applying cu
615. x Blending Options panel Photoshop choose one of the knockout options e Shallow to knock out to the first possible stopping point such as the bottom of the layer set or clipping group containing the knockout option Deep to knock out to the background layer or to the first mandatory stopping point For example a mandatory stopping point is the bottom of the layer set containing the layer using knockout when the layer set uses a blend mode other than Pass Through If there is no background layer Deep knocks out to transparency 4 Select additional knockout options Blend Interior Effects as Group and Blend Clipped Layers as Group There are a number of options that define possible and mandatory stopping points for knockout Layer sets and clipping groups are possible stopping points for knockout The blending mode of a layer or layer set and the option Blend Clipped Layers as Group also affects knockout For layer sets containing a layer using knockout knockout stops immediately beneath the layer set if the layer blending mode is not set to Pass Through Otherwise it stops before the background Other layers can still knock through the entire layer set regardless of its blending mode For clipping groups knockout stops above the To specify the scope of blend effects 1 Select the layer that you want to affect such as the bottom layer of a clipping group 2 10 display the Advanced Blending options do one of the fo
616. xels on a layer within the canvas boundaries 1 Select the layer in the Layers palette 2 Choose Select gt All Chapter 5 Selecting o modify part of an image in Adobe Photoshop or Adobe ImageReady you first select the area you want to edit A selected area is indicated by a dotted selection border also called a selection marquee The area outside the selection border is protected while you move copy paint or apply special effects to the isolated area You can choose from a variety of specialized tools for creating selection borders About selections Since there are two different types of data in your image bitmap and vector you need to use separate sets of tools to make selections of each type You can use selection borders to select pixels When you select pixels you are selecting resolution dependent information in the image For more information about bitmap images and vector graphics see About bitmap images and vector graphics on page 91 You can also create selections using the pen or shape tools which produce precise outlines called paths A path is a vector shape that contains no pixels See Moving copying and pasting selec tions and layers on page 149 You can convert paths to selections or convert selections to paths See Converting between paths and selection borders Photoshop on page 180 3 Specify a feathering setting in the options bar Turn anti aliasing on or off for t
617. ximum and minimum level of quality in the Modify Quality Setting dialog box Choose Regenerate from the Optimize palette menu Note Manually optimizing an image does not turn auto regeneration on The Regenerate option is available only when the optimized image is out of date when Auto Regen erate is turned off and the image or its optimi zation settings are modified or when optimization has been canceled To cancel optimization Click the Stop button next to the progress bar at the bottom of the image window Using weighted optimization Weighted optimization lets you smoothly vary optimization settings across an image using an alpha channel This technique produces higher quality results in critical image areas without sacrificing file size With weighted optimization you can produce gradual variations in GIF dithering lossy GIF settings and JPEG compression Weighted optimization also lets you favor colors in selected image areas when you generate a color table About alpha channels and weighted optimization Alpha channels lets you store selections as grayscale images called masks In a mask selected areas appear white deselected areas appear black and partially selected areas appear as shades of gray When you use an alpha channel to apply optimization settings the white areas of the mask To use a channel to modify GIF lossiness 1 In the Optimize panel palette choose a GIF setting from the Settings
618. y Linking slices lets you share optimization settings between slices You must use ImageReady to link slices however you can apply settings to linked slices in either the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the Optimize palette ImageReady When you apply optimization settings to a linked slice all slices in the set are updated 4 Photoshop Save for Web dialog box and ImageReady If desired select options in the Cell Alignment section of the dialog box Horizontal alignment options Default to use the browser s default for horizontal alignment Left to align the text to the left side of the slice area Center to align the text to the center of the slice area Right to align the text to the right side of the slice area Vertical alignment options Default to use the browser s default for vertical alignment Top to align the text to the top of the slice area Baseline to set a common baseline for the first line of text in cells in the same row of the resulting HTML table Each cell in the row must use the Baseline option Middle to center the text vertically in the slice area Bottom to align the text to the bottom of the slice area 5 Photoshop Click OK Optimizing slices You can optimize Image slices using the Save for Web dialog box Photoshop or the Optimize palette ImageReady Creating and viewing image maps ImageReady Image maps enable you to link an area
619. y messages to ensure the appropriate color management of documents on a case by case basis See Resetting all warning dialogs on page 87 You should only turn off message displays if you are very confident that you under stand the default policy decision and are willing to accept it for all documents that you open You cannot undo the results of a default policy decision once a document has been saved Customizing color management settings Although the predefined settings should provide sufficient color management for many publishing workflows you may sometimes want to customize individual options in a configuration For example you might want to change the CMYK working space to a profile that matches the proofing system used by your service bureau Producing Consistent Color Photoshop import For a newly created document the color workflow operates relatively seamlessly the document uses the working space profile associated with its color mode for creating and editing colors However it is common to encounter the following exceptions to your color managed workflow You might open a document or import color data for example by copying and pasting or dragging and dropping from a document that is not tagged with a profile This is often the case when you open a document created in an appli cation that either does not support color management or has color management turned off You might open a document
620. y transparency is always preserved regardless of whether you select or deselect this option 5 Select Image Interpolation if you want to anti alias the printed appearance of a low resolution image CHAPTER 13 Saving and Exporting Images 4 Do one of the following to specify the image quality Choose an option from the Quality menu Drag the Quality pop up slider Enter a value between 1 and 12 in the Quality text box 5 Select a format option Baseline Standard to use a format recog nizable to most Web browsers Baseline Optimized to optimize the color quality of the image and produce a slightly smaller file size This option is not supported by all Web browsers Progressive to create an image that displays gradually as it is downloaded in a series of scans you specify how many showing increasingly detailed versions of the entire image Progressive JPEG images files are slightly larger in size require more RAM for viewing and are not supported by all applications and Web browsers 6 To view the estimated download time of the image select a modem speed from the Size pop up menu The Size preview is only available when Preview is selected Note Some applications may not be able to read a CMYK file saved in JPEG format In addition if you find that a Java application cannot read your JPEG file in any color mode try saving the file without a thumbnail preview 7 ClickOK 362
621. y a saved path a work path or a layer clipping path can be moved reshaped copied or deleted To move a curved segment 1 Select the direct selection tool and select the points or segments you want to move Be sure to select both points anchoring the segment 2 Drag the selected anchor points or segments to new positions Hold down Shift as you drag to constrain the movement to multiples of 45 Select points anchoring a curve Then drag to move the curve To reshape a curved segment 1 Select the direct selection tool and select the curved segment you want to adjust Direction lines appear for that segment 2 Adjust the curve To adjust the position of the segment drag the segment Click to select the curve segment Then drag to adjust To copy a path component or path Do any of the following To copy a path component as you move it select the path name in the Paths palette and use the path component selection tool to select the path component in the image Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS the path To copy a path without renaming it drag the path in the Paths palette to the New Path button El at the bottom of the palette To copy and rename a path Alt drag Windows or Option drag Mac OS the path in the Paths palette to the New Path button at the bottom of the palette Or select the path to copy and choose Duplicate Path from the Paths palette menu Ente
622. y can be viewed in ImageReady Layer clipping paths can be created with either Photoshop or ImageReady but Photoshop provides more support for editing them About layer sets Layer sets help you organize and manage contiguous layers You can expand a layer set to display the layers it contains or collapse it to reduce clutter You can also use layer sets to apply masks to groups of layers CHAPTER 8 Using Layers 206 ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 6 0 7 User Guide To view the Layers palette 1 Choose Window gt Show Layers or click the Layers palette tab 2 Use the scroll bars or resize the palette to see additional layers 3 Click the arrow t to expand or collapse layer sets and layer effects such as drop shadows glows beveling and embossing See Using layer styles on page 226 Viewing and selecting layers With the Layers palette you can control whether or not a layer layer set or layer effect is visible whether or not a preview or thumbnail of a layer s contents is displayed and also how transparency is displayed Turning off thumbnails can improve performance and save monitor space You can also color code layers to easily locate related layers or serve as a reminder of changes you need to make Select a layer to make it the active layer changes you make affect the active layer To show or hide a layer layer set or layer effect Do one of the following e In the Layers palette click the eye icon
623. y paragraph indentation In the Paragraph palette enter a value for an indentation option e Left Indent to indent from the left edge of the paragraph For vertical type this option controls the indentation from the top of the paragraph e Right Indent i to indent from the right edge of the paragraph For vertical type this option controls the indentation from the bottom of the paragraph e First Line Indent to indent the first line of type in the paragraph For horizontal type the first line indent is relative to the left indent for vertical type the first line indent is relative to the top indent To create a first line hanging indentation enter a negative value Changing space above or below paragraphs You can control the space above and below paragraphs using the paragraph spacing options To specify paragraph spacing In the Paragraph palette enter a value for Space Before 72 and Space After imm Aligns type to the center leaving both the top and bottom edges of the paragraph ragged mui Aligns type to bottom leaving the top edge of the paragraph ragged To specify justification for paragraph type In the Paragraph palette click a justification option The options for horizontal type are Justifies all lines except the last which is left aligned Justifies all lines except the last which is centered Justifies all lines except the last which is right ali
624. yer the position of the layer changes in each frame of the animation Creating animations You use the Animation palette in conjunction with the Layers palette to create animation frames from an original multilayer image You can assign a delay time to each frame use the Tween command to generate new frames and specify looping for the animation ImageReady dobe ImageReady provides a powerful easy way to create multiple frame animations from a single document Using the Animation and Layers palettes you can create edit copy paste and rearrange frames in a sequence You can use the powerful Tween feature to quickly create new frames that vary a layer s opacity position or layer effects and create the illusion of a single element in a frame moving or fading in or out You can also optimize the animation specify looping and repeat options for playback and flatten frames into layers The number of frames you can create is limited only by the amount of memory available to ImageReady on your system About animation An animation is a sequence of images or frames that is displayed over time Each frame varies slightly from the preceding frame creating the illusion of movement when the frames are viewed in quick succession Adding frames Adding frames is the first step in creating an animation If you have an image open in ImageReady the Animation palette displays the image as the first frame in a new animat
625. yer contents Bevel and Emboss to add various combinations of highlights and shadows to a layer To display the Styles palette Choose Window gt Show Styles or click the Styles palette tab To change the view of layer styles in the Styles palette Choose a view from the Styles palette menu Photoshop Select Text Only to view the layer styles as a list e Select Small or Large Thumbnail to view the layer styles as thumbnails e Select Small or Photoshop Large List to view the layer styles as a list with a thumbnail of the selected layer style displayed Layer styles are displayed in the order created by name from top to bottom and from left to right in thumbnail view To delete a layer style from the Styles palette Select a layer style in the Styles palette and do one of the following e Drag it to the trash button 11 at the bottom of the Styles palette Press Alt Windows or Option Mac OS and click the layer style in the Styles palette Managing layer styles The Styles palette and the Styles pop up palette in the options bar for the pen and shape tools can hold many layer styles You can easily change how they display in either palette The Styles palette displays in the options bar for the pen and shape tools when you choose Create New Shape Layer See Using pop up palettes on page 62 Drag the style thumbnail from the Styles palette onto pixel data in a document The laye
626. yer masks let you selectively hide parts of a layer without permanently altering the layer For example you can create a mask that reveals a certain area of detail on a layer the rest of the layer is hidden but still available behind the mask In the Layers palette select the layer that you want to mask and click the New Layer Mask button E at the bottom of the palette Create the mask To add to the mask and hide more of the layer use a painting tool to paint with black See Painting on page 26 for more information e To subtract from the mask and reveal more of the layer paint with white e To create a semitransparent mask paint with gray This is useful for partially hiding areas of the layer Adobe Photoshop Basics Painting and drawing Painting Painting in Photoshop or ImageReady 1s as easy as choosing a color selecting a tool choosing a brush tip and dragging in the image to paint The various painting tools are modeled after styles of traditional paint media Choose a foreground color Before painting an image you need to specify the foreground color that will be used to paint Click the top color selection box in the toolbox and choose a color in the color picker You can select the Only Web Colors option to confine your range of choices to Web safe colors You can also use the Color or Swatches palette to choose colors Choosing a foreground color Select a painting tool Select a paintin
627. ying file and image information Annotating images Photoshop Jumping between applications Previewing an image in a browser 0 Managing libraries with the Preset Manager PROTOSNOP ie tas Setting preferences Resetting all warning dialogs Monitoring operations Closing files and quitting Chapter 2 About bitmap images and vector graphics About image size and resolution 46 Changing image size and resolution SCANNING images cece cece teen ee eees Creating NEW IMAGES cece cece eee eee ees Opening and importing images Placing IES nio Managing files with WebDAV Looking at the Work Area Getting Images into Photoshop and ImageReady iv CONTENTS Chapter 3 About color modes and models Photoshop Color gamuts Photoshop Adjusting the monitor display Channels and bit depth Photoshop Converting between color modes Photoshop Converting to indexed color Photoshop APPIVING ICOI0FS Sens cles Sua Making color and tonal adjustments Chapter 4 Why colors sometimes don t match About color management Do you need color management Creating a viewing environment for color m
628. ype adjusting 262 hot spots for tool pointers 58 HSB color model 109 HTML adding title and copyright information to files 351 Alt element 284 292 cell alignment for text 285 copying to clipboard 348 creating files 347 formatting tables in files 350 Message element 284 292 output settings 349 setting background color 353 target frame 282 291 text in slices 284 updating files 348 URLs in image maps 291 URLs in slices 282 using CSS 350 hue 109 hyphenating type 267 I ICC profiles See profiles ICC See International Color Consortium Image Dimensions option 79 95 Image Info dialog box 351 Image Interpolation option 361 362 Image Map palette 271 image map select tool 289 Image Map Visibility button 288 hard edged transparency 340 Help 2 hexadecimal color values 337 hidden tools about 57 viewing 58 Hide All Layer Styles command 226 Hide command 60 Hide Optimization Info command 317 Hide Rulers command 74 Hide Status Bar command See online Help hiding and showing channels 186 grid and guides 76 image maps 288 layer sets 206 layer styles 226 layers 207 rulers 74 selections 238 slices 275 text bounds 254 text selections 258 using layer masks 238 highlights CMYK mode 111 See also online Help history brush tool 68 History palette about 69 and batch processing 405 using with actions 394 400 history states deleting 70 guidelines 69 Invert command 9 Inv

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User`s Manual for Installation & Configuration    Appendix D Access Codes    Real Nappy Guide  User Manual - Slide Kamera  振動計バイブロ 3100 - 測定器の専門商社｜株式会社佐藤商事  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file